advertisement
USER GUIDE
FM-1000™ Plus Application
Version 3.0
Revision A
August 2015
1
Corporate Office
Trimble Navigation Limited
935 Stewart Drive
Sunnyvale, CA 94085
USA www.trimble.com
Agriculture
10368 Westmoor Drive
Westminster, Colorado 80021
USA
800-361-1249 (toll free in USA)
+1-937-245-5154 Phone
+1-937-233-9441 Fax www.trimble.com
Email: [email protected]
Legal Notices
© 2015 Trimble Navigation Limited. All rights reserved.
Trimble, the Globe & Triangle logo, EZ-Boom, EZ-Guide, EZ-Pilot, EZ-
Steer, FarmWorks Software, FmX, GreenSeeker, OmniSTAR, Trimble
Ready, Tru Count Air Clutch, and WM-Drain are trademarks of Trimble
Navigation Limited, registered in the United States and in other countries.
Autopilot, AutoSense, CenterPoint, CFX-750, Connected Farm, EZ-
Remote, Farm Works, Farm Works Mapping, Farm Works Software,
Field-IQ, FieldLevel, FM-750, FM-1000, FreeForm, LiquiBlock,
NextSwath, Rawson, RTX, T3, TMX-2050, TrueGuide, TrueTracker, VRS
Now, VRS, WM-Topo, XCN-2050, xFill, and Zephyr are trademarks of
Trimble Navigation Limited.
For STL support, the software uses the Moscow Center for SPARC
Technology adaptation of the SGI Standard Template Library. Copyright
© 1994 Hewlett-Packard Company, Copyright © 1996, 97 Silicon
Graphics Computer Systems, Inc., Copyright © 1997 Moscow Center for
SPARC Technology.
Portions Copyright © 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
Portions Copyright © 2003, Bitstream Inc.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
Release Notice
This is the August 2015 release (Revision A ) of the FM-1000 Plus application documentation. It applies to version 3.0 of the display software.
Legal Notices
The following limited warranties give you specific legal rights. You may have others, which vary from state/jurisdiction to state/jurisdiction.
Product Limited Warranty
Trimble warrants that this Trimble product and its internal components
(the 'Product") shall be free from defects in materials and workmanship and will substantially conform to Trimble's applicable published specifications for the Product for a period of one (1) year, starting from the earlier of (i) the date of installation, or (ii) six (6) months from the date of original Product shipment from Trimble. This warranty applies only to the Product if installed by Trimble or a dealer authorized by
Trimble to perform Product installation services.
Software Components
All Product software components (sometimes hereinafter also referred to as "Software") are licensed solely for use as an integral part of the
Product and are not sold. Any software accompanied by a separate end user license agreement ("EULA") shall be governed by the terms, conditions, restrictions and limited warranty terms of such EULA notwithstanding the preceding paragraph.
During the limited warranty period you will be entitled to receive such
Fixes to the Product software that Trimble releases and makes commercially available and for which it does not charge separately, subject to the procedures for delivery to purchasers of Trimble products generally. If you have purchased the Product from an authorized
Trimble dealer rather than from Trimble directly, Trimble may, at its option, forward the software Fix to the Trimble dealer for final distribution to you. Minor Updates, Major Upgrades, new products, or substantially new software releases, as identified by Trimble, are expressly excluded from this update process and limited warranty.
Receipt of software Fixes or other enhancements shall not serve to extend the limited warranty period.
For purposes of this warranty the following definitions shall apply: (1)
"Fix(es)' means an error correction or other update created to fix a previous software version that does not substantially conform to its
Trimble specifications; (2) "Minor Update" occurs when enhancements are made to current features in a software program; and (3) "Major
Upgrade" occurs when significant new features are added to software, or when a new product containing new features replaces the further development of a current product line. Trimble reserves the right to determine, in its sole discretion, what constitutes a Fix, Minor Update, or
Major Upgrade.
Gson components licensed under the Apache 2.0 License. The source is available from http://code.google.com/p/google-gson/. Google
MVEL components licensed under the Apache 2.0 Llicense. The source is available from http://code.google.com/p/mvel.codehause.org. Google
Guava components listed under the Apache 2.0 License. The source is available from http://code.google.com/p/guava-libraries. MapQuest content licensed under the Open Data Commons Database License
(DbCL). The source is available from http://developer.mapquest.com.
APACE LICENSE (Version 2.0, January 2004) http://www.apache.org/licenses/
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR USE,
REPRODUCTION, AND DISTRIBUTION
1. Definitions
"License" shall mean the terms and conditions for use, reproduction, and distribution as defined by Sections 1 through Section 9 of this document.
""Licensor " shall mean the copyright owner or entity authorized by the copyright owner that is granting the License.
"Legal Entity" shall mean the union of the acting entity and all other entities that control, are controlled by, or are under common control with that entity. For the purposes of this definition, "control" means (i) the power, direct or indirect, to cause the direction or management of such entity, whether by contract or otherwise, or (ii) ownership of fifty percent
(50%) or more of the outstanding shares, or (iii) beneficial ownership of such entity.
"You" (or "Your") shall mean an individual or Legal Entity exercising permissions granted by this License.
"Source" form shall mean the preferred form for making modifications, including but not limited to software source code, documentation source, and configuration files.
"Object" form shall mean any form resulting from mechanical transformation or translation of a Source form, including but not limited to compiled object code, generated documentation, and conversions to other media types.
"Work" shall mean the work of authorship, whether in Source or Object form, made available under the License, as indicated by a copyright notice that is included in or attached to the work (an example is provided in the Appendix below).
"Derivative Works" shall mean any work, whether in Source or Object form, that is based on (or derived from) the Work and for which the editorial revisions, annotations, elaborations, or other modifications represent, as a whole, an original work of authorship. For the purposes of this License, Derivative Works shall not include works that remain separable from, or merely link (or bind by name) to the interfaces of, the
Work and Derivative Works thereof.
"Contribution" shall mean any work of authorship, including the original version of the Work and any modifications or additions to that Work or
Derivative Works thereof, that is intentionally submitted to Licensor for inclusion in the Work by the copyright owner or by an individual or Legal
Entity authorized to submit on behalf of the copyright owner. For the purposes of this definition, "submitted" means any form of electronic, verbal, or written communication sent to the Licensor or its representatives, including but not limited to communication on electronic mailing lists, source code control systems, and issue tracking systems that are managed by, or on behalf of, the Licensor for the purpose of discussing and improving the Work, but excluding communication that is conspicuously marked or otherwise designated in writing by the copyright owner as "Not a Contribution."
"Contributor" shall mean Licensor and any individual or Legal Entity on behalf of whom a Contribution has been received by Licensor and subsequently incorporated within the Work.
2. Grant of Copyright License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this
License, each Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable copyright license to reproduce, prepare Derivative Works of, publicly display, publicly perform, sublicense, and distribute the Work and such Derivative Works in Source or Object form.
2
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
3. Grant of Patent License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this
License, each Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable (except as stated in this section) patent license to make, have made, use, offer to sell, sell, import, and otherwise transfer the Work, where such license applies only to those patent claims licensable by such Contributor that are necessarily infringed by their Contribution(s) alone or by combination of their
Contribution(s) with the Work to which such Contribution(s) was submitted. If You institute patent litigation against any entity (including a cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging that the Work or a
Contribution incorporated within the Work constitutes direct or contributory patent infringement, then any patent licenses granted to
You under this License for that Work shall terminate as of the date such litigation is filed.
4. Redistribution. You may reproduce and distribute copies of the Work or Derivative Works thereof in any medium, with or without modifications, 4and in Source or Object form, provided that You meet the following conditions:
You must give any other recipients of the Work or Derivative Works a copy of this License; and
You must cause any modified files to carry prominent notices stating that You changed the files; and
You must retain, in the Source form of any Derivative Works that You distribute, all copyright, patent, trademark, and attribution notices from the Source form of the Work, excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works; and
If the Work includes a "NOTICE" text file as part of its distribution, then any Derivative Works that You distribute must include a readable copy of the attribution notices contained within such NOTICE file, excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works, in at least one of the following places: within a NOTICE text file distributed as part of the Derivative Works; within the Source form or documentation, if provided along with the Derivative Works; or, within a display generated by the Derivative Works, if and wherever such thirdparty notices normally appear. The contents of the NOTICE file are for informational purposes only and do not modify the License. You may add Your own attribution notices within Derivative Works that You distribute, alongside or as an addendum to the NOTICE text from the
Work, provided that such additional attribution notices cannot be construed as modifying the License.
You may add Your own copyright statement to Your modifications and may provide additional or different license terms and conditions for use, reproduction, or distribution of Your modifications, or for any such
Derivative Works as a whole, provided Your use, reproduction, and distribution of the Work otherwise complies with the conditions stated in this License.
5. Submission of Contributions. Unless You explicitly state otherwise, any
Contribution intentionally submitted for inclusion in the Work by You to the Licensor shall be under the terms and conditions of this License, without any additional terms or conditions. Notwithstanding the above, nothing herein shall supersede or modify the terms of any separate license agreement you may have executed with Licensor regarding such
Contributions.
6. Trademarks. This License does not grant permission to use the trade names, trademarks, service marks, or product names of the Licensor, except as required for reasonable and customary use in describing the origin of the Work and reproducing the content of the NOTICE file.
7. Disclaimer of Warranty. Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, Licensor provides the Work (and each Contributor provides its Contributions) on an "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR
CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied, including, without limitation, any warranties or conditions of TITLE, NON-INFRINGEMENT,
MERCHANTABILITY, or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. You are solely responsible for determining the appropriateness of using or redistributing the Work and assume any risks associated with Your exercise of permissions under this License.
8. Limitation of Liability. In no event and under no legal theory, whether in tort (including negligence), contract, or otherwise, unless required by applicable law (such as deliberate and grossly negligent acts) or agreed to in writing, shall any Contributor be liable to You for damages, including any direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages of any character arising as a result of this License or out of the use or inability to use the Work (including but not limited to damages for loss of goodwill, work stoppage, computer failure or malfunction, or any and all other commercial damages or losses), even if such Contributor has been advised of the possibility of such damages.
LWGL LICENSE
ODC DATABASE CONTENTS LICENSE
SGI FREE SOFTWARE LICENSE B (Version 2.0, Sept. 18, 2008)
Copyright © 2013 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
"Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:
The above copyright notice including the dates of first publication and either this permission notice or a reference to http://oss.sgi.com/projects/FreeB/ shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL SILICON
GRAPHICS, INC. BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR
OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE
SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
Except as contained in this notice, the name of Silicon Graphics, Inc. shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization from Silicon
Graphics, Inc.
MAPQUEST PLATFORM TERMS OF USE (Last Updated: November 1,
2011)
Community Edition License Agreement
INTRODUCTION. MapQuest has been helping people find places and get maps and directions for over 40 years. We make the MapQuest
APIs, our Open Services (as described at http://open.mapquestapi.com/), Community Accounts and other developer services (in short, the "MapQuest Services"), along with the maps, driving directions and other content delivered through the
MapQuest Services (the "MapQuest Content"), available without charge to encourage developers to use these services and content in developing their applications and websites. We want you to be creative and build awesome applications and websites that thrill your users. All we ask is that you comply with the terms that are included in these
Terms of Use.
We will provide the developer community at-large with support in various forms, such as forums, blog posts or FAQs. Since we're providing the MapQuest Services for free, we don't provide individual technical support or warranties for the Community Services, but if you want to receive technical support and warranties, we have a product for you.
Please check out our MapQuest Platform Services Enterprise Edition and learn more about the services we will provide for reasonable fees.
If you choose to use any of the MapQuest Services or if you set up a
Community Account, you are agreeing to abide by these Terms of Use and are forming an agreement between yourself and MapQuest, Inc.
("MapQuest"). If you do not want to abide by these Terms of Use, then don't use the MapQuest Services.
LICENSES FROM MAPQUEST TO YOU.
2.1. MapQuest Services License. MapQuest grants you a non-exclusive, non-assignable, non-sublicensable, revocable limited license to use the
MapQuest Services during the Term of these Terms of Use as provided by MapQuest in the manner permitted in these Terms of Use.
2.2. MapQuest Content License. MapQuest grants you a non-exclusive, non-assignable, non-sublicensable, revocable limited license access, use, publicly perform and publicly display the MapQuest Content as the
MapQuest Content is provided through the MapQuest Services and in the manner permitted by these Terms of Use.
GENERAL RESTRICTIONS, ADDITIONAL LEGAL NOTICE, RESERVATION
OF RIGHTS.
3.1. Restrictions. Except as expressly authorized by MapQuest, You must not: decompile, disassemble, reverse engineer, or otherwise attempt to derive any source code from the MapQuest Services or MapQuest
Content, other than the Open Services; interfere or disrupt MapQuest servers or networks, or disobey any network access or security requirements, policies, procedures or regulations of MapQuest (including the enabling of any viruses, Trojan horses, trap doors, back doors, worms, time bombs, cancelbots, adware, spyware or other computer programming routines designed or intended to damage, detrimentally interfere with, surreptitiously intercept or expropriate any system, data or personal information); use the MapQuest Services as a means to engage in conduct that reflects poorly upon, disparages or devalues MapQuest's reputation or goodwill, as determined in MapQuest's sole discretion;
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
3
use the MapQuest Services, other than the Open Services, in conjunction with any commercial application not publicly available without charge (other than mobile applications for which users pay a fee to download/install the application). If your application does not fit this criteria and you would like to discuss additional options for using the
MapQuest Services please contact [email protected]; use the MapQuest Services, other than the Open Services, to process or generate data for any third party (other than for end users as expressly permitted hereunder); use the MapQuest Services with any content or product that falsely expresses or implies that such content or product is sponsored or endorsed by MapQuest; use the MapQuest Services in conjunction with a site or application which contains or displays adult content or promotes illegal activities, gambling, or the sale of tobacco or alcohol to persons under twenty-one
(21) years of age;
3.2. Additional Legal Requirements. In addition to the restrictions set forth in Section 3.1, your use of the MapQuest Services and MapQuest
Content is subject to the Additional Legal Requirements which are incorporated and made a part of these Terms of Use. Please read the
Additional Legal Requirements carefully as they include usage limits and additional restrictions that may impact your plans for development.
3.3. Reservation of Rights. MapQuest reserves all rights not expressly granted in these Terms of Use and you may not use the MapQuest
Services or MapQuest Content in any manner not expressly authorized in these Terms of Use.
LICENSE FROM YOU TO MAPQUEST. If you upload any data, feedback, ideas, suggestions, content, points of interest (including any points of interest that include Trademarks) or other material to MapQuest
(collectively "Your Content"), you hereby grant MapQuest a perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, royalty-free license to access, archive, reproduce, publicly display, translate, modify the format or the display of, distribute, transmit, stream, cache, overlay, seam, perform, sublicense, and otherwise use Your Content with or without attribution and without financial obligation, in whole or in part, via any method for any purpose. MapQuest makes no assertion of ownership over Your
Content, and you retain all intellectual property rights to Your Content, subject to the license you grant to MapQuest above.
MODIFICATIONS TO THESE TERMS OF USE AND THE SERVICES.
MapQuest reserves the right to change or modify these Terms of Use, the MapQuest Services and/or the MapQuest Content. Please check these Terms of Use, including the Additional Legal Requirements periodically for changes. Your continued use of the MapQuest Services or MapQuest Content following the posting of any changes to the Terms of Use constitutes acceptance of those changes.
TERMINATION. MapQuest may terminate these Terms of Use and/or the provision of the MapQuest Services or MapQuest Content at any time, for any reason, with or without notice.
PRIVACY POLICY AND END USER TERMS.
7.1. Privacy Policy. MapQuest's collection and use of personally identifiable information is governed by the AOL Network Privacy Policy, available at http://about.aol.com/aolnetwork/aol_pp.
7.2. End User Terms. End users shall only be entitled to use the
MapQuest Services and MapQuest Content if they accept the then current end user Terms of Use located at http://info.mapquest.com/terms-of-use/. MapQuest reserves the right to amend and/or replace these terms and the form and manner of presentation. You must provide a hypertext link at the bottom of each page in your website or application where the MapQuest Services or
MapQuest Content can be viewed or accessed, or within the terms of use of your application or website, to the end user terms of use.
ACCESS AND USAGE DATA.
8.1. Credentials. MapQuest, at its discretion, may require you to create an account and obtain an access key and other related credentials
(collectively "Credentials") to use the MapQuest Services or certain aspects of the MapQuest Services. You are responsible for maintaining the confidentiality of your Credentials and for any usage or abuse of the
MapQuest Services or MapQuest Content by anyone using your
Credentials.
8.2. Usage Data. MapQuest's servers record information when you visit
MapQuest websites or when applications and/or Credentials call or invoke the MapQuest Services. This information may include, without limitation, the URL, IP address, browser type, Credential and access times and dates. MapQuest may use this information to promote, operate, and improve MapQuest services, products and properties.
PROPRIETARY RIGHTS. You acknowledge and agree the MapQuest
Services and MapQuest Content are works for purposes of copyright law, and embody valuable, confidential, trade secret information of
MapQuest, the development of which required the expenditure of substantial time and money. As between MapQuest and You,
MapQuest retains exclusive ownership of any and all rights, title and interest (including all intellectual property rights) in the MapQuest
Services and MapQuest Content, and you shall not acquire any rights, express or implied, in the foregoing by virtue of these Terms of Use other than otherwise expressly set forth. For purposes of these Terms of Use, the term "Trademarks" means all trademarks, trade names, service marks, logos, domain names, along with any other distinctive brand features of MapQuest or its suppliers. All use by You of Trademarks shall inure to the benefit of MapQuest. Further, You shall not (a) display a Trademark as the most prominent element on any page of Your website, application or paper map; (b) display a Trademark in a manner that is misleading, defamatory, infringing, libelous, disparaging, obscene or otherwise objectionable to MapQuest as determined by MapQuest in its sole discretion; or (c) remove, distort or alter any element of a
Trademark.
DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTIES. THE MAPQUEST SERVICES AND
MAPQUEST CONTENT ARE PROVIDED ON AN "AS IS" AND "AS
AVAILABLE" BASIS. MAPQUEST DISCLAIMS ANY AND ALL
WARRANTIES, WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO ANY WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ACCURACY OR NON-INFRINGEMENT.
MAPQUEST DOES NOT REPRESENT OR WARRANT THAT THE
MAPQUEST SERVICES OR CONTENT, OR ANY PORTION THEREOF, IS OR
WILL BE FREE OF DEFECTS OR ERRORS (OR THAT ANY SUCH DEFECTS
OR ERRORS WILL BE CORRECTED), VIRUS FREE, ABLE TO OPERATE ON
AN UNINTERRUPTED BASIS, MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS, OR CAPABLE
OF BEING INTEGRATED INTO OR WITH YOUR COMPUTER SYSTEM,
APPLICATIONS OR NETWORK. FURTHER, MAPQUEST DOES NOT
WARRANT OR MAKE ANY REPRESENTATIONS REGARDING THE USE OR
THE RESULTS OF THE USE OF THE MAPQUEST SERVICES, OR ANY
PORTION THEREOF, IN TERMS OF ITS CORRECTNESS, ACCURACY,
QUALITY, RELIABILITY, OR OTHERWISE. THIS DISCLAIMER
CONSTITUTES AN ESSENTIAL PART OF THESE TERMS OF USE. IF THIS
EXCLUSION IS HELD UNENFORCEABLE, THEN ALL EXPRESS AND
IMPLIED WARRANTIES SHALL BE LIMITED IN DURATION TO A PERIOD
OF FIFTEEN (15) DAYS AFTER THE EFFECTIVE DATE, AND NO
WARRANTIES SHALL APPLY AFTER THAT PERIOD.
LIMITATION ON LIABILITY. NEITHER MAPQUEST NOR ITS AFFILIATES
NOR ANY OF THEIR SUPPLIERS SHALL BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY
OTHER THIRD PARTY FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE ARISING OUT OF THE
POSSESSION OF, ACCESS TO, USE OF, OR INABILITY TO ACCESS OR
USE THE MAPQUEST SERVICES OR MAPQUEST CONTENT, OR ANY
PORTION, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, LOST PROFITS, DATA
LOSS, COST OF PROCUREMENT FOR SUBSTITUTE GOODS, OR
COMPUTER FAILURE OR MALFUNCTION, EVEN IF MAPQUEST HAS
BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES, AND
REGARDLESS OF WHETHER THE CLAIM OR LIABILITY IS BASED UPON
ANY CONTRACT, TORT, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR OTHER LEGAL OR
EQUITABLE THEORY. IN NO EVENT SHALL MAPQUEST'S TOTAL
AGGREGATE LIABILITY UNDER THESE TERMS OF USE EXCEED THE
LESSER OF (A) THE TOTAL AMOUNT OF FEES PAID BY YOU TO
MAPQUEST UNDER THESE TERMS OF USEFOR THE TWELVE (12)
MONTHS PRECEDING THE DATE OF THE EVENT GIVING RISE TO SUCH
CLAIM; OR (B) FIVE HUNDRED DOLLARS ($500).
YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND AGREE THAT THE
PARTICIPATION IN AND USE OF THE MAPQUEST SERVICES AND
MAPQUEST CONTENT IS DONE AT YOUR OWN RISK AND THAT YOU
ARE SOLELY RESPONSIBLE AND LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGE SUSTAINED
TO YOUR COMPUTER SYSTEM, NETWORK OR DATA RESULTING FROM
SUCH PARTICIPATION OR USE.
SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF CERTAIN
WARRANTIES OR THE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION OF LIABILITY FOR
INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES.
INDEMNITY. You agree to indemnify, defend and hold MapQuest and its affiliates, and each of their officers, directors, employees, agents, cobranders or other partners (as well as each of their suppliers), successors and permitted assigns ("Indemnified Parties") harmless from and against any third party claim or action, including any liability, cost, losses, damages, expenses, and attorney's fees, arising from or in any way related to Your access, use or participation in the MapQuest Services
(including claims related to Your Content and any use of the MapQuest
Services with software, data, content, systems, or other technology not provided by MapQuest), any violation of these Terms of Use, or any alleged infringement of a patent, copyright, trademark, trade secret, or other intellectual property right. MapQuest shall use good faith efforts
4
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
to provide you with prompt notice of any such claim or action; provided however, you agree that, upon MapQuest's written request, MapQuest shall control the defense or settlement of any such claim or action and you shall provide reasonable cooperation to MapQuest. You may not settle an indemnifiable claim without obtain MapQuest's prior written consent.
EXPORT RESTRICTIONS. You agree to comply with all export and import laws and restrictions and regulations of the United States or any foreign agency or authority, and not to export or re-export MapQuest Services or any direct product thereof in violation of any such restrictions, laws or regulations, or without all necessary approvals.
NOTICES AND TRANSACTING ELECTRONICALLY. You understand and agree that MapQuest is an online service and that you are transacting with MapQuest electronically. MapQuest shall provide electronic notices by posting them on this website and/or by sending an email to any account associated with your Credentials.
GENERAL PROVISIONS.
15.1. Entire Agreement. These Terms of Use constitute the entire agreement between MapQuest and You with respect to the subject matter of these Terms of Use, and supersedes all prior agreements, understandings and communications between MapQuest and You with respect to such subject matter. No modification or amendment to these
Terms of Use shall be effective unless in writing by MapQuest.
15.2. Choice of Law; Jurisdiction. These Terms of Use are made under and shall be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the Commonwealth of Virginia (except for its conflicts of laws principles) and specifically excluding f the United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods. MapQuest and You expressly agree that exclusive jurisdiction for any claim or dispute relating to or arising out of these Terms of Use resides in the state courts in Loudoun County,
Virginia and the federal courts of the Eastern District of Virginia
(Alexandria Division) and further agree and expressly consent to the exercise of personal jurisdiction in such state and federal courts of
Virginia in connection with any such dispute.
15.3. Severability; Waiver. If any provision in these Terms of Use should be held illegal or unenforceable by a court having jurisdiction, such provision shall be modified to the extent necessary to render it enforceable without losing its intent, or severed from these Terms of Use if no such modification is possible, and other provisions of these Terms of
Use shall remain in full force and effect. A waiver by either MapQuest or
You (as applicable) of any term or condition of these Terms of Use or any breach thereof, in any one instance, shall not waive such term or condition or any subsequent breach thereof.
15.4. Public Statements. You acknowledge and agree that MapQuest may make any public statements regarding the existence of these
Terms of Use or the relationship described herein, without Your consent.
15.5. Survival. Any term or condition of these Terms of Use that by its nature would logically survive termination or expiration of these Terms of Use, including but not limited to protections of proprietary rights, indemnifications, and limitations of liability, shall survive such termination or expiration.
15.6. Independent Contractors. The parties to these Terms of Use are independent contractors. Neither party is an agent, representative or partner of the other party. Neither party shall have any right, power or authority to enter into any agreement for or on behalf of, or incur any obligation or liability of, or otherwise to bind, the other party.
15.7. Equitable Remedies. You acknowledge and agree that monetary damages may be insufficient to compensate MapQuest for an actual or anticipated breach of these Terms of Use by you. You agree that in such circumstances MapQuest shall be entitled to seek equitable remedies
(including preliminary and permanent injunctions), in addition to any other remedies available to MapQuest at law or hereunder.
15.8. Statute of Limitations. You agree that regardless of any statute or law to the contrary, any claim or cause of action arising out of or related to use of the MapQuest Services or these Terms of Use must be filed by you within one (1) year after such claim or cause of action arose or be forever barred.
15.9. Consent to Further Contacts. You agree that MapQuest may contact You with respect to these Terms of Use, any other MapQuest products and services, and in relation to any marketing relatedpurposes.
ODC Open Database License (ODbL)
The Open Database License (ODbL) is a license agreement intended to allow users to freely share, modify, and use this Database while maintaining this same freedom for others. Many databases are covered by copyright, and therefore this document licenses these rights. Some jurisdictions, mainly in the European Union, have specific rights that cover databases, and so the ODbL addresses these rights, too. Finally, the ODbL is also an agreement in contract for users of this Database to act in certain ways in return for accessing this Database.
Databases can contain a wide variety of types of content (images, audiovisual material, and sounds all in the same database, for example), and so the ODbL only governs the rights over the Database, and not the contents of the Database individually. Licensors should use the ODbL together with another license for the contents, if the contents have a single set of rights that uniformly covers all of the contents. If the contents have multiple sets of different rights, Licensors should describe what rights govern what contents together in the individual record or in some other way that clarifies what rights apply.
Sometimes the contents of a database, or the database itself, can be covered by other rights not addressed here (such as private contracts, trade mark over the name, or privacy rights / data protection rights over information in the contents), and so you are advised that you may have to consult other documents or clear other rights before doing activities not covered by this License.
The Licensor (as defined below) and You (as defined below) agree as follows:
1.0 Definitions of Capitalised Words
"Collective Database" – Means this Database in unmodified form as part of a collection of independent databases in themselves that together are assembled into a collective whole. A work that constitutes a Collective
Database will not be considered a Derivative Database.
"Convey" – As a verb, means Using the Database, a Derivative
Database, or the Database as part of a Collective Database in any way that enables a Person to make or receive copies of the Database or a
Derivative Database. Conveying does not include interaction with a user through a computer network, or creating and Using a Produced Work, where no transfer of a copy of the Database or a Derivative Database occurs.
"Contents" – The contents of this Database, which includes the information, independent works, or other material collected into the
Database. For example, the contents of the Database could be factual data or works such as images, audiovisual material, text, or sounds.
"Database" – A collection of material (the Contents) arranged in a systematic or methodical way and individually accessible by electronic or other means offered under the terms of this License.
"Database Directive" – Means Directive 96/9/EC of the European
Parliament and of the Council of 11 March 1996 on the legal protection of databases, as amended or succeeded.
"Database Right" – Means rights resulting from the Chapter III
("suigeneris") rights in the Database Directive (as amended and as transposed by member states), which includes the Extraction and Reutilisation of the whole or a Substantial part of the Contents, as well as any similar rights available in the relevant jurisdiction under Section
10.4.
"Derivative Database" – Means a database based upon the Database, and includes any translation, adaptation, arrangement, modification, or any other alteration of the Database or of a Substantial part of the
Contents. This includes, but is not limited to, Extracting or Re-utilising the whole or a Substantial part of the Contents in a new Database.
"Extraction" – Means the permanent or temporary transfer of all or a
Substantial part of the Contents to another medium by any means or in any form.
"License" – Means this license agreement and is both a license of rights such as copyright and Database Rights and an agreement in contract.
"Licensor" – Means the Person that offers the Database under the terms of this License.
"Person" – Means a natural or legal person or a body of persons corporate or incorporate.
"Produced Work" – a work (such as an image, audiovisual material, text, or sounds) resulting from using the whole or a Substantial part of the
Contents (via a search or other query) from this Database, a Derivative
Database, or this Database as part of a Collective Database.
"Publicly" – means to Persons other than You or under Your control by either more than 50% ownership or by the power to direct their activities
(such as contracting with an independent consultant).
"Re-utilisation" – means any form of making available to the public all or a Substantial part of the Contents by the distribution of copies, by renting, by online or other forms of transmission.
"Substantial" – Means substantial in terms of quantity or quality or a combination of both. The repeated and systematic Extraction or Reutilisation of insubstantial parts of the Contents may amount to the
Extraction or Re-utilisation of a Substantial part of the Contents.
"Use" – As a verb, means doing any act that is restricted by copyrightor
Database Rights whether in the original medium or any other; and includes without limitation distributing, copying, publicly performing,
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
5
publicly displaying, and preparing derivative works of the Database, as well as modifying the Database as may be technically necessary to use it in a different mode or format.
"You" – Means a Person exercising rights under this License who has not previously violated the terms of this License with respect to the
Database, or who has received express permission from the Licensor to exercise rights under this License despite a previous violation.
Words in the singular include the plural and vice versa.
2.0 What this License covers
2.1. Legal effect of this document. This License is: a. A license of applicable copyright and neighbouring rights; b. A license of the Database Right; and c. An agreement in contract between You and the Licensor.
2.2 Legal rights covered. This License covers the legal rights in the
Database, including: a. Copyright. Any copyright or neighbouring rights in the Database. The copyright licensed includes any individual elements of the Database, but does not cover the copyright over the Contents independent of this
Database. See Section 2.4 for details. Copyright law varies between jurisdictions, but is likely to cover: the Database model or schema, which is the structure, arrangement, and organization of the Database, and can also include the Database tables and table indexes; the data entry and output sheets; and the Field names of Contents stored in the Database; b. Database Rights. Database Rights only extend to the Extraction and
Re-utilisation of the whole or a Substantial part of the Contents.
Database Rights can apply even when there is no copyright over the
Database. Database Rights can also apply when the Contents are removed from the Database and are elected and arranged in a way that would not infringe any applicable copyright; and c. Contract. This is an agreement between You and the Licensor for access to the Database. In return you agree to certain conditions of use on this access as outlined in this License.
2.3 Rights not covered.
a. This License does not apply to computer programs used in the making or operation of the Database; b. This License does not cover any patents over the Contents or the
Database; and c. This License does not cover any trademarks associated with the
Database.
2.4 Relationship to Contents in the Database. The individual items of the
Contents contained in this Database may be covered by other rights, including copyright, patent, data protection, privacy, or personality rights, and this License does not cover any rights (other than Database Rights or in contract) in individual Contents contained in the Database. For example, if used on a Database of images (the Contents), this License would not apply to copyright over individual images, which could have their own separate licenses, or one single license covering all of the rights over the images.
3.0 Rights granted
3.1 Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, the Licensor grants to You a worldwide, royalty-free, non-exclusive, terminable (but only under Section 9) license to Use the Database for the duration of any applicable copyright and Database Rights. These rights explicitly include commercial use, and do not exclude any field of endeavour. To the extent possible in the relevant jurisdiction, these rights may be exercised in all media and formats whether now known or created in the future.
The rights granted cover, for example: a. Extraction and Re-utilisation of the whole or a Substantial part of the
Contents; b. Creation of Derivative Databases; c. Creation of Collective Databases; d. Creation of temporary or permanent reproductions by any means and in any form, in whole or in part, including of any Derivative Databases or as a part of Collective Databases; and e. Distribution, communication, display, lending, making available, or performance to the public by any means and in any form, in whole or in part, including of any Derivative Database or as a part of Collective
Databases.
3.2 Compulsory license schemes. For the avoidance of doubt: a. Non-waivable compulsory license schemes. In those jurisdictions in which the right to collect royalties through any statutory or compulsory licensing scheme cannot be waived, the Licensor reserves the exclusive right to collect such royalties for any exercise by You of the rights granted under this License; b. Waivable compulsory license schemes. In those jurisdictions in which the right to collect royalties through any statutory or compulsory licensing scheme can be waived, the Licensor waives the exclusive right to collect such royalties for any exercise by You of the rights granted under this License; and, c. Voluntary license schemes. The Licensor waives the right to collect royalties, whether individually or, in the event that the Licensor is a member of a collecting society that administers voluntary licensing schemes, via that society, from any exercise by You of the rights granted under this License.
3.3 The right to release the Database under different terms, or to stop distributing or making available the Database, is reserved. Note that this
Database may be multiple-licensed, and so You may have the choice of using alternative licenses for this Database. Subject to Section 10.4, all other rights not expressly granted by Licensor are reserved.
4.0 Conditions of Use
4.1 The rights granted in Section 3 above are expressly made subject to
Your complying with the following conditions of use. These are important conditions of this License, and if You fail to follow them, You will be in material breach of its terms.
4.2 Notices. If You Publicly Convey this Database, any Derivative
Database, or the Database as part of a Collective Database, then You must: a. Do so only under the terms of this License or another license permitted under Section 4.4; b. Include a copy of this License (or, as applicable, a license permitted under Section 4.4) or its Uniform Resource Identifier (URI) with the
Database or Derivative Database, including both in the Database or
Derivative Database and in any relevant documentation; and c. Keep intact any copyright or Database Right notices and notices that refer to this License.
d. If it is not possible to put the required notices in a particular file due to its structure, then You must include the notices in a location (such as a relevant directory) where users would be likely to look for it.
4.3 Notice for using output (Contents). Creating and Using a Produced
Work does not require the notice in Section 4.2. However, if you Publicly
Use a Produced Work, You must include a notice associated with the
Produced Work reasonably calculated to make any Person that uses, views, accesses, interacts with, or is otherwise exposed to the Produced
Work aware that Content was obtained from the Database, Derivative
Database, or the Database as part of a Collective Database, and that it is available under this License.
a. Example notice. The following text will satisfy notice under
Section 4.3: Contains information from DATABASE NAME, which is made available here under the Open Database License (ODbL).
DATABASE NAME should be replaced with the name of the Database and a hyperlink to the URI of the Database. "Open Database License" should contain a hyperlink to the URI of the text of this License. If hyperlinks are not possible, You should include the plain text of the required URI's with the above notice.
4.4 Share alike.
a. Any Derivative Database that You Publicly Use must be only under the terms of: i. This License; ii. A later version of this License similar in spirit to this License; or iii. A compatible license.
If You license the Derivative Database under one of the licenses mentioned in (iii), You must comply with the terms of that license.
b. For the avoidance of doubt, Extraction or Re-utilisation of the whole or a Substantial part of the Contents into a new database is a Derivative
Database and must comply with Section 4.4.
c. Derivative Databases and Produced Works. A Derivative Database is
Publicly Used and so must comply with Section 4.4. if a Produced Work created from the Derivative Database is Publicly Used.
d. Share Alike and additional Contents. For the avoidance of doubt, You must not add Contents to Derivative Databases under Section 4.4 a that are incompatible with the rights granted under this License.
e. Compatible licenses. Licensors may authorise a proxy to determine compatible licenses under Section 4.4 a iii. If they do so, the authorised proxy's public statement of acceptance of a compatible license grants
You permission to use the compatible license.
4.5 Limits of Share Alike. The requirements of Section 4.4 do not apply in the following: a. For the avoidance of doubt, You are not required to license Collective
Databases under this License if You incorporate this Database or a
Derivative Database in the collection, but this License still applies to this
Database or a Derivative Database as a part of the Collective Database; b. Using this Database, a Derivative Database, or this Database as part of a Collective Database to create a Produced Work does not create a
Derivative Database for purposes of Section 4.4; and
6
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
c. Use of a Derivative Database internally within an organisation is not to the public and therefore does not fall under the requirements of Section
4.4.
4.6 Access to Derivative Databases. If You Publicly Use a
DerivativeDatabase or a Produced Work from a Derivative Database,
You must also offer to recipients of the Derivative Database or Produced
Work a copy in a machine readable form of: a. The entire Derivative Database; or b. A file containing all of the alterations made to the Database or the method of making the alterations to the Database (such as an algorithm), including any additional Contents, that make up all the differences between the Database and the Derivative Database. The
Derivative Database (under a.) or alteration file (under b.) must be available at no more than a reasonable production cost for physical distributions and free of charge if distributed over the internet.
4.7 Technological measures and additional terms a. This License does not allow You to impose (except subject to Section
4.7 b.) any terms or any technological measures on the Database, a
Derivative Database, or the whole or a Substantial part of the Contents that alter or restrict the terms of this License, or any rights granted under it, or have the effect or intent of restricting the ability of any person to exercise those rights.
b. Parallel distribution. You may impose terms or technological measures on the Database, a Derivative Database, or the whole or a
Substantial part of the Contents (a "Restricted Database") in contravention of Section 4.74 a. only if You also make a copy of the
Database or a Derivative Database available to the recipient of the
Restricted Database: i. That is available without additional fee; ii. That is available in a medium that does not alter or restrict the terms of this License, or any rights granted under it, or have the effect or intent of restricting the ability of any person to exercise those rights (an
"Unrestricted Database"); and iii. The Unrestricted Database is at least as accessible to the recipient as a practical matter as the Restricted Database.
c. For the avoidance of doubt, You may place this Database or a
Derivative Database in an authenticated environment, behind a password, or within a similar access control scheme provided that You do not alter or restrict the terms of this License or any rights granted under it or have the effect or intent of restricting the ability of any person to exercise those rights.
4.8 Licensing of others. You may not sublicense the Database. Each time
You communicate the Database, the whole or Substantial part of the
Contents, or any Derivative Database to anyone else in any way, the
Licensor offers to the recipient a license to the Database on the same terms and conditions as this License. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License, but You may enforce any rights that You have over a Derivative Database. You are solely responsible for any modifications of a Derivative Database made by You or another Person at Your direction. You may not impose any further restrictions on the exercise of the rights granted or affirmed under this License.
5.0 Moral rights
5.1 Moral rights. This section covers moral rights, including any rights to be identified as the author of the Database or to object to treatment that would otherwise prejudice the author's honour and reputation, or any other derogatory treatment: a. For jurisdictions allowing waiver of moral rights, Licensor waives all moral rights that Licensor may have in the Database to the fullest extent possible by the law of the relevant jurisdiction under Section 10.4; b. If waiver of moral rights under Section 5.1 a in the relevant jurisdiction is not possible, Licensor agrees not to assert any moral rights over the
Database and waives all claims in moral rights to the fullest extent possible by the law of the relevant jurisdiction under Section 10.4; and c. For jurisdictions not allowing waiver or an agreement not to assert moral rights under Section 5.1 a and b, the author may retain their moral rights over certain aspects of the Database. Please note that some jurisdictions do not allow for the waiver of moral rights, and so moral rights may still subsist over the Database in some jurisdictions.
6.0 Fair dealing, Database exceptions, and other rights not affected
6.1 This License does not affect any rights that You or anyone else may independently have under any applicable law to make any use of this
Database, including without limitation: a. Exceptions to the Database Right including: Extraction of Contents from non-electronic Databases for private purposes, Extraction for purposes of illustration for teaching or scientific research, and Extraction or Re-utilisation for public security or an administrative or judicial procedure.
b. Fair dealing, fair use, or any other legally recognised limitation or exception to infringement of copyright or other applicable laws.
6.2 This License does not affect any rights of lawful users to Extract and
Re-utilise insubstantial parts of the Contents, evaluated quantitatively or qualitatively, for any purposes whatsoever, including creating a
Derivative Database (subject to other rights over the Contents, see
Section 2.4). The repeated and systematic Extraction or Re-utilisation of insubstantial parts of the Contents may however amount to the
Extraction or Re-utilisation of a Substantial part of the Contents.
7.0 Warranties and Disclaimer7.1 The Database is licensed by the
Licensor "as is" and without any warranty of any kind, either express, implied, or arising by statute, custom, course of dealing, or trade usage.
Licensor specifically disclaims any and all implied warranties or conditions of title, non-infringement, accuracy or completeness, the presence or absence of errors, fitness for a particular purpose, merchantability, or otherwise.
Some jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion of implied warranties, so this exclusion may not apply to You.
8.0 Limitation of liability
8.1 Subject to any liability that may not be excluded or limited by law, the Licensor is not liable for, and expressly excludes, all liability for loss or damage however and whenever caused to anyone by any use under this License, whether by You or by anyone else, and whether caused by any fault on the part of the Licensor or not. This exclusion of liability includes, but is not limited to, any special, incidental, consequential, punitive, or exemplary damages such as loss of revenue, data, anticipated profits, and lost business. This exclusion applies even if the
Licensor has been advised of the possibility of such damages.
8.2 If liability may not be excluded by law, it is limited to actual and direct financial loss to the extent it is caused by proved negligence on the part of the Licensor.
9.0 Termination of Your rights under this License
9.1 Any breach by You of the terms and conditions of this License automatically terminates this License with immediate effect and without notice to You. For the avoidance of doubt, Persons who have received the Database, the whole or a Substantial part of the Contents, Derivative
Databases, or the Database as part of a Collective Database from You under this License will not have their licenses terminated provided their use is in full compliance with this License or a license granted under
Section 4.8 of this License. Sections 1, 2, 7, 8, 9 and 10 will survive any termination of this License.
9.2 If You are not in breach of the terms of this License, the Licensor will not terminate Your rights under it.
9.3 Unless terminated under Section 9.1, this License is granted to You for the duration of applicable rights in the Database.
9.4 Reinstatement of rights. If you cease any breach of the terms and conditions of this License, then your full rights under this License will be reinstated: a. Provisionally and subject to permanent termination until the 60th day after cessation of breach; b. Permanently on the 60th day after cessation of breach unless otherwise reasonably notified by the Licensor; or c. Permanently if reasonably notified by the Licensor of the violation, this is the first time You have received notice of violation of this License from the Licensor, and You cure the violation prior to 30 days after your receipt of the notice.
Persons subject to permanent termination of rights are not eligible to be a recipient and receive a license under Section 4.8.
9.5 Notwithstanding the above, Licensor reserves the right to release the
Database under different license terms or to stop distributing or making available the Database. Releasing the Database under different license terms or stopping the distribution of the Database will not withdraw this
License (or any other license that has been, or is required to be, granted under the terms of this License), and this License will continue in full force and effect unless terminated as stated above.
10.0 General
10.1 If any provision of this License is held to be invalid or unenforceable, that must not affect the validity or enforceability of the remainder of the terms and conditions of this License and each remaining provision of this License shall be valid and enforced to the fullest extent permitted by law.
10.2 This License is the entire agreement between the parties with respect to the rights granted here over the Database. It replaces any earlier understandings, agreements or representations with respect to the Database.
10.3 If You are in breach of the terms of this License, You will not be entitled to rely on the terms of this License or to complain of any breach by the Licensor.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
7
10.4 Choice of law. This License takes effect in and will be governed by the laws of the relevant jurisdiction in which the License terms are sought to be enforced. If the standard suite of rights granted under applicable copyright law and Database Rights in the relevant jurisdiction includes additional rights not granted under this License, these additional rights are granted in this License in order to meet the terms of this
License.
Warranty Remedies
Trimble's sole liability and your exclusive remedy under the warranties set forth above shall be, at Trimble's option, to repair or replace any
Product that fails to conform to such warranty ('Nonconforming
Product"), and/or issue a cash refund up to the purchase price paid by you for any such Nonconforming Product, excluding costs of installation, upon your return of the Nonconforming Product to Trimble in accordance with Trimble's product return procedures than in effect. Such remedy may include reimbursement of the cost of repairs for damage to thirdparty equipment onto which the Product is installed, if such damage is found to be directly caused by the Product as reasonably determined by
Trimble following a root cause analysis.
Warranty Exclusions and Disclaimer
These warranties shall be applied only in the event and to the extent that (a) the Products and Software are properly and correctly installed, configured, interfaced, maintained, stored, and operated in accordance with Trimble's relevant operator's manual and specifications, and; (b) the Products and Software are not modified or misused. The preceding warranties shall not apply to, and Trimble shall not be responsible for defects or performance problems resulting from (i) the combination or utilization of the Product or Software with hardware or software products, information, data, systems, interfaces or devices not made, supplied or specified by Trimble; (ii) the operation of the Product or
Software under any specification other than, or in addition to, Trimble's standard specifications for its products; (iii) the unauthorized, installation, modification, or use of the Product or Software; (iv) damage caused by accident, lightning or other electrical discharge, fresh or salt water immersion or spray (outside of Product specifications); or (v) normal wear and tear on consumable parts (e.g., batteries). Trimble does not warrant or guarantee the results obtained through the use of the Product or that software components will operate error free.
THE WARRANTIES ABOVE STATE TRIMBLE'S ENTIRE LIABILITY, AND
YOUR EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES, RELATING TO THE PRODUCTS AND
SOFTWARE. EXCEPT AS OTHERWISE EXPRESSLY PROVIDED HEREIN,
THE PRODUCTS, SOFTWARE, AND ACCOMPANYING DOCUMENTATION
AND MATERIALS ARE PROVIDED "AS IS" AND WITHOUT EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED WARRANTY OF ANY KIND BY EITHER TRIMBLE NAVIGATION
LIMITED OR ANYONE WHO HAS BEEN INVOLVED IN ITS CREATION,
PRODUCTION, INSTALLATION, OR DISTRIBUTION INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND
NONINFRINGEMENT. THE STATED EXPRESS WARRANTIES ARE IN LIEU
OF ALL OBLIGATIONS OR LIABILITIES ON THE PART OF TRIMBLE
ARISING OUT OF, OR IN CONNECTION WITH, ANY PRODUCTS OR
SOFTWARE. BECAUSE SOME STATES AND JURISDICTIONS DO NOT
ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON DURATION OR THE EXCLUSION OF AN
IMPLIED WARRANTY, THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY OR
FULLY APPLY TO YOU.
NOTICE REGARDING PRODUCTS EQUIPPED WITH TECHNOLOGY
CAPABLE OF TRACKING SATELLITE SIGNALS FROM SATELLITE BASED
AUGMENTATION SYSTEMS (SBAS) (WAAS/EGNOS, AND MSAS),
OMNISTAR, GPS, MODERNIZED GPS OR GLONASS SATELLITES, OR
FROM IALA BEACON SOURCES: TRIMBLE IS NOT RESPONSIBLE
FOR THE OPERATION OR FAILURE OF OPERATION OF ANY
SATELLITE BASED POSITIONING SYSTEM OR THE AVAILABILITY
OF ANY SATELLITE BASED POSITIONING SIGNALS.
Limitation or Liability
TRIMBLE'S ENTIRE LIABILITY UNDER ANY PROVISION HEREIN SHALL BE
LIMITED TO THE AMOUNT PAID BY YOU FOR THE PRODUCT OR
SOFTWARE LICENSE. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY
APPLICABLE LAW, IN NO EVENT SHALL TRIMBLE OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES WHATSOEVER UNDER ANY CIRCUMSTANCE OR LEGAL
THEORY RELATING IN ANY WAY TO THE PRODUCTS, SOFTWARE AND
ACCOMPANYING DOCUMENTATION AND MATERIALS, (INCLUDING,
WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF BUSINESS PROFITS,
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, LOSS OF BUSINESS INFORMATION, OR ANY
OTHER PECUNIARY LOSS), REGARDLESS WHETHER TRIMBLE HAS BEEN
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF ANY SUCH LOSS AND REGARDLESS
OF THE COURSE OF DEALING WHICH DEVELOPS OR HAS DEVELOPED
BETWEEN YOU AND TRIMBLE. BECAUSE SOME STATES AND
JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF
LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, THE
ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY OR FULLY APPLY TO YOU.
PLEASE NOTE: THE ABOVE TRIMBLE LIMITED WARRANTY
PROVISIONS WILL NOT APPLY TO PRODUCTS PURCHASED IN
THOSE JURISDICTIONS (E.G., MEMBER STATES OF THE
EUROPEAN ECONOMIC AREA) IN WHICH PRODUCT
WARRANTIES ARE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE LOCAL DEALER
FROM WHOM THE PRODUCTS ARE ACQUIRED. IN SUCH A
CASE, PLEASE CONTACT YOUR TRIMBLE DEALER FOR
APPLICABLE WARRANTY INFORMATION.
Official Language
THE OFFICIAL LANGUAGE OF THESE TERMS AND CONDITIONS IS
ENGLISH. IN THE EVENT OF A CONFLICT BETWEEN ENGLISH AND
OTHER LANGUAGE VERSIONS, THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE SHALL
CONTROL.
Registration
To receive information regarding updates and new products, please contact your local dealer or visit the Trimble website at www.trimble.com/register. Upon registration you may select the newsletter, upgrade or new product information you desire.
Notices
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used in order to meet FCC emission limits. TRIMBLE is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by using other than recommended cables and connectors or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Responsible
Party:
Trimble Navigation
935 Stewart Drive
Sunnyvale CA 94085
Telephone: 1-408 481 8000
Canada
This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe A est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
This apparatus complies with Canadian RSS-GEN.
Cet appareil est conforme à la norme CNR-GEN du Canada.
Europe
The product covered by this guide are intended to be used in all EU member countries, Norway, and
Switzerland. Products been tested and found to comply with the requirements for a Class B device pursuant to
European Council Directive 89/336/EEC on EMC, thereby satisfying the requirements for CE Marking and sale within the European Economic
Area (EEA). Contains a Bluetooth radio module. These requirements are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a residential or commercial environment. The 450 MHZ (PMR) bands and 2.4 GHz are nonharmonized throughout Europe.
CE Declaration of Conformity
8
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
Hereby, Trimble Navigation, declares that the GPS receivers are in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.
Australia and New Zealand
This product conforms with the regulatory requirements of the Australian Communications and Media Authority
(ACMA) EMC framework, thus satisfying the requirements for C-Tick Marking and sale within Australia and New Zealand.
Restriction of Use of Certain Hazardous Substances in Electrical and Electronic Equipment (RoHS)
Trimble products in this guide comply in all material respects with
DIRECTIVE 2002/95/EC OF THE EUROPEAN PARLIAMENT AND OF THE
COUNCIL of 27 January 2003 on the restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment (RoHS
Directive) and Amendment 2005/618/EC filed under C(2005) 3143, with exemptions for lead in solder pursuant to Paragraph 7 of the Annex to the RoHS Directive applied.
Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE)
For product recycling instructions and more information, please go to www.trimble.com/ev.shtml
.
Recycling in Europe: To recycle Trimble WEEE (Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment, products that run on electrical power.), Call
+31 497 53 24 30, and ask for the “WEEE Associate”. Or, mail a request for recycling instructions to:
Trimble Europe BV c/o Menlo Worldwide Logistics
Meerheide 45
5521 DZ Eersel, NL
Unlicensed radios in products
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Licensed radios in products
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the condition that this device may not cause harmful interference.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
9
Safety Information
Safety Information
Always follow the instructions that accompany a Warning or Caution. The information it provides is intended to minimize the risk of personal injury and/or damage to property. In particular, observe safety instructions that are presented in the following format:
WARNING –
This alert warns of a potential hazard which, if not avoided, could result in severe injury or even death.
CAUTION – This alert warns of a potential hazard or unsafe practice which, if not avoided, could result in injury or property damage or irretrievable data loss.
Note – An absence of specific alerts does not mean that there are no safety risks involved.
Warnings
Auto guidance
WARNING –
Auto guidance systems cannot avoid items in the field such as obstacles. Make sure you are adequately trained to operate the auto guidance system.
WARNING –
Obstacles in the field can cause collisions, which may injure you a damage the vehicle. If an obstacle in the field makes it unsafe to continue a particular phase of the Automated Deadzone calibration:
- Stop the vehicle to abort the phase.
- Turn the steering wheel to disengage the system.
- Reposition the vehicle and continue from the current test phase.
WARNING –
Many large and sudden changes in satellite geometry caused by blocked satellites can cause significant position shifts. If operating under these conditions, auto-guidance systems can react abruptly. To avoid possible personal injury or damage to property under these conditions, disable the auto-guidance system and take manual control of the vehicle until conditions have cleared.
WARNING –
Installers, technicians, and operators must verify that the Autopilot function (line acquisition and online guidance) is in good, safe, working order before the operator uses NextSwath.
WARNING –
Do not use automated implement functions to: 1) control hazardous materials (including NH3) or 2) operate implements near ground laborers. Failure to follow these restrictions could result in serious injury or death.
10
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
Safety Information
WARNING –
A trained and qualified operator must be at the controls of the vehicle at all times, and be ready to safely take over controls of the system at anytime. NextSwath is not a safety aid nor a replacement for a skilled operator.
WARNING –
NextSwath cannot avoid obstacles. The operator is solely responsible for avoiding obstacles.
WARNING –
Interaction with and avoidance of boundaries is solely the operator's responsibility. While
NextSwath can use field boundaries for a reference point for turn start points, the trained and qualified operator is responsible for determining offsets from field boundaries. NextSwath does not calculate distance of the vehicle or machinery from the boundary during the turn.
Calibration
WARNING –
Anhydrous valve and flow calibrations require the vehicle and implement to be moving and the implement must be in the ground (the implement lift switch must be down). Take all necessary precautions to ensure user safety. Failure to do so may result in serious injury or death.
WARNING –
Moving parts during this operation. Make sure that the implement is safe to operate.
WARNING –
The wheels can move abruptly during the Proportional Steering Gain procedure while the Autopilot system tests the hydraulic response to the steering commands. These sudden movements can cause collisions with nearby obstacles or cause injury to occupants of the vehicle. Be prepared for sudden wheel movements.
WARNING –
The steering coulters can move abruptly during the Proportional Steering Gain procedure while the
TrueTracker system tests the hydraulic response to the steering commands. These sudden movements can cause collisions with nearby obstacles or cause injury. Be prepared for sudden steering coulter movements.
WARNING –
The vehicle needs to move during the Hydraulic Tracked Pump Knees calibration procedure. To avoid injury, be prepared for vehicle movement.
WARNING –
Obstacles in the field can cause collisions, which may injure you and damage the vehicle. If an obstacle in the field makes it unsafe to continue the Automated Deadzone calibration, stop the vehicle and turn the steering wheel to disengage the system.
1) Wait until the display prompts you that the phase is ready to begin.
2) Look at the screen to determine whether the next phase will require a left or right turn.
3) Reposition the vehicle so that the turn will use the space that you have available.
4) Tap the button to begin the next phase.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
11
Safety Information
WARNING –
During the Automated Deadzone calibration, the system moves the wheels that steer the vehicle. To avoid injury, be prepared for sudden vehicle movement and that the area around the vehicle (and implement, if applicable) are clear.
WARNING –
During flow calibration, the machine will become operational. Take all necessary precautions to ensure user safety. Failure to do so may result in serious injury or death.
WARNING –
Material will be dispensed during calibration. Make sure that the implement is safe to operate.
WARNING –
Incorrect adjustment of Manual Override Sensitivity could cause this critical safety feature to fail, resulting in personal injury or damage to the vehicle. Do not to choose a setting that is either too sensitive or not sensitive enough. It is vital to avoid setting the sensitivity so low that the system will not detect any steering wheel motion.
Display
WARNING –
When the temperature of the display case reaches 65° C (149 ° F) the display shows the following:
WARNING! HOT SURFACE, DO NOT TOUCH. The display will dim the screen until the temperature returns to normal. Use caution when touching the display when this warning is visible.
Implement master switch
WARNING –
When the implement is down and the master switch is in the On position, the machine is fully operational. Take all necessary precautions to ensure user safety. Failure to do so could result in injury or death.
NH3, anhydrous ammonia
WARNING –
NH3 is an irritant and corrosive to the skin, eyes, respiratory tract and mucous membranes, and is dangerous if not handled properly. It may cause severe burns to the eyes, lungs, and skin. Skin, and respiratoryrelated diseases could be aggravated by exposure. It is recommended that protective gloves, boots, slicker and/or pants and jacket, and chemical-splash goggles that are impervious to anhydrous ammonia are worn at all times.
WARNING –
Anhydrous valve and flow calibrations require the vehicle and implement to be moving and the implement must be in the ground (the implement lift switch must be down). Take all necessary precautions to ensure user safety. Failure to do so may result in serious injury or death.
12
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
Safety Information
Cautions
Data
CAUTION – Deleting data is permanent. You cannot undo the deletion or restore the data.
CAUTION – POTENTIAL LOSS OF DATA!
If you copy files from:
- An FM-1000 Plus application to another or to an FM-1000 integrated display.
- An physical FM-1000 integrated display to another or to an FM-1000 Plus application
First make sure you have created a subfolder labeled with the display serial number for your files. Transfer your files to this subfolder. Otherwise, you will overwrite files when you copy and you will corrupt your data.
CAUTION – Do not remove the USB drive from the socket while the application is copying data. This will corrupt the data.
Display
CAUTION – Do not remove power from the display or the DCM-300 modem for 10 minutes after you tap the
Generate New button.
CAUTION – If you leave the display powered on after shutting off the vehicle's ignition, the display power can drain the battery.
GNSS interference
CAUTION – The GNSS antenna may experience interference if you operate the vehicle within 100 m (300 ft) of any power line, radar dish, or cell phone tower.
Setup
CAUTION – Always verify implement and NextSwath settings, and verify performance for each implement you use for NextSwath. Failure to do so may result in equipment damage.
CAUTION – Some Raven controllers do not support zero rates. If the target rate is zero, and spray is still being applied, you must turn off the boom sections manually.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
13
Safety Information
CAUTION – Always verify implement and NextSwath settings, and verify performance for each implement you use for NextSwath. Failure to do so may result in equipment damage.
CAUTION – You must configure the correct front/back offset. If you are using:
- An Autopilot system: Set the front/back offset to the distance from the fixed axle of the vehicle to the implement.
- Manual guidance: Set the front/back offset to the distance from the antenna centerpoint to the implement.
Touchscreen
CAUTION – Do not apply glass cleaner directly to the touchscreen.
CAUTION – Do not press on the screen with a sharp object such as a pencil. This could damage the surface of the screen.
Working with anhydrous ammonia
l
Contact your NH3 supplier to review all safety requirements associated with anhydrous ammonia (NH3).
l
Always wear correct personal protective equipment. This includes, but is not limited to:
Goggles or face shield l
Protective suit and gloves l
Respirator l
Do not allow anyone to operate the system without proper instruction and training.
l
Stand up-wind when working around NH3 and related equipment.
l
Always keep NH3 equipment away from buildings, livestock, and other people.
l
Never work on NH3 equipment in confined spaces.
l
Before you attempt to transport the implement, discharge the system of all NH3 and completely shut down the system. See
Discharging the System (page 15) .
l
If symptoms of illness occur during or shortly after use of NH3 products, seek immediate medical attention.
l
Keep a source of clean water (at least five gallons) readily available. In case of exposure, flush exposed skin or eyes immediately with large quantities of water and seek immediate medical attention.
l
NH3 can be harmful to the environment if not used correctly. Follow all local, state, and federal regulations regarding proper handling of this chemical.
14
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
Safety Information
Servicing the Equipment
1. Remove the system from operation before performing any maintenance.
2. Thoroughly bleed all system lines and disconnect the nurse tank hose. See
3. Make sure that the gauge pressure is at zero before you open the system.
4. Use extreme caution when opening a previously pressurized system.
Discharging the System
1. Turn off the console or vehicle master switch.
2. Completely close the main shut-off valve on the supply or nurse tank.
3. Resume field application until the pressure gauge shows zero pressure.
4. Check again that the console and/or vehicle master switch, and all section switches, are turned off.
5. Completely close the emergency shut-off valve the cooling tower.
6. Bleed and disconnect the nurse tank supply hose from the system.
7. Turn on the console master switch and all section switches.
8. Stand up-wind from the implement and then slowly open the bleed valve(s) until fully open.
9. Allow at least one (1) hour for the system to fully discharge.
10. Before you open the system, make sure that the pressure gauge on the manifold reads zero and that the cooling tower is not cold to the touch. This ensures that all liquid NH3 has evaporated and that the pressure is discharged.
Note – Frost on any component is a positive indication of trapped NH3 at low pressure. Lack of frost does not always indicate a lack of NH3.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
15
Contents
Working with anhydrous ammonia
1 Introduction
About the FM-1000 Plus application
2 FM-1000 Plus application basics
Configuration Selection screen
16
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
Contents
29
33
Version 3.0, Revision A
Contents
FM-1000 Plus application Passwords
Change administration password
3 Basic settings
FM-1000 Plus application-specific settings
FM-1000 Plus application and display settings
Activate features/plugins for use
FM-1000 Plus application settings
Field feature mapping settings
Language, measurements, keyboard layout
Signal input module for OEM switch
Languages and units settings for display
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
17
53
4 Data management
Create / load a data dictionary
5 Connectivity settings
18
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
Contents
95
115
Version 3.0, Revision A
Contents
6 Field feature mapping setup
Field feature mapping settings
Access Feature Mapping settings
7 Implement setup
8 Vehicle guidance setup
Version 3.0, Revision A
155
161
147
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
19
Automated headlands management settings
EZ-Pilot assisted steering system
Vehicle settings for EZ-Pilot system
Steering settings for EZ-Pilot system
Engage settings for EZ-Pilot system
EZ-Steer assisted steering system
Advanced settings for EZ-Pilot
9 Field-IQ system setup
Equipment calibration for Field-IQ
20
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
Contents
211
Version 3.0, Revision A
Contents
10 GreenSeeker setup
Field preparations for nitrogen application
Field preparations for user defined rate
Delivery system and liquid control
11 ISOBUS setup
12 Serial Rate Control setup
Supported variable rate controllers
Variable rate controller setup
13 TrueGuide setup
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
21
263
257
269
279
System aggressiveness settings
14 TrueTracker setup
Implement controller setup for TrueTracker system
Vehicle settings for TrueTracker system
Engage settings for TrueTracker system
Steering settings for TrueTracker system
Implement calibration for TrueTracker system
Proportional Steering Gain calibration
Implement Steering Sensor calibration
Implement Automated Deadzone calibration
Antenna position and roll offset correction
Line Acquisition Aggressiveness calibration
15 Vehicle Sync setup
16 Water Management setup
Implement settings for FieldLevel II
22
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
Contents
285
301
305
Version 3.0, Revision A
Contents
Calibrate WM-Drain for cantilever plow
17 Yield Monitoring setup
Yield Monitoring functionality
Yield Monitoring best practices
Calibrating and operating conditions
Yield sensor / moisture sensor calibration
Third-party display instructions
Claas Cebis Quantimeter calibration
Claas Cebis Auto Pilot calibration
Greenstar Monitor: Stop Head Height setup
Greenstar Monitor calibrations
Command Center (70 Series Combines)
18 Operations
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
23
331
351
On-screen lightbar for vehicle
On-screen lightbar for implement
Field-IQ master switch box functions
Field-IQ 12-section switch box (optional)
24
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
Contents
Version 3.0, Revision A
Contents
Adjust direction and swath number
Using automated headlands management
Crossing a line feature operation
Distance-based pulse operation
Change trigger limits during operation
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
25
Guidance lines with Vehicle Sync
Water Management functionality
Create a tile / ditch survey line
Clip a portion of a section line
19 Diagnostics
26
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
Contents
485
Version 3.0, Revision A
Contents
20 Glossary
Field-IQ faults and troubleshooting
FieldLevel II diagnostics valve test
Yield Monitoring warning messages
Version 3.0, Revision A
527
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
27
Contents
28
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
Chapter
1
Introduction
In this chapter:
About the FM-1000 Plus application
This user guide includes information on setting up and using the FM-1000™ Plus application. For installation information, see
XCN-2050 Cabling Guide.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
29
About the FM-1000 Plus application 1 Introduction
About the FM-1000 Plus application
With the FM-1000™ Plus application, you can perform: l
Field definition and mapping l
Feature mapping l
Guidance to predefined field patterns l
Logging of coverage data l
Variable rate control l
Boom/Row switching l
Logging of topographic mapping data l
Output of information for analysis in office-based Geographic Information System (GIS) software l
Seed, Liquid, Granular, and Anhydrous Ammonia control l
Seed monitoring
Optional features
The FM-1000 Plus application has a number of optional features /plugins you can install to expand its functionality.
Most of these features require additional hardware. For installation information, see the XCN-2050
Cabling Guide.
Note – Some configuration settings are unavailable when a field is open in the Run screen. To access these settings, return to the Run screen and then tap the Home button. When prompted to close the field, tap Yes.
Also see
Optional features/plugins (page 48) ,
and
Activate features/plugins for use (page 60) .
Compatibility
The following are compatible with the FM-1000 Plus application: l
Trimble Autopilot™ automated steering system l
Trimble EZ-Steer® assisted steering system l
Trimble EZ-Pilot® steering system l
Trimble TrueTracker™ implement steering system l
Trimble TrueGuide™ implement guidance system l
Trimble FieldLevel™ II
30
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
1 Introduction About the FM-1000 Plus application l
Trimble WM-Drain® farm drainage system l
Trimble Rawson™ drive l
Trimble Field-IQ™ crop input control system l
Trimble RangePoint™ RTX™ l
Trimble CenterPoint™ RTX and CenterPoint VRS™ l
Trimble VRSNow™ l
Trimble Farm Works Software® l
Trimble GreenSeeker® l
Trimble Tru Count Air Clutch® l
Trimble AutoSense™ l
Trimble T2™ terrain compensation technology l
Trimble T3™ roll compensation l
OmniSTAR® wide-area differential GPS service l
Trimble NextSwath™ end of row turn technology
Installation
To install the display and required cabling for your configuration, see the XCN-2050 Cabling Guide.
Supported features
All features available in the FM-1000™ display are available in the 1.0 version of the FM-1000 Plus application except: l
Remote Assistant l
External speakers for the Trimble EZ-Pilot® system and EZ-Steer® assisted steering system
Productivity and Delay and cameras are separate applications that you can access from the
.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
31
Changes to this document 1 Introduction
Changes to this document
The changes for this document for the FM-1000 Plus application version 3.0, revision A are: l
Remote Output: Crossing a Line Feature has been added. See
and
Remote Output operation (page 429) .
l
WM Drain: Changes to the Run screen and added features, including clipping/deleting a section line and adding fixed points during design. See
WM-Drain operation (page 464) .
l
Serial NMEA messages: 10 Hz has been added as an output. See
l
The addition of pressure limiting to Field-IQ. See
Pressure limiting (page 214) .
l
The addition of CenterPoint RTX fast satellite for Europe. See
.
32
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
Chapter
2
FM-1000 Plus application basics
In this chapter:
FM-1000 Plus application Passwords
The FM-1000 Plus application has five main screens you use for setup and operations.
You can also access on-screen help.
Optional features (plugins) are available to add to the FM-1000 Plus application.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
33
Display power on/off 2 FM-1000 Plus application basics
Display power on/off
Note – The display must be correctly installed
Cabling Guide.
before
powering on. For more information, see XCN-2050
CAUTION – If you leave the display powered on after shutting off the vehicle's ignition, the display power can drain the battery.
Automatic power on
If the display is connected to the ignition source, power on the vehicle. The TM-200 Module sends power to the display when the vehicle powers on. The display powers on. After a short pause, the
displays.
To open the FM-1000 Plus application, tap .
Note – After you have initially powered on the display, the FM-1000 Plus application may not open until the
TM-200 Module has initialized or finished booting.
Manual power on
To turn on the display manually, hold the power button down briefly (about half a second).The
power button is on the rear of the display.
The display powers on. After a short pause, the
displays.
To open the FM-1000 Plus application, tap .
Note – After you have initially powered on the display, the FM-1000 Plus application may not open until the
TM-200 Module has initialized or finished booting.
Automatic power off
If the display is connected to the ignition source, when you switch the ignition off, a shutdown/reboot dialog displays. If you do nothing the display shuts off in 60 seconds. If you choose not to shutdown the display, it will remain powered on indefinitely.
Note – If you fail to close FM-1000 Plus application before power down, you may experience a loss of data.
CAUTION – If you leave the display powered on after shutting off the vehicle's ignition, the display power can drain the battery.
34
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
2 FM-1000 Plus application basics Display power on/off
Manual power off
To manually turn the power off, hold the power down button for one to two seconds. See the steps below.
1. Close the FM-1000 Plus application.
2. Turn off the display manually by holding the power button down for about two seconds.
3. Choose one of the following options:
Shutdown: Powers down the display l
Reboot: Restarts the display l
Cancel: Cancels the power off process
Note – If you fail to close FM-1000 Plus application before rebooting or shutdown, you may experience a loss of data.
Note – Sometimes after you press the power button and tap
Shutdown
, the display does not immediately turnoff. This is because the FM-1000 Plus application is saving settings. The display will power off after all settings are saved.
If these steps do not cause the power to go off, you can force a shut down of the display by holding the power button for 5 seconds.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
35
Touch screen basics 2 FM-1000 Plus application basics
Touch screen basics
If you are unfamiliar with using a touch screen, this section contains the basics of using a touch screen and how to clean it.
Interactive controls
Use your fingers to interact with buttons, maps, lists and selectors.
CAUTION – Do not press on the screen with a sharp object such as a pencil. This could damage the surface of the screen.
Item
Buttons and selectors
Lists
Action
Tapping
Scrolling
Settings shortcut
Swiping down
Explanation
Tap means to touch a point on the screen and then remove your finger from the screen.
A tap is a single touch. You do not move your finger while touching the screen. You tap buttons, items in lists, points on a range, and so on.
When a list has more items than fit on a screen or in a box, you can move the list to see all items by scrolling up, down, or side to side. To scroll:
1. Touch anywhere on the scroll bar and hold your finger on the it.
2. Move your finger in the direction that you want to move the up or down.
3. Remove your finger when you are satisfied with the position of the list.
Swipe down on the upper right area of the screen to quickly access the brightness control and Display settings.
See
Access display settings (page 91) .
36
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
2 FM-1000 Plus application basics Touch screen basics
Cleaning the touch screen
CAUTION – Do not press on the screen with a sharp object such as a pencil. This could damage the surface of the screen.
Use the following supplies to clean the touch screen of the display: l
Ammonia-free glass cleaner l
Soft, lint-free cotton cloth l
50% isopropyl alcohol
CAUTION – Do not apply glass cleaner directly to the touchscreen.
1. Apply a small amount of ammonia-free glass cleaner to the cloth.
2. Gently rub the touchscreen with the cloth.
3. To remove stains or smudges, use a cotton cloth dampened with 50% isopropyl alcohol.
Tip – You can set up status items to show the length of the swath (Swath Length) and the calculated distance to the end of the swath (Along Track Error). See
.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
37
Main screens 2 FM-1000 Plus application basics
Main screens
The FM-1000 Plus application has the following main screens: l
Launcher screen (page 39) : The first screen that displays when you power on the display
l
: The first screen that displays when you open FM-1000 Plus application l l
: For performing operations
Configuration Selection screen (page 41)
: For switching and editing selections for system, vehicle and implement l
Configuration screen (page 44)
(and subsequent setup screens): For setting up the system and features l
Field Selection screen (page 43) : For choosing which field to work in
l
On-screen user guide (page 46)
: For viewing immediate help about a screen
38
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
2 FM-1000 Plus application basics
Launcher screen
Main screens
You open applications from the Launcher screen by tapping them, including: l
FM-1000 Plus application l
XCN-2050™ application l
Connected Farm™ applications l
Dealer-specific applications
The FM-1000 Plus application and XCN-2050 application cannot be open at the same time. If you are switching from FM-1000 Plus application to XCN-2050 application or XCN-2050 application to FM-
1000 Plus application:
1. Close the FM-1000 Plus application by navigating to the Home screen and tapping
Close
.
Note – If you fail to close FM-1000 Plus application before rebooting, you may experience a loss of data.
2. Reboot the display by holding down the power button for 1-2 seconds.
3. When the option menu displays, tap
Reboot
.
Interruption of services
If automatic steering, spraying, seeding or other services are engaged in FM-1000 Plus application and you go to the Launcher screen, the automatic systems will disengage.
Application menu button
To see all the application icons on the Launcher screen, tap the application menu button .
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
39
Main screens 2 FM-1000 Plus application basics
Home screen
The Home screen lists the following information about the configuration: l
The display build date, firmware and hardware version l
All optional features/plugins loaded on the application l
The automatic steering system (if applicable) l
The GPS receiver version, correction source and subscription information l
The selected vehicle make and model
The Home screen has two tabs: l
Home tab, containing the buttons: l
Open Field
: Tap to open the
Configuration Selection screen (page 41)
.
Settings
: Tap to open the
Configuration screen (page 44)
.
l
Data Transfer
: Tap to display the Data Transfer screen. See
l
Modules
: Tap to upgrade hardware modules.
l
System Information tab, listing about the configuration: l
Display firmware build date, firmware, and hardware version
Optional features/plugins loaded on the application l
Vehicle and implement automatic steering controller version, date, and serial number (if applicable) l
GPS receiver version, correction source, and subscription information l
Selected vehicle make and model
40
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
2 FM-1000 Plus application basics
Configuration Selection screen
Before you enter the Run screen, the Configuration Selection screen shows the current configuration selected for the: l
System l
Vehicle l
Implement
Access the Configuration Selection screen from the Home screen.
Main screens
For each of these you can: l
Switch to another system, vehicle or implement l
Edit settings
The Configuration Selection screen shows the current configuration selected for the: l
System l
Vehicle l
Implement
System configuration switching
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
41
Main screens
Vehicle configuration switching
2 FM-1000 Plus application basics
Implement configuration switching
42
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
2 FM-1000 Plus application basics
Field Selection screen
Main screens
1. When you want to go to a field to begin work in the Run screen, tap at the Home screen.
2. If the system, vehicle and implement at the Configuration Screen are what you want to use, tap
OK
.
3. At the Field Selection screen, you can:
Choose existing fields you have created in the system l
Create a new field (as well as the client, farm and event associated with it)
For more information, see
Field creation / selection (page 361) .
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
43
Main screens 2 FM-1000 Plus application basics
Configuration screen
You can access the Configuration screen from the Home or Run screen.
Note – Some configuration settings are unavailable when a field is open in the Run screen. To access these settings, return to the Run screen and then tap . When prompted to close the field, tap
Close
. Then tap access the Configuration screen.
For each item shown in the configuration list on the Configuration screen, you can: l
Change settings l
View diagnostics l
Save the configuration l
Switch the selected configuration
You can also add or remove features/plugins to perform different operations. See
Activate features/plugins for use (page 60) .
to
44
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
2 FM-1000 Plus application basics
Run screen
You access the Run screen from the Home screen.
Main screens
You can also move between the Run screen and the Configuration screen in some cases.
The Run screen is used during operations and shows your guidance lines and an on-screen representation of your vehicle in the field. The areas of the Run screen include: l
l
l
On-screen lightbar for vehicle (page 360)
l
Optional features/plugins (page 48)
l
Coverage button and information. See
Coverage button for logging (page 360)
.
l
, if applicable
You can navigate from the Run screen to the Configuration screen to: l
Change settings l
View diagnostics l
Save configuration (in some cases)
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
45
On-screen user guide 2 FM-1000 Plus application basics
On-screen user guide
To access the on-screen user guide for the FM-1000 Plus application:
1. Close the FM-1000 Plus application by navigating to the Home screen and tapping
Close
.
Note – If you fail to close FM-1000 Plus application before rebooting, you may experience a loss of data.
2. Go to the
.
3. Tap
.
Note – If automatic steering, spraying, seeding or other services are engaged in FM-1000 Plus application and you go to the Launcher screen without closing the FM-1000 Plus application, the automatic systems will disengage.
46
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
2 FM-1000 Plus application basics System bar
System bar
CAUTION – Do not press on the screen with a sharp object such as a pencil. This could damage the surface of the screen.
The system bar is always available at the bottom of the screen on the FM-1000 Plus application.
Navigation buttons
Navigation buttons in the middle of the bottom display bar enable you to navigate between views.
Button Tap to...
Go to the
Go to the
.
See all views. Tap the view you want to fill the screen.
Emergency button
In the middle of the bottom bar, the Emergency button is displayed at all times. To cancel all functions controlled by the display, tap . This button is useful if you need to quickly disengage an automatic steering system or end application control.
Note – Tapping this button does not turn the vehicle off or stop it. It only cancels display-controlled functions such as automatic steering systems, spraying, seeding and so on.
Screenshot
To capture a screen, tap the camera button
.
on the far right of the bottom display bar. See
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
47
Optional features/plugins 2 FM-1000 Plus application basics
Optional features/plugins
The FM-1000 Plus application has a number of optional features (plugins) you can install to expand its functionality. Most of these features require additional hardware. You must:
1. Purchase the feature.
2. Install any hardware required by the feature.
3. Unlock the feature. See
.
4. Activate the feature for use. See
Activate features/plugins for use (page 60) .
5. Configure the feature.
Vehicle guidance
l
Trimble Autopilot™ automated steering system: See
.
l
Trimble EZ-Pilot™ assisted steering system: See
EZ-Pilot assisted steering system (page 199) .
l
Trimble EZ-Steer® assisted steering system: See
EZ-Steer assisted steering system (page 205) .
l
RG-100 Row Guidance system: Works with the Autopilot system to center the combine on the rows. See
Features for application
l
Trimble Field-IQ™ crop input control system: Control sections and vary application rates. See
Field-IQ system setup (page 218)
and
Field-IQ operation (page 389) .
l
GreenSeeker®: Vary fertilizer rate in real-time using crop vigor measurements. See
GreenSeeker functionality (page 258)
and
GreenSeeker operation (page 422) .
l
Serial Rate Controller: Use a variable rate controller. See
Additional controller setup (page 277)
.
ISOBUS
l
Virtual Terminal: View and use Virtual Terminal. See
Virtual Terminal setup (page 264)
and
Virtual Terminal operation (page 428)
.
l
Task Controller: Use Task Controller. See
Task Controller setup (page 264)
and
Task Controller operation (page 427) .
48
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
2 FM-1000 Plus application basics Optional features/plugins
Implement control
l
Trimble TrueGuide™ implement guidance system: Use guidance on the implement for greater accuracy. See
and
TrueGuide operation (page 437)
.
l
Trimble TrueTracker™ implement steering system: Automatically steer the implement for greater accuracy. See
and
TrueTracker operation (page 439) .
Connectivity
l l
Ag3000 modem: Receive cellular RTK corrections. See
DCM-300 modem: Receive RTK corrections from a VRS
™ a CORS. See
network, a third-party RTK provider or l
Vehicle Sync: Transmit data between vehicles. See
l
Serial Data Input: Enable data input from an external serial device. See
.
l
Remote Output: Enable remote data output to an external device. See
l
EZ-Remote™ Joystick: Control a variety of FM-1000 Plus applicationfunctions remotely. See
EZ-Remote Joystick (page 64) .
Water Management
l
Survey and design: Survey a field and then create a design. See
and
Create / save a design (page 449) .
l
FieldLevel™ II:
Level the field to a design, install subsurface drainage or surface ditches. See
l
Control leveling with two GPS receivers, in one of two possible scraper configurations. See
Tandem / dual scraper setup (page 317)
,
Dual scraper controls (page 462) , and
Tandem scraper controls (page 463) .
l
WM-Drain® farm drainage solution: For subsurface drainage. See
and
.
Harvest
l
Yield Monitoring: Display yield monitoring data. See
Yield Monitoring settings (page 336)
and
Yield Monitoring operation (page 482)
.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
49
Screen shots 2 FM-1000 Plus application basics
Screen shots
To save an image of the FM-1000 Plus application screen, tap screen.
The screenshot is stored: l
On the USB drive under Pictures \ Screenshots l
In the Data Dictionary under Diagnostics \ Screenshots on the bottom left of the
50
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
2 FM-1000 Plus application basics FM-1000 Plus application Passwords
FM-1000 Plus application Passwords
The access and administration passwords apply to the FM-1000 Plus application.
Access password
Any
Setup
or
Calibrate
button marked with a padlock icon is protected by two passwords: l
Administration password: Your password.
l
Master password: A backup password in case you lose the Administration password. If you need the Master password, contact your local reseller.
The password screen displays the first time that you tap a
Setup
or
Calibrate
button after you turn on the FM-1000 Plus application. Use the on-screen keyboard to enter the administration password and then tap
OK
.
Note – Passwords are case sensitive.
Change administration password
Note – To change the Administration password, you need the Master password. If you do not know it, contact your local reseller.
1. If you have not entered the password during the current session, at the Configuration screen tap
Setup
or
Calibrate
.
2. If you have already entered the password during this session, tap button and then tap
Lock
Configuration
. On the Configuration screen tap
Setup
or
Calibrate
.
3. The Enter Administration Password screen displays.
4. Enter an incorrect password. The Wrong Password screen displays.
5. Tap
Enter Master Password
.
6. Enter the master password and then tap
OK
. The Change Administration Password screen displays.
7. Enter your new administration password in both fields. The new administration password is now active.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
51
FM-1000 Plus application Passwords 2 FM-1000 Plus application basics
52
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
Chapter
3
Basic settings
In this chapter:
Activate features/plugins for use
FM-1000 Plus application settings
Languages and units settings for display 92
Basic settings include: l
Upgrades: Upgrading the system firmware or features you have purchased and activated l
Unlocks: Features you purchase are included with a passcode so that you can unlock them on your system.
l
Activation for use: After you have unlocked a feature, you can activate it for use for your operation. You can also deactivate features in order to activate other features for use.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
53
Settings 3 Basic settings
Settings
You can customize and set up many options for both the FM-1000 Plus application and the XCN-
2050 display.
FM-1000 Plus application-specific settings
Some settings are specific to the FM-1000 Plus application only: l
l
l
Field feature mapping settings (page 65)
l
l
Language, measurements, keyboard layout (page 67)
l
l
l
Restore default settings (page 76)
l
Signal input module for OEM switch (page 77)
l
l
FM-1000 Plus application and display settings
Some settings affect both FM-1000 Plus application and the display, including the Launcher screen: l
Languages and units settings for display (page 92)
l
Date and time settings (page 91)
l
l
l
Display-specific settings
Settings in
affect the volume, brightness and sounds from the display.
54
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
3 Basic settings
Upgrades and unlocks
Navigate to these settings to upgrade firmware or unlock features: l
l
Settings
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
55
Unlocks and upgrades 3 Basic settings
Unlocks and upgrades
Unlocks are passcodes you enter to activate a feature or service on the display after you have purchase it.
Upgrades are firmware updates to the existing firmware or feature that you have already activated.
Note – If you are using the XCN-2050 display for the first time, you must first obtain a GPS position for unlocks to become active. If the display was installed indoors, you must move the equipment with the display outside to gain satellite access.
Firmware upgrades
You can upgrade firmware using a USB drive or wirelessly if your configuration includes a DCM-300 modem, subscription to Office Sync and Wi-Fi or data plan.
USB upgrades
Note – Do NOT shut down the system during upgrades. The upgrade process can take at least 10 minutes, depending on your system's configuration. The system will reboot automatically at least once. It can take up to two minutes for the reboot process to be complete.
1. Turn off the display manually by holding the power button down for about two seconds.
2. Tap Shutdown. The display powers off and saves a backup of the database.
3. Power on the display by holding down the power button briefly (about one half of a second).
4. Insert the USB drive in either socket of the XCN-2050 display.
5. At the
Launcher screen (page 39) , tap
.
6. Tap
Firmware Upgrades
.
7. A list displays with the firmware versions available.
8. Choose the version of the firmware package for FM-1000 Plus application and XCN-2050 application you want to upgrade to.
9. Tap the checkmark to continue the upgrade.
Note – Do NOT shut down the system during upgrades. The upgrade process can take at least 10 minutes, depending on your system's configuration. The system will reboot automatically at least once. It can take up to two minutes for the reboot process to be complete.
56
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
3 Basic settings Unlocks and upgrades
Wireless upgrades
Note – Do NOT shut down the system during upgrades. The upgrade process can take at least 10 minutes, depending on your system's configuration. The system will reboot automatically at least once. It can take up to two minutes for the reboot process to be complete.
Note – Wireless upgrades require a DCM-300 modem, a subscription to Office Sync and a data plan or access to WiFi. See
and
1. Tap Shutdown. The display powers off and saves a backup of the database.
2. Power on the display by holding down the power button briefly (about one half of a second).
3. At the
, tap .
4. Tap
Firmware Upgrades
.
5.
Tap Check for Updates
.
6. A list displays with the firmware versions available.
7. Choose the version of the firmware package for FM-1000 Plus application and XCN-2050 application you want to upgrade to.
8. Tap the checkmark to continue the upgrade.
Settings for wireless upgrades
To access display settings, see
Access display settings (page 91)
.
You can control how FM-1000 Plus application checks for upgrades and when to wirelessly download them.
1. Tap Firmware Upgrades.
2. Tap
Settings
.
Setting Explanation
Auto check for new upgrades If you activate this, the system will automatically check for new upgrades.
Auto download new upgrades when available
Auto install firmware on power down
Only download via WiFi
This choice is only available if you have chosen to have the system automatically check for new upgrades. The system will install the updates as they are available.
This choice is only available if you have chosen to have the system automatically check for new upgrades. The system will install the updates before the display powers off.
This choice is only available if you have chosen to have the system automatically check for new upgrades. The system
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
57
Unlocks and upgrades 3 Basic settings
Setting
Show support beta releases in list
Explanation
will download the updates only through a WiFi connection.
The system includes beta releases available for you to download.
Installed packages
To access display settings, see
Access display settings (page 91) .
1. Tap Firmware Upgrades.
2. Tap
Installed Packages
.
Check for updates
To access display settings, see
Access display settings (page 91) .
1. Tap Firmware Upgrades.
2. Tap
Check for Updates
. If you are set up for wireless upgrades the system checks for updates and begins the upgrade process immediately unless you have altered when the upgrade occurs in
Settings.
58
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
3 Basic settings Unlocks and upgrades
Feature unlocks
Note – If you are using the XCN-2050 display for the first time, you must first obtain a GPS position for unlocks to become active. If the display was installed indoors, you must move the equipment with the display outside to gain satellite access.
For some optional features, you must enter the unlock password. If you do not have an unlock password, contact your local reseller.
To access display settings, see
Access display settings (page 91)
.
Tap Feature Unlocks. You can unlock features by manually entering the code, having the display read the QR code of the unlock, or checking for unlocks.
At the bottom of the screen, the list of currently locked features displays.
Manual code entry
1. Tap the Code text box and enter the code.
2. If the system accepts the code, tap Accept.
3. If the system rejects the code, you can try again or contact your reseller for help.
QR code scan
1. Tap
Read QR
.
2. Hold your code image in front of the camera for it to be read.
3. If the system accepts the code, Tap Accept.
4. If the system rejects the code, you can try again or contact your reseller for help.
Check for unlocks
1. Tap
Check for Unlocks
.
2. The request will be sent for the display to check for any available service or licenses. It may take several minutes for the unlocks to be processed.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
59
Activate features/plugins for use 3 Basic settings
Activate features/plugins for use
All features that have been unlocked must be activated (or "added") for use before you can set up or use them.
1. Open the FM-1000 Plus application if you are not already in it.
2. At the Home screen, tap
.
Note – To add or remove features/plugins, you must access the Configuration screen only from the
Home screen.
3. At the Configuration screen, tap
Add/Remove
. The Select Active Plugins screen displays.
4. To use a feature, select it from the
Inactive Plugins list and tap
Add >
.
5. To stop using a feature, select it from the
Active Plugins list and tap
<Remove
.
6. When you are finished with your choices, tap
OK
. The system returns you to the Configuration screen.
60
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
3 Basic settings
FM-1000 Plus application settings
FM-1000 Plus application settings
To complete the settings for the FM-1000 Plus application, at the Configuration screen, select the
System option and then tap
Setup
. The Display Setup screen displays.
If required, enter the administrator password. See
FM-1000 Plus application Passwords (page 51) .
1. At the Configuration screen, tap
System in the list, then tap
Setup
.
2. If necessary, enter the administrator password. See
FM-1000 Plus application Passwords (page
3. The Display Setup screen displays.
4. At this screen, you can navigate to and edit:
l
l
Field feature mapping settings (page 65)
l
l
Language, measurements, keyboard layout (page 67)
l
l
l
l
Signal input module for OEM switch (page 77)
l
that display on the Run screen
You can also return the display to its default settings. See
Restore default settings (page 76) .
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
61
FM-1000 Plus application settings
Data dictionary
For information about data management, see: l
l
Data Dictionary categories (page 112)
l
Create / load a data dictionary (page 113)
3 Basic settings
62
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
3 Basic settings
Data Files
FM-1000 Plus application settings
At the Data Files screen, you can transfer data. See
You can access the Data Files screen from the Display Setup screen as well as from the Home screen.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
63
FM-1000 Plus application settings
EZ-Remote Joystick
3 Basic settings
For installation information, see the EZ-Remote Joystick Quick Reference Card.
If you use the EZ-Remote joystick, you do not need to tap buttons on the display. This improves your accuracy when you select buttons, and gives you faster reaction times. You can program the
EZ-Remote joystick to controls the functions of the FM-1000 Plus application.
Note – The functions available to assign to each button depend on which optional features (plugins) are activated on the display.
1. Connect the EZ-Remote joystick into into a CAN connection on Port A or B of the TM-200
Module. An EZ-Remote joystick icon automatically displays on the Configuration screen.
2. At the Configuration screen, select EZ-Remote and then tap
Setup
. The EZ-Remote Assignment screen displays.
Configure each key for the function you want to control remotely. You can also adjust the brightness of the LED joystick buttons.
3. On the EZ-Remote joystick, press the first button you wish to program. The Function
Assignment screen displays.
4. Tap the feature that you want to program into that button on the control joystick.
5. Tap
Set
and then tap
OK
. The Keypad Assignment screen displays again.
6. Repeat steps 2 through 5 to program more buttons as required.
7. When completed, tap
OK
.
Note – You can configure the EZ-Remote control joystick while operating in a field. From the Run screen, tap and then follow the previous steps.
64
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
3 Basic settings FM-1000 Plus application settings
Field feature mapping settings
A field feature is an item you designate on the display while your in your field to indicate lines (such as fences), areas (such as areas to exclude) and points (such as rocks).
The field feature mapping settings determine: l
What buttons are available on the Mapping Guidance panel of the Run screen for creating features in the field l
The reference point for creating field features (center, left or right of the boom) l
If a path should be recorded when you begin logging coverage l
The types of warnings that can trigger when entering a feature or area l
When to restrict remote output l
How a boundary is recorded
For detailed information, see
Field feature mapping settings (page 148)
.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
65
FM-1000 Plus application settings 3 Basic settings
Guidance settings
Note – If you are setting up the system for the first time, you should not need to adjust these settings.
Setting
Limit Field Selection
Auto Steering Lockout
Explanation
Limits the number of fields that display when you are selecting a field.
l
Yes
: Enables Limit Field Selection. The displayed fields are within the set radius of the vehicle's current location, based on the vehicle's GPS position.
l
No
: Disables Limit Field Selection l
Selection Radius
: Fields that fall within this radius will display. To exclude: l
More fields, enter a smaller number
Fewer fields, enter a larger number
Disables engagement of an automated guidance system until you enable guidance in the Run screen.
l
Yes
: System functions as normal. Auto Guidance Enabled on/off is still allowed.
l
No
: System cannot engage. The Engage button shows as red.
66
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
3 Basic settings FM-1000 Plus application settings
Language, measurements, keyboard layout
Setting
Language Selection
Display Units
Keyboard Layout
Explanation
Same as XCN
: Sets the language for the FM-1000 Plus application to be the same as that of the XCN-2050 display. This is the default settings.
To set the language for the display, see
Languages and units settings for display (page 92) .
FM-1000 Only
: Enables you to set a language for the FM-1000 Plus application that is different from the language set for the XCN-2050 display.
Select the unit of measure for the display: l
Metric l
Feet and Inches (default) l
Decimal Feet
The FM-1000 Plus application uses an on-screen keyboard on the touchscreen. Options for layout: l
ABCDEF
: Letters appear in alphabetical order l
QWERTY
: Layout the same as a computer keyboard (default)
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
67
FM-1000 Plus application settings
Lightbar settings
3 Basic settings
On-screen lightbar
You can edit the default settings for the on-screen (virtual) lightbar.
1. At the Display Setup screen, select
Lightbar
.
2. Tap
Setup
. The Lightbar Configuration screen displays.
3. Tap
Virtual Lightbar and tap
Setup
.
4. Complete the settings as appropriate.
Setting
LED spacing
Display Mode
Explanation
The distance represented by each LED on the lightbar.
a. Tap the appropriate number field.
b. Enter the required values.
Default: 3 cm per LED/1" per LED
How the LEDs respond to offline distances. When “Show error” is selected, the FM-1000 Plus application shows the direction that you need to move in. When
Show correction is selected, the
FM-1000 Plus application shows your current distance offline.
a. From the list, tap the appropriate option.
b. Enter the virtual lightbar settings, then tap
OK
.
c. At the Lightbars Configuration screen, tap
OK
.
Default: show error (chase mode)
68
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
3 Basic settings FM-1000 Plus application settings
External lightbar
To set up the external lightbar:
1. Connect the LB25 lightbar to any available CAN connection on Port A or Port B of the AG-815 integrated radio.
2. At the Display Setup screen, tap
Lightbar
.
3. Tap
Setup
. The Lightbar Configuration screen displays.
4. Tap
Lightbar and tap
Setup
.
5. Complete the settings as appropriate.
Setting
Name
Orientation
Brightness
LED Spacing
Lightbar Purpose
Look ahead time
Explanation
Name and serial number of the lightbar
Choose the orientation of the lightbar
Setting for how bright the lightbar displays
The distance represented by each LED on the lightbar.
a. Tap the appropriate number field.
b. Enter the required values.
Default: 3 cm per LED/1" per LED
Choose the purpose of the lightbar
The distance ahead of the vehicle that the lightbar will use for
LED guidance and offline distance.
Default: 0 seconds
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
69
FM-1000 Plus application settings
Map settings
At the Mapping screen, you can complete settings on these tabs: l
l
3 Basic settings
70
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
3 Basic settings FM-1000 Plus application settings
Main tab
Note – For a new toolbar orientation to take effect, restart the display.
Setting
Map orientation
Explanation
Controls the direction that the screen follows the position of the vehicle.
l
North Up
: When you perform a turn, the field remains stationary and the vehicle turns.
l
Vehicle Up
: When you perform a turn, the field rotates but the vehicle remains pointing up.
Color scheme
Save summaries
Note – To change the map orientation from the Run screen, tap the north arrow.
Default mode l
On
: The FM-1000 Plus application creates a saved file for your work.
l
Off
: The FM-1000 Plus application does not create a saved file for your work.
Track Logging tab
On the
Track Logging tab, you can configure the FM-1000 Plus application to record the vehicle track at either a set time or a set distance. Points along the trck are logged at the greater of the two values
(either logging time or logging distance).
To always log a point based on either of the two values, set the other value to zero. To disable track logging, set both values to zero.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
71
FM-1000 Plus application settings 3 Basic settings
Setting
Distance = 0, Time = 0
Distance = 1+, Time = 0
Track logging is...
Turned off
Recorded by distance (m)
Distance = 0, Time = >1+ Recorded by time (s)
Distance = >1+, Time = >1+ Recorded by whichever setting is higher
Track logging files
Track logging files are created whenever you open an event. The track file records points at the rate set on the
tab. At each point, a number of attributes are recorded.
Note – The data stored in the track logging file (Track3D_<date time>.dbf) is in metric units.
The information stored for each point in the track logging file is listed in the following table.
Column
Along_Line
Units
meters
Ant_HAE
Ant_Lat
Ant_Long
Appln_Wdth
As_Applied
Auto_Steer
Corct_Age
Field_Name
GPS_Status
Ground_HAE
HDOP
Heading
Description
Along line distance from start of swath.
Attribute Not Populated
Antenna height above ellipsoid.
Attribute Not Populated.
Antenna latitude (WGS-84).
Antenna longitude (WGS-84).
Application width.
Applied rate. Attribute Not Populated
Auto-Steer flag (1=on, 0=off).
DGPS signal correction age.
The name of the field.
GPS status value (NMEA).
Ground height above ellipsoid.
Attribute Not Populated
Horizontal Dilution of Precision – A measure of the quality of positions based on satellite geometry.
Direction of travel with respect to true North.
meters
DD.dddddddd
DD.dddddddd
meters
–
On or off seconds
–
1, 2, 5, 4 meters
– decimal degrees
72
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
3 Basic settings
Column
Height
Local_Time
Logging_On
Num_Stats
Offline
Pitch
Relative_Height
Roll
Speed
Status_Text
Swath_Num
Swath_Wdth
Target
Total_Qty
Units
UTC_Date
UTC_Time
Version
Yaw
FM-1000 Plus application settings
Description
Mean sea level height of ground.
Local time.
Coverage logging flag (1=on, 0=off).
Number of GPS satellites.
Offline distance from swath center line.
The pitch. Attribute Not Populated
Units
meters hh:mm:ss.s
On or off
– meters
–
Height.
The roll. Attribute Not Populated
GPS-derived ground speed.
GPS status description.
meters
– kph
–
Current swath/headland number.
Swath width.
The target rate at the current position.
Total volume of material as applied for the current field. Only supported for the Aerial Flow
Controller, Autocal Flow controller, and
Crophawk Flow Meter.
– meters
–
Units.
Attribute Not Populated metric
Point creation date.
UTC time.
Track attribute file version.
The yaw. Attribute Not Populated
–
–
YYYYMMDD hh:mm:ss.s
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
73
FM-1000 Plus application settings 3 Basic settings
Port settings
The Port Setup screen displays information about: l
Receiver connection status l
The TM-200 Module serial number l
The serial number of the AG-815 integrated radio, if connected
To configure your system:
1. Connect hardware. See the XCN-2050 Cabling Guide.
2.
the primary USB port and the EXP-100(s) in the Port Setup screen.
3. Complete port information for each optional feature/plugin as you set it up.
Assignments
1. Choose which EXP-100 is used as primary, secondary and tertiary.
2. Assign which USB port of the XCN-2050 display should be used to transfer data to a USB drive.
Setting
EXP-100 #1
EXP-100 #2
Receiver EXP-100 or AG-815 integrated radio
(This label changes, depending on your configuration)
Choose the serial number of the...
Primary EXP-100
Note – Typically used for SerialVR or external receivers.
Equivalent to Port A or Port B on a physical FM-1000 integrated display.
Secondary EXP-100
Note – Typically used for SerialVR or external receivers.
Equivalent to Port A or Port B on a physical FM-1000 integrated display.
EXP-100 (third port expander cable)
Note – Used to assign GNSS-2 or external radios. Typically used for TrueTracker. Equivalent to Port D on a physical FM-
1000 integrated display.
74
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
3 Basic settings FM-1000 Plus application settings
Configuration principles
Use these rules to configure the settings of your configuration.
l
Any serial connection requires an EXP-100. You can connect up to three EXP-100s together.
However, port A of the TM-200 Module is used for Autopilot.
l
For CAN connections, two CAN ports are available on the TM-200 Module. The EZ-Steer system and EZ-Pilot system use Port B on the TM-200 Module.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
75
FM-1000 Plus application settings 3 Basic settings
Restore default settings
Note – These default settings for the FM-1000 Plus application are different from the
settings for the XCN-2050 display.
You can reset the FM-1000 Plus application to its default values. This can be useful if: l
You made changes to the display settings. The results are poor, but you cannot determine which setting was the cause.
l
You move the display from one vehicle to another.
Note – If you restore the defaults, the Autopilot vehicle setup information is not reset.
To restore the default settings:
1. At the Configuration screen, select the screen displays.
2. Tap
Default
. A confirmation screen displays.
System option and then tap
Setup
. The Display Setup
3. Tap
Yes
. The default settings are restored.
76
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
3 Basic settings
Signal input module for OEM switch
FM-1000 Plus application settings
The signal input module (SIM) can interface with existing equipment inputs to control on-screen buttons and features. A SIM must be connected to assign features to the buttons.
1. To assign the buttons, highlight the action in the
Actions list.
2. Tap
<-- Set
to set the action to the specified input.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
77
FM-1000 Plus application settings
Sounds
The ways sounds can be produced are: l l
Through the internal speaker of the FM-1000 Plus application
If Autopilot is part of your configration, you can use an exernal Sonalert
1. At the Display Setup screen, select
Sounds and tap setup.
2. Complete the settings and tap
OK
.
Setting
Alarm
Warning
Track Logging
Touch Screen
Explanation
Off, External Speaker, AP Sonalert.
Note – Sonalert works only with Autopilot.
Off, External Speaker, AP Sonalert.
Note – Sonalert works only with Autopilot.
Off, External Speaker
Both high, Off, External low
3 Basic settings
78
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
3 Basic settings
Status items
FM-1000 Plus application settings
The status items are features you have activated for use. See
Activate features/plugins for use (page
. If a feature is deactivated, the status items associated with it are no longer available.
The Select Status Items screen has two tabs where you can configure various FM-1000 Plus application options for the status text items.
Run screen slide-out status
On the
Run Screen tab, you can set what items display on the Run screen in the status slide-out panel when you tap the edge of the panel. The status text items appropriate for the features/plugins you are currently using display in the Info Items list.
1. Set the upper left status text item: a. From the
Info Items list, tap the item you want to use.
b. Tap the left
^ Set Item
button. The information displays in the upper left field.
2. Set the upper right status text item: a. From the
Info Items list, tap the item you want to use.
b. Tap the right
^ Set Item
button. The information displays in the upper right field.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
79
FM-1000 Plus application settings 3 Basic settings
3. From the
Timeout list, select a time. This is how long the tab remains on-screen before retracting.
To have the tab extended until you close it manually, select
Never
.
4. To add status items to the slide-out tab: a. Tap the position on the tab that you want to fill. For example, to add an item to the first position on the list, tap at the location shown.
b. From the
Info Items list, tap the item you want to use.
c. Tap
<- Set Item
.
5. To save the configuration, tap
OK
.
Info screen
On the
Info Screen tab, you can determine which items will be displayed on the Info panel when you tap .
The status text items appropriate for the features/plugins you are currently using display in the
Info
Screen list.
1. Set the left Info text items: a. From the
Info Items list, tap the item you want to use.
b. Tap the left
^ Set Item
button.
c. Repeat steps a and b until you have all the items you want, or the list is full. The information displays in the left field.
2. Set the right Info text items: a. From the
Info Items list, tap the item you want to use.
b. Tap the right
^ Set Item
button.
c. Repeat steps a and b until you have all the items you require, or the list is full. The information displays in the right field.
3. To save the configuration, tap
OK
.
Status option list
The following list shows the status items you can choose to display on the Run screen. The status items available depend on the optional features/plugins that are currently activated.
In the Display Setup screen, select
Status Items
and then tap
Setup
.
Status Item
(blank)
Along Track Error
Explanation
Status text item is not shown
80
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
3 Basic settings FM-1000 Plus application settings
Status Item
Altitude
Applied Rate
Area to Empty
Auxiliary Valve
Available Memory
Average Population
Avg Seed Spacing
Blade Height
Boot Depth
CH1 - CH4 Product Level
Client Name
CMR Percent
Control Speed
Correction Age
Correction Type
Coverage Percent
Current Flow
Cut/Fill
Design Height
Explanation
Current height of the vehicle
Current application rate
Area that can still be applied before the tank is empty
Current status of the auxiliary valve
Amount of free space on the display's internal memory
Average rate across all rows
Average distance between seeds based on the average sample size
Current height of the blade
Depth of the boot when installing tiles or the depth of the blade when cleaning surface ditches (used with the Autoslope leveling model)
Current level of the products that are in channels 1-4
Name of the current client
Percentage of radio CMR packets received over the last 100 seconds
Speed reported to the multi-application controller
Length of time since the last correction was received
Correction type that is being used
Percentage of the field area that is covered area
Current flow of material
Difference between the Blade Height and the Target Height: l
When Cut is shown, the current ground height is above the target height. The height adjustment indicator shows a red down arrow, which means that the blade needs to move down to reach the Target Height.
l
When Fill is shown, the current ground height is below the target height. The height adjustment indicator shows a red up arrow, which means that the blade needs to move up to reach the Target Height.
Height the blade will attempt to reach. This is the Design Height ± the Offset. When the blade reaches the Target Height, the arrows turn green.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
81
FM-1000 Plus application settings 3 Basic settings
Status Item
Design Slope
Dist to Feature
Dist to Pause
East
Engaged Time
Event Coverage Area
Event Coverage Distance
Event Coverage Time
Event Name
Farm Name
Field Area
Field Name
Free External Storage
Free Internal Storage
GMT Time
GPS Position Spacing
GPS Status
H Error
Heading
Heading to Feature
Heading to Pause
Impl. Altitude
Impl. CMR Percent
Explanation
When using the Autoslope leveling model, this displays the design slope with respect to the current location along the section line.
Distance to the nearest feature
Distance to the pause position
Distance that the vehicle is to the east of the field origin point (a negative number means the vehicle is to the west of the field origin point)
Length of time that the system has been engaged
Area that has been logged during the current event
Distance covered while logging during the current event
Length of time that coverage logging has been engaged during the current event
Name of the current event
Name of the current farm
Field area within a pivot or headland boundary
Name of the current field
Amount of free space on the USB drive
Amount of free space on the display's internal memory
Current Greenwich Mean Time
GPS correction type that the GPS receiver is currently using
Horizontal error:An estimation of the level of precision of the GPS position in 2 dimensions
Current heading of the vehicle, in degrees, from direct north
Vehicle location relative to the nearest feature (feature is directly ahead = 0°; directly behind = 180°)
Direction vehicle is facing relative to the paused vehicle position
(directly ahead = 0°; directly behind = 180°)
Current height of the implement
Percentage of radio CMR packets received by the implement GPS
82
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
3 Basic settings
Status Item
Impl. Correction Age
Impl. Correction Type
Impl. East
Impl. Engaged Time
Impl. GPS Status
Impl. H Error
Impl. HDOP
Impl. Heading
Impl. Latitude
Impl. Long-Term XTE
Impl. Longitude
Impl. Network ID
Impl. North
Impl. Nudge/Trim
Impl. Offline Dist
Impl. Satellites
Impl. Short-term XTE
Impl. Speed
FM-1000 Plus application settings
Explanation
receiver over the last 100 seconds
Age of the corrections used by the implement receiver
Correction type used by the implement receiver
Distance that the implement is to the east of the field origin point (a negative number means the implement is to the west of the field origin point)
Time that the implement has been engaged
The status of the GPS correction used for the implement
Implement horizontal error: An estimation of the level of precision of the implement GPS position in 2 dimensions
Horizontal Dilution of Precision of the implement receiver: A measure of accuracy based on the geometry of the satellites in the sky.
If the satellites are near each other in the sky, the HDOP is higher
(lower is better).
Current heading of the implement, in degrees, from direct north
Implement's current latitude
Implement Cross Track Error (XTE) when passes occur more than one hour apart
Implement's current longitude
RTK network ID of the implement receiver's corrections
Distance that the implement is to the north of the field origin point
(a negative number means the implement is to the south of the field origin point)
Amount of nudge or trim currently applied to the implement position
Distance away from the guidance line
Number of satellites the implement receiver is reading
Implement pass-to-pass Cross Track Error (XTE) when passes occur within less than 15 minutes
Current implement speed
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
83
Impl. Vehicle Model
Implement
Implement F/B Offset
Implement L/R Offset
Implement Width
Latitude
Line Feature Length
Local Time
Long-term XTE
Longitude
Longitude
NDVI
Nearest Point Name
Network ID
Network Status
North
FM-1000 Plus application settings
Status Item
Impl. Steering Angle
Impl. Up
Nudge
Nudge/Trim
Offline Dist.
Offset X
Offset Y
P Altitude
3 Basic settings
Explanation
Steering angle of the implement
Vertical height of the implement relative to the field origin point (a negative number means the implement is lower than the field origin point)
Implement profile name
Name of the current implement
Distance of front to back offset
Distance of left to right offset
Width of the implement
Vehicle's current latitude
Length of the current line feature
Current local time
Vehicle Cross Track Error (XTE) when passes occur more than one hour apart.
Vehicle's current longitude
Vehicle's current longitude
Normalized Difference Vegetation Index
Bame of the nearest point feature
RTK network ID of the GPS receiver's corrections
Current status of the wireless cellular network
Distance that the vehicle is to the north of the field origin point (a negative number means the vehicle is to the south of the field origin point)
Amount of nudge currently applied
Amount of nudge or trim currently applied
Distance away from the guidance line
Relative Position X offset from the master benchmark
Relative Position Y offset from the master benchmark
Current height of the vehicle as reported by the primary blade GPS
84
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
3 Basic settings
Status Item
P Blade Height
P Boot Depth
P CMR Percent
P Correction Age
P Correction Type
P Cut/Fill
P Design Height
P Design Slope
P Distance Traveled
P East
P GPS Status
P H Error
FM-1000 Plus application settings
Explanation
receiver
Current height of the primary blade
Depth of the boot when installing tiles or the depth of the blade when cleaning surface ditches (used with the Autoslope leveling model)
Percentage of radio CMR packets received over the last 100 seconds by the primary blade GPS receiver
Time since the GPS corrections were last received from the primary
FieldLevel™ GPS receiver
Correction type used by the primary blade receiver
Difference between the Primary Blade Height and the Primary
Target Height: l
When Cut is shown, the current ground height is above the target height. The height adjustment indicator shows a red down arrow, which means that the blade needs to move down to reach the Target Height.
l
When fill is shown, the current ground height is below the target height. The height adjustment indicator shows a red up arrow, which means that the blade needs to move up to reach the Target Height.
Height the primary blade will attempt to reach. This is the Design
Height ± the Offset. When the blade reaches the Target Height, the arrows turn green.
When using the Autoslope leveling model, this displays the design slope with respect to the current location along the section line.
Distance traveled since Auto mode was enabled. (For use with
FieldLevel II Point to Slope mode). The d
Distance that the primary blade receiver is to the east of the field origin point (a negative number means the receiver is to the west of the field origin point)
GPS correction type that the primary blade GPS receiver is currently using
(Horizontal error) An estimation of the level of precision of the primary blade GPS position in 2 dimensions
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
85
FM-1000 Plus application settings 3 Basic settings
Status Item
P HDOP
P Heading
P Latitude
P Longitude
P Network ID
P North
P Offset
P Offset X
P Offset Y
P Satellites
P Section Line Number
P Speed
P Target Height
P Up
P VDOP
P Vertical Error Estimate
Pressure
Explanation
Horizontal Dilution of Precision of the primary blade receiver: A measure of accuracy based on the geometry of the satellites in the sky. If the satellites are near each other in the sky, the HDOP is higher (lower is better).
Current heading of the primary blade, in degrees, from direct north
Primary blade's current latitude
Primary blade's current longitude
RTK network ID of the primary blade receiver's corrections
Distance that the primary blade receiver is to the north of the field origin point (a negative number means the receiver is to the south of the field origin point)
Separate plane that is parallel to the design plane. The offset if defined by a single measurement, which is the height that the offset plane is from the design plane.
Relative Position X offset from the master benchmark
Relative Position Y offset from the master benchmark
Number of satellites the system is currently being received by the
FieldLevel II GPS receiver
Line number of the primary blade
Speed of the vehicle as reported by the primary blade GPS receiver
Height the primary blade will attempt to reach. This is the Design
Height ± the Offset. When the blade reaches the Target Height, the arrows turn green.
Height of the primary blade receiver relative to the field origin point
(a negative number means the blade is lower than the field origin point)
Vertical Dilution of Precision of the FieldLevel II GPS receiver: A measure of accuracy based on the geometry of the satellites in the sky. If the satellites are near each other in the sky, the VDOP is higher (lower is better).
Current estimate of error in the height calculated by the FieldLevel II
GPS receiver
Current pressure as reported by the primary pressure sensor
86
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
3 Basic settings
Status Item
Productive Area
Radio Signal Strength
S Altitude
S Blade Height
S CMR Percent
S Correction Age
S Correction Type
S Cut/Fill
S Design Height
S Distance Traveled
S East
S GPS Status
S H Error
S HDOP
FM-1000 Plus application settings
Explanation
Area of Area Features that are designated as "productive"
DCM-300 wireless signal strength
Current height of the vehicle as reported by the secondary blade
GPS receiver
Current height of the secondary blade
Percentage of radio CMR packets received over the last 100 seconds by the secondary blade GPS receiver
Time since the GPS corrections were last received from the secondary FieldLEvel GPS receiver
Correction type used by the secondary blade receiver
Difference between the Secondary Blade Height and the Secondary
Target Height: l
When Cut is shown, the current ground height is above the target height. The height adjustment indicator shows a red down arrow, which means that the blade needs to move down to reach the Target Height.
l
When Fill is shown, the current ground height is below the target height. The height adjustment indicator shows a red up arrow, which means that the blade needs to move up to reach the Target Height.
Height the secondary blade will attempt to reach. This is the Design
Height ± the Offset. When the blade reaches the Target Height, the arrows turn green.
Distance traveled since Auto mode was enabled (for use with
FieldLevel II Point to Slope mode)
Distance that the secondary blade receiver is to the east of the field origin point (a negative number means the receiver is to the west of the field origin point)
GPS correction type that the secondary blade GPS receiver is currently using
(Horizontal error) Estimation of the level of precision of the secondary blade GPS position in 2 dimensions
Horizontal Dilution of Precision of the secondary blade receiver: A measure of accuracy based on the geometry of the satellites in the
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
87
FM-1000 Plus application settings 3 Basic settings
Status Item
S Heading
S Latitude
S Longitude
S Network ID
S North
S Offset
S Offset X
S Offset Y
S Satellites
S Section Line Number
S Speed
S Target Height
S Up
S VDOP
S Vertical Error Estimate
Satellites
Explanation
sky. If the satellites are near each other in the sky, the HDOP is higher (lower is better).
Current heading of the secondary blade, in degrees, from direct north
Secondary blade's current latitude
Secondary blade's current longitude
RTK network ID of the secondary blade receiver's corrections
Distance that the secondary blade receiver is to the north of the field origin point (a negative number means the receiver is to the south of the field origin point)
Separate plane that is parallel to the design plane. The offset if defined by a single measurement, which is the height that the offset plane is from the design plane.
Relative Position X offset from the master benchmark
Relative Position Y offset from the master benchmark
Number of satellites the system is currently being received by the
FieldLevel II GPS receiver
Line number of the secondary blade
Speed of the vehicle as reported by the secondary blade GPS receiver
Height the secondary blade will attempt to reach. This is the Design
Height ± the Offset. When the blade reaches the Target Height, the arrows turn green.
Height of the secondary blade receiver relative to the field origin point (a negative number means the blade is lower than the field origin point)
Vertical Dilution of Precision of the FieldLevel II GPS receiver: A measure of accuracy based on the geometry of the satellites in the sky. If the satellites are near each other in the sky, the VDOP is higher (lower is better).
Current estimate of error in the height calculated by the FieldLevel II
GPS receiver
Number of satellites the system is currently receiving
88
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
3 Basic settings FM-1000 Plus application settings
Status Item
Secondary Pressure
Section Line Number
Seed Mults %
Seed Population
Seed Singulation
Seed Skips %
Seed Spacing
Session Coverage Area
Session Coverage Dist
Session Coverage Time
Session Time
Short-term XTE
Speed
Steering Angle
Survey Area
Survey Cut/Fill
Survey Points
Swath Length
Explanation
Current pressure, as reported by the secondary pressure sensor
Number of the current section line
Percentage of time an more than one seed is placed for every intended drop
Amount of seed planted per acre/hectare
Percentage of time an individual seed is placed for every intended drop
Percentage of seed that has not been planted
Percentage of seed that has been applied in the specified spacing
Area that has been logged during the current session
Distance covered while logging during the current session
Length of time that coverage logging has been engaged during the current session
Length of the current field session
Vehicle pass-to-pass Cross Track Error (XTE) when passes occur within less than 15 minutes
Current vehicle speed
Angle reported by the rotary potentiomenter or the AutoSense™ device
Total area of the current survey
Difference between the Blade Height and the Target Height: l
When Cut is shown, the current ground height is above the target height. The height adjustment indicator shows a red down arrow, which means that the blade needs to move down to reach the Target Height.
l
When Fill is shown, the current ground height is below the target height. The height adjustment indicator shows a red up arrow, which means that the blade needs to move up to reach the Target Height.
Number of survey points that have been created
Length of the current guidance line
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
89
FM-1000 Plus application settings
Status Item
Swath Number
Swath Points
Tank Level
Tank Level N
Tank Level NH3
Tank/Bin Level
Target Rate
Total Boundaries Area
Total Seed Rate
Total Vol Applied
Total Vol Applied N
Total Vol Applied NH3
Transfer Status
TrueGuide Roll
TrueGuide Trim
Up
VDOP
Vehicle Model
Vehicle Type
Vertical Error Estimate
3 Basic settings
Explanation
Note – FreeForm™ curves are made up of line segments, so the Swath
Length value is not appropriate for FreeForm curves.
Swath number (L = left, R = right)
Note – FreeForm curves are made up of line segments, so the Swath
Number value is not appropriate for FreeForm curves.
The number of points that define the current line.
Current level of the tank
Level of nitrogen currently in the tank
Level of anhydrous ammonia currently in the tank
Current level of the tank or bin
Application target rate
Total area between the current boundaries
Total seed rate that is currently being applied
Total volume of material applied
Total volume of nitrogen applied
Total volume of anhydrous ammonia applied
Connected Farm™ transfer activity
Roll corrections in degrees that are applied
Distance from the guidance line that the vehicle has been shifted
Vertical height of the vehicle relative to the field origin point (a negative number means the vehicle is lower than the field origin point)
Vertical Dilution of Precision of the FieldLevel II GPS receiver: A measure of accuracy based on the geometry of the satellites in the sky.
If the satellites are near each other in the sky, the VDOP is higher
(lower is better).
Model of vehicle that is configured
Type of vehicle that is configured
Current estimate of error in the height calculated by the FieldLevel II
GPS receiver
90
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
3 Basic settings Display settings
Display settings
Most of the display settings affect the XCN-2050 display and the FM-1000 Plus application.
Access display settings
You can access settings for the XCN-2050 display from the: l
l
Shortcut
You can access XCN-2050 display settings only using a shortcut.
1. Navigate to the
and tap
Close
to close the FM-1000 Plus application.
Note – If you fail to close FM-1000 Plus application before rebooting, you may experience a loss of data.
2. At the upper right of the display screen, swipe down.
3. Tap .
4. Tap
.
Launcher screen
You can access XCN-2050 display settings only from the
1. Navigate to the
and tap
Close
to close the FM-1000 Plus application.
Note – If you fail to close FM-1000 Plus application before rebooting, you may experience a loss of data.
2. Tap
3. Tap
.
to navigate to the
Note – If you have an automatic steering system that is currently engaged, before you go to the Launcher screen, the steering system will disengage.
Date and time settings
The time and date for the display and the FM-1000 Plus application is automatically obtained from the GNSS receiver in the TM-200 Module.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
91
Languages and units settings for display 3 Basic settings
Setting
Automatic date and time
Set date
Set time
Select time zone
Use 24-hour format
Select date format
Tap to...
Turn on or off. If you choose to use the automatic date and time, the Set date and Set time controls are disabled. The display then obtains time and date from the GNSS receiver in the TM-200
Module.
Choose the current date. Scroll in the month, date and year columns.
Choose the current time. Scroll in the hour, minute and AM/PM columns.
Choose time zone. Scroll the list of time zones and tap the time zone that applies to you.
You must set the time zone. The system does not automatically set this.
Turn on or off.
Choose the date format you want to see on the screen. Options are: MM/dd/YYYY, dd/MM, YYYY/MM/dd.
See
Access display settings (page 91) .
Languages and units settings for display
At this settings page, you can set for the XCN-2050 display (such as the
l
The language l
The type of units of measure l
Whether the password entry is always obscured or delayed from being obscured
Setting
Languages
Display Units
Number Format
Tap to view or choose...
The language for the display.
Scroll the list and tap the language you want.
The type of units you want on the display: English or Metric
Either commas or periods.
You can choose to have a different language on the FM-1000 Plus application from that on the XCN-
2050 display. See
Language, measurements, keyboard layout (page 67) .
See
Access display settings (page 91) .
92
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
3 Basic settings Users and passwords
Users and passwords
User profiles and passwords are system-wide, meaning they are active for the FM-1000 Plus application and XCN-2050 application as well as other Trimble applications.
Setting
Enable Operators
Add User
(Existing user name)
Tap to...
Turn this feature on to use operator login.
Add a user
Edit the user profile
See
Access display settings (page 91) .
Add a user
1. Tap
Add User
.
2. Enter the Operator ID.
3. Enter and confirm the user's password.
4. Tap
Create User
.
Take a photo of a user
You can capture a photo of the user, which will display: l
Next to the user's information in the Users and passwords section of Settings l
On the top display bar when the user is logged in
1. At the Users and passwords section, Tap the user icon on the right of the user information.
2. The camera activates and displays a frame on the screen. Make sure the user's face is contained within this frame.
3. To capture the photo, tap
Capture
. The photo displays on the lower right. You can continue to tap
Capture
until you are satisfied with the photo.
4. When you are ready to save the photo, tap
Done
.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
93
Wi-Fi settings 3 Basic settings
Wi-Fi settings
With a DCM-300 modem and additional subscription services, Wi-Fi enables you to transfer data wirelessly from: l
Vehicle to office using Office Sync l
Vehicle to vehicle using Vehicle Sync
You can use Wi-Fi in addition to or instead of the cellular network.
At Wi-Fi network settings, turn on Wi-Fi.
Note – Before you can configure Wi-Fi settings in the FM-1000 Plus application, you must turn this setting on for Wi-Fi to operate properly.
At Available Networks, tap
Refresh
to scan for additional networks you can connect to.
For content on:
Diagnostics and status
See:
Restore defaults
During troubleshooting, you may be asked by Support to perform a reset.
See
Access display settings (page 91) .
Admin User Options
Setting
Restore Default user
Preferences
Restore Preferences to
Factory Defaults
Tap to...
Restore the default preferences for the user currently logged in.
Factory Reset
Restore the display to default factory settings. Erases all custom settings for all user accounts for FM-1000 Plus application and XCN-
2050 application.
Erase all user accounts, system and application data, coverage, configurations, feature unlocks, minor firmware updates and downloaded applications.
Note – Only perform a factory reset on the advice of technical support.
94
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
Chapter
4
Data management
In this chapter:
This chapter explains: l
How to transfer data between a USB drive and the FM-1000 Plus application l
The structure of data on the USB and computer l
The Data Dictionary
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
95
Managing data 4 Data management
Managing data
As part of data management, you can: l
Transfer files. See
l
Delete files. See
.
l
Edit and add to the data entry categories by editing the data dictionary. See
Data Dictionary categories (page 112)
.
l
Create or load a data dictionary. See
Create / load a data dictionary (page 113)
.
l
View a PDF file of an event summary. See
.
l
Import an AB line or boundary. See
Import AB Lines or boundaries (page 380) .
l
Save an Autopilot system vehicle configuration file (.vdb). See
Save vehicle profile (page 186) .
Files generated by the FM-1000 Plus application are saved in a specific structure on the USB drive.
See
Data storage structure (page 101) .
Transfer data
At the Data Files screen, you can: l
Transfer data between a USB drive and the display's internal storage. See
or
l
Transfer data between a USB drive and a computer. See
.
l
Delete data from a USB drive or the display's internal storage. See
.
Data Files screen
You can access the Data Files screen from either:
96
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
4 Data management Transfer data l
The Home screen: Tap
Data Files
.
l
The
Configuration
screen: a. At the Home screen, tap
.
b. At the Configuration screen, tap
System and then tap
Setup
.
c. If necessary, enter the administration password and then tap
OK
.
d. Select
Data Files from the list and then tap
Manage
. The Data Files screen displays.
Data File categories
The categories available on the Data Files screen are:
Category
Summary Files
Diagnostics
Configuration
Data Dictionary
Field Data
Subcategories and data
PDF summary files listed under client name
Screen shots: Folder containing screen captures
System logs
Features:
Implements:
System Archive:
Varieties:
Vehicle Archive:
Data dictionary. See
Data Dictionary categories (page 112)
Data for all activities in the field. Data is structured as:
Client / Farm / Field / Event
Transfer to USB
CAUTION – Do not remove the USB drive from the socket while the application is copying data. This will corrupt the data.
CAUTION – POTENTIAL LOSS OF DATA!
If you copy files from:
- An FM-1000 Plus application to another or to an FM-1000 integrated display.
- An physical FM-1000 integrated display to another or to an FM-1000 Plus application
First make sure you have created a subfolder labeled with the display serial number for your files. Transfer your files to this subfolder. Otherwise, you will overwrite files when you copy and you will corrupt your data.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
97
Transfer data 4 Data management
1. At the Data Files screen from the display's
Internal Storage list, tap the item to copy. You can:
Select all files in the category: Select the entire category by tapping the category name.
l
Select individual files: See files within a category by tapping . The arrow changes to a down arrow and shows the files stored under the category. Then select the file or files you want.
l
Select all files: Select
Everything
.
2. Tap
Copy >
. The item is copied to the
USB list.
Transfer from USB
CAUTION – Do not remove the USB drive from the socket while the application is copying data. This will corrupt the data.
CAUTION – POTENTIAL LOSS OF DATA!
If you copy files from:
- An FM-1000 Plus application to another or to an FM-1000 integrated display.
- An physical FM-1000 integrated display to another or to an FM-1000 Plus application
First make sure you have created a subfolder labeled with the display serial number for your files. Transfer your files to this subfolder. Otherwise, you will overwrite files when you copy and you will corrupt your data.
USB to FM-1000 Plus application
1. At the Data Files screen from the
USB list, tap the item to copy. You can:
Select all files in the category: Select the entire category by tapping the category name.
l
Select individual files: See files within a category by tapping . The arrow changes to a down arrow and shows the files stored under the category. Then select the file or files you want.
l
Select all files: Select
Everything
.
2. Tap
Copy >
. The item is copied to the
Internal Storage list.
USB to computer
After you have transferred data from the FM-1000 Plus application to the USB:
1. Remove the USB drive from the display.
2. Insert the USB drive into your computer.
98
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
4 Data management Delete data
If you place the files in a series of folders, the combined filename and folder path may become too long and the operating system may not allow you to open the files. To avoid this, it is recommended that you place data in your computer’s
C:\ folder.
3. Copy the appropriate folder to the office computer using an application such as Windows
®
Explorer. This copies all the sub-folders and files in the folder.
Note – When you copy or move files using Windows Explorer, you must keep all the shape-files (.dbf,
.shp, and .shx) together so that office software can open the theme file. To ensure that the files stay together, always copy the entire folder rather than just the individual files.
4. If you create a new event in a field, and you already have the
\Field\ folder containing any previous events on the office computer, you should still copy the
\Field\ folder so that the new
EventHistory information is copied.
Delete data
CAUTION – Deleting data is permanent. You cannot undo the deletion or restore the data.
If you need to create more space, you can use the FM-1000 Plus application to delete from the FM-
1000 Plus application internal memory or the USB drive: l
Clients l
Farms l
Fields l
Events
Note – You cannot undo data deletion or restore the data.
1. At the Data Files screen, tap
Delete Data
. The Delete Data Storage screen displays.
2. If you want to delete from:
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
99
Delete data 4 Data management
The internal memory of the FM-1000 Plus application: Tap the
Internal tab.
l
The USB drive: Tap the
3. To delete a specific item from the FM-1000 Plus application: a. In the lists for Client, Farm, Field or Event, tap the item you want to delete.
b. Tap
Delete
.
USB Drive tab.
c. To exit the Delete Data Storage screen, tap
OK
.
4. To delete all materials from the FM-1000 Plus application:
5. To delete all events from the FM-1000 Plus application: a. Tap
Delete All Events
.
b. Enter the administration password.
6. To delete all files from the FM-1000 Plus application: a. Tap
Delete EVERYTHING
.
b. Enter the administration password.
7. The system displays a message asking you to confirm the deletion. If you want to proceed, tap
Yes
.
100
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
4 Data management Data storage structure
Data storage structure
The FM-1000 Plus application stores client, farm, field, and event data in a specific structure on the computer and USB drive. The first level folder is AgGPS.
Depending on your system configuration and the operations you perform, the top level folders of the structure are: l
l
l
l
l
Data Dictionary folder (page 109)
l
l
Prescriptions folder (page 110)
l
l
Column
Area
Date
Dist1
Dist2
ID
Length
AB Lines folder
There is one set of boundary and AB Line shapes for each field: l
Boundary.* - Fields with boundaries include a boundary polygon stored in the boundary.shp
file. Fields without boundaries do not contain a boundary file.
l
Swath.* - For fields with boundaries, AB polylines are stored in the swath.shp file.
Note – Units are always metric in files created by the FM-1000 Plus application.
The following is stored in the boundary and AB line attribute files.
Field Description
Field area (Boundary area)
Date the field was created
Format
ha
YYYYMMDD
AB Line number ID
Length of the AB Line meters
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
101
Data storage structure 4 Data management
Column
Name
Perimeter
Field Description
Name assigned to the AB Line
Field perimeter distance (Boundary only)
Format
meters
The size of the field is not defined unless a field has a boundary. Therefore, the %_Complete in the
EventHistory.dbf file is always zero for fields without boundaries
Note – If you browse the .dbf files using an Excel spreadsheet, date fields may appear in a different format, depending on your local settings.Unless a field has a boundary, the size of the field is not defined. Therefore, for fields without boundaries the %_Complete in the EventHistory.dbf file is always zero.
Archives folder
When the ProgramLog.txt file becomes larger than 1024 KB, it is backed up to a file named
ProgramLog.old and stored in the Archives folder.
Autopilot folder
The Autopilot folder contains the following subfolders: l
Configuration l
Custom Vehicle Configurations l
VDB l
Vehicle Database
Data folder
The data folder contains the client subfolder and all subsequent subfolders related to the client.
Client subfolder
The client is the customer for whom the work is being done. This folder contains at least one Farm subfolder for each client.
Farm subfolder
A farm is a collection of fields. This folder contains at least one Field subfolder related to each farm.
Field subfolder
You create an on-screen field to represent an actual field, part of an actual field, or a group of more than one actual fields.
102
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
4 Data management Data storage structure
This folder contains an Event subfolder for each event performed on the field as well as the following files:
Data
Field AB Line
Field Boundary
Coordinates
Paused Files
Event history
Point
Line
Area
Explanation
Boundary and/or AB Line polylines
Polygon (Only available if the field is a headland field and therefore has a boundary)
Files
Swaths.shp
Swaths.dbf
Swaths.shx
Boundary.shp
Boundary.dbf
Boundary.shx
Contains coordinates of the field boundary file
Information regarding guidance being paused
Information about each event carried out in the field
<Latitude Longitude Altitude>.pos
Attribute ID and latitude, longitude, and height
Version / Client / Farm / Field /
Event / Operator / Material /
Date Open / Time Open /
Date Close / Time Close / Duration /
Primary AB / ABLine / Cover Area /
Cover Distance / Cover Time / Engage
Time
PointFeature.shp
PointFeature.dbf
PointFeature.shx
Line with attribute ID LineFeature.shp
LineFeature.dbf
LineFeature.shx
Area polygons with attribute ID AreaFeature.shp
AreaFeature.dbf
AreaFeature.shx
Event History file
The EventHistory.dbf file contains information on every event carried out in the field.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
103
Data storage structure 4 Data management
Data
ABLine
Client
Cover area
Cover distance
Cover time
Date close
Date open
Duration
Engage time
Event
Farm
Field
Material
Operator
PrimaryAB
Time close
Time open
Version
Explanation
Guidance line used
Client name
Area covered
Distance covered
Total time to cover the covered area
Date the field was closed
Date the field was opened
Length of time that the field was open (seconds)
Time engaged
Event name
Farm name
Field name
Material name
Operator name
Number of the primary AB Line
Time the field was closed
Time the field was opened
FM-1000 Plus application firmware version
Data
Area
Date
Dist1
Dist2
Data in features file
One row of data is stored in the
<type>
.dbf file for each feature of that feature type recorded in the field.
Explanation
Field area (Area only)
Date the feature was created.
Format / Notes
ha yyyy/mm/dd
104
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
4 Data management Data storage structure
Data
ID
Length
Name
Perimeter
PrefWeight
SwathsIn
Time
Version
Explanation
Feature ID
Length of the AB Line.
Feature name
Field perimeter distance (Area only)
Time the feature was recorded.
Features attribute file version.
The following data is only recorded in point features.
Data
AlarmRad
Height
Latitude
Longitude
Status_Txt
WarningRad
Explanation
Alarm radius
Ground mean sea level height at antenna position. If you are mapping on a slope, the height may be wrong.
Antenna latitude
Antenna longitude
GPS status
Warning radius
Format / Notes
meters meters hh:mm:ss.s
Format / Notes
meters meters decimal degrees decimal degrees meters meters
Event subfolder
An event is a precision agriculture application or activity on a particular field. For example: l
Planting of seed l
Application of fertilizer or lime l
Spraying with fungicide, herbicide, or insecticide
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
105
Data storage structure 4 Data management
Files stored in this folder are:
Data
Coverage
Track
Free Form Guidance
Explanation
Graphical files containing polygons
Graphical files containing a series of
3D points with attributes
Graphical files containing paths for free form guidance
Files
Coverage.shp
Coverage.dbf
Coverage.shx
Track3D_<date time>.shp
Track3D_<date time>.dbf
Track3D_<date time>.shx
Swaths.shp
Swaths.shx
Swaths.dbf
Coverage logging file
The display creates a coverage logging file when any application coverage is recorded. For each coverage polygon, the following information is saved to the coverage logging file.
Data
AppType
AppliedRate
DateClosed
GPS_Status
Height
Speed
Status_Txt
Swath
TimeClosed
Version
XTE
Field Description
Application type ID
Applied rate reported by the variable rate controller
Date the polygon was closed
Numeric GPS status value
Height in meters
Average GPS ground speed for the polygon (in meters per second)
GPS status description
The current swath number when coverage was recorded
Time the polygon was closed
Coverage attribute file version
Implement Cross Track Error (in meters)
Track logging file
A track logging file is created whenever the event is opened. At each point, a number of attributes are recorded.
The units stored in the track attribute file (
Track3D_<date time>
.dbf) are in metric units.
106
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
4 Data management Data storage structure
Also see:
Data
Along_Line
Ant_HAE
Ant_Lat
Ant_Long
Appln_Wdth
As applied
Auto_Steer
Corct_Age
DOP
Field_Name
GPS_Status
Ground_HAE
Heading
Height
Local_Time
Logging_On
NDVI
Field Description
Along Line distance from start of swath
Antenna height above ellipsoid
Antenna latitude (WGS-84)
Antenna longitude (WGS-84)
Application width
The actual rate applied by the rate control system when serial rate control, TAC or the Field-IQ system are used
Auto-Steer Flag (1=on, 0=off)
DGPS signal correction age
Horizontal Dilution of Precision – a measure of the quality of positions based on satellite geometry
Name of the field
GPS status value
Ground height above ellipsoid
Direction of travel with respect to true North.
Mean sea level height of ground
Local time
Coverage logging Flag (1=on, 0=off)
The NDVI values recorded when using the GreenSeeker plugin (not currently implemented)
Num_Stats
Offline
Number of GPS satellites
Offline distance from swath center line
Pitch The pitch
Relative_Height Height
Roll
Speed
Status_Text
The roll
GPS derived ground speed
GPS status description
– meters
– meters
– kph
–
Format / Notes
meters meters
DD.dddddddd
DD.dddddddd
meters
On or off seconds
–
–
1 to 12 meters decimal degrees meters hh:mm:ss.s
On or off
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
107
Data storage structure 4 Data management
Data
Swath_Num
Swath_wdth
Target
Target
Total_Qty
TRACK_ID
Units
UTC_Date
UTC_Time
Version
Yaw
Field Description
Current swath/headland number
Swath width
Target rate at the current position
Target application rate when serial rate control, TAC or the Field-IQ system are used
Total volume of material as applied for the current field
Only supported for the: l
Aerial Flow Controller l
Autocal Flow controller l
Crophawk Flow Meter
Date and time stamp
Units
Point creation date
UTC time
Track attribute file version
The yaw
Format / Notes
meters
–
–
– metric
YYYYMMDD hh:mm:ss.s
–
–
Graphical data formats
The FM-1000 Plus application uses the Environmental Systems Research Institute (ESRI) 3D shapefile format for storing the layers of graphical information collected in the field (for example, spray coverage, track logging points, and features). The three files in a shapefile set are: l
<filename>.dbf file: Contains the feature attributes l
<filename>.shp file: Contains position information l
<filename>.shx file: An index file that links the position information with its attributes
The term shapefile is used to refer to these three files collectively.
The FM-1000 Plus application records all latitude, longitude, and height data in decimal degrees.
Note – The FM-1000 Plus application reads and writes ESRI ArcView version 2.0 or 3.1 3D polylines, polygons, and points. The M and Z entity types introduced in ArcView 3.1 can be generated in the track logging files, but cannot be read by the display. For more information, visit the ESRI website (
www.esri.com
).
108
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
4 Data management Data storage structure
Graphical file editing
ESRI shape (.shp) and attribute (.dbf) files can be used in many other software packages that can import or use .shp and .dbf formats.
The Farm Works Software® is recommended. For more information, go to www.farmworks.com
.
Data collected by the FM-1000 Plus application can be opened directly into the Farm Works software. You can make changes to the files and save them on an office computer.
The Microsoft Excel
® spreadsheet software and most database software also let you open and view the data in the attribute (
.dbf
) file.
The FM-1000 Plus application can load files that you created in office software. Save Shapefile or
Agfile (.gdx) prescriptions to the
\AgGPS\Prescriptions\ folder on the USB drive to send rates to a variable rate controller.
Data Dictionary folder
The Data Dictionary folder contains text files you can add to customize the data dictionary. See
Dictionary categories (page 112)
and
Create / load a data dictionary (page 113) .
Diagnostics folder
Diagnostic logs are stored for the FM-1000 Plus application and XCN-2050 application activities. Logs are useful for Trimble Support to troubleshoot system operation issues.
The ProgramLog.txt file is saved in the Diagnostics folder and can be useful for troubleshooting. This file contains data from checks performed by the FM-1000 Plus application: l
When the display is turned on or off l
Periodically, while running
The file can be read with a text editor such as Notepad.
When this file becomes larger than 1024 KB, it is backed up to a file named ProgramLog.old and stored in the Archives folder. See
The Diagnostics folder contains the following subfolders: l
Autopilot (if you are using the Autopilot system) l
Preferences: System settings stored in the <Preferences>.xml file l
Screenshots: Screenshot files automatically numbered Screenshot_<num>.png
l gps l logs l
Screenshots
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
109
Data storage structure 4 Data management
Autopilot subfolder
This folder contains Autopilot configuration settings ( vehicle
.
cfg
).
Screenshots folder
The Screenshots folder contains screenshots you have captured.
System folder
The system folder contains log files used in troubleshooting.
Program log files
The ProgramLog.txt file can be useful for troubleshooting. This file contains data from checks performed by the FM-1000 Plus application: l
When the display is turned on or off l
Periodically, while running
When this file becomes larger than 1024 KB, it is backed up to a file named ProgramLog.old and stored in the Archives folder. See
The file can be read with a text editor such as Notepad.
Prescriptions folder
For each prescription that you generate, the system stores three prescription files in either of these formats: l
ESRI shape-file format:
<prescription_name>.shp
l <prescription_name>.dbf
l <prescription_name>.shx
l
.gdx file format:
<prescription_name>.gdx
Some GIS software packages generate other files and include different contents in the files. If these files are on the USB drive, they are ignored when you transfer from the USB to the FM-1000 Plus application.
Summaries folder
The Summaries folder contains files such as:
110
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
4 Data management Data storage structure l
Program log files l
PDF summary file
PDF summary file
When you close a field, the FM-1000 Plus application creates a PDF summary file. This file is saved to the folder:
\AgGPS\Summaries\<client_farm_field_event>\
.
The Event Summary PDF file may include the following images of the field: l
Overlap: Coverage and any overlaps l
Height: Vertical height of the GPS position l
Applied rate: Volume at which the spray boom applied solution l
GPS quality l
Average XTE coverage layer: Degree of implement drift
The file also shows information about the: l
Event l
Vehicle setup
To view a summary report on a computer:
1. Remove the USB drive from the display.
2. Insert the USB into an office computer.
3. Select the folder
\AgGPS\Summaries\
.
4. Open the file
Index.html
.
Note – If you use the Microsoft
®
Internet Explorer
®
Internet browser, you may need to allow ActiveX
®
technology to see all of the summary file.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
111
Data Dictionary categories 4 Data management
Task Data folder
The TaskData folder contains yield data collected in the ISO11783 BIN format, which is read by Farm
Works and other precision agriculture software.
Data Dictionary categories
The data dictionary editor enables you to edit default data entry categories and add new ones.
Default data entry categories
The following are default categories in the Data Dictionary.
l
Application method l
Client l
Crop l
Custom 1, 2, 3 and 4 l
Event l
Farm l
Farm location l
Field l
Harvest l
Harvest year l
Implement l
Material l
Operator l
Operator EPA# l
Sky conditions l
Soil conditions l
Soil type l
Stoppage reason l
Target pests l
Vehicle l
Wind direction l
Wind gust speed l
Wind speed
Edit data entry categories
1. At the Display Setup screen, tap
Data Dictionary
.
2. Tap
Setup
. The Data Dictionary Setup screen displays.
3. From the data list, select the data item you want to add or change.
112
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
4 Data management Data Dictionary categories
Tap
New
to create a new item.
l
Tap
Edit
to change an existing item.
4. Define the custom entry by manually entering or updating the name, then tap
OK
.
5. The new or edited entry displays in the data list on the Data Dictionary Setup screen.
Create / load a data dictionary
The FM-1000 Plus application can load data dictionaries that enable you to select field entry data
(for example, Client, Farm, Field, and Event) from a list of predefined values. This saves you time from continually entering commonly used categories.
You can create a data dictionary either through the FM-1000 Plus application or using Farm Works software.
To create a data dictionary on a computer:
1. On a computer, create a text file. The text file can have any name, but the file extension must be
.txt
.
2. Enter the text.
3. Copy the
.txt
file to the
\AgGPS\Data Dictionary\ folder on a USB drive.
4. On specific FM-1000 Plus application screens (for example, at the Client screen), the file entries will display.
5. To access the entries in the dictionary: a. At the Field Setup screen, tap
New
.
b. Tap any list's down arrow to see the available items in the list.
c. Select the appropriate item from the list.
d. Tap
OK
.
Note – You can still enter new information as before, but these entries are not added to the data dictionary. To add items to the data dictionary, edit the .txt file on an office computer.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
113
Data Dictionary categories 4 Data management
114
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
Chapter
5
Connectivity settings
In this chapter:
This chapter covers connectivity related to: l
GPS receiver settings, including corrections l
GPS output l
Serial data input l
Remote Output setup
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
115
GPS receiver settings 5 Connectivity settings
GPS receiver settings
The FM-1000 Plus application automatically adds a GPS receiver option that controls the internal
GPS receiver, when you install: l
Manual Guidance l
Autopilot l
FieldLevel II
In addition, the system may need second GPS receiver. For example, the TrueTracker system uses a second receiver that is configured with a separate GPS receiver option.
Note – GPS receiver settings will show different options, depending on how your system is setup.
Setup of the GPS receiver begins with corrections. The following corrections are available: l
Autonomous (no GPS corrections): WAAS and EGNOS l
CenterPoint™ RTK. See
.
l
CenterPoint RTX™. See
CenterPoint RTX US or EU (fs) (page 121) .
l
CenterPoint RTX (sc) (page 123)
l
CenterPoint RTX (ss) (page 124)
l
OmniSTAR® wide-area differential GPS service. See
OmniSTAR HP/XP/G2 (page 128) .
l
l
SBAS: Tracks DGPS correction systems using WAAS
116
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
5 Connectivity settings GPS receiver settings
AgRemote Interface
Note – Only advanced users should use the AgRemote interface.
The FM-1000 Plus application has an on-screen AgRemote interface for manually adjusting GPS receiver settings.
To access the on-screen AgRemote interface:
1. At the Configuration screen, tap screen displays.
GPS Receiver and then tap
Diagnostics
. The GPS Status
2. Tap
AgRemote
. The on-screen AgRemote interface displays.
For more information on the correct use of the AgRemote interface, refer to the AgRemote Software
Guide for AgGPS Receivers on www.trimble.com
.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
117
GPS receiver settings 5 Connectivity settings
Basic correction settings
For the basic corrections, complete the following steps.
1. At the Configuration screen, tap screen displays.
GPS Receiver
, then tap
Setup
. The GPS Receiver Settings
2. On the
Settings tab, from the
Corrections list select either:
Autonomous l
SBAS
3. On the
Advanced tab, enter the settings.
Setting
Elevation Mask
SNR Mask
RTK Base Station Filter
RTK Base Station CMR ID
Scintillation Filter
Explanation
Enabled, Disabled
Can be edited if Filter is enabled
On or Off
4. On the
Logging tab, if you want to record logs, select
Record Logs
.
5. On the
Radar Output tab, enter the settings.
Setting
Connector
Radar Frequency Rate
Explanation
TM-200 Port B connector P6
Radar output works for the EZ-Steer system or the
Autopilot system.
Enter Hz/mph rate
6. When you have completed the settings, tap
OK
.
118
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
5 Connectivity settings GPS receiver settings
CenterPoint RTK
Trimble CenterPoint™ RTK is radio-broadcast corrections from a ground-based reference station using either: l
Single-based line (CenterPoint RTK) l
Internet with a DCM-300 modem (CenterPoint VRS)
1. At the Configuration screen, tap screen displays.
GPS Receiver
2. On the
Settings tab, complete the settings.
, then tap
Setup
. The GPS Receiver Settings
Setting
Antenna Selection
Corrections
Net ID
GPS Output
Explanation
Select a supported antenna type
Choose CenterPoint RTK
Tap to open the GPS Output Settings screen to send messages. See
GPS output settings (page 133)
3. On the xFill tab, enter the settings.
Setting
x-Fill™ technology
Frequency
Baud Rate
Datum Selector
Explanation
On or Off
During RTK signal interruptions, xFill technology can sustain
RTK operation for up to 20 minutes.
See
Frequencies and baud rate (page 132)
See
Frequencies and baud rate (page 132)
Choose the datum that was used when the RTK base station was surveyed. For more information contact your local reseller.
Note – You must select the correct base datum for your location.
If you select an incorrect value, this will result in incorrect xFill operation.
4. On the
SecureRTK tab, enter the key or keys and an optional description.
The base station access code provided by your base station service provider. After you enter this code, the
Status and
Expiry values change to show the current status of the security feature.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
119
GPS receiver settings 5 Connectivity settings
SecureRTK is a Trimble proprietary base station security feature that enables a service provider with a RTK base station to generate time-based access codes for their supported rovers. If
SecureRTK is enabled on the base station, rovers with authorized access codes can use corrections from that base.
SecureRTK requires firmware version 1.59, or later, on MS750
™
GPS receivers, and firmware version 4.60 or later on AgRTK, AgGPS 442, and Ag GPS 542 base stations.
Note – Rovers without a SecureRTK access code are unable to access a secure Trimble RTK base station.
5. On the
Advanced tab, only alter the settings if directed by Support.
Setting
Elevation Mask
SNR Mask
RTK Base Station Filter
RTK Base Station CMR ID
Scintillation Filter
Explanation
Enabled, Disabled
Can be edited if Filter is enabled
On or Off
6. On the
Logging tab, if you want to record logs, select
Record Logs
.
7. On the
Radar Output tab, enter the settings.
Setting
Connector
Radar Frequency Rate
Explanation
TM-200 Port B connector P6
Radar output works for the EZ-Steer system or the
Autopilot system.
Enter the required rate.
8. When you have completed the settings, tap
OK
.
120
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
5 Connectivity settings GPS receiver settings
CenterPoint RTX US or EU (fs)
CenterPoint RTX™ (fs - fast satellite) is a satellite-based subscription correction service for the United
States and European Union.
Note – Make sure you have unlocked the service before setting it up.
1. At the Configuration screen, tap screen displays.
GPS Receiver
2. On the
Settings tab, complete the settings.
, then tap
Setup
. The GPS Receiver Settings
Setting
Antenna Selection
Corrections
GPS Output
Explanation
Select a supported antenna type
Choose CenterPoint RTX US or EU (fs), depending on your region
Tap to open the GPS Output Settings screen to send messages. See
GPS output settings (page 133)
3. On the
Frequencies tab, enter the settings for
Frequency and
Baud Rate
. See
Frequencies and baud rate (page 132)
.
4. On the
Advanced tab, only alter the settings if directed by Support.
Setting
Elevation Mask
SNR Mask
RTK Base Station Filter
RTK Base Station CMR ID
Scintillation Filter
Explanation
Enabled, Disabled
Can be edited if Filter is enabled
On or Off
5. On the
Logging tab, enter the settings.
Setting
Record AgRemote Logs
Explanation
Off or Record Logs
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
121
GPS receiver settings 5 Connectivity settings
6. On the
Radar Output tab, enter the settings.
Setting
Connector
Radar Frequency Rate
Explanation
TM-200 Port B connector P6
Radar output works for the EZ-Steer system or the
Autopilot system.
Enter the required rate.
7. When you have completed the settings, tap
OK
.
122
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
5 Connectivity settings GPS receiver settings
CenterPoint RTX (sc)
CenterPoint RTX (sc - standard cell) is a satellite-based subscription correction service.
Note – Make sure you have unlocked the service before setting it up.
1. At the Configuration screen, tap screen displays.
GPS Receiver
2. On the
Settings tab, complete the settings.
, then tap
Setup
. The GPS Receiver Settings
Setting
Antenna Selection
Corrections
FastRestart
Convergence Threshold
GPS Output
Explanation
Select a supported antenna type
Choose CenterPoint RTX (ss)
On or off
FastRestart technology greatly reduces the time needed for
OmniSTAR HP/XP/G2/VBS and CenterPoint RTX convergence. After the satellite signal has initially converged, you can turn off the receiver. When you turn the receiver on again, accuracy levels will be similar to those experienced before shutdown.
Disabled
Tap to open the GPS Output Settings screen to send messages. See
GPS output settings (page 133) .
3. On the
Logging tab, if you want to record logs, select
Record Logs
.
4. On the
Radar Output tab, enter the settings.
Setting
Connector
Radar Frequency Rate
Explanation
TM-200 Port B connector P6
Radar output works for the EZ-Steer system or the
Autopilot system.
Enter the required rate.
5. When you have completed the settings, tap
OK
.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
123
GPS receiver settings 5 Connectivity settings
CenterPoint RTX (ss)
CenterPoint RTX (ss - standard satellite) is a satellite-based subscription correction service.
Note – Make sure you have unlocked the service before setting it up.
1. At the Configuration screen, tap screen displays.
GPS Receiver
2. On the
Settings tab, complete the settings.
, then tap
Setup
. The GPS Receiver Settings
Setting
Antenna Selection
Corrections
FastRestart
Convergence Threshold
GPS Output
Explanation
Select a supported antenna type
Choose CenterPoint RTX (ss)
On or off
FastRestart technology greatly reduces the time needed for
OmniSTAR HP/XP/G2/VBS and CenterPoint RTX convergence. After the satellite signal has initially converged, you can turn off the receiver. When you turn the receiver on again, accuracy levels will be similar to those experienced before shutdown.
Note – Do not move the vehicle from the point of system shut down. Otherwise this feature will not work.
Disabled
Tap to open the GPS Output Settings screen to send messages. See
GPS output settings (page 133)
.
3. On the
Frequencies tab, enter the settings for
Frequency and
Baud Rate
. See
Frequencies and baud rate (page 132) .
4. On the
Advanced tab, only alter the settings if directed by Support.
Setting
Elevation Mask
SNR Mask
RTK Base Station Filter
RTK Base Station CMR ID
Scintillation Filter
Explanation
Enabled, Disabled
Can be edited if Filter is enabled
On or Off
5. On the
Logging tab, if you want to record logs, select
Record Logs
.
124
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
5 Connectivity settings GPS receiver settings
6. On the
Radar Output tab, enter the settings.
Setting
Connector
Radar Frequency Rate
Explanation
TM-200 Port B connector P6
Radar output works for the EZ-Steer system or the
Autopilot system.
Enter the required rate.
7. When you have completed the settings, tap
OK
.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
125
GPS receiver settings 5 Connectivity settings
OmniSTAR HP/XP/G2 - VBS
OmniSTAR VBS is a satellite-based subscription correction service delivered either by: l
Satellite l
Internet using a DCM-300 modem with <1.5" (3.8 cm) accuracy and GLONASS compatibility
Note – Make sure you have unlocked the service before setting it up.
1. At the Configuration screen, tap screen displays.
GPS Receiver
2. On the
Settings tab, complete the settings.
, then tap
Setup
. The GPS Receiver Settings
Setting
Antenna Selection
Corrections
FastRestart
Convergence Threshold
GPS Output
Explanation
Select a supported antenna type
Choose OmniSTAR HP/XP/G2 - VBS
On or off
FastRestart technology greatly reduces the time needed for convergence. After the satellite signal has initially converged, you can turn off the receiver. When you turn the receiver on again, accuracy levels will be similar to those experienced before shutdown.
Note – Do not move the vehicle from the point of system shut down. Otherwise this feature will not work.
Disabled
Tap to open the GPS Output Settings screen to send messages. See
GPS output settings (page 133)
.
3. On the
Advanced tab, only alter the settings if directed by Support.
Setting
Elevation Mask
SNR Mask
Explanation
4. On the
Logging tab, if you want to record logs, select
Record Logs
.
126
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
5 Connectivity settings GPS receiver settings
5. On the
Radar Output tab, enter the settings.
Setting
Connector
Radar Frequency Rate
Explanation
TM-200 Port B connector P6
Radar output works for the EZ-Steer system or the
Autopilot system.
Enter the required rate.
6. When you have completed the settings, tap
OK
.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
127
GPS receiver settings 5 Connectivity settings
OmniSTAR HP/XP/G2
OmniSTAR HP/XP/G2 is a high-accuracy, satellite-based subscription correction service. The accuracy for each type is: l
HP: 2-4" (5-10 cm) accuracy l
XP: 3-4" (8-10 cm) accuracy l
GP: 2-4" (8-10 cm) accuracy (compatible with GLONASS)
Note – Make sure you have unlocked the service before setting it up.
1. At the Configuration screen, tap screen displays.
GPS Receiver
2. On the
Settings tab, complete the settings.
, then tap
Setup
. The GPS Receiver Settings
Setting
Antenna Selection
Corrections
FastRestart
Convergence Threshold
GPS Output
Explanation
Select a supported antenna type
Choose OmniSTAR HP/XP/G2
On or off
FastRestart technology greatly reduces the time needed for convergence. After the satellite signal has initially converged, you can turn off the receiver. When you turn the receiver on again, accuracy levels will be similar to those experienced before shutdown.
The required accuracy of the correction service before the signal will converge and the automatic steering system will engage.
Tap to open the GPS Output Settings screen to send messages. See
GPS output settings (page 133)
.
3. On the
Advanced tab, only alter the settings if directed by Support.
Setting
Elevation Mask
SNR Mask
Explanation
4. On the
Logging tab, if you want to record logs, select
Record Logs
.
128
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
5 Connectivity settings GPS receiver settings
5. On the
Radar Output tab, enter the settings.
Setting
Connector
Radar Frequency Rate
Explanation
TM-200 Port B connector P6
Radar output works for the EZ-Steer system or the
Autopilot system.
Enter the required rate.
6. When you have completed the settings, tap
OK
.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
129
GPS receiver settings 5 Connectivity settings
OmniSTAR VBS
OmniSTAR VBS is a satellite-based subscription correction service with 6-8" (15-20 cm) accuracy.
Note – Make sure you have unlocked the service before setting it up.
1. At the Configuration screen, tap screen displays.
GPS Receiver
2. On the
Settings tab, complete the settings.
, then tap
Setup
. The GPS Receiver Settings
Setting
Antenna Selection
Corrections
GPS Output
Explanation
Select a supported antenna type
Choose OmniSTAR VBS
Tap to open the GPS Output Settings screen to send messages. See
GPS output settings (page 133)
.
3. On the
Advanced tab, only alter the settings if directed by Support.
Setting
Elevation Mask
SNR Mask
Explanation
4. On the
Logging tab, if you want to record logs, select
Record Logs
.
5. On the
Radar Output tab, enter the settings.
Setting
Connector
Radar Frequency Rate
Explanation
TM-200 Port B connector P6
Radar output works for the EZ-Steer system or the
Autopilot system.
Enter the required rate.
6. When you have completed the settings, tap
OK
.
130
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
5 Connectivity settings GPS receiver settings
RangePoint RTX
Trimble RangePoint™ RTX is a satellite-based subscription correction service with pass-to-pass <6"
(15 cm) accuracy and GLONASS compatibility.
Note – Make sure you have unlocked the service before setting it up.
1. At the Configuration screen, tap screen displays.
GPS Receiver
2. On the
Settings tab, complete the settings.
, then tap
Setup
. The GPS Receiver Settings
Setting
Antenna Selection
Corrections
GPS Output
Explanation
Select a supported antenna type
Choose RangePoint RTX
Tap to open the GPS Output Settings screen to send messages. See
GPS output settings (page 133)
3. On the
Frequencies tab, enter the settings for
Frequency and
Baud Rate
. See
Frequencies and baud rate (page 132)
.
4. On the
Logging tab, if you want to record logs, select
Record Logs
.
5. On the
Radar Output tab, enter the settings.
Setting
Connector
Radar Frequency Rate
Explanation
TM-200 Port B connector P6
Radar output works for the EZ-Steer system or the
Autopilot system.
Enter the required rate.
6. When you have completed the settings, tap
OK
.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
131
GPS receiver settings 5 Connectivity settings
Frequencies and baud rate
When you receive satellite signals, you must select the frequency and baud rate based on your specific region.
Region
Western North America (RTX WN)
Central North America (RTX CN)
Eastern North America (RTX EN)
South/Central America (RTX SA)
Europe/Africa (RTX EA)
Europe (RTX FS)
Asia Pacific (RTX AP)
Baud Rate
1557.8615 MHz at 600 baud
1557.8150 MHz at 2400 baud
1557.8590 MHz at 600 baud
1539.8325 MHz at 600 baud
1539.9525 MHz at 600 baud
1529.7250 MHz at 2400 baud
1539.8325 MHz at 600 baud
Note – These frequencies do change occasionally. If you experience issues with the satellite signal, contact your reseller for updated satellite information.
132
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
5 Connectivity settings GPS output settings
GPS output settings
To access the GPS Output Settings screen:
1. At the Configuration screen, tap screen displays.
GPS Receiver
, then tap
Setup
. The GPS Receiver Settings
2. On the
Settings tab, tap
GPS Output
. The GPS Output Settings screen displays. There are three tabs available: l
l
Serial NMEA messages (page 134)
CAN GPS messages
You can set up specific messages to be sent from the GPS receiver from a CAN port. If you are using an ISO-certified implement, use this setting to send information to the implement (such as speed).
At the
CAN GPS tab on the GPS Output Settings screen, complete the settings and tap
OK
.
Section
Output
Setting
Port
Rate
Simulated Speeds Wheel Speed Port
Wheel Speed Rate
Radar/Ground Speed
Port
Radar/Ground Speed
Rate
Explanation
The TM-200 CAN connection on Port A or Port B you want the GPS speed to be sent from
How often you want the message to be sent
The TM-200 CAN connection on Port A or Port B you want the wheel speed to be sent from
Off or On
The TM-200 CAN connection on Port A or Port B you want the radar/ground speed to be sent from
Off or On
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
133
GPS output settings 5 Connectivity settings
Serial NMEA messages
Note – Depending on your configuration, NMEA message output may require: Part number 67091, FmX to
DE9, RS232 cable (Port A or B), Part number 59043, DB9(F) to DB9(F) modem cable.
Some GPS receivers can output serial NMEA messages to an external device. For example, if you have an external device connected to the Autopilot controller, you can have the receiver send GPS position information to the device. The messages are output through the NavController harness laptop connector.
Note – To enable NMEA output from another receiver for an optional feature, make sure the feature has been selected from the feature list.
At the
Serial NMEA Messages tab on the GPS Output Settings screen, complete the settings and tap
OK
.
Setting
Message Rate
Output Port
Baud Rate
Maximum CGA Quality
Lat/Lon Precision
Explanation
How often the message is sent. Options are: l
Off l
1 min l
30 sec l
10 sec l
1 Hz l
3 Hz l
5 Hz l
10 Hz
What Serial port the message should be sent on
Note – The output port may be on a EPX-100 typically assigned to
Reciever EXP-100 or the Autopilot serial port.
Baud rate. Options are: l
2400 l
4800 l
9600 l
19200 l
38400 l
57600
How high the quality of the message should be
Options are 1 through 10
134
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
5 Connectivity settings GPS output settings
NMEA messages
Some GPS receivers can output NMEA GGA type messages to an external device. For example, if you have an external device connected to the Autopilot controller, you can have the receiver send GPS position information to the device. The messages are output through the NavController harness laptop connector.
Note – To enable NMEA output from another receiver for an optional feature (for example, the GPS receiver connected to an TrueTracker system controller), make sure the feature has been selected from the feature list.
At the
NMEA tab on the GPS Output Settings screen, complete the settings and tap
OK
.
Setting
Message Rate
Baud Rate
Messages Enabled
Explanation
How often you want the message sent
Baud rate
On: Send NMEA message. Off: Do not send NMEA message.
Message types supported are: l
CGA l
VTG l
GSA l
GST l
RMC l
ZDA
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
135
Remote Output setup 5 Connectivity settings
Remote Output setup
When remote output is activated, the FM-1000 Plus application sends pulses to an external device.
For example, you can use a remote output signal to control a tree planter.
To set up Remote Output:
1. Install Remote Output. See
Activate features/plugins for use (page 60)
.
2. Set up Remote Output. See
Remote Output settings (page 136)
.
3. Calibrate the lead time. See
Calibrate implement lead time (page 139) .
Remote Output settings
To enable pulse remote output:
1. Navigate to
and assign the EXP-100s to the first position or the second position.
2. At the Configuration screen, select
Remote Output and then tap
Setup
.
3. The Remote Output screen displays. Complete the settings and tap
OK
.
4. For Remote Output Connector:
Select the digital input/output connection assigned by EXP-100 #1 or EXP-100 #2.
See
.
5. For Remote Output Type, choose the type: a. For
Time Based Pulse
, enter:
Setting
Time
Duration b. For
Distance Based Pulse
, enter:
Explanation
The pulse interval in seconds
The pulse duration in milliseconds
136
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
5 Connectivity settings Remote Output setup
Setting
Lead Time
Distance
Duration
Within Line Distance
Design Trigger Color
Manual Trigger Color
Trigger Limits
Explanation
See
Calibrate implement lead time (page 139)
.
The distance in meters/decimal feet/feet and inches. The pulse occurs at each increment of this distance. The first pulse occurs at the A point. Pulse remote output is not recommended for Headland patterns.
The duration of the pulse in milliseconds (ms)
The pulse occurs only when the vehicle is within this distance of being online. If the vehicle is more than this distance offline, no pulse occurs
The color of the pulse indicator that will display on the screen when the system automatically outputs a pulse
The color of the pulse indicator that will display on the screen when you press the manual trigger button
If you select
None
, the pulses triggered by the system are unlimited. If you select
Edit
, enter the maximum number of pulses (per swath) that will be triggered after you pass the A point.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
137
Remote Output setup 5 Connectivity settings
Note – This option works with straight AB and A+ lines.
For using remote output using distance based pulses, see
Distance-based pulse operation
c. For
When Within Area Feature
, enter the
Lead Time
. Calibrate the Lead Time setting to match your implement. See
Calibrate implement lead time (page 139)
. The pulse occurs only when Remote Output is enabled. You must also enable Remote Output for each area feature individually in the Mapping setup. See
Field feature use (page 364) .
d. For
When Engaged
, there are no options to set. Remote output occurs when the system is engaged.
e. For
When Crossing a Line Feature
, enter:
Setting
Lead Time
Distance
Duration
Explanation
See
Calibrate implement lead time (page 139)
.
The distance in meters/decimal feet/feet and inches. The pulse occurs at each increment of this distance. The first pulse occurs at the A point.
Note – Pulse remote output is not recommended for Headland patterns.
The duration of the pulse in milliseconds (ms)
138
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
5 Connectivity settings Remote Output setup
Setting
Within Line Distance
Design Trigger Color
Manual Trigger Color
Explanation
The pulse occurs only when the vehicle is within this distance of being online. If the vehicle is more than this distance offline, no pulse occurs
The color of the pulse indicator that will display on the screen when the system automatically outputs a pulse
The color of the pulse indicator that will display on the screen when you press the manual trigger button
Be sure to edit the line feature to enable remote output and the trigger warning. See
Line feature settings (page 152)
. Complete the settings and tap
OK
.
Note – This option works with straight AB and A+ lines, pivots and curves.
For using remote output using when crossing a line feature, see
Crossing a line feature operation (page 429)
.
6. Tap
OK
when your are finished.
Calibrate implement lead time
There is usually a gap between the time when the system generates a pulse and the time when that pulse triggers an action on the implement. To compensate for this system delay, you can set a lead time to trigger the pulse slightly early so that the action occurs at the correct location.
For this calibration, drive the vehicle along a line and back, using Remote Output to mark points on the ground. If the remote output is correctly calibrated, the points that you create when driving in both directions will be close together.
To calibrate implement lead time:
1.
Set front/back offset (page 139) .
2.
Calibrate front/back offset (page 140) .
3.
Set front/back offset
Configure the correct front/back offset.
1. Accurately measure either of these as appropriate:
Autopilot systems: The distance between the fixed axle of the vehicle and the part of the implement where the trigger marks will be applied on the ground.
l
Manual guidance systems: The distance between the antenna center-point and the part of the implement where the trigger marks will be applied on the ground.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
139
Remote Output setup 5 Connectivity settings
2. At the Configuration screen, tap
Implement Setup
.
3. Enter the measurement as the F/B Offset distance on the Implement Boom Setup screen.
Calibrate front/back offset
1. Create a straight AB Line.
2. At the Remote Output screen, set the
Lead Time to 0.
3. Drive as slowly as possible down the AB Line from point A to point B, marking points on the ground where the remote output triggers.
4. At the end of the line, turn the vehicle around.
5. Drive back down the line from point B to point A, marking another set of trigger points.
6. Measure the distance between the points from the first run and the points from the second run.
7. Divide the distance by two.
8. Adjust your
Front/Back Offset value by this amount.
9. If the return points are nearer where you originally started than the first set of points, increase the F/B offset.
10. If the return points are further from where you originally started than the first set of points, lower the F/B offset.
Set lead time
1. Drive at your intended application speed down the AB Line from point A to point B, marking points on the ground where the remote output triggers. Ensure that your speed remains constant.
2. At the end of the line, turn the vehicle around.
3. Drive back down the line from point B to point A, marking the trigger points.
4. Measure any offset distance between the points from the first run and the points from the second run.
5. Divide the distance by two.
6. Convert your speed from mph to inches/second.
Inches/second = mph x 17.6.
7. To calculate the lead time setting (in seconds), divide the distance between the points (in inches) from Step 5 by the vehicle speed (in inches/second).
Lead Time = Half the distance between points (inches) divided by speed (inches per second)
8. Enter the lead time at the Remote Output screen.
For example, if a 4 mph pass creates a 14" distance between each set of points:
140
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
5 Connectivity settings Remote Output setup
Divide the distance between the points by 2. (In this example, 14" / 2 = 7") l l
Convert the speed from mph to inches/second. (4 mph = (4 x 17.6) = 70.4 inches/second)
Divide the halved distance between the points by the speeds
7" divided by 70.4" per second = 0.999 Lead time in seconds
9. Drive along the AB line and then back at your application speed while you create trigger points.
10. Ensure that the trigger points are sufficiently close to one another.
11. If the gap between the points is unacceptable, repeat the calibrations.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
141
Serial Data Input 5 Connectivity settings
Serial Data Input
Serial Data Input is an optional feature/plugin. When it is activated, the FM-1000 Plus application can receive and log NMEA messages from an external device (for example, an infra-red sensor).
1. Install Serial Data Input. See
Activate features/plugins for use (page 60) .
2. At the Configuration screen, select
Serial Data Input and tap
Setup
. The Serial Data Input screen displays.
3. Complete the settings and tap
OK
.
Setting
Port
Baud rate
Explanation
The port the device is connected to. Usually an EXP-100 assigned to
EXP-100#1 or EXP-100#2 used for serial communication on the
screen.
The rate information is transferred. Enter the appropriate rate for your region. See
Frequencies and baud rate (page 132)
.
Parity
Data bits
Stop bits
Prefix
Suffix
Log Interval
The start point of the data you want to collect.
To log data from the start of the line, leave this field empty.
l
To drop introductory characters, enter them. For example, if you receive data that begins with "$GPGGA...", enter "\24GP" in this field. The data will then begin with "GGA...". ("\24" is the
ASCII code for "$".)
The end point of the data you want to collect.
To log to the end of the line, keep the default field ("\0D\0A").
How regularly the data is written to the file.
142
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
5 Connectivity settings Ag3000 modem
Ag3000 modem
The Ag3000 modem enables the FM-1000 Plus application to receive RTK corrections from a: l
Trimble VRS network l
Third-party RTK provider l
Continuously Operating Reference Station (CORS)
Modem activation
In the USA, the Ag3000 is bundled with a Trimble-installed AT&T card, which is tied to your Ag3000 unit and cannot be separated. You cannot use any other SIM cards with this device.
Additionally, the Ag3000 modem does not work in a CDMA network.
Outside of the USA, you must contact your local VRS Now™ or third-party cell provider for a SIM card.
Modem setup
Activate VRS for use. See
Activate features/plugins for use (page 60) .
1. At the Configuration screen, select
VRS and then tap
Setup
.
2. The VRS Configuration screen displays.
3. Select the
VRS Server Setup tab. Enter the required settings, as provided by your Trimble VRS
Now
™ or Network RTK operator.
Setting
Server Name/Address
Server Port Number
Mount Point
User Name
Password
Explanation
RTK/VRS/CORS base station broadcast name
Base station port number
Base station mount point
Assigned username
Assigned password
4. If you are inside the USA, tap
OK
. The Configuration screen displays. The Ag3000 modem is now configured.
5. If you are outside the USA, select the
SIM Card Setup tab. Enter the details of the SIM card from the card provider, then tap
OK
.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
143
DCM-300 Modem 5 Connectivity settings
DCM-300 Modem
The DCM-300 modem is a rugged and sealed 3G communications solution for customers who need reliable communications for their farming operations. This modem enables the FM-1000 Plus application to receive RTK corrections from a: l
Trimble VRS network l
Third-party RTK provider l
Continuously Operating Reference Station (CORS)
The benefits of using the DCM-300 modem include: l
More acres of RTK accuracy from Trimble VRS Now delivered to the FM-1000 Plus application.
l
Easy interface and configuration with the FM-1000 Plus application.
l
Roof-mounted high-gain cellular antenna for enhanced signal reception to minimize cell phone signal related drop outs.
l
On-screen wireless status and diagnostics.
l
Vehicle Sync l
Office Sync
The DCM-300 modem is available: l
With a HSDPA modem for use with GSM wireless networks globally l
An EVDO modem for use with the Verizon wireless network in the USA
Unlock the modem
The DCM-300 modem is available at different prices for Asset Tracking and VRS/File Transfer. The
VRS/File Transfer functionality in the DCM-300 modem must be unlocked to use VRS or data transfer.
To unlock the DCM-300 with a passcode, you must connect the modem to the display and then turn it on. The Unlock screen shows the DCM-300 when connected.
Enter the passcode in the FM-1000 Plus application and then tap
OK
to send it to the modem. When the modem is successfully unlocked, a message displays to reboot the modem.
Service activation
Services for the DCM-300 modem can be purchased from a Trimble store. Services include: l
VRS Now Ag correction service l
Sync data transfer
144
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
5 Connectivity settings DCM-300 Modem l
Dispatch asset tracking l
Wireless data plans (USA only)
Modem setup
Activate VRS for use. See
Activate features/plugins for use (page 60) .
To use VRS corrections, the
GPS Setup tab must be configured with a
Correction type of Trimble VRS.
Note – The display must be unlocked for RTK to use the Trimble VRS correction type.
1. At the Configuration screen, select
VRS and then tap
Setup
. The VRS Configuration screen displays.
2. From the
Device list, select the type of modem that is connected. The default is
DCM-300
.
3. Select the
VRS Server Setup tab. Enter the required settings, as provided by your Trimble VRS Now or Network RTK operator.
Setting
Server Name/Address
Server Port Number
Mount Point
User Name
Password
Explanation
RTK/VRS/CORS base station broadcast name
Base station port number
Base station mount point
Assigned username
Assigned password
4. If you are inside the USA and:
Subscribe to the AT&T or Verizon data plans and have a DCM-300G modem, tap
OK
. The
Configuration screen displays.
Supply your own SIM card and have a DCM-300G modem, enter the details of the SIM card from the card provider, then tap
OK
.
Note – The DCM-300C modem for Verizon does not use the SIM card setup tab.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
145
DCM-300 Modem 5 Connectivity settings
146
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
Chapter
6
Field feature mapping setup
In this chapter:
Field feature mapping settings
You can place features on the screen that represent points, areas and lines in your field.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
147
Field feature mapping settings 6 Field feature mapping setup
Field feature mapping settings
You can place field features in the field while driving to define on the screen points of interest or areas to avoid. There are three types of field feature: l
Point: A single point in the field, such as a tree l
Line: A straight or curved line in a field, such as a fence l
Area: An area of land, such as a pond
You can customize: l
Which features display on the Mapping Guidance panel at the Run screen l
The settings of each feature
Access Feature Mapping settings
1. At the Home screen tap
. The Configuration screen displays.
2. Select
System and tap
Setup
. The Display Setup screen displays.
3. Select
Feature Mapping and tap
Setup
. The Feature Mapping screen displays.
Assign feature buttons
To assign the feature buttons that will be available on the Mapping Guidance panel in the Run screenn:
1. At the Feature Mapping screen, tap one of the four buttons under the
Selected Features section.
The Select Feature screen displays.
2. At the top left-hand list, choose the type of feature: Area, Line or Point. The options available to you for that feature type are listed below.
3. Select the feature option you want and tap
OK
.
148
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
6 Field feature mapping setup Field feature mapping settings
Create a field feature
To create a feature in your field:
1. At the Feature Mapping screen, tap one of the four buttons under the
Selected Features section.
The Select Feature screen displays.
2. At the top left-hand list, choose the type of feature: Area, Line or Point.
3. Tap
New
. The Edit Area/Line/Point Feature screen displays.
4. Tap in the entry box for the name of the feature. The Enter Area/Line/Point Feature Name screen displays.
5. Enter the name of the feature and tap
OK
. You are returned to the Edit Area/Line/Point Feature screen.
6. Complete the settings for the feature you have added. For specifics, see: l
Field area feature settings (page 151)
Line feature settings (page 152)
l
Point feature settings (page 154)
7. Tap
OK
. The Feature Mapping screen displays again, showing the button of the feature you just created.
Edit a field feature
To edit a feature you have placed in your on-screen field:
1. At the Feature Mapping screen, tap one of the four buttons under the
Selected Features section.
The Select Feature screen displays.
2. At the top left-hand list, choose the type of feature: Area, Line or Point.
3. Tap
Edit
. The Edit Area/Line/Point Feature screen displays.
4. To edit the name: a. Tap in the entry box for the name of the feature. The Enter Area/Line/Point Feature Name screen displays.
b. Enter the name of the feature and tap
OK
. You are returned to the Edit Area/Line/Point
Feature screen.
5. Edit the settings for the feature you have added. For specifics, see: l
Field area feature settings (page 151)
Line feature settings (page 152)
l
Point feature settings (page 154)
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
149
Mapping location setting 6 Field feature mapping setup
6. Tap
OK
. The Feature Mapping screen displays again, showing the button of the feature you just edited.
Mapping location setting
As you place features in your on-screen field, they are placed in relation to the: l
Center of the boom l
Right of the boom l
Left of the boom
Access these settings at the Feature Mapping screen.
1. At the Home screen tap
. The Configuration screen displays.
2. Select
System and tap
Setup
. The Display Setup screen displays.
3. Select
Feature Mapping and tap
Setup
. The Feature Mapping screen displays.
4. Complete the settings for the
Mapping Location section and tap
OK
.
Setting
Point Features
Line/Area Features
Explanation
Point features should be placed in your on-screen field relation to: l
Boom Center: The center of the boom
Boom Right: To the right of the boom l
Boom Left: To the left of the boom
Line and area features should be placed in your on-screen field relation to:
Boom Center: The center of the boom l
Boom Right: To the right of the boom l
Boom Left: To the left of the boom
150
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
6 Field feature mapping setup Recording with coverage
Recording with coverage
You can choose to have line features be recorded when you have enabled coverage.
1. At the Home screen tap
. The Configuration screen displays.
2. Select
System and tap
Setup
. The Display Setup screen displays.
3. Select
Feature Mapping and tap
Setup
. The Feature Mapping screen displays.
4. From the
Record Line with Coverage list, choose: l
None
: The line will not automatically record when you begin logging coverage.
As Applied
: l
Fence
:
5. Tap
OK
.
Field area feature settings
You can use area features to define areas of land as productive or unproductive. If the sprayer passes into an area that is defined as unproductive, the boom sections turns off. This can be useful for setting exclusion zones that you do not want to spray (such as waterways).
Setting
Name
Color
Area Type
Trigger Warning
Remote Output
Expand by
Explanation
Name of the feature
Select the feature appearance color
Productive
: Choose this option if the area feature will be a section of land that can be included in area calculations.
Non-productive
: Chose this option if the area is unproductive land.
No Warning
: No warning displays.
Entering Area
: A warning displays while you are inside the area.
Leaving Area
: A warning displays while you are outside the area.
Set to
Enabled if a signal pin is attached to the system. This enables you to trigger a pulse to an external device when you enter or exit this area.
See
Remote Output setup (page 136)
and
.
Options are:
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
151
Line feature settings 6 Field feature mapping setup
Setting Explanation
l
1/2 swath width l
1 swath width
Line feature settings
1. At the Feature Mapping screen, tap one of the four buttons under the
Selected Features section.
The Select Feature screen displays.
2. At the top left-hand list, choose the Line feature.
3. Tap
New
. The Edit Area/Line/Point Feature screen displays.
4. Tap in the entry box for the name of the feature. The Enter Area/Line/Point Feature Name screen displays.
5. Enter the name of the line and tap
OK
. You are returned to the Edit Area/Line/Point Feature screen.
6. Complete the settings for the line:
Setting
Color
Trigger Warning
Remote Output
Explanation
Select the feature appearance color
Enabled
: Warning is enabled
Disabled
: No warning will be issued
Set to
Enabled if a signal pin is attached to the system. This enables you to trigger a pulse to an external device when you enter or exit this area.
See
Remote Output setup (page 136)
and
Remote Output operation (page 429) .
7. Tap
OK
. The Feature Mapping screen displays again, showing the button of the feature you just created.
Boundary feature settings
The FM-1000 Plus application includes the field boundary feature that enables you to map multiplebounded areas within a field.
Field boundaries create a separate boundary file that can be used to calculate area and control automatic section switching at the edge of the field.
152
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
6 Field feature mapping setup Boundary feature settings
1. At the Feature Mapping screen, tap one of the Selected Features buttons. The Select Feature screen displays.
2. From the feature list, select
Area and then tap
New
.
3. From the list of features, select
Boundary and then tap
Edit
. The Edit Area Feature screen displays.
4. Set one or more of the following the attributes for the boundary features.
Setting
Name
Color
Draw as
Trigger Warning
Remote Output
Expand By
Explanation
Custom name that displays on the
Color of the boundary outline and also the infill color, if selected.
Outlined or Filled
Visual and audible warning when entering or leaving the boundary edge.
Feature Mapping tab.
Enabled
: Restricts remote output pulses from being triggered while outside the boundary.
Disabled
: Does not restrict remote output.
See
Remote Output setup (page 136) .
How the boundary is actually recorded:
Nothing
: Maps the boundary exactly at the recorded position.
l
½ Swath Width
: Expands the recorded boundary location by ½ the swath width after the boundary is closed.
l
1 Swath Width
: Expands the recorded boundary location by 1 additional swath width after the boundary is closed.
5. Tap
OK
. The Select Feature screen displays.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
153
Point feature settings 6 Field feature mapping setup
6. Tap
OK
. The Feature Mapping screen displays.
7. Tap
OK
. The Display Setup screen displays.
8. Tap
OK
.
Point feature settings
1. At the Feature Mapping screen, tap one of the four buttons under the
Selected Features section.
The Select Feature screen displays.
2. At the top left-hand list, choose the Point feature.
3. Tap
New
. The Edit Area/Line/Point Feature screen displays.
4. Tap in the entry box for the name of the feature. The Enter Area/Line/Point Feature Name screen displays.
5. Enter the name of the line and tap
OK
. You are returned to the Edit Area/Line/Point Feature screen.
6. Complete the settings for the point:
Setting
Alarm Radius
Warning Radius
Average Position
Explanation
l
Displays as a solid red block when the vehicle comes within this radius of the feature
More serious than the warning radius. Set it to a shorter distance.
Distance around the feature that causes a warning message to appear l
Displays on the screen as an orange line
Improves the quality of the point feature position
Yes
: The FM-1000 Plus application calculates the average position of the feature over 30 seconds.
l
No
: The FM-1000 Plus application places the feature at the coordinates that the vehicle is at when you tap the button.
154
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
Chapter
7
Implement setup
In this chapter:
Before you can begin operations, you must select an implement that has been created and set up in the system.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
155
Implement setup 7 Implement setup
Implement setup
Settings for an implement vary depending on the implement type and the operation it will be performing.
Implement setup ensures the system can tell: l
Which type of implement is attached l
How much area it covers l
How far offset the implement is from the guidance line or pattern
Note – Some configuration settings are unavailable when a field is open in the Run screen. To access these settings, return to the Run screen and then tap the Home button. When prompted to close the field, tap
Close
.
156
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
7 Implement setup
Create an implement
Create an implement
1. At the Home screen, tap
.
2. At the Configuration Selection screen, tap
Switch
next to the implement.
3. If necessary, enter the administrative password. See
FM-1000 Plus application Passwords (page
4. At the Implement Configuration screen, tap
New
.
5. The New Configuration Name screen displays with an on-screen keyboard.
6. Enter a name for the new implement and tap
OK
. The Select Active Plugins screen displays.
7. Select the optional features/plugins that will be used with this implement and then tap
OK
.
8. The Implement Setup wizard displays. See
Edit implement settings (page 158)
to complete the settings.
Note – The information needed for implement setup depends on the plugins that you selected in the previous step.
9. Tap
OK
. Your current configuration now displays in the Configuration screen.
Select an implement
To select an implement that has been configured:
1. At the Home screen, tap
.
2. At the Configuration Selection screen, tap
Switch
next to the implement.
3. If necessary, enter the administrative password. See
FM-1000 Plus application Passwords (page
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
157
Import an implement 7 Implement setup
1. At the Implement Configuration screen, select the implement you want to switch to and then tap
OK
.
Note – If there is only one available implement, it is selected by default.
2. The currently selected implement is displayed in the Configuration Selection screen.
Import an implement
To import an implement:
1. Copy the implement file into the AgGPS folder on the USB drive.
2. Insert the USB drive into the FM-1000 Plus application and then turn on the display. Open the
FM-1000 Plus application.
3. At the Home screen, tap .
4. At the Current Configurations screen, tap
Setup
.
5. If necessary, enter the Administration password. See
FM-1000 Plus application Passwords
.
6. At the Configuration screen, select
System and then tap
Setup
.
7. Select
Data Files and then tap
Manage
.
8. Select
Implement from the list on the left of the screen and then tap
Copy
.
The implements from the FieldManager screen now display in the Implement Configuration screen.
Edit implement settings
At the Implement Setup screen, you can change: l
Implement Type : Primary task for the current implement
l
Measurements : Basic information required for guidance using an automatic steering system
l
: More detailed implement dimensions required both with and without a GPS receiver on the implement l
: Values required to apply or avoid overlap l
: Settings for switches tied to implement control system
Implement Type
In the
Implement Type tab, choose the type of implement you want to set up.
158
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
7 Implement setup Edit implement settings
Measurements
Note – The screen is scaled to the swath or application width, whichever is larger. If any offset is greater than this, the tractor image may pass the edge of the screen.
Note – This setting is used for navigation. At the Run screen, when you tap
Skip
to adjust the guidance line, the guidance line moves to the current location of the vehicle or can be moved by a user entered distance or number of rows. Row width is defined by the swath width divided by the number of rows.
Measurement
Swath Width
Application Width
Application Offset
Rows
Left/Right Offset
Explanation
Set the distance between guidance passes.
The applied width of the tool or boom, which sets the width of the coverage logging and mapping.
Measured from the fixed axle of the vehicle to the point on the implement where coverage logging will be mapped. The fixed axle varies depending on vehicle type: l
Rear axle on front steering tractor and self-propelled sprayer.
l
Front axle on a harvester and 4x4 tractor l
Center of tracks on a tracked tractor
Number of rows that are covered by the implement.
Measure from the center of the vehicle to the center of the implement or header. This measurement adjusts the tractor path so that an offset implement is centered on the guidance line.
Geometry
Set up the measurements required for accurate implement modeling.
Measurement
Type
Hitch to Ground Contact
Point
Explanation
Select the implement type. The antenna offsets are required when a
GPS antenna is mounted on the implement for TrueGuide and
TrueTracker.
Measured from the tractor hitch pin to the soil engagement point that the implement rotates about. For planters this is typically the seeding units or the midpoint of several rows of tools
Note – For modeled implements, shortening this setting causes the implement to come online more quickly while lengthening the setting causes the implement to come online more slowly.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
159
Delete an implement 7 Implement setup
Overlap
When you map a headland, you create an inner boundary and an outer boundary. At this tab, set the Infill Boundary: l
Select
Inner to shut off sections when the implement reaches the inner boundary.
l
Select
Outer to shut off sections when the implement reaches the outer boundary.
Switches
1. At the
Switches tab, tap
Setup
.
2. At the Add / Edit Implement Lift Sensor screen, enter the appropriate settings.
Measurement
Status
Number of Switches
Minimum Changed
Switches
Explanation
On
: Select if you have one or more implement switches tied into your implements control system.
Off
: Select if you have no implement switches tied into your implements control system.
Select the number of implement switches that you have tied into your implement control system.
Enter the number of implement switches the system should recognize to determine if the implement is lifted.
Delete an implement
To delete an implement:
1. At the Configuration Selection screen, tap
Switch
next to the implement.
2. At the Implement Configuration screen, select the appropriate implement from the list.
3. Tap
Delete
.
4. When prompted, tap
Yes
to confirm the deletion.
160
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
Chapter
8
Vehicle guidance setup
In this chapter:
EZ-Pilot assisted steering system
EZ-Steer assisted steering system
Setup for vehicle guidance includes choosing the type of guidance system that your vehicle is configured for.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
161
Guidance settings 8 Vehicle guidance setup
Guidance settings
l
: For systems without any automatic steering system l
l
EZ-Pilot assisted steering system (page 199)
l
EZ-Steer assisted steering system (page 205)
All guidance systems require GPS. See
GPS receiver settings (page 116) .
For operational information, see: l
Autopilot system operation (page 402)
l
EZ-Pilot system operation (page 416)
l
EZ-Steer system operation (page 419)
Manual guidance
To set up manual guidance, complete the settings and complete the
.
1. At the Home screen, tap . The Configuration screen displays.
2. Select
Manual Guidance and then tap
Setup
. The Manual Guidance Settings screen displays.
3. In the
Vehicle tab, complete the settings and tap
OK
.
Setting
Vehicle Type
Axle to Antenna Offset
Explanation
Type of vehicle
The horizontal distance between the axle and the antenna.
162
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
8 Vehicle guidance setup Manual guidance
Setting
Antenna Height
Wheelbase
Explanation
Measure the distance accurately (within 3 inches). An incorrect offset may cause poor steering performance.
Note – Measure the offset distance as accurately as possible
(within 3"); an incorrect offset may cause poor steering performance.
If the antenna is in front of the axle, enter a forward distance.
l
If the antenna is behind the axle, enter a back distance.
Measure the antenna height vertically, from the ground to the base of the antenna.
The horizontal distance between the center of the front wheel and the center of the back wheel.
Note – Any changes you make to the vehicle settings remain, even if you replace the Manual Guidance option with the Autopilot option.
4. Complete the
GPS receiver settings (page 116)
.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
163
Autopilot system 8 Vehicle guidance setup
Autopilot system
Note – Autopilot system setup is typically done when the system is professionally installed.
For cabling information, see the XCN-2050 Cabling Guide.
For operational information, see
Autopilot system operation (page 402)
.
The sequence of setting up the Autopilot system is:
1. Complete the
GPS receiver settings (page 116)
if you have not already done so.
2. Complete the settings for the Autopilot system.
3. Calibrate the Autopilot automated steering system for your vehicle. See
.
Note – The subsequent configuration steps are usually done when the system is professionally installed.
Begin setup
1. At the Home screen, tap
. The Configuration screen displays.
2. Select
Autopilot (Vehicle) and tap
Setup
. The Vehicle Controller Setup screen displays.
Vehicle settings for Autopilot system
Complete the settings in the
Vehicle tab.
164
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
8 Vehicle guidance setup Autopilot system
Setting
Connector
Current Selection
Explanation
Select Port A of the TM-200 Module.
Displays the current vehicle profile (.vdb) that is loaded.
To change this setting, see
Vehicle settings for Autopilot system
Complete the settings in the
Vehicle tab.
Setting
Connector
Current Selection
Explanation
Select Port A of the TM-200 Module.
Displays the current vehicle profile (.vdb) that is loaded.
To change this setting, see
Engage settings for Autopilot system
At the
Engage tab, complete settings related to the engagement of the Autopilot system.
Setting
Operator Timeout
Coverage Log
Explanation
The amount of time of inactivity before an operator timeout message displays.
How coverage logging occurs: l l
Manual
: Coverage logging only occurs when you tap .
When Engaged
: Coverage logging occurs when Autopilot steering is engaged, by tapping
.
(yellow). See
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
165
Autopilot system 8 Vehicle guidance setup
Steering settings for Autopilot system
At the
Steering tab, complete the settings related to steering on the guidance line.
Setting
Nudge Increment
End of Row Warning Dist
AutoSense
Valve on Speed
Legacy Sensors
Explanation
The distance the Nudge buttons in the Run screen move to for the vehicle to line up with the guidance line.
The distance the vehicle is from the end of a row to trigger the endof-row warning.
On or off.
Note – Most recent Autopilot systems use an AutoSense device require this setting to be On.
l
Normal
: Speed threshold >0.4 m/s (1.3 ft/s). For normal operating speeds.
l
Low
: Speed threshold >0.1 m/s (0.3 ft/s). For vehicles operating and very slow speeds.
l
Ultra Low
: Speed threshold >0.2 m/s (0.7 ft/s). For vehicles operating and very slow speeds.
Note – The NavController must have firmware version 5.10 or higher to support low and ultralow settings.
For older Autopilot systems that use the electrical system to measure vehicle status.
l
None l
Wheel Speed Only l
Gear Level Only l
Wheel and Gear
This list is only available when AutoSense is set to
Off
.
166
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
8 Vehicle guidance setup Autopilot system
Measurements for NextSwath
At the
Measurements tab, complete the settings for using the NextSwath feature. See
and
NextSwath operation (page 405)
.
Setting
Fixed Axle to Tow Hitch
Explanation
Measure the distance from the center point of the drawbar hitch pin to the control point of the vehicle. Control points depend on the type of vehicle: l
MFWD: Rear axle l
Tracked tractor: Center of rotation l
Sprayer: Rear axle l
Combine/harvester: Front axle l
4WD/articulated: Rear axle
Note – If you are using a 2-point hitch, measure from the fixed axle to the pivot point on the implement.
Fixed Axle to 3-Point Hitch Measure the distance from the rear axle of the vehicle to the location where the three point fixture attaches. Also use this measurement for fixed applications such as harvesting and spraying with a self-propelled sprayer.
Advanced settings for Autopilot system
Advanced settings are located in the
Advanced tab. For more information regarding the
Advanced tab settings, contact your local reseller.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
167
Autopilot system
Select a vehicle
8 Vehicle guidance setup
1. At the Home screen, tap
. The Configuration screen displays.
2. Select
Autopilot (Vehicle) and tap
Setup
. The Vehicle Controller Setup screen displays.
3. Tap
Edit
. The Edit Vehicle screen displays.
4. From the
Vehicle Profile Location list, select the source of the pre-configured vehicle profile you want:
Autopilot
controller : The majority of vehicle profiles are stored on the Autopilot controller.
l l
Vehicle profile
file: As additional profiles become available or are updated, they are added to a vehicle profile database. You can download the database and load profiles from it.
: You can install an individual vehicle profile that you configured previously and saved. See
Save vehicle profile (page 186)
.
Then...
For Vehicle Profile
Location, if you choose...
From Controller (New)
From Database (new)
From Saved File
(existing) a. From the
Model list, select the make and model you want.
b. Tap
Use Vehicle
.
a. Tap
Browse
.
b. Select the .vdb file you want.
c. Tap
OK
.
d. Tap
Use Vehicle
.
a. Tap
Browse
.
b. Select the file you want.
168
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
8 Vehicle guidance setup Autopilot system
For Vehicle Profile
Location, if you choose...
Then...
c. Tap
OK
.
d. Select Save Vehicle to save the new settings.
e. When a message displays that the profile you selected on the NavController, tap
OK
.
Note – If you select a vehicle make and model but do not upload that configuration to the Autopilot controller, that make and model may not be loaded.
f. Tap
OK
when another message displays explaining the
NavController will be reinitialized.
Autopilot calibration
After you configure the vehicle make and model, calibrate the system for your vehicle. The calibration process records additional details about your vehicle which helps the system to steer the vehicle more accurately. For high accuracy systems, all settings must be correct.
All vehicle types
Four calibration items are required for all types of vehicles: l
Controller orientation (page 170) : Correctly associates the outputs of the Autopilot controller
sensors with the direction of the vehicle.
l
Manual Override Sensitivity calibration (page 171)
: Required for platforms that employ a pressure transducer for the manual override function. Change the default only if the operation of the manual override function is acceptable.
l
Roll / antenna compensation calibration (page 177)
: Compensates for antenna height and static roll caused by minor variations in the Autopilot controller and the GPS receiver mounting.
l
Line acquisition aggressiveness calibration : How aggressively the vehicle approaches the
guidance line
Articulated and front-wheel-steered types
For articulated and front-wheel-steered vehicle types, additional calibrations are required: l
Steering angle sensor calibration (page 172)
: Converts the sensor output into commands for steering full left, full right and any position in between.
l
AutoSense calibration (page 172) : Orients Autosense.
l
Automated Deadzone calibration (page 173) : Required to learn the vehicle's steering deadzone.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
169
Autopilot system 8 Vehicle guidance setup l
Proportional steering gain calibration (page 175)
: Required only if system steering performance is not satisfactory.
Tracked tractors
For tracked tractors, there are several calibrations required. See
Tracked tractor calibrations (page
.
Begin calibration
1. At the Home screen, tap
.
2. At theConfigurations screen, tap
Setup
next to the vehicle.
3. Select
Autopilot (Vehicle) and tap
Calibrate
. The Vehicle Calibration screen displays.
4. Select a calibration and tap
OK
.
Controller orientation
1. At the Vehicle Calibration screen, select
Controller Orientation and tap
OK
. The Autopilot Controller
Orientation screen displays. A graphic of the controller represents the current mounting orientation of the controller.
The image is shown as though:
You are looking down on the vehicle from above.
l
The top of the screen points to the nose of the vehicle.
2. Use the buttons to select the orientation of the controller.
If the controller is set at a sloped angle, the vehicle profile will set the NavController orientation.
Note – Install the NavController as described in the vehicle install instructions. If custom angles are used, the on-screen image of the controller does not display.
3. Tap
OK
to accept the new orientation or tap
Cancel
to exit.
170
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
8 Vehicle guidance setup Autopilot system
Manual Override Sensitivity calibration
WARNING –
Incorrect adjustment of the Manual Override Sensitivity calibration setting could cause this critical safety feature to fall, resulting in personal injury or damage to the vehicle. Any adjustment to this setting must be made only by an authorized dealer.
Note – Manual Override Sensitivity calibration is valid only for platforms that employ a pressure transducer for the manual override function. The software automatically detects whether or not the vehicle configuration includes this type of sensor and provides this option if required.
Manual override is one method of disengaging the Autopilot system by turning the steering wheel.
When you turn the steering wheel, there is a voltage spike that then tapers off. This spike and decline occurs at different levels for different models of tractor.
The manual override sensitivity is the level that the voltage must spike to before the override occurs and the system disengages. The voltage must also taper below that level before automated steering can be engaged again. If you set a: l
High level of sensitivity, the system will disengage more quickly and you will have to wait longer before you can re-engage.
l
Low level of sensitivity, the system will take longer to disengage and you will be able to reengage more quickly.
Incorrect adjustment of the Manual Override Sensitivity calibration setting could cause this critical safety feature to fail, resulting in personal injury or damage to the vehicle. Any adjustment to this setting must be made only by an authorized dealer.
We strongly recommend that you perform this calibration only if the default sensitivity is unacceptable under all conditions. Do not to choose a sensitivity setting that is either too
sensitive or not sensitive enough. In either case, manual override may cease to function correctly.
On some platforms, you could set the sensitivity so low that the manual override function will not detect any steering wheel motion. It is vital that you avoid this.
Calibration steps
1. At the Vehicle Calibration screen, select
Manual Override and tap
OK
. The Autopilot Manual
Override Calibration screen displays.
2. Test the current manual override setting. Turn the steering wheel. The
Override Inactive
button changes color when the Override becomes active. With the system active, assess whether the manual override feature is at an acceptable level of sensitivity for: l
Speed of steering wheel turn
Distance of steering wheel turn
3. To adjust the manual override sensitivity setting, move the slider bar.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
171
Autopilot system 8 Vehicle guidance setup
Slider Bar Direction
Left
Right
Sensitivity is...
Increased
Decreased
Manual Override is triggered...
More easily
Less easily
The value above the slider bar on the right is the current setting. The total range of the slider bar is 0.5 to 2.5 (where 0.5 is the most sensitive setting and 2.5 is the least sensitive).
4. To try the new setting, tap
OK
. The Vehicle Calibration screen displays.
5. Select
Manual Override again. The Autopilot Manual Override Calibration screen displays again.
6. Repeat steps 1 through 4 to test each new setting.
Note – You can also evaluate the performance of the manual override feature under conditions of loading and/or activities which may affect the pressure of the hydraulic system. For example, you can turn on the auxiliary hydraulics while you evaluate the manual override sensitivity.
7. Tap
OK
to accept the new setting or tap
Cancel
to exit.
AutoSense calibration
1. At the Vehicle Calibration screen, select
Autosense Calibration and tap
OK
. The Autopilot AutoSense
Calibration screen displays.
2. From the
Location list, select the AutoSense position.
3. From the
Orientation list, select the AutoSense orientation.
4. Tap
OK
to confirm selections.
Steering angle sensor calibration
Note – Perform the steering sensor calibration only if a rotary potentiometer is installed on the vehicle. If an
AutoSense device is selected as the steering angle sensor, the Steering Sensor screen does not appear.
Steering sensor calibration converts the voltage output of the steering sensor into an equivalent steering angle measurement.
Note – Complete this calibration before you attempt to calibrate the steering deadzone or roll correction procedures.
This calibration requires the vehicle to be in motion. Ensure that you: l
Perform this procedure on a hard, level surface that is free of obstructions.
l l
Maintain a tractor speed above 1.6 kph (1 mph).
Watch the
Sensor Angle value:
For a symmetrical angle reading at the steering extremes while you manually steer the wheels to full right and full left
172
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
8 Vehicle guidance setup Autopilot system
To ensure that the angle reading is near zero while you manually steer the wheels straight ahead
Calibration steps
To run the steering sensor calibration:
1. At the Vehicle Calibration screen, select
Manual Override and tap
OK
. The Autopilot Steering
Sensor Calibration screen displays.
2. Move the tractor forward slowly.
3. Center the steering wheel and then tap
Next
.
4. Turn the steering wheel completely to the left and then tap
Next
. If the steering wheel is not turned completely to the left or if the steering sensor requires adjustment or replacement, an error message displays.
The value for
Volts updates as you turn the steering wheel:
5. Turn the steering wheel completely to the right and then tap
Next
. If the steering wheel is not turned to the full right position or if the steering sensor requires adjustment or replacement, an error message displays.
6. At the next screen, center the steering wheel. While the wheel is at the center position, tap
Next
.
The value for
Volts updates as you turn the steering wheel.
7. Tap
OK
to accept the calibration.
Automated Deadzone calibration
WARNING –
During the Automated Deadzone calibration, the system moves the wheels that steer the vehicle. To avoid injury, be prepared for sudden vehicle movement and that the area around the vehicle (and implement, if applicable) are clear.
WARNING –
Obstacles in the field can cause collisions, which may injure you and damage the vehicle. If an obstacle in the field makes it unsafe to continue the Automated Deadzone calibration, stop the vehicle and turn the steering wheel to disengage the system.
1) Wait until the display prompts you that the phase is ready to begin.
2) Look at the screen to determine whether the next phase will require a left or right turn.
3) Reposition the vehicle so that the turn will use the space that you have available.
4) Tap the button to begin the next phase.
The Automated Deadzone calibration runs a series of tests on the valve and steering hydraulics to determine the point at which steering movement occurs.
In this test, the system independently opens and closes each side of the steering system while determining the point at which wheel movement occurs.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
173
Autopilot system 8 Vehicle guidance setup l
You must complete the Steering Angle procedure before you run this procedure.
l
To ensure optimal system performance, the hydraulic fluid must be at normal operating temperature when you run this procedure. On some vehicles with large reservoirs, it may take several hours for the fluid to reach operating level, especially if the implement circuit is lightly loaded. Consult the vehicle documentation to determine if the hydraulic fluid temperature can be shown on a vehicle console.
l
If you perform the calibration while the system is still cold, repeat both the Deadzone and the
Proportional gain calibration procedures after the system is at operating temperature.
Calibration steps
Place the vehicle in a large field that is free of hazards. To minimize the effect of the ground conditions, the field should have smooth soil that is loose but firm.
At the Vehicle Controller Setup screen, select
Automated Steering Deadzone and tap
OK
. The Autopilot
Automated Deadzone Calibration screen displays.
1. Tap
Next
.
2. Tap
Next
in the two screens that display.
3. Follow all instructions. Tap the
Test Right
and
Test Left
buttons to perform the Deadzone calibration.
4. As ground conditions affect the results of this calibration, it is recommended that you perform the calibration at least three times, or until the average deadzone values change by less than about 0.5.
To minimize the total amount of space needed for the complete calibration, you can reposition the vehicle between the phases of the test. If the available flat, smooth space is extremely limited, re-align the vehicle after each segment of the calibration.
To reposition the vehicle: a. Wait until the software prompts you that the next phase is ready to begin.
b. Look at the screen to determine whether the next phase will require a left or right turn.
c. Reposition the vehicle so that the turn will use the space that you have available.
d. Tap the button to begin the next phase.
5. Reposition the vehicle and continue from the current test phase.
Automated Deadzone error messages
Error - ....
Manual Override Detected
Vehicle Moving Too Slow
Explanation
Manual override was detected before the calibration cycle could be completed. Retry.
The vehicle was moving too slowly for the calibration
174
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
8 Vehicle guidance setup Autopilot system
Error - ....
Explanation
cycle to successfully finish. Make sure the vehicle is moving at least 0.8 kph (0.5 mph) during each calibration cycle.
Steering Close To End Stops
Valve Connectors Could Be Swapped The calibration test sensed the steering turning in the opposite direction to what was expected. Retry, and if the problem persists either the valve connectors have been accidentally swapped or the steering sensor calibration was performed incorrectly.
No GPS A GPS receiver must be connected and outputting positions before the software can run the calibration procedure.
No Steering Response Detected
Before the calibration cycle could be completed, the measured steering angle approached the end stops.
Retry, and if the problem persists, instead of centering the steering at the start of each cycle, try turning the steering in the opposite direction to that which is being tested so that the calibration procedure has a greater range to test over.
Unable To Determine DZ: Try Again
During the calibration cycle, insufficient movement was sensed for the calibration to complete. If the problem persists, the hydraulic installation could be faulty.
A problem occurred when trying to compute dead zone.
Retry, and if the problem persists, contact Technical
Support.
Software Problem Detected The software was unable to complete the calibration due to insufficient movement of the vehicle. If the problem persists, contact Technical Support.
Proportional steering gain calibration
WARNING –
The wheels can move abruptly during the Proportional Steering Gain procedure while the Autopilot system tests the hydraulic response to the steering commands. These sudden movements can cause collisions with nearby obstacles or cause injury to occupants of the vehicle. Be prepared for sudden wheel movements.
Note – Complete the steering sensor calibration before you perform the proportional gain calibration.
Perform the proportional steering gain calibration only when the Autopilot system performance is less than satisfactory.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
175
Autopilot system 8 Vehicle guidance setup
The Proportional Steering Gain (PGain) setting enables a balance between rapid steering response and stability. When you modify the PGain setting, two steering characteristics are affected: l
Slew Time: The amount of time that the front wheels take to move from the far left to the far right position and vice versa.
l
Overshoot: The percentage by which the front wheels exceed the commanded angle before they settle on the correct value.
To correct slight variations caused by valve current response, friction, and hydraulic fluid viscosity, alter the PGain value: l
High PGain value: Decreases the slew time and increase the overshoot. This provides rapid responses, but can cause the steering to exhibit signs of instability (for example, a tendency to excessively overshoot).
l
Low PGain value: Increases the slew time and decrease the overshoot. This improves the stability but can introduce significant delays in the steering response and can cause the vehicle to oscillate from side to side.
Perform the calibration: l
Immediately before you run the PGain calibration, even if the Automatic Deadzone calibration has been performed in the past.
l
On a hard, level surface that is free of obstructions.
l
While maintaining a vehicle speed above 1.6 kph (1 mph)
Increase the proportional gain up to the point just before any one of the following occurs: l
Slew times no longer decrease (a low value is required) l
Overshoot exceeds 5 – 8% (depending on the vehicle) l
Wheels noticeably shake near end stops
Calibration steps
1. At the Vehicle Calibration screen, select
Steering Gain and tap
OK
. The Autopilot Steering Gain
Calibration screen displays.
2. Tap
Run Slew Test
. A warning message displays.
3. Tap
Next
.
WARNING –
The wheels can move abruptly during the Proportional Steering Gain procedure while the
Autopilot system tests the hydraulic response to the steering commands. These sudden movements can cause collisions with nearby obstacles or cause injury to occupants of the vehicle. Be prepared for sudden wheel movements.
4. Tap
Next
in the next two screens that display.
176
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
8 Vehicle guidance setup Autopilot system
5. Test various gain settings while you monitor the vehicle performance and the values for
Slew
Time and
Overshoot for the Turn Left phase.
a. Adjust the
New Gain
(if required).
b. Turn the front wheels completely to the right to begin the test. (The test is for the stop-tostop position.) c. Tap
Turn Left
. Both turn buttons are unavailable while the wheels slew.
Note – The optimum gain setting has short slew time (short millisecond reading) and low overshoot percentage (less than 5–8%).
6. Repeat Step 5 with
Turn Right
. Both turn buttons are unavailable while the wheels slew.
7. When you locate the best gain value, either:
Tap
OK
to save the value in the Autopilot controller memory.
l
Tap
Cancel
to restart the calibration procedure.
Roll / antenna compensation calibration
Note – Antenna offsets are provided when the antenna cannot be placed directly over the working point of the implement. It is recommended that these offsets are minimized whenever possible.
At the Vehicle Calibration screen, select
Roll/Antenna Correction and tap
OK
. The Autopilot Roll/Antenna
Compensation screen displays.
Precalibration
Before configuring the antenna compensation, make sure that: l
The Autopilot system is completely and correctly set up.
l
GPS corrections are set up.
l
You read this section carefully.
l
If multiple GPS technologies will be used (for example, RTK and SBAS), use the technology with the highest accuracy when you perform the Roll Correction calibration.
Calibration steps
1. Set the antenna height above the ground.
a. Place the tractor on a flat, level surface.
b. Measure the distance from the ground to the base of the GPS receiver (or antenna).
c. Enter this value for
Antenna Height Above Ground
.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
177
Autopilot system 8 Vehicle guidance setup
2. Set the antenna distance from the fixed axle.
a. Place the tractor on a flat, level surface.
b. Measure the distance from the fixed axle to the center of the GPS receiver (or antenna).
c. Enter this value into the
Antenna Distance from Fixed Axle entry box. Enter a negative value if the
GPS receiver antenna is to the rear of the fixed axle. The nose of the vehicle is considered the forward direction.
3. Configure the roll offset correction.
Use one of the following methods to calculate the roll offset and then enter the roll offset correction to compensate for it: l
Choose the method which best matches the conditions.
4. Enter the roll offset value for roll offset.
5. Select one of the offline direction options, depending on whether the roll offset distance is to the right or left.
Tire track offset method for roll offset
Note – Use a highly repeatable GPS correction mode for roll correction. For best results, use a RTK mode or
OmniSTAR HP signal that has been converged for at least twenty minutes. If you do a roll calibration with less accurate GPS correction modes, repeat the measurements at least four times to ensure a more consistent result.
1. Remove any implement from the vehicle.
2. Drive the tractor to a relatively flat field where tire impressions are visible and where you can complete passes of at least 400 m (1320 ft) in length.
3. Reset the roll offset value to 0 (zero).
4. Create an AB Line.
5. Create a clean set of tire tracks in the field. To do this, start a new pass away from the area where the AB Line was created. When the system is stable, engage automatic steering mode and allow the Autopilot system to complete the pass.
6. At the end of the pass, turn the tractor around to return along the same pass from the opposite direction.
7. Engage automated steering mode and allow the system to complete the pass.
8. In the middle of the return pass, stop the tractor and confirm that the current position is directly on the AB Line. This ensures there is no cross track error.
9. Park the tractor and exit the cab. Evaluate the tire track pattern between the first and return paths.
178
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
8 Vehicle guidance setup Autopilot system
10. Measure the difference between the track passes and record the distance. Also note whether the return pass is to the left or the right of the original pass. Record the results.
Note – The offset should be consistently to the left or right.
11. Repeat Step 5 through Step 10 two more times, for a total of three test runs.
Offset distance Offset direction Test
Run
1
2
3
Total =
Total / 3 (average offset value) =
Flag offset method for roll offset
1. Remove any implement from the vehicle. The vehicle draw-bar must be centered.
2. Drive the vehicle to a relatively flat area where you can complete passes that are at least 400 m
(1320 ft) in length.
3. Reset the Roll Offset value to 0 (zero) on the Roll Correction screen. See
Roll / antenna compensation calibration (page 177)
.
4. Create an AB Line.
5. Start a new pass. Engage automatic steering mode when the system is stable. Stop the tractor midway through the pass. Confirm that there is no cross track error: the current vehicle position should be directly on the AB Line.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
179
Autopilot system 8 Vehicle guidance setup
6. Park the vehicle and exit the cab. Use the hitch pin hole in the drawbar as a guide to insert a flag in the ground to mark the vehicle center-line for this pass.
7. Complete the pass. Turn the vehicle around to return along the same pass from the opposite direction.
8. Engage automatic steering mode. Stop the vehicle midway down the pass with the drawbar pin location very close to the marker flag. Confirm that there is no cross track error: the current vehicle position should be directly on the AB Line.
9. Park the vehicle and exit the cab. Use the hitch pin hole in the drawbar as a guide to insert a second flag in the ground to mark the tractor centerline for this pass. Note whether the second pass is to the left or the right of the first pass.
10. Measure the difference between the flags for the two passes and record the distance. Also record whether the return pass is to the left or the right of the original pass. Record the results.
Note – The offset should be consistently to the left or right The following graphic shows an example of a right offset. Measure the distance between the flags.
11. Repeat Steps 5 to 10 two more times for a total of three test runs. Use the following table to record the offset distance and the left or right direction of offset for each test run.
12. Average the results of the three runs. (Total the offset distances from the three passes and divide by three). Repeat Step 5 through Step 10 two more times, for a total of three test runs.
Offset distance Offset direction Test
Run
1
2
180
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
8 Vehicle guidance setup Autopilot system
Test
Run
3
Offset distance Offset direction
Total =
Total / 3 (average offset value) =
Line acquisition aggressiveness calibration
1. At the Vehicle Calibration screen, select
Line Acquisition and tap
OK
.
2. At the
Classic tab, choose whether you want to use the classic method of line acquisition or the
OnSwath method. For more information about OnSwath, see
3. Complete the settings on all other tabs.
The following instructions apply to the OnSwath mode.
Steering Angle tab
The steering angle (or turn radius) is used when acquiring a guidance line. A wider angle creates a sharper turn.
OnSwath Mode Settings
Maximum steering angle
(nominal)
Explanation
How sharply the vehicle turns during line acquisition at low speeds.
Sets the desired steering angle (turn radius) the system will use during line acquisition. This is not a hard limit and may be exceeded.
The value must be set to less than the physical maximum steering angle of the vehicle. A good starting point is 50-75% of the physical maximum. The default values for the vehicle profile are in this range.
Note – Do not set this too high. Too high of a value will cause poor performance.
Note – This setting affects the sharpest angle between the vehicle and a towed implement.
Maximum steering angle at
How much the Autopilot will reduce the steering angle used at
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
181
Autopilot system 8 Vehicle guidance setup
OnSwath Mode Settings
high speed
Explanation
higher speeds. The speed noted below the slider indicates when a reduction in steering angle will start to occur.
l
Lower aggressiveness values: Autopilot will limit the sharpness of high speed turns more, to maintain smoother, more stable operation.
l
Higher aggressiveness values: Autopilot will use the nominal maximum steering angle until the indicated speed is reached.
Slew Rate tab
The slew rate is how quickly the vehicle steers. The maximum slew rate (nominal) is the slew rate the
Autopilot system will assume the system is capable of and will plan for during line acquisition.
OnSwath Mode Settings
Maximum slew rate
(nominal)
Steering slew rate at high speed
Explanation
Adjust how quickly the steering changes during line acquisition at low speeds.
Note – This must be set lower than the physical capacity of the vehicle or instability may occur. Lowering this value may help with vehicle jerk and oscillations.
A value that is: l
Lower: Is better for vehicles with poor hydraulic performance.
l
Higher: Reduces the slew rate at high speeds less. The speed noted below the slider indicates where the slew rate reduction will begin.
The Autopilot system will reduce the slew rate at speeds above the displayed value.
Note – Lowering this value may help with vehicle jerk and oscillations.
A value that is: l
Lower: Reduces the slew rate at high speeds more. This leads to smoother and more stable operation.
l
Higher: Reduces the slew rate at high speeds less. The speed noted below the slider indicates where the slew rate reduction will begin.
Approach Angle tab
The slew rate is how quickly the vehicle steers. The maximum slew rate (nominal) is the slew rate the
Autopilot system will assume the system is capable of and will plan for during line acquisition.
182
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
8 Vehicle guidance setup Autopilot system
OnSwath Mode Settings
Maximum approach angle
(nominal)
Explanation
The desired approach angle that the Autopilot system will drive to the line if adequate space is available. If space is not available, the angle may not be achievable.
The following graphic shows possible paths to the line based on different approach angles.
Initial Turn Aggressiveness
Adjusts how sharp or smooth the initial turn toward to the line will be in comparison to the final turn onto the line. This affects only the initial turn towards, while the final turn onto the line is not affected.
If the value is: l
Lower: The initial turn will be smoother and more gradual.
l
Higher: The initial turn will be harder and sharper toward the line.
Tracked tractor calibrations
If you selected a tracked tractor as the make and model, the
Track Spacing option displays on the calibration list. (This option is not shown in the Vehicle Calibration screen.)
Track Spacing value
At the Autopilot Track Spacing Calibration screen, enter the distance between the center of the tracks. The width of the vehicle tracks is the distance from halfway across the width of the left track to halfway across the width of the right track.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
183
Autopilot system 8 Vehicle guidance setup
Hydraulically-steered tracked tractor
If you selected a hydraulically-steered tracked tractor as the make and model, Engine Speed displays on the calibration list.
This group of vehicles includes the CAT/AGCO Challenger Tracked family.
No calibration is required if the system is installed on a CAT MT 700/800 series equipped with the ISO option. This also includes John Deere tracked vehicles.
Autopilot RPM Sensor Calibration screen
The Autopilot RPM Sensor Calibration screen enables you to verify that the RPM sensor output is correct.
If the Engine RPM value is not close to the actual engine RPM, follow the onscreen instructions to adjust the sensor output.
Autopilot Hydraulic Pump Response Time Calibration screen
The Autopilot Hydraulic Pump Response Time Calibration screen verifies and optimizes the response of the hydraulic steering pumps. Follow the onscreen instructions to perform the calibration.
Autopilot Steering Pump Knees Calibration screen
This calibration determines the compensation required for dead-band in the steering pumps.
WARNING –
The vehicle needs to move during the Hydraulic Tracked Pump Knees calibration procedure. To avoid injury, be prepared for vehicle movement.
The instructions for this calibration test include several screens. Follow the instructions on each screen.
Tracked vehicle steering wheel calibration
1. Turn off the engine, but keep the ignition key in the run position.
2. At the Autopilot Calibration screen, select
Steering Interface Calibration
.
3. Keep to the suggested time interval and follow the on screen instructions to turn the steering wheel right and left, full lock.
4. Follow the on-screen instructions until
Calibration Complete displays on screen.
184
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
8 Vehicle guidance setup Autopilot system
Row Guidance
Note – The Autopilot system with a supported vehicle is required for Row Guidance. For the list of supported vehicles, please refer to the RG-100 Supported platforms list.
When Row Guidance has been activated on the FM-1000 Plus application, the Autopilot system will follow curved or hillside corn rows that do not exactly match the guidance line.
Row Guidance setup
Before setup, make sure you have activated Row Guidance for use. See
Activate features/plugins for use (page 60) .
1. At the Configuration screen, select
Row Guidance and then tap
Setup
.
2. The Row Guidance Configuration screen displays. Complete the settings and tap
OK
.
Note – Verify the measurements are accurate for your vehicle. Measurements can differ due to vehicle variations. Measure distances with the header at the approximate operation height. Inaccurate measurements will result in a degraded performance.
Setting
Header
Feeler to Axle Offset
Cutter Bar to Axle Distance
Feeler Left/Right Offset
Engage Delay
Clear Nudge When Disengaged
Explanation
Header model attached to your combine.
Distance from the pivot point of the feeler to the front axle. This measurement must be accurate to within an inch, otherwise the performance will be degraded.
Distance from the front of the cutter bar or point where the crop enters the snapper rollers to the center of the front axle. This measurement must be accurate, otherwise the performance will be degraded.
Distance of the center of the row crop feelers to the centerline of the vehicle.
This delay in seconds (0 - 10) will be used when the system is engaged. The system will wait the entered time until inputs are recognized to start row guidance.
Use this setting to keep the system from mistaking random stalk strikes on headlands as inputs for steering.
Yes
: Clears the AutoPilot nudges when the system is disengaged.
No
: Keep the AutoPilot nudges when the system is
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
185
Autopilot system 8 Vehicle guidance setup
Setting Explanation
disengaged.
3. At the Configuration screen, tap
Item
Offline Distance
Status
Enable
/
Disable
Voltage
Voltage status
Row Guidance and then tap
Diagnostics
.
Explanation
Status of the sensor
Tap to enable or disable sensors
Voltage for the left and right sensor
Status for the left and right sensor
Implement setup for Row Guidance
Before starting the Row Guidance setup, ensure that: l
All cables and components of the system are installed on the vehicle.
l
The Autopilot system has been installed and configured with the NavController firmware.
l
When setting up Autopilot for use with the RG-100 system, ensure that: l
A vehicle profile that ends in
RG-100 is selected at the Vehicle Controller Setup screen
The XML header file in the latest release of the vehicle database (.vdb) has been added to the vehicle profiles on the FM-1000 Plus application. Firmware versions after v 6.63 contain an XML file. For instructions on updating the XML file, refer to the support note Autopilot
System: Installing the VDB File (v6) .
l
Row Guidance has been added (activated) for the FM-1000 Plus application.
1. At the Home screen, tap
. The Configuration Selection screen displays.
2. Tap
Edit
next to
Implement
. The Configuration screen displays.
3. Tap
Add/Remove
to add Row Guidance to the configuration.
Save vehicle profile
Note – From Autopilot firmware version 3.0 and later, the vehicle profile location defaults to “From
Database”.
186
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
8 Vehicle guidance setup Autopilot system
After you configure and calibrate the Autopilot system for your vehicle, you can save that information for later use. This can be useful if you want to adjust the settings or if you move the display from one vehicle to another.
To save a vehicle profile:
1. At the Home screen, tap
.
2. Select Autopilot and then tap
Setup
. The Vehicle Controller Setup screen displays.
3. On the
Vehicle tab, tap
Edit
. The Edit Vehicle screen displays.
4. Tap
Save Vehicle
.
5. At the Save Vehicle Configuration screen, tap in the
Filename entry box.
6. At the Enter Save Filename screen, enter a name for the current vehicle profile and tap
OK
.
7. At the Edit Vehicle screen, tap
OK
.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
187
OnSwath settings 8 Vehicle guidance setup
OnSwath settings
With OnSwath, you can customize line acquisition to the vehicle, operation and operator preference. With OnSwath, vehicle behavior during line acquisition is more controlled, more predictable, and more repeatable.
Choose the OnSwath option when calibrating the Line Acquisition Settings for the Autopilot system.
See
Line acquisition aggressiveness calibration (page 181)
.
The benefits of OnSwath include: l
Up to 50% faster line acquisition l
Separate tuning for online and line acquisition l
More repeatable performance l
Consistent performance over entire speed range.
l
Cab shake eliminated on articulated machines l
Limited turn rates reduce impact on field for tracked machines l
Front axle/nose overshoots more, so that the l
Rear axle on the guidance line faster due to front axle/nose overshooting more
OnSwath requires Autopilot firmware 6 and higher.
188
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
8 Vehicle guidance setup NextSwath settings
NextSwath settings
The optional NextSwath feature/plugin works with Autopilot to enable you to: l
Set up automatic turns to occur between swaths. See
Automatic turn settings (page 190)
and
l
Better acquire the guidance line when pulling an implement. See
.
l
Extend the point for the automatic turn to compensate for larger pulled implements and enable proper coverage. See TrueSwath under
Automatic turn settings (page 190) .
l
Set up automated headlands management to use automated functions you have programmed in your vehicle. See
Automated headlands management settings (page 194)
.
l
Set up reminders to occur before you begin or end a swath. See
Automated headlands management settings (page 194) .
Requirements
NextSwath requires: l
The Autopilot steering system. See
.
l
One of the following GNSS correction sources: l
Omnistar XP
Omnistar HP l
RangePoint RTX l
Centerpoint RTX (SS, FS, SC) l
Centerpoint RTK
See
GPS receiver settings (page 116) .
l
OnSwath selected and properly set up for line acquisition. See
l
Supported vehicles as defined by the supported platforms list. The vehicle profile in the version
11.00 Vehicle Database (VDB) will enable NextSwath if it is supported. Unsupported VDB files will not allow setup or enabling of NextSwath.
l
To use the automated headlands management functions (vehicle integration), a NavController
III. See
Automated headlands management settings (page 194) .
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
189
NextSwath settings 8 Vehicle guidance setup
Restrictions
NextSwath cannot be used in with: l
TrueTracker l
Row Guidance RG-100 l
FieldLevel II l
WM-Drain
Automatic turn settings
Note – To use NextSwath automatic turn, see
The value for end-of-row warning distance is set in the Steering tab. See
To set up NextSwath automatic turn capability:
1. Complete the setup for the Autopilot system and the implement. NextSwath uses the following in settings for calculating automatic turns: l
Swath width. See
Measurements for NextSwath (page 167)
under Autopilot setup.
Application offset. See
Measurements for NextSwath (page 167)
under Autopilot setup.
l
Hitch to ground contact point. See Geometry tab under
.
CAUTION – Always verify implement and NextSwath settings, and verify performance for each implement you use for NextSwath. Failure to do so may result in equipment damage.
2. Make sure OnSwath is chosen as the method for the vehicle to acquire the line in the Autopilot setup. See
and
Line acquisition aggressiveness calibration (page
3. At the Home screen, tap
. The Configuration screen displays.
4. Select
NextSwath and then tap
Setup
.
5. Complete the settings on the following tabs.
190
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
8 Vehicle guidance setup
Turn Pattern tab
Measurement
Type of path
Turn Pattern
Swath Change Limit
NextSwath settings
Explanation
l
Shortest (sharper turn)
(default): The path of the turn will be sharper and as short as possible. To determine this path, the system uses: l
Swath width
Steering angle and slew rate settings for OnSwath l
Turn speed l
The Turn Pattern option you have chosen l
Smoothest (rounder turn)
: The path of the turn will be smoother and gentler (with a constant curve), and likely longer.
Use this setting for large applications such as wide spraying. If you change to a swath which causes the vehicle to skip a larger number of swaths for a turn, the radius for this turn will increase.
When the limitations of the steering system and the width of the swath do not allow a turn to be completed within the distance between swaths, the turn must extend beyond the swath lines.
Choose which pattern to use in such a case.
l
Keyhole
: An equal amount of turning outside the swath region occurs on each side of the turn.
l
Turn wide at start
: The turn extends widely beyond the existing line to be able to line up accurately to the next swath. The turning occurs outside of the swath at the beginning of the turn.
l
Turn wide at end
: The turn begins on the existing line and extends widely beyond the next swath. The turning occurs outside of the next swath at the end of the turn.
Enter the maximum number of swaths the operator can move to, up to 10 swaths (up to 500 feet/152.4 meters).
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
191
NextSwath settings 8 Vehicle guidance setup
Turn Point tab
Measurement
Shorten or Extend Swath
Explanation
l
Maximize infill coverage (extend)
: The turn starts at the boundary between the headland and infill. All of the turn occurs outside of the infill.
Note – When your boundaries are not regular, the turn point may be out of the boundary.
Turn Point Inside/Outside boundary l
Minimize headland usage (shorten)
: The turn may start inside the infill to attempt to keep the turn inside the headland region.
If you have a boundary without headlands, set the location of the turning point in relation to the boundary, such as 10 feet (3.05
meters) outside the boundary or 10 feet (3.05 meters) inside the boundary. This setting only applies to Productive Area Feature Field
Boundaries, and does not apply to headland infill boundaries.
Note – When your boundaries are not regular, the turn point may be out of the boundary.
192
WARNING –
Interaction with and avoidance of boundaries is solely the operator's responsibility. While NextSwath can use field boundaries for a reference point for turn start points, the trained and qualified operator is responsible for determining offsets from field boundaries. NextSwath does not calculate distance of the vehicle or machinery from the boundary during the turn.
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
8 Vehicle guidance setup NextSwath settings
Measurement Explanation
TrueSwath Swath Extension When TrueSwath is enabled on the Run screen, the system will extend the original turn point. The additional distance delays the vehicle turn and enables the implement to fully cover the swath.
Tap
Calculate
to obtain this value. The system uses several values to complete this calculation, including the distance of: l
The rear axle of the vehicle to the hitch of the implement l
The hitch-to-ground contact
Change this value when you change to a different implement.
See
TrueSwath operation (page 413) .
Parameters tab
Measurement
Turn Speed
Minimum Turn Radius
Remote Engage Confirms
Auto Turn
Explanation
All automated turns are optimized for this speed. If the vehicle is traveling faster than this speed, the Autopilot system will not start the turn. If the vehicle speed is increased during the turn and exceeds this speed, the system will post a warning to the operator.
If speed does not reduce within two seconds, the turn will be disengaged. It is recommended that this value be set to the highest speed for which turns will be made.
Note – Settings for OnSwath that have an affect on the path of the planned turn are: Maximum nominal steering angle, maximum nominal steering slew rate and aggressiveness. See
Line acquisition aggressiveness calibration (page 181)
The smallest radius for the automatic turn. To calculate the value, drive the vehicle/implement combination in the tightest turn desired. Then measure the radius of this turn.
Note – This setting applies for turns with or without TrueSwath. It does not apply to line acquisition. Settings for OnSwath and turn speed may cause the system to use a larger turn radius for regular and TrueSwath automated turns.
Choose
Yes if you want the option to use the Remote Engage button as well as the touchscreen to confirm an automatic turn.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
193
NextSwath settings 8 Vehicle guidance setup
Automated headlands management settings
Note – For operation, see
Using automated headlands management (page 415)
.
The automated headlands management capability of NextSwath enables you to: l
Have your vehicle and implement perform certain operations automatically after you have programmed these functions into your vehicle. For example, you may want the implement automatically raise at the end of a swath and automatically lower at the beginning of the swath.
l
Set up reminders to prompt you to perform an action at the appropriate time whether you have a programmable vehicle or not
To set up NextSwath automated headlands management:
1. Complete the setup for the Autopilot system and the implement. NextSwath uses the following in implement setup for calculating automatic turns: l
Swath width. See
Measurements for NextSwath (page 167)
under Autopilot setup.
Implement offset. See
Measurements for NextSwath (page 167)
under Autopilot setup.
l
Hitch to ground contact point. See Geometry tab under
.
CAUTION – Always verify implement and NextSwath settings, and verify performance for each implement you use for NextSwath. Failure to do so may result in equipment damage.
2. Make sure OnSwath is chosen as the method for the vehicle to acquire the line in the Autopilot setup. See
Line acquisition aggressiveness calibration (page 181) .
3. At the Home screen, tap
. The Configuration screen displays.
4. Select
NextSwath and then tap
Setup
.
5. Complete the settings on the tabs: l
Turn Pattern
Turn Point l
Parameters
See
Automatic turn settings (page 190)
.
6. Complete the settings on the following tabs and screens.
Swath Start Events tab
Tap a row to add an event that will occur before or during the swath start. The system displays the
Edit Start of Swath Event screen.
194
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
8 Vehicle guidance setup
Version 3.0, Revision A
NextSwath settings
Column Heading
Event
Distance or Time
Occurs Before/After
Sound alert
Text alert
Explanation
The name of the event.
The event will occur in reference to a certain distance or a certain time to the turn point.
Whether the event will occur before or after the start/end of the swath.
Whether an alert will sound to alert you of the event.
Whether a message will display to alert you of the event.
Edit Start of Swath Event screen
The event you create here will be one that occurs at the start of the swath.
Item
Event
Distance or time
Occurs before/after
Sound alert
Text alert
Explanation
Choose the event you want from the list: l
Start application: A reminder to start the application l
Stop application: A reminder to stop the application l
Lower implement: A reminder to lower the implement l
Raise implement: A reminder to raise the implement l
Adjust speed for turn: A reminder to adjust your speed for the turn l
Adjust speed to operating speed: A reminder to adjust your speed to the operating speed l
Perform Sequence A: A reminder or command to start the automated operations previously recorded on your vehicle.
l
Perform Sequence B: A reminder or command to start the automated operations previously recorded on your vehicle.
Choose whether you want to use distance or time to define when the event occurs.
Choose whether the event will occur before or after the start of the event.
Choose Yes if you want the system to alert you with a sound when the event is about to occur.
Choose Yes if you want the system to display a message reminding you of the start of the event.
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
195
NextSwath settings 8 Vehicle guidance setup
Swath End Events tab
Tap a row to add an event that will occur before or during the swath end. The system displays the
Edit End of Swath Event screen.
Column Heading
Event
Distance or Time
Occurs Before/After
Sound alert
Text alert
Explanation
The name of the event.
The event will occur in reference to a certain distance or a certain time to the turn point
Whether the event will occur before or after the start/end of the swath.
Whether an alert will sound to alert you of the event.
Whether a message will display to alert you of the event.
Edit End of Swath Event screen
The event you create here will be one that occurs at the end of the swath.
Item
Event
Distance or time
Occurs before/after
Explanation
Choose the event you want from the list: l
Start application: A reminder to start the application l
Stop application: A reminder to stop the application l
Lower implement: A reminder to lower the implement l
Raise implement: A reminder to raise the implement l
Adjust speed for turn: A reminder to adjust your speed for the turn l
Adjust speed to operating speed: A reminder to adjust your speed to the operating speed l
Perform Sequence A: A reminder or command to start the automated operations previously recorded on your vehicle.
l
Perform Sequence B: A reminder or command to start the automated operations previously recorded on your vehicle.
Choose whether you want to use distance or time to define when the event occurs.
Choose whether the event will occur before or after the start of the event.
196
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
8 Vehicle guidance setup NextSwath settings
Item
Sound alert
Text alert
Explanation
Choose Yes if you want the system to alert you with a sound when the event is about to occur.
Choose Yes if you want the system to display a message reminding you of the start of the event.
Vehicle Integration tab
WARNING –
Do not use automated implement functions to: 1) control hazardous materials (including NH3) or 2) operate implements near ground laborers. Failure to follow these restrictions could result in serious injury or death.
The settings on this tab only apply if your vehicle has been programmed for automated headlands management (vehicle/implement performing functions automatically in a specific sequence). The signal issued from the third solenoid of the NavController III starts the automatic operations you have created and saved on the vehicle. Any timing for each event in the sequence must be set up from the vehicle interface. Refer to the appropriate tractor operator manual.
Note – Automated functions do not work with on vehicles that use the third solenoid output for the “On when engaged” function.
Requirements
To set up and use the automated functionality, you must have: l
The automated headlands management (Vehicle Integration) feature/plugin that is unlocked and activated l l
A vehicle that is supported by a platform kit which offers automated functions
A NavController III (to output the signal for operation from the third solenoid)
Note – There is only one solenoid output on the NavController III, meaning only one button can be triggered.
Column Heading
Sequence A Trigger
Sequence B Trigger
Explanation
Choose which operation will trigger the sequence: l
Manual: Operator taps a button on the tractor to begin the automated functions l
Third solenoid: Signal is sent from the NavController to begin the automated operations
Choose which operation will trigger the sequence:
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
197
NextSwath settings
Column Heading
8 Vehicle guidance setup
Explanation
l
Manual: Operator taps a button on the tractor to begin the automated functions l
Third solenoid: Signal is sent from the NavController to begin the automated operations
198
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
8 Vehicle guidance setup EZ-Pilot assisted steering system
EZ-Pilot assisted steering system
The EZ-Pilot assisted steering system uses GPS to provide automatic vehicle guidance.
For cabling information, see XCN-2050 Cabling Guide.
For operational information, see
EZ-Pilot system operation (page 416)
.
To set up the EZ-Pilot system:
1. Complete the
GPS receiver settings (page 116)
.
2. Complete the EZ-Pilot settings.
3. Calibrate the EZ-Pilot system.
Vehicle settings for EZ-Pilot system
1. At the Configuration screen, select displays.
EZ-Pilot and tap
Setup
. The EZ-Pilot Settings screen
2. On the
Vehicle tab complete the settings as appropriate.
Setting
Vehicle Type
Axle to Antenna
Offset
Explanation
Type of vehicle
The horizontal distance between the axle and the antenna. Measure the distance accurately (within 3 inches). An incorrect offset may cause poor steering performance.
Take the measurement from the antenna to the correct point of your vehicle: l
From the rear axle for MFWD, Sprayer, Floater, Truck
From the front axle for 4WD tractor, Combine, Swathers (For swathers, it is recommended that you place the antenna directly
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
199
EZ-Pilot assisted steering system 8 Vehicle guidance setup
Setting
Antenna Height
Wheelbase
Explanation
l over or ahead of the front axle.)
From the tracked center for tracked vehicles
If the antenna is:
In front of the axle, enter a forward distance.
l
Behind the axle, enter a back distance.
The distance between the ground and the top of the GPS antenna.
The horizontal distance between the center of the front wheel and the center of the back wheel.
Steering settings for EZ-Pilot system
On the EZ-Pilot Settings screen at the
Steering tab, complete the settings for steering.
Setting
Nudge Increment
Angle Per Turn
Freeplay Left
Freeplay Right
Motor Speed
Online Aggressiveness
Approach Aggressiveness
Explanation
The distance the Nudge button on the Run screen moves when you tap it.
The angle the wheels turn during one full rotation of the steering wheel. If the setting is too: l
Low
: The system will turn the wheel too much and the vehicle will perform S-turns.
l
High
: The system will turn the wheel too little and the vehicle will not hold the line.
Adjust if the vehicle drives consistently to the right of the line.
Adjust if the vehicle drives consistently to the left of the line.
The maximum rate at which the SAM-200 will operate.
How aggressively the EZ-Pilot system corrects the deviations from the current guidance line. A setting that is: l
Very high
: Will correct deviations quickly, but the vehicle may steer erratically.
l
Very low
: Will allow a smoother drive down the swath, but the vehicle may go further offline before the deviation is corrected.
How quickly the EZ-Pilot system steers the vehicle onto the
200
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
8 Vehicle guidance setup EZ-Pilot assisted steering system
Setting Explanation
current guidance line. A setting that is: l
Very high
: Steers the vehicle quickly, but the steering correction may be too severe.
l
Very low
: Steers the vehicle very slowly, but the vehicle may overshoot and travel too far down the swath before reaching the guidance line.
Engage settings for EZ-Pilot system
At the EZ-Pilot Settings screen on the
Engage tab, you can edit the system’s engage and disengage behavior if you need to change the settings.
Setting
Operator Time Out
Minimum speed
Maximum speed
Maximum angle
Engage offline
Disengage offline
Coverage log
Explanation
If the steering system is engaged and there has been no operator interaction with the FM-1000 Plus application for longer than the operator timeout period, a message displays on the screen. If you acknowledge the message within 30 seconds, the system does not disengage. Otherwise, the EZ-
Pilot system steering disengages.
Minimum speed at which the system can engage. If the system is engaged and the speed drops below this limit, the system disengages.
Maximum speed at which the system can engage. If the system is engaged and the speed increases above this limit, the system disengages.
Maximum angle at which the system can engage. If the vehicle approaches the swath at an angle greater than this limit, it cannot be engaged.
Maximum distance from the swath at which the system can engage. If the vehicle approaches the swath at a distance greater than this limit, it cannot be engaged.
Maximum distance from the swath at which the system can remain engaged. If the vehicle drives offline greater than this limit, the system disengages.
Displays on the Run screen to show what areas have been applied.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
201
EZ-Pilot assisted steering system 8 Vehicle guidance setup
Setting
Override sensitivity
Explanation
l
Select
When Engaged to automatically show coverage logging when the system is engaged. See
l
Select
Manual to show coverage logging only when you tap
.
Amount the steering wheel must be turned manually before the system disengages.
EZ-Pilot system calibration
To calibrate the EZ-Pilot system to work with the FM-1000 Plus application, you must complete the following:
1. Enter the vehicle settings.
2. Complete calibration for T3™ roll compensation. See
T3 roll compensation calibration (page
3. Calibrate the EZ-Pilot system:
Angle per turn. See
SAM-200 calibration (page 202)
.
l
Aggressiveness and Freeplay offset. See
Steering performance calibration (page 203)
).
4. Confirm the calibration settings.
Note – You may have to perform the EZ-Pilot calibration more than once to achieve optimal results.
SAM-200 calibration
Note – You must calibrate the IMD-600 before you calibrate the SAM-200.
1. At the Configuration screen, select
Calibration screen displays.
EZ-Pilot and then tap
Calibrate
. The EZ-Pilot Steering
202
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
8 Vehicle guidance setup EZ-Pilot assisted steering system
2. Select
SAM-200 and tap
OK
.
3. Ensure that you are operating the vehicle in an open field with ample area for the vehicle to make right and left turns.
4. For best results, operate the vehicle at between 2 and 4 mph.
5. To calibrate the right turn angle: a. Drive straight forward until (yellow) displays.
b. Tap
. Allow the system to operate for 20 seconds until you receive a message that the calibration is complete.
WARNING –
Auto guidance systems cannot avoid items in the field such as obstacles. Make sure you are adequately trained to operate the auto guidance system.
6. Repeat the steps to calibrate the left turn angle.
Steering performance calibration
To calibrate the EZ-Pilot system and set the correct steering performance parameters, the following steps must be completed with the vehicle moving forward along an A-B line.
1. At the EZ-Pilot Steering Calibration screen, select
Steering Performance
. The EZ-Pilot Steering
Performance screen displays.
2. Tap the
Override Sensitivity tab.
3. Adjust the force required to manually override EZ-Pilot.
4. Tap the
Aggressiveness tab. The aggressiveness setting controls the amount of force that required to disengage the system and how aggressively the system holds the line. If the setting is: l
Too low, the vehicle will not hold the line
Too high, the vehicle may over-correct and make S-turns
5. Adjust the
Aggressiveness setting to get the vehicle as close to the line as possible without going into S-turns. To make turns: l
More aggressive: Increase the aggressiveness value.
Less aggressive: Decrease the aggressiveness value.
6. Tap the
Free Play tab.
7. Adjust the freeplay offset if the steering has greater freeplay in one direction than the other, causing it to drive consistently to one side of the guidance line. To make this adjustment: a. Engage the on an AB line.
b. If the vehicle is offline to the left, increase the freeplay offset to the right.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
203
EZ-Pilot assisted steering system 8 Vehicle guidance setup c. If the vehicle is offline to the right, increase the freeplay offset to the left.
d. Enter the parameters and then tap
OK
. The EZ-Pilot Steering Calibration screen displays.
Note – If you are calibrating a 4WD articulated vehicle, you may need to set the Motor Speed setting to
Auto Low.
Note – The Advanced Calibration tab is currently not available. To access these options, select EZ-Pilot
Diagnostics from the main Configuration screen.
8. Tap
OK
. The Configuration screen displays.
T3 roll compensation calibration
The EZ-Pilot system contains sensors that use T3 terrain compensation technology to provide roll compensation when the vehicle is on a slope or drives over a bump. For roll compensation to work correctly, the IMD-600 must be calibrated.
1. At the Configuration screen, select
Calibration screen displays.
EZ-Pilot and then tap
Calibrate
. The EZ-Pilot Steering
2. Select
IMD-600 Orientation and tap
OK
. The EZ-Pilot Roll Calibration screen displays.
Note – For best accuracy, install the IMD-600 as shown in the installation instructions for the supported platform in which it is being installed. Make sure the IMD-600 is installed at right angles to the center line of the vehicle. Non-orthogonal angles will cause performance degradation.
3. From the
Orientation list, select the orientation of the IMD-600 module and then tap
Next
.
4. Park the vehicle, mark the inside position of both sets of wheels and then tap
Next
.
The FM-1000 Plus application records the roll offset in the first direction. This takes approximately 20 seconds. Do not move the vehicle while the offset is being read.
5. Turn the vehicle around, ensure the wheels are parked over the marks created in step 4 and then tap
Next
.
The FM-1000 Plus application records the roll offset in the second direction. This takes approximately 20 seconds. Do not move the vehicle while the offset is being read.
The T3 calibration results display in the
Roll Offset section of the screen. The roll offset value should be between 0° and 4°.
6. Tap
OK
. The EZ-Pilot Steering Calibration screen displays.
204
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
8 Vehicle guidance setup EZ-Steer assisted steering system
EZ-Steer assisted steering system
The EZ-Steer assisted steering system uses GPS to provide automatic vehicle guidance.
For cabling information, see XCN-2050 Cabling Guide.
For operational information, see
EZ-Steer system operation (page 419) .
To set up the EZ-Steer system:
1. Complete the
GPS receiver settings (page 116)
.
2. At the Configuration screen, select displays.
3. Complete the settings as appropriate.
EZ-Steer and tap
Setup
. The EZ-Steer Settings screen
Setting
Vehicle Type
Axle to Antenna
Offset
Antenna Height
Wheelbase
Explanation
Type of vehicle
The horizontal distance between the axle and the antenna. Measure the distance accurately (within 3 inches). An incorrect offset may cause poor steering performance.
Note – Measure the offset distance as accurately as possible (within 3"). An incorrect offset may cause poor steering performance.
l
If the antenna is in front of the axle, enter a forward distance.
If the antenna is behind the axle, enter a back distance.
Measure the antenna height vertically, from the ground to the base of the antenna.
The horizontal distance between the center of the front wheel and the center of the back wheel.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
205
EZ-Steer assisted steering system 8 Vehicle guidance setup
Note – The Engage, Steering, and Advanced tabs on this screen are completed automatically with starting values, based on the vehicle type selected.
4. Tap
OK
. The Configuration screen displays.
Engage settings for EZ-Steer
To edit the EZ-Steer system engage settings:
1. At the EZ-Steer Settings screen, select the
Engage Options tab and complete the settings.
Setting
Minimum speed
Maximum speed
Maximum angle
Engage offline
Disengage offline
Engage on A-B
Override sensitivity
EZ-Steer external switch
Explanation
Minimum speed at which the system can engage. If the system is engaged and the speed drops below this limit, the system engages.
Maximum speed at which the system can engage. If the system is engaged and the speed increases above this limit, the system disengages.
Maximum angle at which the system can engage. If the vehicle approaches the swath at an angle greater than this limit, it cannot be engaged.
Maximum distance from the swath at which the system can engage. If the vehicle approaches the swath at a distance greater than this limit, it cannot be engaged.
Maximum distance from the swath at which the system can remain engaged. If the vehicle drives offline greater than this limit, the system disengages.
Set up whether the system can or cannot be engaged on the master A-B line.
Amount the steering wheel must be turned manually before the system disengages.
Set up the behavior of a seat or foot switch.
2. Tap
OK
. The Configuration screen displays.
Advanced settings for EZ-Pilot
At the EZ-Pilot Settings screen on the
Advanced tab, complete the settings as appropriate.
206
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
8 Vehicle guidance setup EZ-Steer assisted steering system
Setting
Roll Offset Angle
Estimate Steering Angle Bias
Dynamic Approach Angle
(Heading)
Steering Slew Limit
Steering Acceleration Limit
Explanation
Fine-tunes the roll calibration value after it has been determined in the initial calibration process.
Note – This value is in roll degrees, not distance (inches, cm, and so on) offline.
For long, straight passes, helps drive the lingering cross track error due to erroneous steering angle measurements to zero.
When enabled: l
Allows for a steeper approach path to the AB line when further away l
Reduces the path angle as the vehicle approaches the line
Note – This setting does not increase the angle at which the system can be engaged from the line, but does increase the approach angle after engagement.
Controls the maximum sustained rate that the steering will respond.
l
Lower value: Steering is smoother and slower.
Note – A value that is too low may cause vehicle instability.
l
Higher value: Steering is quicker and more responsive.
Controls the rate at which the EZ-Pilot system switches from no steering movement to the full steering slew rate.
l
Lower value: Steering is smoother.
Note – A value that is too low may cause vehicle instability. Set the value to zero to disable the setting.
l
Higher value: Steering is more aggressive.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
207
EZ-Steer assisted steering system 8 Vehicle guidance setup
EZ-Steer system calibration
Before you calibrate the vehicle: l
Ensure that the vehicle’s hydraulic oil is up to operating temperature. Refer to the vehicle documentation.
l
Ensure that the tire pressure is correct.
l
Perform initial calibration without an implement or with the booms folded in on a highclearance sprayer. After initial calibration is completed, you can fine tune the settings with the implement or booms folded out.
l
Choose a field with the smoothest possible surface and perform calibration at the normal operating speed for the vehicle.
l
Have a straight AB line available. If you do not create an A–B line before you begin the calibration, the system will prompt you to open a field and create one.
To calibrate the EZ-Steer system:
1. Complete the
T2 roll compensation calibration for EZ-Steer system (page 210) .
2. Calibrate the EZ-Steer system.
l
Angle per Turn calibration for EZ-Steer system (page 209)
Aggressiveness calibration for EZ-Steer system (page 208)
l
Freeplay Offset calibration for EZ-Steer system (page 209)
3. Confirm the calibration settings.
Note – You may have to perform the EZ-Steer calibration more than once to achieve optimal results.
Aggressiveness calibration for EZ-Steer system
The aggressiveness setting fine-tunes how aggressively the system holds the line. If the setting is too low, the vehicle will not hold the line. If the setting is too high, the vehicle may over-correct and make S-turns.
To configure the aggressiveness settings, at the EZ-Steer Steering Performance screen select the
Step
2 tab.
Adjust the aggressiveness setting to get the vehicle as close to the line as possible without going into S-turns. To make: l
More aggressive turns, increase the aggressiveness l
Less aggressive turns, decrease the aggressiveness
208
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
8 Vehicle guidance setup EZ-Steer assisted steering system
Angle per Turn calibration for EZ-Steer system
Angle per Turn is a course adjustment of the angle that the wheels turn through during one full rotation of the steering wheel. If the setting is too low, the system may require several attempts to reach the line.
To calibrate the EZ-Steer system, and set the correct steering performance parameters, complete the following steps with the vehicle moving forward along the A-B line.
Note – Use the Cross Track Error history plot on the top right of the page and the Average Offline distance to optimize EZ-Steer performance for each step in the calibration.
1. At the EZ-Steer Steering Calibration screen, select
Steering Performance
. The EZ-Steer Steering
Performance screen displays.
2. Select the
Step 1 tab.
3. With the vehicle moving forward along the A–B line: a. Nudge the vehicle left or right 1 m (3') from the A–B line.
b. Engage the EZ-Steer system.
4. Adjust the
Angle per Turn value so that when the system is engaged, the vehicle moves close to the guidance line. To make: l
More aggressive turns, decrease the value for angle per turn
Less aggressive turns, increase the value for angle per turn
Freeplay Offset calibration for EZ-Steer system
Add a Freeplay Offset if the steering has greater freeplay in one direction than the other, causing it to drive consistently to one side of the guidance line.
Note – If you are calibrating a 4WD articulated vehicle, you may need to set the Motor Speed setting to Auto
Low.
Note – The Advanced Calibration tab is currently not available. To access these options, select the EZ-Steer
Diagnostics
from the main Configuration screen.
1. To adjust the Freeplay Offset settings, at the EZ-Steer Steering Performance screen select the
Step 3 tab.
2. Engage the system on the A–B line. If the vehicle is offline: l
To the left, increase the freeplay offset to the right
To the right, increase the freeplay offset to the left
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
209
EZ-Steer assisted steering system 8 Vehicle guidance setup
WARNING –
Many large and sudden changes in satellite geometry caused by blocked satellites can cause significant position shifts. If operating under these conditions, auto-guidance systems can react abruptly. To avoid possible personal injury or damage to property under these conditions, disable the auto-guidance system and take manual control of the vehicle until conditions have cleared.
3. Enter the parameters and then tap
OK
. The EZ-Steer Steering Calibration screen displays.
4. Tap
OK
. The Configuration screen displays.
T2 roll compensation calibration for EZ-Steer system
The EZ-Steer system contains sensors that use T2™ terrain compensation technology to provide roll compensation when the vehicle is on a slope or drives over a bump. For roll compensation to work correctly, the controller must be calibrated.
1. Select
EZ-Steer and then tap
Calibrate
. The EZ-Steer Steering Calibration screen displays.
2. Select
Controller Orientation and tap
OK
. The next step in calibration displays.
3. From the
Orientation list, select the orientation of the steering control module and then tap
Next
.
The next step in calibration displays.
4. Park the vehicle, mark the inside position of both sets of wheels and then tap
Next
. The FM-
1000 Plus application records the roll offset in the first direction. This takes approximately 20 seconds. Do not move the vehicle while the offset is being read.
5. Turn the vehicle around, ensure the wheels are parked over the marks created in the previous step and then tap
Next
. The next step in calibration displays.
The FM-1000 Plus application records the roll offset in the second direction. This takes approximately 20 seconds. Do not move the vehicle while the offset is being read.
The T2 calibration results will be listed in the
Roll Offset section. The
Roll Offset value should be between 0° and 4°.
6. Tap
OK
. The EZ-Steer Steering Calibration screen displays.
210
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
Chapter
9
Field-IQ system setup
In this chapter:
Equipment calibration for Field-IQ
When the Field-IQ system is installed, the
FM-1000 Plus application can control: l
Planters l
Sprayers l
Air seeders l
Liquid strip-till tool-bars l
Spinner spreaders
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
211
Field-IQ system functionality 9 Field-IQ system setup
Field-IQ system functionality
The Field-IQ system can perform automatic section control using: l
Tru Count Air Clutch® l
Boom valves l
LiquiBlock™ l
Various section control devices
While performing automatic section control it can control rates using a prescription with: l
Rawson™ drives l
Servo valves l
PWM valves l
Various flow control devices
The Field-IQ system can be configured to perform different functions.
Application
Planter
Sprayer
Strip-till (liquid)
Main functions
l
Seed Section Control of up to 48 individual rows (Field-IQ system section control module(s) needed) using Tru Count Air Clutches l
Seed Rate Control using up to 4 Rawson drives to change seed population l
Seed Rate control using up to 6 PWM drives to change seed population l
Liquid Fertilizer Control of up to 48 individual liquid nozzles (Field-IQ section control module(s) needed) using Tru Count LiquiBlock valves l
Variety tracking l
Liquid Rate Control, using either a PWM or Servo control valve l
Liquid Section Control of up to 48 individual spray nozzles (Field-IQ
Section Control Module(s) needed) using existing boom shutoff valves or
Tru Count LiquiBlock valves l
l
Liquid Section Control of up to 48 sections or individual sections (Field-IQ
Section Control Module(s) needed) using Tru Count LiquiBlock valves l
Liquid Rate Control using up to 2 Rawson drives connected to fixed
displacement pumps, such as CDS-John Blue piston pumps, to change liquid rate (Field-IQ Rawson Control Module(s) needed)
212
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
9 Field-IQ system setup Field-IQ system functionality
Application
Spreading
Air seeder
Main functions
l
Liquid Rate Control using either a PWM or Servo control valve and flow meter l
Spreading Rate Control using a Rawson Drive (Field-IQ Rawson Control
Module(s) needed) l
Spreading Rate Control using either a PWM or Servo control valve and application rate sensor l
Section Control of up to 96 rows of blockage sensors l
Section Control of multiple materials simultaneously with manual rate or prescription l
Control existing PWM, linear actuators, or servo systems l
Auxiliary sensors can read fan speed, bin level, air pressure, and implement switches
For installation and cabling information, see XCN-2050 Cabling Guide.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
213
Pressure limiting 9 Field-IQ system setup
Pressure limiting
To control rate the application rate on a sprayer, two factors must be adjusted in relation to forward speed to keep the application constant: l
Control flow in relation to speed
l
Pressure limiting supports these valve/drive types: l
PWM l
Bypass Servo l
Pump Servo
Flow control
Application rate control on a sprayer is maintained by controlling the flow of material directed to the boom. The volume of material sent to the boom is determined by the: l
Number of sections that are open l
Forward speed l
Target rate
The pressure will vary within the sprayer depending on such factors.
When speed drastically changes, such as when the vehicle slows before a turn or to avoid an obstacle, pressure can drop or rise above the recommended pressure for the tip and create an incorrect spray pattern.
Pressure limiting
While the pressure will vary within the boom depending on its operation, good canopy penetration depends on maintaining a consistent spray pattern. Nozzle pressure must be within a working range for a consistent pattern.
Pressure limiting is used to limit the pressure during operation between a minimum and maximum pressure. The system operates with flow control (the flow meter) until it reaches either the maximum or minimum pressure limit. After reaching the limit, the system holds at the specific limit.
The pressure will adjust to the high or low limit until commanded to return to normal flow control.
By limiting the pressure, the psi or kpa stays within an acceptable range when the sprayer speed decreases or increases. Pressure limiting ensures a sufficient but not excessive flow through the nozzle to maintain a good spray pattern.
Pressure limiting works only when sections are on. When sections are off, the system will use standby pressure if you are using a bypass or PWM valve.
214
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
9 Field-IQ system setup General setup information
Low pressure example
During normal operation, all sections are closed but one and the system is running a low rate. To keep the nozzles from pulsing or fluctuating, the system will switch to the low pressure limit.
High pressure examples
In the field during a high flow if you shut the sections off, there will be a spike in pressure. Pressure limiting protects the system from these spikes.
If the vehicle speed is too fast or the rate is too high for the tip size, pressure limiting prevents over pressurization of the system.
Setup
The pressure limiting settings begin at the
.
General setup information
Before starting the Field-IQ system setup, ensure that: l
All components of the system are installed on the vehicle and implement.
l
Field-IQ has been activated for use. See
Activate features/plugins for use (page 60)
.
l
The implement has been set up and configured for the appropriate operation, such as planting or spraying. See
Implement setup for Field-IQ (page 215)
.
For cabling information, see the XCN-2050 Cabling Guide.
For operational information, see
Field-IQ operation (page 389) .
Implement setup for Field-IQ
The implement type defines the set up options for the Field-IQ system.
For example, if the material is set to granular fertilizer and the implement is set to sprayer, the system will not allow you to enter a gate height setting.
When running a fertilizer cart, set the implement type to air seeder. This will allow the user to not have to enter gate dimensions.
1. Navigate to the Implement Setup screen.
2. On the
Implement Type tab: a. From the
Operations list, choose the operation.
b. Tap
Edit
. The Select Implement Layout screen displays.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
215
Implement setup for Field-IQ 9 Field-IQ system setup c. Tap the appropriate layout and then tap
OK
.
Operations
Spreading
Spraying
Planting
Seeder
Tillage
Other
Layouts
Pull-type spreader
Self-propelled spreader
Self-propelled, front boom
Self-propelled, rear boom
Pull-type sprayer
Standard
Front split
Rear split
Center offset
None
None
None
3. On the
Measurements tab, enter the measurements for the implement.
These measurements are crucial to the performance of the vehicle and implement in the field.
Measurement
Swath Width
Application Width
Application Offset
Explanation
The distance between guidance lines. This is typically the working width of your implement, vehicle, or header.
The width of a pass including any overlap. This measurement is reflected by the FM-1000 Plus application's coverage map.
The distance between the tractor and the implement:
Guidance Only
: This is measured from the fixed axle of the vehicle to the location where the coverage will be mapped. Used to reference from the vehicle to the implement / application point.
l
Field-IQ
: Measured from the fixed axle of the vehicle to the implement tool bar.
The offset is measured from the fixed axle of the vehicle to the point on the implement where coverage logging will be mapped.
The fixed axle varies depending on vehicle type:
Rear axle on front-steering tractors and self-propelled sprayers l
Front axle on 4 x 4 articulated tractors
216
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
9 Field-IQ system setup Implement setup for Field-IQ
Measurement
Rows
Left/Right Offset
Explanation
l
Center of tracks on tracked tractor
Note – If you set Application Offset to zero, you will not be able to select
Drawbar for the Type in the Geometry tab.
Number of rows that are covered by the implement.
This measurement adjusts the tractor path so that an offset implement is centered on the guidance line. It is measured from the center of the vehicle ot the center of the implement or header.
4. On the
Geometry tab: a. Select the type, which controls how the implement is modeled: Either Hitch / 3 pt or
Drawbar.
Note – If
Application Offset
is set to zero in the
Implement Type
tab, you cannot select
Drawbar
.
b. Enter the appropriate measurement. Some measurements are only available if Implement
Monitoring, TrueGuide, or TrueTractor is active.
Measurement
Hitch to Ground
Contact Point
Antenna Front/Back
Offset
Measured from the implement working point to the center of the
GPS antenna. This is used only when an GPS antenna is mounted on the implement.
When using the TrueGuide system, minimize the antenna offset position. If an antenna offset is required, set the left/right offset first, then limit the offset to the forward distance of 2 m / 80” or less.
Back offsets with the TrueGuide system are not accepted.
Antenna Left/Right
Offset
Explanation
Measured from the tractor hitch pin to the soil engagement point that the implement rotates about.
For planters this is typically the seeding units or the midpoint of several rows of tools.
Antenna Height
Measured from the center of the implement to the center of the
GPS antenna. This is used only when the GPS antenna is mounted on the implement.
When using the TrueGuide system, minimize the antenna offset positions, They should not exceed 1 m or 40”.
The working height of the GPS antenna on the implement. This is used only when the GPS antenna is mounted on the implement.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
217
Field-IQ system setup 9 Field-IQ system setup
5. On the
Overlap tab, choose the correct option for the infill boundary:
Outer
: Uses the field boundary as the infill boundary l
Inner
: When running a Headland setting, this moves the boundary to the inside of the last headland pass. This allows you to run the inside patterns first before running the headland and then use the inner boundary for section / rate shutoff.
6. On the
Switches tab, enable any implement switches that are connected to the Field-IQ system.
Tap
Setup
. The Add/Edit Implement Lift Sensor screen displays.
Setting
Status
Explanation
Off
: No Switches are attached to the Field-IQ system.
On
: One or more implement switches are attached to the Field-IQ system.
Number of Switches Select the number of implement switches that are attached to the
Field-IQ system. The maximim is 3.
Minimum Changed
Switches
Enter the number of implement switches the system should recognize to determine if the implement is lifted.
For example, if the total number of switches is 2, and the Minimum
Changed Switches is 2, both switches must show raised before determining the implement is in the raised position.
Field-IQ system setup
1. At the Configuration screen, select
Field-IQ and then tap
Setup
.
2. Tap the appropriate button to continue setup.
Button
Material Setup
Control Setup
Material Assignment
Tap to...
Set up a predefined list of materials to use in the Control Setup or
Material Assignment screens.
See
Set up control locations and assign Field-IQ system modules.
See
.
Assign materials that were set up in the Material Setup screen to the
Locations that were set up in the Control Setup screen.
218
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
9 Field-IQ system setup Material setup
Material setup
When you select a material from the
Available Materials list, some of its specific settings appear on the right-hand side of the screen. This allows you to check some of the settings needing to view the material.
Add or edit a material
Enter information about the material.
1. At the Material Setup screen, tap
Add
. The Material Details screen displays.
2. At the
Material tab, enter the appropriate settings and tap
Next
. See
3. At the
Alarms tab, enter the alarm information and tap
Next
. See
.
4. At the
Operation tab, complete the settings and tap
Next
. See
5. At the
Coefficient tab, enter the calibration value with the material. The material may have different calibrations for different locations. This means that you will need to make a different material for each location and name them in such a way (for example, Wheat Front Bin, Wheat
Rear Bin) that you will know which location to use them in. When you have entered the coefficient, tap
OK
.
See
Delete a material
1. At the Material Setup screen, tap
Delete
.
2. To remove the material, tap
Remove
. A message displays prompting you to tap either: l
Remove
to remove the material.
Cancel
to return to the Material Setup screen.
Alarms tab
Setting
High Alarm
Low Alarm
Singulation Low
Seeds When Off
Alarm triggers when...
The rate reaches the selected percentage above the target for longer than the delay setting
The rate drops the below the target for longer than the delay setting for the selected percentage
The singulation reaches a percentage lower than 100% for longer than the delay setting
This percentage of seeds is detected while the sections are off
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
219
Material setup 9 Field-IQ system setup
Setting
No Seeds When On
Blockage Sensitivity/Alarm
Multiples Threshold
Skips Threshold
Averaging Sample Size
Misplaced Seeds Threshold
Alarm triggers when...
for longer than the delay setting
This percentage of seeds is not detected for longer than the delay setting
When less than this amount of material is sensed for the number of seconds given. When no pulses are sensed for this amount of time the alarm triggers.
When two seeds fall within this percentage of seed spacing
(this is considered a double). Lowering this number requires seeds to be closer together to be reported as a double.
If two seeds fall outside of this percentage of seed spacing (this is considered a ). Raising this number requires seeds to be further apart to be a skip.
The number of seeds used to calculate the average. Increasing this amount makes the response slower but more stable.
If a seed falls outside this percentage of seed spacing then it is considered misplaced and reduces the spacing quality.
Operation tab
Setting
Jump Start Speed
Jump Start Timeout
Shutoff Speed
Minimum Override Speed
Note – Not available if pressure limiting is enabled.
Explanation
The speed to be used when the master switch on the Field-IQ system master switch box is put in the jump start position.
This manual override option can be used to operate the system when the vehicle is stationary. Jump start is also used when GPS has become unavailable.
Time that Jumpstart speed will be active. A timeout setting for the Jump Start Speed, which allows you to run the jump start for a specified amount of time.
Auto control resumes if Jump Start Speed is exceeded by
Ground Speed.
This setting will shut the control system down when the vehicle reaches a minimum speed.
Setting used to hold the operating speed at a preset minimum to prevent the control system from operating out of a controllable range. Maintains the application rate when the implement's actual speed drops below the value entered. It is
220
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
9 Field-IQ system setup Material setup
Setting
Apply Latency to Boundary
Note – Only applies to fields that have a boundary.
Rate Snapping
Explanation
used to ensure consistent material flow during slow speeds.
This setting is also applied when you exit an exclusion zone and return to the workable area of the field.
l
Yes
: The system starts when needed to begin applying immediately when crossing a boundary.
l
No
: The system starts when the boundary is reached and any mechanical delay could leave a gap between the boundary and where the product is applied. When GPS accuracy is low, this is the preferred selection.
Due to pump constraints, liquid flow generally is inconsistent with the information on the FM-1000 Plus application.
Enabling this setting gives you a more steady reading of the applied rate. If you are with in the allowable error, you will see the applied rate just show your target rate.
Coefficent tab
The material may have different calibrations for different locations. This means that you will need to make a different material for each location and name them in such a way (for example, Wheat Front
Bin, Wheat Rear Bin) that you will know which location to use them in.
1. Enter the coefficient.
2. Tap
OK
.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
221
Control setup 9 Field-IQ system setup
Control setup
The first time you tap
Control Setup
, the Control Setup screen is blank and you can only add a location.
After you have added a location, you can select it from the Location list on the right-hand side of the screen to see the assigned modules.
Button
Add
Edit
Delete
Tap to...
Add and set up a new control location. This opens the Control Details screen, which contains the following tabs: l
l
l
Section Control tab (page 225)
l
l
l
View or edit the details of an existing control location.
Delete an existing location.
A message displays prompting you to tap either: l
Remove
to remove the material l
Cancel
to return to the Control Setup screen
Material tab
1. On the
Material tab at the
Available Materials list, select the material that will be set up in this location.
222
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
9 Field-IQ system setup Control setup
Setting
Material Type
Material Name
Material Units
Seeds Per Pound
Target Rate 1
Target Rate 2
Rate Increment
Manual Rate
Increment
Minimum Rate
Explanation
Select the type of material being applied:
Row Crop Seed l
Liquid l
Granular Seed l
Granular Fertilizer l
Anhydrous
Name of the material
Units to use with the selected material
Number of seeds per pound
Preset volume that the implement supplies when the rate switch is in position 1.
Note – For liquid, granular fertilizer, NH3, and Granular seed, enter the desired amount of material that you would like to apply. For Row Crop seed, the target rate for row crop seed is entered as Ks/a. 1 Ks/a equals 1000 seeds per acre. When entering a target rate of 25500 into the FM-1000 Plus application, type it as 25.5.
Present volume that the implement supplies when the rate switch is in position 2.
Note – For liquid, granular fertilizer, NH3, and Granular seed, enter the desired amount of material that you would like to apply. For Row Crop seed, the target rate for row crop seed is entered as Ks/a. 1 Ks/a equals 1000 seeds per acre. When entering a target rate of 25500 into the FM-1000 Plus application, type it as 25.5.
This setting adjusts the increment that the target rate will adjust by when in rate 1 or 2.
Controls the aggressiveness of the rate adjustment switch when in manual rate.
If the valve is over active when in manual rate you need to lower the manual rate increment.
l
If the valve is slow to respond when in manual rate you need to increase the manual rate increment.
Sets the minimum rate increment.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
223
Control setup 9 Field-IQ system setup
Setting
Maximum Rate
Explanation
Sets the maximum rate increment.
Note – If you don’t want the system to be capable of applying more than
100 units, set the maximum rate to 100 units.
2. If no materials are listed, create a material that you can assign. See
.
Note – You can also assign the correct material later using the Material Assignment option, see
Material assignment (page 396)
.
3. Tap
Next
to go to the
.
Layout
At the
Layout tab, enter information about the implement that will be used to apply the material.
Setting
Location Name
Bin/Tank Setup
Explanation
Add a name to the
Control Location
, for example, Hoppers, Front Bin, Rear
Bin, Left Saddle Tanks.
The system tracks how much material is left in the bin/tank, and provides a warning when the bin/tank needs to be refilled. Adjust the settings for: l
Status
: l
On
: The system tracks the bin/tank level and provide warnings.
l
Off
: The system will not track the bin/tank level or provide warnings.
Density
: (Granular and granulated material only.) Used in system setup and calibration to ensure accuracy in applying product. When changing material this setting must be updated.
l l
Capacity Units
: Select Default Units or Bushels. Default units will vary according to the type of material that is being applied.
Bin Capacity
: The amount the tank/bin holds when full.
Note – Markings on tank/bin may not be accurate.
l
Current Volume
: Current volume of the product in the tank.
l
Partial Refill
: The amount of material that will be added to the bin/tank during a partial refill.
l
Warning Level
: Setting that triggers a low bin warning. The level at which a warning displays on the screen when your bin/tank reaches a set threshold.
224
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
9 Field-IQ system setup Control setup
Setting Explanation
l
Spinner Pulses Per Revolution
: Enter the number of magnetic pick up points per revolution of the spinner.
l
Refill Tank/Bin
: Refills the tank/bin to capacity.
l
Partial Refill Tank/Bin
: Refills the tank/bin to the
Partial Refill amount.
Row Offset Setup
Provides additional tuning by detailing where the material will be applied in relation to the vehicle. Increase coverage accuracy by selecting one or two offsets.
Row offsets are measured from the
Application Offset value entered in the
Measurements tab of the Implement Configuration wizard.
l
Number of row offsets
: Use 1 row offset when coverage is applied at a single location. Use two row offsets when planting singulated seed with staggered implements.
l
Row Offset (1 row offset)
: Enter the distance between the Application
Offset and the row.
l
Rear Row Offset (2 row offset)
: Enter the distance between the Application
Offset and the rear row.
l
Front Row Offset (2 row offset)
: Enter the distance between the
Application Offset and the front row.
Material Controlled By You are controlling the material with: l
Switch Boxes l
On Screen
Section Control tab
With section control, you can avoid double coverage and eliminating wasted inputs using automatic or manual section control. Section control: l
Automatically control up to 48 rows individually l
Enables you to see where you have been and what you have done with overlap detection l
Eliminates overlap by adding Tru Count Air Clutches® and Tru Count LiquiBlock™ valves
At the Section Control tab, you can set up section control as: l
Rate as Section : To use rate control drives as section shutoffs
l
Material linking: To link primary and secondary materials l
Automatic Section Control: Automatic section control with various section control devices
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
225
Control setup 9 Field-IQ system setup
Rate as Section
The Field-IQ system can use the rate control drives as section shutoffs. For example, when going into a nonproductive or covered area the rate control drives will be commanded to zero rate.
1. To set up rate as sections, at the
Section Control tab, complete these settings.
Setting
Section Control
Section Control
Explanation
Select Rate as Section.
Tap
Setup
to adjust latency and overlap values.
2. Select the
Rate Control tab and then set up rate control.
Material linking
The Field-IQ system can link primary and secondary materials, where the secondary material uses the output of the primary material. For example, LiquiBlock valves can be linked to use the output of Tru Count Air Clutch systems.
When planting, seeding, or strip-tilling, you can link the following together: l
Liquid l
Granular seed l
Granular fertilizer
Note – Anhydrous cannot be linked.
When the system is in diagnostics mode: l
The secondary material is not functional.
l
You can only operate a linked material when you also open the sections of the primary material.
1. To link materials, at the
Section Control tab, complete these settings.
Setting
Section Control
Linked Material
Explanation
Select
Link to Material
.
Select the primary material you want to link to.
2. Select the Rate Control tab and then set up rate control.
For more information, see the sections for each type below.
226
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
9 Field-IQ system setup Control setup
Automatic Section Control
The Field-IQ system can perform automatic section control using: l
Air clutch (such as Tru Count Air Clutch) or electric clutch: Used for TC and John Deere row command clutches that require inverted switching. (Signal to shut row off) l
Boom valves: Used for 3 wire boom valves and 2 wire solenoid valves that require a 12v signal to open.
l
LiquiBlock valves (such as Tru Count LiquiBlock valves): Used for Liquiblock valves that require inverted switching.
l
Various section control devices
1. At the Field-IQ Setup screen on the
Section Control tab, for: a.
Section Control
: Select
On
.
b.
Section Control Module Location
: Tap
Setup
. The Section Control Module Setup screen displays.
2. Complete the settings for: l
Number of Modules
: The total number of modules that will be used on the current control location.
Module
: Assign the serial numbers of the modules to their location on the current control location.
Note – Sections start from left to right in their numbering. This means that Section 1 is on the far left and numbers increase to the right.
l
Number of Sections
: The number of sections physically wired into the selected module serial number.
3. If you have a row crop, tap Section Grouping. Otherwise tap Section Widths.
4. Set up the section widths.
Note – Both of these setups allow you to set the section widths. Section Grouping does it by grouping rows together in a section and Sections Widths allows you to enter an actual measurement.
a. For section grouping, at the Section Grouping screen: Complete each row from the left and to right in sequence until all the rows are grouped correctly and then tap
OK
.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
227
Control setup 9 Field-IQ system setup
For section widths, at the Section Widths screen: Enter the section width for each section from left to right in sequence.
b.
When you are finished, tap OK.
5. At the Section Control Module Setup screen, tap
Advanced Wire Assignment
.
Note – This button is only available for specific cases, so may not be visible.
Assign the rows to the correct module and wire location. To assign a wire ID to a row, tap the module icon, select the number of the wire you want to assign from the drop-down list. and then tap on the row to assign that module and wire. It is recommended that you work from left to right:
228
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
9 Field-IQ system setup Control setup
Latency
Setting
On Latency
Off Latency
Explanation
By default, this is set to 0.0 seconds. Use this setting unless you are experiencing a long response time from your clutch or valve (this can happen on larger systems). In this case, increase the On Latency value to compensate the delay, and the system will turn on in advance.
By default, this is set to 0.0 seconds. Use this setting unless you are experiencing a long response time from your clutch or valve (this can happen on larger systems). In this case, increase the Off Latency value to compensate for the delay, and the system will turn off after the set number of seconds.
Overlap
Setting
Start Overlap
End Overlap
Coverage Switching
Overlap
Boundary Switching
Overlap
Explanation
Distance of intentional swath overlap when entering a previously applied area. The higher the number, the greater the overlapped area.
Distance of intentional swath overlap when exiting a previously applied area. The higher the number, the greater the overlapped area.
Percentage of the section width for intentional swath overlap. The higher the number, the greater the overlapped area before the section is turned off.
Percentage of the section width for intentional overlap of a boundary.
The higher the number, the greater the overlapped area into the boundary area.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
229
Rate Control tab
Rate Control tab
9 Field-IQ system setup
At the
Rate Control tab, complete the settings based on your configuration.
230
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
9 Field-IQ system setup Rate Control tab
Setting
Rate Control
Rate Control Module Location
Drive Setup
Number of Nozzles
No/Low Flow Timeout
Explanation
Select
ON to have the Field-IQ system operate a rate control component. The system sets the target rate.
Select
OFF for no rate control. Section switching only.
Tap
Setup
to configure the rate control module(s), their location on the implement, and the width they will control. See
Rate control module setup (page 232)
Tap to set up the drive. The
displays. Complete the settings on each tab.
The number of nozzles on the implement.
This is the time for which the system will attempt to control the rate. Should no response be seen, the control system will shut the channel off.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
231
Rate control module setup
Rate control module setup
9 Field-IQ system setup
Click
Setup
next to
Rate Control Module Location
. The Section Control Module Setup screen displays.
Setting
Number of Modules
Module
Number of Sections
Section Widths
Explanation
The number of modules
Select the module to configure
The number of sections for the module.
Tap to open the
Section Widths screen
At the Section Widths screen enter the width of each section.
232
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
9 Field-IQ system setup Rate control module setup
Drive Setup screen
Valve Setup tab
Setting
Valve Type
Plumbing
Valve Behavior When
Sections Closed
Option
Available with Valve
Types:
N/A
Explanation
Servo
Fast Servo
Pump Servo
Hardi % Bypass
All
All
PWM
Servo
: 2-wire standard servo valve that turns a ball or butterfly valve to adjust product flow
Fast Servo
: 4-wire servo valve motor that turns a ball or butterfly valve to adjust product flow
PWM
: 2-wire PWM valve. An electric solenoid valve that adjust hydraulic flow to a motor. The valve adjusts application rate indirectly.
Pump Servo
: An electric solenoid valve that adjust hydraulic flow to a motor. The valve adjusts application rate indirectly.
Linear Actuator
: A valve that creates a linear motion (as opposed to a rotary motion)
Electric over Hydraulic
: A valve that uses electric current to control the hydraulic valve output
Hardi % Bypass
: Specific system type for Hardi control systems which has a boom line leak back to tank.
Inline
: Valve is in the solution line going to the boom. The valve opens to increase the application rate.
Bypass
: Valve is in the return-to-tank line. The valve closes to increase the application rate.
If you chose this option,
is available to enable.
Close
: When all sections are off, the control valve returns to the closed position.
Lock in Last Position
: When all sections are off, the control valve remains in the last position. This setting allows the system to return to the target rate faster. The valve will remain locked in the position it was in when the boom sections were closed.
Lock in Minimum
: The valve will lock into a minimum position that is configured in setup. With this option, enter the
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
233
Rate control module setup 9 Field-IQ system setup
Setting Option
Available with Valve
Types:
Explanation
Servo
Fast Servo
Pump Servo
PWM
Hardi % Bypass
Lock in Standby Pressure
: Used for maintaining a minimum operational pressure which enables a quicker response when activating sections. When sections are closed, this option can be used.
If you choose this option, enter the
Standby Pressure later.
Auxiliary Valve
Pump Disarming
Switch
Minimum Preset
Position
Standby Pressure
All
All
All
PWM
Servo
Fast Servo
Pump Servo
PWM
Hardi % Bypass
Enable
: Pressure limiting is enabled. With this option, the
tab is available.
Disable
: Pressure limiting is not enabled. Use when no auxiliary valve is installed.
See
Pressure limiting (page 214) .
Note –
only works when the sections are on.
Master
: Valve closes when the system is turned off.
Dump
: Valve opens to dump flow-to-return line when the system is turned off.
Disable
: Auxiliary valve not used or disabled.
Enable
: Select if you have a pump disarming switch installed.
Disable
: Select you do not have a pump disarming switch installed.
Only available if you have chosen PWM for the valve type and
for
Valve Behavior on Sections Closed
.
Enter the psi. When you exit a boundary, nonproductive exclusion zone or previously covered area, the system will hold the desired pressure. When you enter a productive area again that you want to spray, there will be adequate pressure to keep a good nozzle spray pattern.
Required if you selected
for
234
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
9 Field-IQ system setup Rate control module setup
Servo, Fast Servo, Pump Servo or Hardi % Bypass valve setting options
If you choose
Bypass for
Plumbing
,
Lock In Standby Pressure is an available option for
Valve Behavior when sections closed when sections closed. If you choose
Lock In Standby Pressure for
Valve Behavior when sections closed
, enter the
Standby Pressure
.
PWM valve setting options
If you choose: l
Lock in Minimum for
Valve Behavior when sections closed
, enter the
Minimum Preset Position later l
Lock In Standby Pressure for
Valve Behavior when sections closed
, enter the
Standby Pressure later
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
235
Rate control module setup 9 Field-IQ system setup
Feedback Setup tab
Setting
Shaft Encoder
Constant
Gear Ratio
Gear Ratio
Seeds Per Disk
Explanation
Pulses per revolution.
Actual ratio of the application rate sensor to the seed meter shaft RPM.
This is the number of revolutions the application rate sensor turns for each revolution of the seed meter.
The
Gear ratio allows the system to properly figure the meter RPM.
l
Calculate the gear ratio from the encoder to the metering point of the material.
l
Rawson gear ratio should be calculated from the motor to the metering point of the material
If the gear ratio is calculated incorrectly, the system may over or under apply even though it is showing the correct rate on the screen. You may also have issues in the Drive Calibration screen.
Use the calculator (tap
Gear Ratio Calculator
) to determine your gear ratio.
The number of seed openings per disk plate.
Liquid Feedback Setup tab
Setting
Flow Meter Type
Explanation
Select the type of flow meter you are using.
Flowmeter Calibration Enter the number for the flow meter calibration.
Minimum Flow
If you have enabled pressure limiting on the
Valve setup tab, pressure limiting takes precedence over this setting.This may result in the system operating below minimum flow.
Pressure Feedback Setup tab
Setting
Pressure Sensor Input
Location
Sensor Name
Explanation
Select either
Pressure 1 or
Pressure 2
.
Optional name for the pressure sensor.
236
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
9 Field-IQ system setup Rate control module setup
Setting
Sensor Slope
Low Pressure Limit
High Pressure Limit
Maximum Pressure
Explanation
This option is only available if you enabled
at the
Valve Setup tab.
This option is only available if you enabled
at the
Valve Setup tab.
Row monitoring
Setting
Row Monitoring
Setup
Explanation
l
Disabled
: Row monitoring is turned off.
l
Blockage
: Select when using an air seeder or when applying granular material.
l
Seed Count
: Select for precision seeding.
l
Row Sensor Enable
: Turn individual row sensors on or off.
l
Row Sensor Wiring
: Select which wire each row sensor is wired to.
Sensor tab
At the
Sensor tab, you can add alarm functionality to a sensor. You can also access the Sensor Setup screen, where you can add, edit, or delete sensors.
Setting
Sensor Type
Name
Alarm
Warn if below
Warn if above
Warn after
Explanation
The required sensor for which you want to create an alarm.
Displays after you have selected the sensor type. You can enter a name for the sensor.
Enabled: Alarm is enabled
Disabled: There is no alarm
If less than this threshold and longer than the delay time, the alarm will display.
If more than this threshold and longer than the delay time, the alarm will display.
Delay time for the threshold values:
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
237
Rate control module setup 9 Field-IQ system setup
Setting
Sensor Setup
Explanation
l
Warn if below l
Warn if above
Tap to access the
screen.
Sensor Setup screen
At the Sensor Setup screen, you can add, edit or remove a sensor.
When adding or editing a sensor, enter the following information.
Setting
Sensor Type
Name
Sensor Setup
Alarm
Explanation
l
Air pressure/vacuum l
Liquid pressure l
NH3 pressure l
Bin level l
RPM l
Gate Height
Enter a name for the sensor
Field-IQ module
: The Field-IQ system module that is controlling this sensor.
Input location
: Which wire is controlling the sensor. (Not required for gate height.)
Alarm settings
238
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
9 Field-IQ system setup Equipment calibration for Field-IQ
Equipment calibration for Field-IQ
Calibrate the equipment for your setup: l
Anhydrous calibration (page 240)
l
Air Seeder calibration (page 239)
l
Planter calibration (page 242)
l
Sprayer calibration (page 246)
l
Spreader calibration (page 251)
Air Seeder calibration
WARNING –
Moving parts during this operation. Ensure the implement is safe to operate.
To calibrate an air seeder calibrate the implement lift switch, then the modules.
For a spreader or seeder: Minimum and maximum motor RPM are used to keep the motor within the manufactures recommended operating range. Rawson specs are 150 and 500 RPM.
Implement lift switch calibration
1. At the Field-IQ Calibration screen, select
Implement Lift
.
2. Raise the implement and then tap
Next
.
3. Lower the implement and then tap
Next
.
4. Tap
OK
to return to the Field-IQ Calibration screen.
Modules calibration
Calibrate the modules to ensure that your system performs at the level you require.
Note – If you have an implement lift switch, calibrate it first.
The Field-system Calibrate option only displays on the Configuration screen if you have at least one
Field-IQ system Rawson control module or Rate control module set up to control the rate.
1. At the Configuration screen, select
Field-IQ and then tap
Calibrate
.
2. At the Field-IQ Calibration screen, select the operation listed under the module that you want to calibrate. The message
Not calibrated displays at the end of the modules that need calibration.
Note – Calibration screens will vary slightly if you are using a linear actuator.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
239
Equipment calibration for Field-IQ 9 Field-IQ system setup
Note – Before priming the system, the Automatic / Manual Switch on the master switch box must be in the manual position.
3. Tap Drive Calibration and then tap
OK
. The Drive Calibration screen displays. Enter the appropriate settings.
Tab
Drive Limits
Auto-Tuning
Drive Settings
Info
Explanation
Enter the minimum and maximum flow values.
Moving parts during this operation. Ensure that the implement is safe to operate.
Follow the on-screen instructions to auto-tune the system.
Do not perform the auto-tuning function if you have loaded a preset configuration file. Use the predefined configuration settings appropriate for your vehicle.
Turn the master switch on and vary the rates. Adjust values if needed.
Shows the results and drive limits of your calibration.
4. Select
Flow Calibration and then tap
OK
. The Flow Calibration screen displays.
Anhydrous calibration
WARNING –
NH3 is an irritant and corrosive to the skin, eyes, respiratory tract and mucous membranes, and is dangerous if not handled properly. It may cause severe burns to the eyes, lungs, and skin. Skin, and respiratoryrelated diseases could be aggravated by exposure. It is recommended that protective gloves, boots, slicker and/or pants and jacket, and chemical-splash goggles that are impervious to anhydrous ammonia are worn at all times.
WARNING –
Anhydrous valve and flow calibrations require the vehicle and implement to be moving and the implement must be in the ground (the implement lift switch must be down). Take all necessary precautions to ensure user safety. Failure to do so may result in serious injury or death.
To calibrate anhydrous, first calibrate the implement lift switch. Then calibrate the modules to ensure your system performs at the level you require.
Implement lift switch calibration
1. At the Field-IQ Calibration screen, select
Implement Lift
.
2. Raise the implement and then tap
Next
.
3. Lower the implement and then tap
Next
.
4. Tap
OK
to return to the Field-IQ Calibration screen.
240
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
9 Field-IQ system setup Equipment calibration for Field-IQ
Module drive calibration
The anhydrous valve calibration requires the vehicle and implement to be moving and the implement must be in the ground (the implement lift switch must be down). Take all necessary precautions to ensure user safety. Failure to do so may result in serious injury or death.
The Field-IQ system
Calibrate option only displays on the Configuration screen if you have at least one Field-IQ system Rawson control module or Rate control module set up to control the rate.
1. At the Configuration screen, select
Field-IQ and tap
Calibrate
.
2. At the Field-IQ Calibration screen, select the operation under the Module that you would like to calibrate. The message "Not calibrated" displays at the end of the modules that need calibration.
Note – If you have an implement lift switch, calibrate it first.
3. Select
Drive Calibration and tap
OK
. The Drive Calibration screen displays.
4. At the
Drive Limits tab, enter the minimum and maximum flow valves and tap Next.
5. At the
Drive Settings tab, turn the master switch on and vary the rates. Adjust the values if needed. Enter the values for: l
Allowable Error
Integral Gain l
Minimum Response
6. Tap
Next
and enter the following values for: l
Allowable Error
Gain l
Minimum Response
Note – For information about the appropriate values for your sprayer, refer to the support note Field-IQ crop Input Control System: For Sprayers and Spreaders.
Module flow calibration
1. At the Field-IQ Calibration screen, select
Flow Calibration and tap
OK
.
2. At the Rate and Section Control Flow Calibration screen, enter values for: l
Flow Meter type
Flow Meter Calibration l
Minimum Flow
3. Tap
Run Calibration
and follow the on-screen instructions.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
241
Equipment calibration for Field-IQ 9 Field-IQ system setup
Planter calibration
The calibration process for a planter includes: l
Implement lift switch calibration (page 242)
l
Rawson modules calibration (page 242)
l
l
PWM valves calibration (page 244)
Implement lift switch calibration
WARNING –
Moving parts during this operation. Make sure that the implement is safe to operate.
1. At the Field-IQ Calibration screen, select
Implement Lift
.
2. Raise the implement and then tap
Next
.
3. Lower the implement and then tap
Next
.
4. Tap
OK
to return to the Field-IQ Calibration screen.
Rawson modules calibration
Note – If you have an implement lift switch,
Calibrate the modules to ensure that your system performs at the level you require.
Note – You must have at least one Field-IQ system Rawson control module or Rate control module set up to control the rate before the Field-IQ
Calibrate
button will display on the Configuration screen.
1. At the Configuration screen, select screen displays.
Field-IQ and tap
Calibrate
. The Field-IQ Calibration
2. Select the first module that you want to calibrate. The Planter Calibration screen displays.
Note – If a Rawson module was configured, the correct calibration is selected automatically.
3. Complete the settings.
Setting
Seeds Per Disk
Gear Ratio
Explanation
The number of seed openings per disk plate
Tap
Calculate
to determine the gear ratio.
Allows the system to properly figure the meter RPM. The number of revolutions that the application rate sensor turns for each revolution of the seed meter.
242
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
9 Field-IQ system setup
Version 3.0, Revision A
Equipment calibration for Field-IQ
Setting Explanation
Calculate the gear ratio from the encoder to the metering point of the material.
Calculate the Rawson gear ratio from the motor to the metering point of the material.
Note – If the gear ratio is figured incorrectly, the system may over or under apply, even if it is showing the correct rate on the screen. You may also have issues in the drive calibration screen.
Calibration Constant A calculated value the system determines during calibration. To begin, leave the value at 1.000. After the calibration test, the system may adjust this value.
4. Place a clean empty container under the rows that contain seeds to capture the seeds dispensed during the calibration.
WARNING –
Moving parts during this operation. Ensure the implement is safe to operate.
5. Tap
Test
.
6. The system asks if you would like to prime the system. Tap
Yes
. To to ensure that the seed disk is full, the system turns the seed disks one revolution.
7. Turn on the master switch to prime the system and then when prompted on-screen, turn off the master switch.
8. For
Number of Seed Meter Revolutions
, enter a value and tap
Start
. The higher the number of revolutions the more accurate the calibration. Five to 10 revolutions is recommended.
9. Follow the on-screen prompts of operating the master switch. After the system turns the specified number of revolutions, enter the number of seeds dispensed per row and then tap
Continue
.
10. The next screen shows the minimum and maximum speeds for the target rate specified. Tap
OK
and then either press
Test
to repeat the calibration or tap
OK
to continue.
11. Select the
Limits tab to view a listing of the limits that are set.
12. Tap
OK
.
13. Repeat the previous steps for other Rawson Control Modules that need calibration.
Hydraulic test
The purpose of this test is to exercise the hydraulics to establish whether there is sufficient oil flow to run the system. The Rawson hydraulic test is used to make sure the drive will turn. After entering a desired RPM the master switch is turned on and the drive should begin to turn.
If the drive does not turn, check all electrical connections. If the motor is plugged in properly, it will make a hissing or whining noise.
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
243
Equipment calibration for Field-IQ 9 Field-IQ system setup
1. Check that there is hydraulic flow to the Rawson.
2. At the Field-IQ Calibration screen, tap
Hydraulic Test
.
WARNING –
Moving parts during this operation. Ensure the implement is safe to operate.
3. Tap
Next
.
4. Enter the initial motor RPM. The default setting is 300. It is recommended that you test the motor RPM at 100 to ensure that the drive runs smoothly at slow speeds.
5. Tap
Start
. The next screen provides the status of each motor: l
No Error
: The test was successful.
Motor Stalled
: The motors did not have sufficient oil flow. Ensure the correct orifice size is installed for each motor. For more information, refer to the Rawson System Installation
Instructions.
l
Disconnected:
The Rawson Control Module cannot communicate with the motor.
6. Tap
Stop
to return to the Field-IQ Calibration screen.
PWM valves calibration
Drive Calibration
1. At the Field-IQ Calibration screen, select
Drive Calibration
. The Field-IQ Drive Calibration screen displays.
2. On the
Drive Limits tab, enter the values for:
Minimum Seed Disk RPM l
Maximum Seed Disk RPM
Tap
Next
.
3. On the
Auto Tuning tab, follow the instructions to auto tune the system.
Note – Do not perform the auto tuning function if you have loaded a preset configuration file. Use the predefined configuration settings appropriate for your vehicle.
WARNING –
Moving parts during this operation. Ensure the implement is safe to operate.
During the auto tuning process the system tries to control the drive with in the specified RPM limits.
If the calibration fails, the drive may have not been able to meet the limits you entered on the
Drive Limits tab.
For a liquid system, it may be helpful to remove all orifices or nozzles to let the system flow freely.
244
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
9 Field-IQ system setup Equipment calibration for Field-IQ
4. When the auto tuning is finished, tap
Next
.
5. On the
Drive Settings tab, turn the master switch on and vary the rates. Then adjust the values on this tab, if necessary.
6. Tap
Next
. On the
Info tab, the results and drive limits of the calibration are listed. This screen is used to show the applicators operating range. If the speeds that are displayed are not logical, there is a setting issue. You may also need to perform a catch test for these numbers to be accurate.
Flow Calibration
WARNING –
During flow calibration, the machine will become operational. Take all necessary precautions to ensure user safety. Failure to do so may result in serious injury or death.
Flow calibration is used to check the accuracy of the: l
Gear ratio (if applicable) l
Gate settings (if applicable) l
App rate sensor
WARNING –
Moving parts during this operation. Ensure the implement is safe to operate.
This is done by performing a catch test.
1. At the Field-IQ Calibration screen, select
Flow Calibration under the valve you want to caibrate.
The Planter Calibration screen displays.
2. On the
Calibrate tab, complete the settings.
Setting
Seeds Per Disk
Explanation
The number of seed openings per disk plate.
Shaft Encoder
Constant
Pulses per revolution.
Calibration Constant A calculated value that the system determines during calibration.
This field allows you to adjust for inconsistencies in the seed meters.
To start out, leave the value at 1.000. After the calibration test, the system may adjust this number.
3. Tap
Test
and follow the instructions to test the settings you entered.
4. On the
Limits tab, you can view an overview of the limits that are set.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
245
Equipment calibration for Field-IQ 9 Field-IQ system setup
Sprayer calibration
WARNING –
Moving parts during this operation. Ensure the implement is safe to operate.
To calibrate a sprayer calibrate the implement lift switch, then the modules.
Implement lift switch calibration
1. From the Field-IQ Calibration screen, select
Implement Lift
.
2. Raise the implement and then tap
Next
.
3. Lower the implement and then tap
Next
.
4. Tap
OK
to return to the Field-IQ Calibration screen.
Spraying modules calibration
Calibrate the modules to ensure that your system performs at the level you require.
The option to calibrate the Field-IQ system only displays on the Configuration screen if you have at least one Field-IQ system Rate and Section control module installed.
1. At the Configuration screen, select
Field-IQ and then tap
Calibrate
.
2. At the Field-IQ Calibration screen, select the Rate and Section Control module you want to calibrate.
Note – If you have an implement lift switch, calibrate it first.
Drive Calibration
At the Field-IQ Drive Calibration screen, complete the settings on each tab.
Drive Limits tab
Settings
Maximum Flow
Maximum Pressure
Note – Displays if
is enabled.
Explanation
Set the maximum flow on your system to prevent it from operating outside its capability. If you do not know the maximum limit of the system, leave this set to zero to ensure accurate auto tune limits are calibrated.
The system shows the Maximum Pressure Limit set in the Drive Setup screen (launched from the
Rate Control tab) on the
Pressure Feedback Setup tab. See
. Any changes you make to this value will also be changed on the
Pressure Feedback Setup tab.
246
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
9 Field-IQ system setup Equipment calibration for Field-IQ
Auto-Tuning tab
At this tab, turn the master switch on to begin the auto calibration process. When the progress bar has completed, turn the master switch off, and tap
Next
. All rows and sections will be commanded fully open during this process.
If you need to shut down the drive at any time, switch the master switch to the off position and adjust the rate and speed parameters on the
as necessary.
If pressure limiting is: l
Disabled: The calibration process will show the status of the master switch and the current flow.
l
Enabled: The calibration process will show the status of the master switch, the current flow and the current pressure.
Drive Settings tab
Settings
Target Speed
Explanation
Enter the test speed to use during calibration. The system will apply material at the rate required to reach the Target Rate if the vehicle travels at this speed.
Target Rate
Applied Rate
Master Switch
Current Pressure
Display only.
The applied rate for comparison to the Target Rate.
Status of on or off. Display only.
Available if
is enabled or if
Lock in Standby
Pressure is chosen for
Valve Behavior when sections closed in the Drive Setup screen (launched from the
Rate Control tab) on the
Pressure Feedback Setup tab. See
Proportional Gain
Minimum Response
If the drive is slow to come up to rate, increase the Proportional Gain and turn on Boost (Feed Forward). If the applied rate is erratic, decrease the Proportional Gain.
If the drive is not responding, increase the Minimum Response. If the system has large fluctuations in applied rate, decrease the minimum response.
Allowable Error If the Applied Rate is less than this amount away from the target rate, the system will not send commands to adjust the rate.
Boost (Feed Forward)
If the drive is slow to come up to rate, increase the Integral/Proportional
Gain and turn on Boost (Feed Forward).
Advanced Parameters Tap to launch the advanced parameters.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
247
Equipment calibration for Field-IQ 9 Field-IQ system setup
Advanced parameters
Advanced Tuning tab
Settings
Target Speed
Target Rate
Applied Rate
Explanation
Enter the test speed to use during calibration. The system will apply material at the rate required to reach the Target Rate if the vehicle travels at this speed.
Display only.
Display only.
Status of on or off. Display only.
Master Switch
Current Pressure
Integrator Upper
PWM Limit
Process Gain
Smoothing Factor
Display only.
Change only if requested by support.
Integrator Lower
PWM Limit
Comparator Limit
Integral Gain
Change only if requested by support.
Change only if requested by support.
Ramp Limit Change only if requested by support.
Boost (Feed Forward)
If the drive is slow to come up to rate, increase the Integral/Proportional
Gain and turn on Boost (Feed Forward).
Proportional Gain If the drive is slow to come up to rate, increase the Proportional Gain and turn on Boost (Feed Forward). If the applied rate is erratic, decrease the Proportional Gain.
Change only if requested by support.
Differential Gain
Minimum Response
Change only if requested by support.
If the drive is not responding, increase the Minimum Response. If the system has large fluctuations in applied rate, decrease the minimum response.
Allowable Error If the Applied Rate is less than this amount away from the target rate, the system will not send commands to adjust the rate.
Change only if requested by support.
Change only if requested by support.
248
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
9 Field-IQ system setup Equipment calibration for Field-IQ
Settings
(Flow Filter Time
Constant)
Pre Position Open
Pre Position Stop
Explanation
Change only if requested by support.
Change only if requested by support.
Advanced PWM tab
This tab is only available if PWM has been selected as the valve type in the Drive Setup screen
(launched from the
Rate Control tab) on the
Valve Setup tab. See
Settings
Target Speed
Explanation
Enter the test speed to use during calibration. The system will apply material at the rate required to reach the Target Rate if the vehicle travels at this speed.
Display only.
Target Rate
Applied Rate
Master Switch
Current Flow
Display only.
Status of on or off. Display only.
Display only.
Base PWM Frequency Change only if requested by support.
Dither Frequency Change only if requested by support.
Dither Amplitude
Dither Control
PWM Upper Limit
PWM Lower Limit
Change only if requested by support.
Change only if requested by support.
Change only if requested by support.
Change only if requested by support.
Advanced Pressure tab
This tab is only available if
is enabled.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
249
Equipment calibration for Field-IQ 9 Field-IQ system setup
Settings
Target Speed
Target Rate
Current Flow
Applied Rate
Master Switch
Integrator Upper
PWM Limit
Integrator Lower
PWM Limit
Comparator Limit
Ramp Limit
Proportional Gain
Explanation
Enter the test speed to use during calibration. The system will apply material at the rate required to reach the Target Rate if the vehicle travels at this speed.
Display only.
Display only.
Display only.
Status of on or off. Display only.
Change only if requested by support.
Change only if requested by support.
Integral Gain
Differential Gain
Minimum Response
Allowable Error
Process Gain
Smoothing Factor
(Flow Filter Time
Constant)
Hysteresis Up
Hysteresis Down
Change only if requested by support.
Change only if requested by support.
If the drive is slow to come up to rate, increase the Proportional Gain and turn on Boost (Feed Forward). If the applied rate is erratic, decrease the Proportional Gain.
Change only if requested by support.
Change only if requested by support.
If the drive is not responding, increase the Minimum Response. If the system has large fluctuations in applied rate, decrease the minimum response.
If the Applied Rate is less than this amount away from the target rate, the system will not send commands to adjust the rate.
Change only if requested by support.
Change only if requested by support.
Change only if requested by support.
Change only if requested by support.
250
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
9 Field-IQ system setup Equipment calibration for Field-IQ
Spreader calibration
To calibrate a spreader, first calibrate the implement lift switch. Then calibrate the modules to ensure your system performs at the level you require.
1. Implement lift switch calibration
2. At the Field-IQ Calibration screen, select the
Implement Lift option.
3. Raise the implement and then tap
Next
.
4. Lower the implement and then tap
Next
.
5. Tap
OK
to return to the Field-IQ Calibration screen.
Rawson modules calibration
The Field-IQ system Calibrate option only displays on the Configuration screen if you have at least one Field-IQ system Rawson control module or rate control module set up to control the rate.
Note – If you have an implement lift switch, calibrate it first.
1. At the Configuration screen, select
Field-IQ and then tap
Calibrate
.
2. At the Field-IQ Calibration screen, select the module you want to calibrate.
3. Select the first module to calibrate. The Planter Calibration screen displays.
Note – If a Rawson module was configured, the correct calibration is selected automatically.
Setting
Gear Ratio
Explanation
Specifies the actual ratio from the application rate sensor to the seed meter shaft RPM. This is the number of revolutions the application rate sensor turns for each revolution of the seed meter.
Gear Ratio Calculator Use the calculator to determine your gear ratio.
Calibration Constant A calculated value that the system determines during calibration.
This field allows you to adjust for inconsistencies in the seed meters.
To start out, leave the value at 1.000. After the calibration test, the system may adjust this number.
4. Place a clean empty container under the rows that contain seeds to capture the seeds dispensed during the calibration.
WARNING –
Moving parts during this operation. Ensure the implement is safe to operate.
5. Tap
Test
.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
251
Equipment calibration for Field-IQ 9 Field-IQ system setup
6. The system asks if you would like to prime the system. Tap
Yes
. To to ensure that the seed disk is full, the system turns the seed disks one revolution.
7. Turn on the master switch to prime the system and then when prompted on-screen, turn off the master switch.
8. In the
Number of Seed Meter Revolutions entry box, enter a value and then tap
Start
. The higher the number of revolutions the more accurate the calibration. Five to 10 revolutions is recommended.
9. Follow the on-screen prompts of operating the master switch. After the system turns the specified number of revolutions, enter the number of seeds dispensed per row and then tap
Continue
.
10. The next screen shows the minimum and maximum speeds for the target rate specified. Tap
OK
and then either press
Test
to repeat the calibration or tap
OK
to continue.
11. Tap the
Limits tab to show an overview of the limits that are set for
Target Rate 1
,
Target Rate 2 and
Jump Start
.
12. Tap
OK
.
13. Repeat steps 1 through 10 for other Rawson Control Modules that need calibration.
Hydraulics test
The purpose of the hydraulics test is to exercise the hydraulics to establish whether there is sufficient oil flow to run the system.
1. At the Field-IQ Calibration screen tap
Hydraulic Test
.
WARNING –
Moving parts during this operation. Make sure that the implement is safe to operate.
2. Tap
Next
.
3. Enter the initial motor RPM. The default setting is 300. It is recommended that you test the motor RPM at 100 to ensure that the drive runs smoothly at slow speeds.
4. Tap
Start
. The next screen provides the status of each motor.
Status
No Error
Motor Stalled
Disconnected
Explanation
The test was successful.
The motors did not have sufficient oil flow; ensure the correct orifice size is installed for each motor. For more information, refer to the
Rawson System Installation Instructions.
The Rawson Control Module cannot communicate with the motor.
5. Tap
Stop
to return to the Field-IQ Calibration screen.
252
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
9 Field-IQ system setup Equipment calibration for Field-IQ
PWM valves calibration
Drive calibration
From the Field-IQ Calibration screen, select
Drive Calibration under the valve you want to calibrate.
Enter the appropriate settings on each tab.
Tab
Drive Limits
Auto-Tuning
Drive Settings
Info
Explanation
Enter the minimum and maximum flow values.
Moving parts during this operation. Ensure that the implement is safe to operate.
Follow the on-screen instructions to auto-tune the system.
Do not perform the auto-tuning function if you have loaded a preset configuration file. Use the predefined configuration settings appropriate for your vehicle.
Turn the master switch on and vary the rates. Adjust values if needed.
Shows the results and drive limits of your calibration.
Flow calibration
WARNING –
During flow calibration, the machine will become operational. Take all necessary precautions to ensure user safety. Failure to do so may result in serious injury or death.
The Field-IQ system Calibration option only displays on the Configuration screen if you have at least one Field-IQ system Rate and Section control module installed.
1. At the Configuration screen, select
Field-IQ and then tap
Calibrate
.
2. At the Field-IQ Calibration screen, select the Rate and Section Control Module to be calibrated.
(The message
Not calibrated displays at the end of the modules that need calibration.) The Field-IQ
Calibration screen displays that includes the serial number of the rate and section control module you just selected.
3. Select
Flow Calibration
. The Rate and Section Controller Valve Calibration screen displays.
4. Select the
Control tab and complete the settings for: l
Allowable Error
Gain l
Minimum Response
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
253
Equipment calibration for Field-IQ 9 Field-IQ system setup
Note – For information about the appropriate values for your sprayer, see the Support Note - Field-IQ
Crop Input Control System: For Sprayers and Spreaders.
5. Tap
OK
to return to the Field-IQ Calibration screen.
6. Select
Flow Calibration
. The Granular Calibration screen displays.
7. At the
Calibrate tab, complete the settings.
Setting
Gate Height Setting
Explanation
Current height of the gate opening.
If you entered a gate height measurement during setup, you must enter a measurement here.
Staff Encoder Constant
8. Tap
Calculate
to calibrate the constant. The Calibration Constant Calculator screen displays.
9. Complete the settings.
Setting
Gate Width
Drag Chain Distance Per Rev
Explanation
Width of the gate opening
The length of the drag chain per turn of the drag shaft.
To figure the drag chain length, you can either:
Multiply the diameter of the drag shaft by 3.14.
l
Mark the belt and measure the distance the mark moved after 1 revolution of the drag shaft.
If these numbers are not correct, you will have issues calibrating the spreader. If any of these settings physically change in the implement, they need to be adjusted in the
FM-1000 Plus application to maintain accuracy.
The system calculates the calibration constant. This value represents the liters of material dispensed from the spreader per revolution of the drag shaft assuming the gate height is 1 meter. The actual gate height is factored in later. The FM-1000 Plus application will automatically come up with this value.
10. Tap
OK
to return to the Granular Calibration screen.
11. Place a clean empty container under the spreader to capture the material dispensed during the calibration, and then tap
Calibrate
. The Granular Calibration screen displays.
WARNING –
Moving parts during this operation. Ensure the implement is safe to operate.
12. Complete the settings.
254
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
9 Field-IQ system setup Equipment calibration for Field-IQ
Setting
Amount of Material to be
Dispensed
Target Rate
Target Calibration
Explanation
The amount to be dispensed during the calibration.
13. To begin calibration, tap
Start
and follow the on-screen instructions.
14. Select the
Info tab to view the system’s operational limits (based on the RPM limits, target rates, and application width).
15. Tap
OK
.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
255
Equipment calibration for Field-IQ 9 Field-IQ system setup
256
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
Chapter
10
GreenSeeker setup
In this chapter:
Field preparations for nitrogen application
Field preparations for user defined rate 261
Delivery system and liquid control 261
GreenSeeker sensors shines a calibrated light wave spectrum to measure the returned reflective light spectrum from plants, and analyzes the data to determine the plants' needs for nitrogen
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
257
GreenSeeker functionality 10 GreenSeeker setup
GreenSeeker functionality
As you travel the field, in real-time the GreenSeeker RT200 system: l
Sensors emit light at two specific wavelengths to measure the light reflected by plants.
l
Analyzes the reflected light and determines the nitrogen level (NDVI - normalized difference vegetation index) of the plants below l
Sends the data to the FM-1000 Plus application
The FM-1000 Plus application sends the correct application rates to either: l
The applicator's rate controller (using Serial Rate Control) l
The Field-IQ system
The required amount of fertilizer is applied as you pass over the crop.
As materials are applied, the system logs the: l
NDVI l
Target rate l
Applied rate
Note – Some rate controllers connected via serial cable to the display do not respond with an 'As Applied' value.
For operational information, see
GreenSeeker operation (page 422) .
Care and maintenance
To maintain the high performance of your GreenSeeker RT200 variable rate application and mapping system: l
Each day or during applicator re-fill, check the GreenSeeker sensor detector and light source windows for dust and dirt, and wipe clean with a soft rag.
l
Do not leave the GreenSeeker system outdoors during extreme weather conditions. Wide temperature variations are hard on electronics and fluid seals, and may reduce the operating life of the system.
l
DO NOT store a GreenSeeker system with the sensors facing upward. Doing so may allow water to collect around the windows and gaskets, causing seal failures in those areas. Also direct sunlight can in some cases focus enough energy into the sensor to damage the detector.
Note – There are no field serviceable components of the electronic system; do not attempt any field repair of a malfunctioning interface module or sensors. If you experience operating problems, contact your local dealer.
258
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
10 GreenSeeker setup Field preparations for nitrogen application
Field preparations for nitrogen application
Note – The following instructions apply to the most common nitrogen applications. Check algorithms for specific instructions. For updated specific algorithm instructions, visit
www.GreenSeeker.com
.
Before you can use the GreenSeeker applicator to apply nitrogen across a field, before or shortly after planting you must establish a nitrogen rich reference strip (NRS) or "calibration" area. The rest of the field is referred to as the Non-Reference (Non-Ref) portion (or as the N-limited area or farmer practice region).
The NRS reference strip is used to determine the: l
Amount of nitrogen being made available to the plant by the environment (such as mineralization) l
Current year's expected maximum yield potential and response to additional nitrogen
An ideal NRS runs the length of the field, but must be at least 400 feet long.
1. Establish the NRS in a representative reference portion of the field (in other words, not in high spot or low spot). Use a permanent land marker or temporary marker to ensure that the NRS can easily be found later in the season. You may also want to establish the location of the NRS by noting it as an A-B line or flag on the screen.
The rate of nitrogen necessary to establish a NRS:
Is crop and region dependent l
Should be the highest rate necessary to satisfy crop needs throughout the growing season
2. Use the sensor mounted booms of the RT200 system with RT Commander or the GreenSeeker
Hand Held sensor.
If past practice was a 100% pre-plant application of nitrogen, decrease pre-plant nitrogen application rate of the field to a level at least half of previous total nitrogen applied during non-
GreenSeeker management practice.
Crop
Spring or winter wheat
Corn
Explanation
If application rate has historically been 100 lbs N/acre, decrease the rate to 50 lbs nitrogen per acre.
Note – Sandy soil type or heavy rainfall may require additional N application to maintain the NRS as a non-limiting reference area.
If application rates have historically been 200 lbs nitrogen per acre decrease to 75 to 125 lbs N/acre.
Note – Sandy soil type or heavy rainfall may require additional N application to maintain the NRS as a non-limiting reference area.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
259
Field setup 10 GreenSeeker setup
For best results, use the RT200 to "read" the NRS and apply N at growth stages dependent upon the crop algorithm used. For most supplied algorithms this is typically: l
Wheat: Feekes growth stage 4-6
Corn: V8-V12
For updated specific algorithm instructions, see www.GreenSeeker.com
. Plant coverage should be at least 50% for the sensors to accurately determine NDVI for topdressing (or sidedressing).
To collect sensor readings, pass the boom mounted sensor (or handheld sensor) over the crop at 32 -– 48" above the canopy. Sense a large area of the NRS and nonreference portion of the field to accurately determine their respective NDVI values.
3. Apply an applicators width swath of N. The rate of N applied should be high enough to satisfy crop N needs in a good year.
4. Enter the values into GreenSeeker on the FM-1000 Plus application:
Automatically with the boom mounted sensors l
Manually with the GreenSeeker handheld
5. If the response is variable across the field, select an area where the difference between the reference and the non-reference areas are most apparent. This assures that the algorithm will determine a rate that utilizes the highest yield potential prediction and maximum response to
N for that year.
To estimate yield potential, most algorithms utilize an environmental factor (Growing Degree
Days or Days From Planting), which takes into account the weather and length of time that has passed since planting.
Different GDD variations are used for different crops. You must know the planting date and sensing date to obtain the GDD value.
Field setup
To prepare a reference area, do the following:
1. Make certain to use a permanent land marker or temporary marker to ensure that the NRS can easily be found later in the season. You may also want to establish the location of the NRS by noting it as an A-B line or flag on the FM-1000 Plus application.
The ideal NRS would run the length of the field, but it should at least be 400 feet long.
2. At appropriate crop growth stage, take readings of the NRS and an adjacent part of the field yet to be fertilized. For most supplied algorithms the following is typical: l
Wheat: Feekes growth stage 4-6
Corn: V8-V12.
3. Find the area where the nitrogen rich strip is most apparent in comparison to the rest of the field (this indicates greatest potential for the crop).
260
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
10 GreenSeeker setup Field preparations for user defined rate
4. Take sensor readings with RT200 or Hand Held sensor for input to your selected Crop
Algorithm.
5. Be sure to match nozzles and/or rate control system to maximize response time and performance for each field's requirements.
For more information, see
Field preparations for nitrogen application (page 259)
for more details, and be sure to consult your application equipment and rate control systems manuals as applicable.
Field preparations for user defined rate
The RT200 system can be used to apply other materials than nitrogen. GreenSeeker permits a custom algorithm to be entered (which is a table of product values) instead of the NDVI value. These values are entered into the Custom Formula Application table. See
Note – The grower/consultant must develop these rates. Also be aware of the rate range ability of your specific rate controller and nozzles used to achieve these results.
Field calibration
You can use a GreenSeeker hand-held to measure the NDVI of a crop if you know the approximate desired rate for the crop.
Note – You can also measure NDVI using the GreenSeeker RT200 by observing NDVI values on the
GreenSeeker panel or by using the calibration function.
Delivery system and liquid control
As with any variable rate system, the minimum and maximum rates obtainable are dependent upon the delivery system. The RT200 interface module is capable of "requesting" any rate, but the actual rates delivered are dependent upon the rate controller and its components. Most liquid rate control systems control or "throttle" the pressure of the system to affect flow and application rate.
When using the RT200 with a typical liquid delivery system, it is important to match nozzle sizes to expected delivery rates. After the appropriate reference strip readings, GDD, and selection of crop type are input into RT Commander, the application graph can be accessed to show the prescription rates at various sensor NDVI readings. Depending upon what delivery system is used, there will be actual minimum and maximum rates obtainable. These will be dependent upon components like the pump, control valve, nozzles, and boom plumbing sizes.
GreenSeeker has features that allow for minimum and maximum rates to be set, regardless of the crop algorithm prescription. After a nozzle set is chosen, the minimum should be set at the lowest rate the nozzles will still give adequate pattern/performance. Maximum rates may be limited by rates that lessen atomization or drift.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
261
Delivery system and liquid control 10 GreenSeeker setup
Select a nozzle
It is usually best to match nozzles to the lower mid-range of the typical rates shown on the application graph. Ultimately, it is up to the grower or crop consultant to determine the minimum or maximum rates and nozzles which are most appropriate.
If most of your NDVI readings (in the area of the field, not in the NRS) are around 0.53, and your review the application graph shows at 0.53 NDVI you should be applying 15GPA, then you should choose a nozzle that will have the ability to change rates above and below this NDVI reading.
You might choose a nozzle that puts out 12.5GPA at its lowest pressure (such as 20psi) and 21GPA at its highest pressure (such as 60psi). Since the penalty to under-fertilize (harm yield) is usually greater than to over-fertilize (waste fertilizer), it may be best to choose a strategy similar to the one shown here. You will need to modify your values to fit your circumstances and meet the local field and delivery system conditions.
262
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
Chapter
11
ISOBUS setup
In this chapter:
ISOBUS is a global set of software and hardware standards that makes possible the communication between equipment made by different manufacturers.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
263
ISOBUS settings 11 ISOBUS setup
ISOBUS settings
To set up ISOBUS features:
1. Connect the CAN bus to the FM-1000 Plus application.
2. Activate the feature/plugin you want to use. See
Optional features/plugins (page 48)
.
3. If you are using Task Controller, unlock the feature.
4. Set up the feature you are using. See
Virtual Terminal setup (page 264)
or
.
5. Set up GPS speed output. See
GPS output settings (page 265) .
6. Set up the specific virtual terminal for your equipment. See
.
For operational information, see
Virtual Terminal setup
1. At the Home screen, tap
.
2. At the Configuration screen, select
Virtual Terminal and tap
Setup
.
3. At the Virtual Terminal Dialog screen, select the appropriately configured CAN port on the TM-
200 Module.
4. Tap
OK
to return to the Configuration screen.
5. Tap
OK
to return to the Home screen.
For operational information, see
Virtual Terminal operation (page 428)
.
Task Controller setup
Make sure you have: l
Connected the CAN bus to the display l
Unlocked the ISOBUS Task Controller functionality l
Activated Task Controller
1. On the Home screen, tap . The Configuration screen displays.
2. At the Configuration screen, select
Task Controller and then tap
Setup
.
264
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
11 ISOBUS setup GPS output settings
3. At the Task Control Setup screen in the
Rates tab, enter the settings.
Setting
Target Rate 1
Target Rate 2
Rate Increment
Minimum Rate
Maximum Rate
Explanation
The first target rate for the volume supplied by the implement
The second target rate for the volume supplied by the implement
When you increment/decrement
Rate 1 or
Rate 2 on the Run screen, the current application rate increases or decreases by this amount.
Minimum rate to be applied
Maximum rate to be applied
4. In the
Boom tab, enter the
Valve On Latency and
Valve Off Latency
. These values are the measured times that it takes the implement to start coverage after the command is given.
5. Tap
OK
to return to the Configuration screen.
6. Tap
OK
to return to the Home screen.
For operational information, see
Task Controller operation (page 427)
.
GPS output settings
1. At the Home screen, tap
. The Configuration screen displays.
2. Select
GPS Receiver and then tap
Setup
.
3. On the
Settings tab, tap
GPS Output
.
4. On the
CAN GPS tab, set: a. The Message Rate to 5 Hz b. The Output Port to be the CAN attached to the ISOBUS for the implement
5. Tap
OK
until you are back at the Home screen.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
265
Equipment setup 11 ISOBUS setup
Equipment setup
Make sure that you have set up the Virtual Terminal and/or Task Controller before completing the rest of this procedure.
For cabling information, see XCN-2050 Cabling Guide.
1. At the Home screen, tap
. The Configuration screen displays.
2. Select
Virtual Terminal then tap
Diagnostics
. The Virtual Terminal for the equipment you have connected displays.
For Kinze:
Type
Planter
Models Set...
Virtual
Terminal
x
Task
Controller
x 3110, 3140, 3200,
3500, 3600, 3660,
3700, 3800
Current Ground Speed Source to
GPS Speed
.
Population Option to
Prescription.
x
For Kuhn:
Type Models Set...
Seed Drill
Virtual
Terminal
x
Task
Controller
x
Spreader
Spreader
Moduliner (HR 6004
ML)
AXIS-H-EMC (40.1 &
50.1)
Simulated Speed to the speed you will drive.
Task Control to
On
.
GPS Control to
On
.
Set
VariSpread to
On
.
Set Change Disc Speed to
On
.
AXIS-W (40.1 & 50.1)
Manual Speed to the speed you will drive.
GPSC to
On
.
x x x x x x x x
266
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
11 ISOBUS setup Equipment setup
For Kverneland:
Type
Spreader
Drill
Drill
Models Set...
Exacta TL GEOspread
Driving Speed Signal to
GPS
J1939
.
Task Controller to
On
.
Accord Optima
Precision Drill
Driving Speed to
GPS J1939
.
Monopill SE
Task Controller to
On
.
Driving Speed Signal to
GPS
J1939
.
Task Controller to
On
.
Virtual
Terminal
x x x
Task
Controller
x x x x x x
For Rauch:
Type
Spreader
Spreader
Models Set...
AXIS-H-EMC (40.1 &
50.1)
Task Control to
On
.
GPS Control to
On
.
VariSpread to
On
.
Change Disc Speed to
On
.
AXIS-W (40.1 & 50.1)
Manual Speed to the speed you will drive
GPSC to
On
.
Virtual
Terminal
x x
Task
Controller
x x x x x x
For Vicon:
Type Models Set...
Virtual
Terminal
x
Task
Controller
x
Spreader RO-EDW GEOspread
Driving Speed Signal to
GPS
J1939
.
Task Controller to
On
.
x
3. Refer to the equipment manufacturer's operating instructions for how to change the settings.
4. If you are using the Task Controller, verify that the equipment recognizes it. For more information, refer to the equipment manufacturer's operating instructions .
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
267
Equipment setup 11 ISOBUS setup
268
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
Chapter
12
Serial Rate Control setup
In this chapter:
Supported variable rate controllers
Variable rate controller setup
By using a serial connection, serial rate control enables you to use the FM-1000 Plus application with non-Trimble variable rate controllers. A simple variable rate serial cable provides a link between your display and variable rate application controller.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
269
Supported variable rate controllers 12 Serial Rate Control setup
Supported variable rate controllers
The FM-1000 Plus application can send control signals to vary only one channel at a time.
Variable rate controller
Bogballe Calibrator (page 272)
Hardi 5500 and 6500 (page 273)
LH Agro
See
.
New Leader
See
Rawson and New Leader (page 276) .
Supported Models
Amatron+
Calibrator Zurf
5500, 6500
LH5000
Mark III and Mark IV
SCS 440, 440DB, 450, 450DB, 460, 660, 661, 700,
710, 750, 760
Accu-Plant and Accu-Rate
Rawson
See
Rawson and New Leader (page 276) .
Tyler
See
Vaderstad Control Station (page 277)
Flex-Air
Control Station
270
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
12 Serial Rate Control setup Variable rate controller setup
Variable rate controller setup
1. At the Configuration screen, select
Rate Controller settings screen displays.
Serial Rate Control and then tap
Setup
. The Edit Variable
2. At the
Comm tab, complete the settings.
Note – The fields that appear on the screen depend on which controller you selected.
Setting
Controller
Port
Active Channel
Send Rate as
Explanation
The make of the controller.
The port configured and assigned to the EXP-100 that the controller is connected to.
If displayed, enter the channel name.
Unit of measure.
3. Select the
Rates tab and enter the settings.
Setting
Default Rate
Step Size
Rate Snapping
Explanation
The increment for adjustment
Enabled, disabled
4. Select the
Sections tab.
5. Enter the number of sections. Then tap
OK
.
After you have selected a type of variable rate controller, the FM-1000 Plus application initiates communications with the controller each time you open a field. Communications are terminated when you close the field.
If the FM-1000 Plus application cannot communicate with the controller: l
A message displays identifying the problem. If the controller type you chose has a configurable baud rate, the error message includes details of the baud rate that required.
l
The applied rate does not display on the Run screen.
l
Variable rate logging is suspended while the controller is disconnected.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
271
Variable rate controller setup 12 Serial Rate Control setup
Amazone Amatron +
1. Connect the XCN-2050 display to the Amazone Amatron + by either: a. Connecting the special adapter cable (P/N 59043) to connect to the display cable (P/N
67091) that is connected to the port configured and assigned to the EXP-100.
Note – Connect the cable to the pinned connector on the lower left side of the Amatron + controller.
b. Connecting the display to the controller with an extension (straight through) serial cable.
2. Set up the controller: a. Press
Shift
+
Page / Setup / Page 2.
b. Set RS232 to 57600 baud.
Bogballe Calibrator
To use the Bogballe Calibrator, you need a special adapter cable (P/N 59043) to connect to the cable
P/N 67091. Cable P/N 6709 will be connected to the configured and assigned EXP-100.
Note – The standoff nuts on the Bogballe rate controller may prevent the pins in the cable connector from making a connection. In this case, remove the standoff nuts.
Controller setup
To set up the controller to operate correctly with the FM-1000 Plus application, tap:
1.
2.
Return
Return
3.
4.
Fertil.-Distrib
Select Type
5.
Bogballe E/EX
6.
Accept
Flex-Air setup
The FM-1000 Plus application can send rates to the Tyler Flex-Air variable rate controller. The controller can have four channels l
Main l
Liquid l
Co-applicator l
Supplemental
272
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
12 Serial Rate Control setup Variable rate controller setup
Rates from all channels are recorded in the variable rate logging .dbf file, but the FM-1000 Plus application can send rates to only one channel at a time: the active channel.
The Tyler Flex-Air controller uses the GPS speed sent by the FM-1000 Plus application.
Operation
Statistics for the active channel are recorded in: l
The
Total_Qty value in the variable rate logging .dbf file l
The
Avg_Rate field in the EventHistory .dbf file
If you want to use these statistics, start a new event before you change the active channel.
Application width
You can individually configure the widths of the boom sections on the controller. The FM-1000 Plus application draws coverage logging at the width of the sum of all the boom sections. If you turn boom sections off, the FM-1000 Plus application varies the width of the coverage polygons according to which boom sections are on.
Hardi 5500 and 6500
1. To connect the Hardi 5500 or 6500 controller, you need a special adapter cable (P/N 59043) to connect to the cable P/N 67091. Cable P/N 6709 will be connected to the configured and assigned EXP-100.
a. Connect the cable to serial port 1 on the Hardi controller.
b. On the Hardi 6500, use terminal version 1.55 or later and Jobcom version 1.55 or later.
c. Set the Hardi 6500 to metric units.
2. Set up the controller: a. Turn on the controller while holding the
ESC
button.
b. In the extended menu, use the arrow keys to select the
E.4 Data Exchange menu.
c. Enter the COM 1 setup and complete the settings.
Setting
Equipment type
Protocol
Baud Rate
Enter...
VRA/remote
Hardi VRA
9600
3. Turn off the controller and turn it on again.
4. Go to
Menu 2.3
and select
VRA/Remote Control Enable
.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
273
Variable rate controller setup 12 Serial Rate Control setup
LH5000
To use the LH 5000 controller, you need a special adapter cable (LH Agro P/N 198-701) to connect to the cable P/N 67091.
1. Connect the XCN-2050 display to the LH5000 by either: a. Connecting the special adapter cable (LH Agro P/N 198-701) to connect to the display cable
(P/N 67091). Cable P/N 6709 will be connected to the configured and assigned EXP-100.
b. Connecting the display to the controller with an extension (straight through) serial cable.
2. Set up the controller, press: a.
Return
b.
Return
c.
Fertil.-Distrib
d.
Select Type
e.
LH5000
f.
Accept
Raven
To use a Raven controller with the FM-1000 Plus application, the controller must: l
Be GPS-ready l
Use Raven’s latest communications protocol (which was introduced in 1996).
If your controller is not GPS-ready or does not use the latest protocol, contact Raven for an upgrade pack.
Cable P/N 6709 will be connected to the configured and assigned EXP-100. Cable P/N 6709 will be connected to the configured and assigned EXP-100.
274
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
12 Serial Rate Control setup Variable rate controller setup
Configure the controller
Screen or
Setting Type
Settings
Data Menu l
BAUD: 9600 l
GPS: Inac l
DLOG: ON l
TRIG: 1 l
UNIT: Sec
Implement
Boom Setup
Application width: l
First boom section width must be greater than 0, otherwise the
FM-1000 Plus application will not communicate with the controller.
l
Total boom section width must match the
Application Width setting in the Implement Boom Setup screen.
Channel setting
To allow rates sent by the FM-1000
Plus application to be used by the
Raven controller, set channel to either: l
Rate 1 (SCS4XX, SCS6XX) l
Product X Auto (SCS7XX)
Baud Rate 9600
Additional Information
Some Raven controllers may lose the settings if power is disconnected. You must then reconfigure the controller.
The FM-1000 Plus application varies the width of the coverage polygons according to the number of boom sections, but it does not know the absolute width of each boom section. It only knows the relative width of each boom section with respect to the total boom section width.
When recording coverage polygons, each section is considered to be a percentage of the application width set in the Implement
Boom Setup screen. For example, if you create an intentional overlap to avoid gaps in the application coverage by making the application width greater than the swath width. This proportionally changes the recorded width of each boom section.
If the controller is set to
Rate 2 or
Manual
, the controller ignores the rates being sent, but the FM-1000 Plus application still records the applied rates.
Some older controllers are only capable of
1200 baud. Such controllers must be upgraded.
CAUTION – Some Raven controllers do not support zero rates. If the target rate is zero, and spray is still being applied, you must turn off the boom sections manually.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
275
Variable rate controller setup 12 Serial Rate Control setup
Rawson and New Leader
The Rawson and New Leader controllers use a nominal flow rate (Yield) and a step size to describe rates.
If you have a dual-channel Rawson Accu-Rate controller, see
Rawson and New Leader (page 276)
.
1. At the Edit Variable Rate Controller settings screen, set the default rate to match the yield value (or nominal flow rate) in the Rawson controller.
Any non-zero rate will be adjusted to the nearest value that the controller can select. A rate of zero turns off the hydraulic drive.
Note – For best result when creating prescriptions, use rates in 2%, 4%, or 6
2
/
3
% increments of the default rate. Select the percentage used on the FM-1000 Plus application.
2. Put the controller into GPS mode. This allows the FM-1000 Plus application to change the rates on the controller. (Without GPS mode, the FM-1000 Plus application will log only the rates being used.) a. Turn on the controller.
b. Tap the
MODE
button twice.
c. Tap the
SET
button to switch the controller between GPS and non-GPS.
3. Set up communication between the FM-1000 Plus application and the controller: a. Connect the display to the controller with Rawson cable (P/N 69730) and cable (P/N 67091).
b. Set the controller baud rate to 9600.
Using the controller
When in GPS mode, the hydraulic drive operates only when both the switch and the FM-1000 Plus application allow the drive to be on. Set the hydraulic drive switch on the controller to the ON position. If you need to quickly turn off the hydraulic drive, use the switch on the controller.
Non-GPS mode
The FM-1000 Plus application sends commands to the controller. If communication cannot be established, it may be because the controller is set to Non GPS mode. A message displays and gives you the option to continue in Non GPS mode.
If the controller is set to Non GPS mode, the FM-1000 Plus application still shows and records asapplied rates. If a prescription is loaded, target rates appear for reference, but these are not used by the controller. In this mode, you must vary rates manually on the controller.
Loss of communication
In GPS mode, if communication with a Rawson controller is lost, the FM-1000 Plus application does not report an error until you cross into a region of the prescription that specifies a different rate.
276
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
12 Serial Rate Control setup Vaderstad Control Station
In Non GPS mode, the FM-1000 Plus application has no way of knowing when communication with a
Rawson controller is lost.
Special note on using a Rawson Accu-Rate controller
The FM-1000 Plus application can send rates and record coverage for the Rawson Accu-Rate controller for only one drive at a time: Drive A or Drive B.
To correctly send rates to the controller and log coverage based on the drive master switch:
1. To operate both drives, set the drive that is not being controlled by the FM-1000 Plus application to
Non GPS mode
.
2. Connect the display Variable Rate cable to the COM port that matches the drive: l
To control Drive A, connect to COM A.
To control Drive B, connect to COM B. When you use Drive B, set the COM port to COM B.
Drive A does not have a configuration for this and will always use COM A.
3. Set Bit 7 mode to off. Bit 7 mode sends two prescriptions and is not supported by the FM-1000
Plus application.
Vaderstad Control Station
1. Connect the XCN-2050 display to the Vaderstad Control Station: a. Connect the special adapter cable (P/N DCA6219) with a crossover serial cable (null modem) to the Vaderstad program cable (Vaderstad P/N 428017).
b. Plug the Vaderstad cable into the GPS port on the back of the Control Station controller.
2. Set up the controller: a. Press the
?
button and hold it down while turning on the controller.
Note – Pressing
?
and selecting Info will not work if the unit is communicating with the FM-1000
Plus application.
b. In the Setup screen, scroll to
GPS and then select
No
.
Additional controller setup
You can also set additional features on variable rate controllers, including: l
l
Target and applied rates (page 278)
l
l
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
277
Additional controller setup 12 Serial Rate Control setup
Alarms
If you want low limit and target rate alarms, set these on the variable rate controller. You can also set a default rate to be used if you go off the prescription or do not have a prescription. For more information, refer to the documentation provided with your variable rate controller.
Coverage mapping
The FM-1000 Plus application receives the applied rate and can also receive the number of active boom sections from a variable rate controller. It does not receive any information about the swath or application width.
To accurately record coverage maps, if your controller does not send the number of active boom sections, set the application width to match the agricultural equipment that you are using (for example, the width of the spray boom).
Prescriptions
You can define variable rate controller setup data, and load prescription files that define the rates to be applied in different areas of the field. This information is used to send target rates to the variable rate controller. Applied rates are received from the controller, and both target and applied rates are shown on the screen. In addition, data relating to the variable rate application may be logged to the card.
The information describing prescriptions for the Field-IQ system also applies to non-Trimble variable rate controllers.
Target and applied rates
The FM-1000 Plus application can control only a single channel at any one time. This active channel is specified in the Edit Variable Rate Controller settings screen. The target and applied rates shown on the Run screen are specific to this active channel.
Units
Most controllers can be configured to use either US Imperial or metric units of measurement. Each channel can be configured to use different types of units (for example, lb/ac, oz/ac, or gal/ac.).
When constructing prescription maps, make sure that the maps use the same units that the controller is configured for.
278
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
Chapter
13
TrueGuide setup
In this chapter:
The TrueGuide implement guidance system works with the Autopilot system.
TrueGuide employs passive implement control and uses the second GPS antenna on the implemen to achieve implement location accuracy.
TrueGuide setup includes: l
Implement setup l
TrueGuide system setup l
Implement guidance calibration
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
279
TrueGuide system 13 TrueGuide setup
TrueGuide system
The working implement behind the tractor is where precision counts, and the only way to directly influence the implement is to measure where it is and control it.
While you steer the vehicle, TrueGuide passively controls the implement to steer itself to the guidance line.
The TrueGuide™ implement guidance system: l
Is used in conjunction with the Autopilot system l
Measures the position of the implement with a second GPS receiver placed on the implement.
The Autopilot system can then adjust the position of the tractor to pull the implement on the guidance line.
TrueGuide works with towed implements for front-steered, tracked, and articulated tractors.
For operation information, see
TrueGuide operation (page 437) .
Benefits
With TrueGuide, you can: l
Reduce the uncontrolled drift of the implement.
l
Control large implements and minimize the effects of draft (due to varying soil conditions and ground moisture) with no additional steering hardware.
l
Guide the implement to the line, even in the most difficult field patterns.
l
Tow your implement online when its natural tendency is to pull through curves.
l
Prevent unpredictable implement movements due to rolling terrain by adjusting on the go.
l
Minimize the effect of downdraft on severe hillsides by having the Autopilot system pull the implement up the hill and hold the line.
To achieve the highest performance from TrueGuide implement guidance, the Autopilot system on the tractor must have a good calibration. An Autopilot system that is calibrated very aggressively may need to be set up with a more neutral calibration when used with TrueGuide implement guidance.
Requirements
To set up and operate, TrueGuide system must have: l
The Autopilot automated steering system installed and configured. See
280
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
13 TrueGuide setup Implement setup and selection l
Stable implements. (Implements that are unstable, such as sprayers with large flotation tires, will cause rocking in the antenna that will be greater than the performance improvements on the ground.) l
Both Autopilot and TrueGuide activated for use. See
Activate features/plugins for use (page 60) .
l
An additional GPS receiver on the implement.
For cabling information, see XCN-2050 Cabling Guide.
For operational information, see
TrueGuide operation (page 437) .
Implement setup and selection
Before you use the FM-1000 Plus application with the TrueGuide system, set up and select a new or existing implement. See
Note – You can update existing (saved) implements with implement geometry to support TrueGuide guidance.
Note – Antenna offsets are provided when the antenna cannot be placed directly over the working point of the implement. These offsets should be minimized whenever possible.
Antenna offsets (Geometry tab)
As part of implement setup, settings on the Geometry tab are required for implement modeling.
When configuring an implement for the TrueGuide system, the following antenna offsets are required:
Offset
Hitch to ground contact point
Antenna front/back
Antenna left/right
Antenna height
Explanation
Measured from the tractor hitch pin to the soil engagement point that the implement rotates around.
Measured from the implement working point to the center of the
GPS antenna (if mounted).
Measured from the center of the implement to the center of the
GPS antenna (if mounted)
The working height of the GPS antenna
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
281
TrueGuide setup 13 TrueGuide setup
TrueGuide setup
1. At the Configuration screen, select screen displays.
2. Enter the required settings.
TrueGuide and then tap
Setup
. The TrueGuide Setup
Setting
Roll compensation
Explanation
l
On: Applies roll corrections from the tractor.
Off: Applies no roll corrections.
CurveGuide l
Off: The system does not anticipate curves.
TrueGuide only: Enables the system to anticipate curves to make corrections for TrueGuide guidance only.
l
Always On: Keeps CurveGuide on at all times.
TrueGuide Aggressiveness The default aggressiveness. The recommended aggressiveness is
100%. See
System aggressiveness settings .
Fixed axle to hitch point The distance between the rear axle for conventional tractors (or the center of rotation for tracked tractors) and the draw bar.
3. Tap
OK
. The Configuration screen displays.
System aggressiveness settings
Aggressiveness affects the response of the implement to move to the guidance line. When aggressiveness is: l
Increased: The response to move the implement back to the guidance line is increased.
l
Decreased: The response to the implement moving offline is smoothed.
1. At the Run screen, tap to open the TrueGuide panel.
2. Use + or - to increase or decrease the aggressiveness.
For...
Steep slopes (10% - +30%)
Slow speed operations
Use the default setting...
150%
125%
282
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
13 TrueGuide setup TrueGuide calibration
For...
Normal operation
High speed applications (> 8 mph or 12.8 kilometers per hour)
Use the default setting...
100%
33%
TrueGuide calibration
WARNING –
Many large and sudden changes in satellite geometry caused by blocked satellites can cause significant position shifts. If operating under these conditions, auto-guidance systems can react abruptly. To avoid possible personal injury or damage to property under these conditions, disable the auto-guidance system and take manual control of the vehicle until conditions have cleared.
To calibrate the TrueGuide system, you must have a field open in the Run screen with an AB line configured. See
and
Guidance pattern use (page 365) .
At the Run screen:
1. Tap
. Without closing the field, the Configuration screen displays.
2. Select
TrueGuide and tap
Calibrate
. The TrueGuide Calibration screen displays.
3. Tap
Next
and follow the on-screen instructions.
4. Complete the test at least four times and tap
OK
.
5. At the Calibration screen, tap
OK
to return to the open field.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
283
TrueGuide calibration 13 TrueGuide setup
284
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
Chapter
14
TrueTracker setup
In this chapter:
Implement controller setup for
Implement calibration for TrueTracker system 292
The TrueTracker feature/plugin works with the Autopilot system. TrueTracker uses active implement control, enabling the vehicle as well as the implement to guide to the line.
This improves accuracy and product placement.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
285
TrueTracker 14 TrueTracker setup
TrueTracker
The TrueTracker implement steering system is an optional upgrade for the Autopilot automated steering system. When the TrueTracker system is added to the Autopilot system, the implement receives separate guidance and steering to increase accuracy.
Implement steering actively steers the implement being towed by the vehicle. This prevents the implement from pulling to one side (called implement draft): l
On extremely sloped ground l
In variable soil conditions l
On curved guidance patterns
TrueTracker supports: l
Steering in reverse l
Straight and curved guidance patterns l
Independent implement offset l
Independent aggressiveness control for the implement l
Zero steering to center the coulters
The system has two parts: l
Additional hardware installed on the implement (which requires professional installation) l
Additional FM-1000 Plus application software provided by TrueTracker
For operation information, see
TrueTracker operation (page 439) .
Requirements
TrueTracker requires: l
An Autopilot system l
An unlock code l
AG-815 integrated radio with secondary receiver l
Second antenna l l
EXP-100 port expander cable
Platform kit for the implement actuation type l
Implement NavController and cabling
For information on TrueTracker cabling, see XCN-2050 Cabling Guide.
For operation information, see
TrueTracker operation (page 439) .
286
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
14 TrueTracker setup Setup process
Setup process
To set up the TrueTracker system:
1. Activate TrueTracker. See
Activate features/plugins for use (page 60) .
2. Complete the implement controller settings. See
Implement controller setup for TrueTracker system (page 287) .
3. Set up the implement so that the system can tell:
Which type of implement is attached l
How much area it covers l
How far it is offset
Make sure you are measuring the offsets from the antenna to the ground interaction point of the implement. See
.
Note – When you enter the number of implement sections, if the implement does not have sections, enter
1
.
4. If necessary, edit the vehicle profile. See
Vehicle settings for Autopilot system (page 165)
.
5. Calibrate the implement. See
Implement calibration for TrueTracker system (page 292)
.
Implement controller setup for TrueTracker system
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
287
Implement controller setup for TrueTracker system 14 TrueTracker setup
1. At the Home screen, tap
. The Configuration Selection screen displays.
2. Tap
Edit
next to the implement.
3. At the Configuration screen, select
Setup screen displays.
4. Complete the:
TrueTracker and tap
Setup
. The Implement Controller l
Vehicle settings for TrueTracker system (page 288)
Engage settings for TrueTracker system (page 290)
l
Steering settings for TrueTracker system (page 291)
Vehicle settings for TrueTracker system
Note – Your vehicle make and model were selected when your TrueTracker system was installed. If your vehicle data is correct, there is no need to edit the vehicle settings. If your vehicle data is not correct, edit the implement controller.
At the Implement Controller Setup screen's
Vehicle tab, complete the settings.
Setting
Connector
Current Selection
Explanation
TrueTracker connects to the port replicator connector on the EXP-
100 and uses the secondary GPS connector of the AG-815 integrated radio. (Autopilot connects to Port A of the TM-200 Module.)
Tap
Edit
if you need to change the: l
l
Implement model
When you tap
Edit
, the Edit Implement Controller screen displays.
Edit vehicle profile
At the Edit Implement Controller screen, change the settings as appropriate.
Choose new vehicle make/model
To select a new make and model from a database of vehicles (.vdb) on the FM-1000 Plus application:
Setting
Vehicle Profile Location
Model
Explanation
Select
From Database (new)
.
1. Tap
Browse
and select the required .vdb file.
288
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
14 TrueTracker setup Implement controller setup for TrueTracker system
Setting Explanation
2. Tap
OK
.
After calibrating a TrueTracker implement NavController, it is recommended to save the configuration:
1. Tap
Edit
and then
Save Implement to file
.
2. Enter the file name and tap
OK
.
Note – This is the only method by which to save an implement
TrueTracker NavController configuration.
Choose existing vehicle
To select an existing vehicle from a previously saved file on the FM-1000 Plus application:
Setting
Vehicle Profile Location
Model
Explanation
Select
From Saved file (existing)
.
1. Tap Browse and select the required .vdb file.
2. Tap Open.
3. Tap
Change/Restore Implement
. The following message displays:
The specified implement model will now be selected on the Autopilot controller.
This will cause the Autopilot controller to be reset. Do you want to continue?
4. Tap OK to load the new configuration. A message displays information you the Autopilot controller will now be reinitialized.
5. Tap OK. Read the warnings and tap OK. The file is now loaded.
Change or restore implement
The
Change or Restore Implement
button is only active when you have selected either a new .vdb or a saved configuration. Until then it is not available for use.
The button is used to acknowledge and apply/load the desired .vdb or .config.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
289
Implement controller setup for TrueTracker system 14 TrueTracker setup
Engage settings for TrueTracker system
At the Implement Controller Setup screen's
Engage tab, complete the settings as appropriate.
Setting
Operator Timeout
Coverage Log
Two State Engage
Explanation
Amount of time allowed before the operator receives an alert for lack of activity. If the operator fails to respond to the alert, the vehicle begins to drive in a tight loop.
Manual
: Coverage logging starts only after you tap .
When Engaged
: Coverage is logged when the Autopilot system is engaged if no other system is controlling logging (such as Field-IQ or Yield
Monitoring). This setting can be edited in both the vehicle and implement setup. A change in one setup location will show up in the other setup location.
Off
: The
Engage
button engages with one tap: l
First tap: Engages implement and vehicle steering l
Second tap: Disengages both implement and vehicle steering
Implement First
: The
Engage
button engages with one tap: l
First tap: Engages the implement steering l
Second tap: Engages the vehicle steering l
Third tap: Disengages both implement and vehicle steering
Vehicle First
: The
Engage
button engages with one tap: l
First tap: Engages the vehicle steering l
Second tap: Engages the implement steering l
Third tap: Disengages both implement and vehicle steering
290
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
14 TrueTracker setup Implement controller setup for TrueTracker system
Steering settings for TrueTracker system
At the Implement Controller Setup screen's
Steering tab, complete the settings.
Setting
Nudge Increment or
Trim Increment
Explanation
Set the amount by which the Nudge or Trim buttons move the line back to the correct path, or by which the
Trim
buttons move the vehicle position.
The guidance line can move off target (requiring
Nudge
) as a result of: l
GPS position drift when you return to the field for guidance, for example after you pause or turn off the system l
GPS satellite constellation changes as you drive in the field
The vehicle can steer offline (requiring
Trim
) as a result of: l
Uneven drag on a vehicle from an unbalanced implement.
l
Uneven drag on a vehicle from soil conditions.
End of Row Warning
Distance before the end of row warning occurs.
Note – Longer vehicles that take longer to turn need an earlier warning and a greater distance.
Autosense
Valve on Speed
On or Off
For vehicles operating at speeds that are: l
Normal: Select
Normal > 0.4 m/s (1.3 ft/s)
. Additional settings are supported only with NavController firmware versions 5.10 and later.
l
Slow: Select
Low > 0.1 m/s (0.3 ft/s) or
Ultra low > 0.02 m/s (0.07 ft/s)
.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
291
Implement calibration for TrueTracker system 14 TrueTracker setup
Implement calibration for TrueTracker system
The auto steering system must be calibrated for the implement you are using.
1. At the Configuration screen, select
TrueTracker and then tap
Calibrate
. The Implement
Controller Calibration screen displays with a list of items to calibrate.
2. Select each item and tap
OK
.
3. Complete the calibration.
Controller orientation setup
1. At the Implement Controller Calibration screen, select
Controller Orientation and tap
OK
. The
Autopilot Controller Orientation screen displays with a graphic that represents how the controller is oriented in the cab. (If the controller is in an orthogonal orientation, a graphic of it displays. If it is not in this orientation, no graphic will be displayed.)
The graphic of the controller is shown as though:
You are looking down on the vehicle from above.
l
The top of the screen points to the front of the vehicle.
2. Tap the buttons to select the orientation of the controller. The graphic of the controller will change as you tap the buttons.
3. If the controller is set at a sloped angle, tap the
Direct Entry tab. Then enter the yaw, pitch, and roll angles of the controller.
Note – If you use direct entry to enter custom angles, the on-screen image of the controller does not display.
4. Tap
OK
to accept the new orientation or tap
Cancel
to exit.
Proportional Steering Gain calibration
WARNING –
The wheels can move abruptly during the Proportional Steering Gain procedure while the Autopilot system tests the hydraulic response to the steering commands. These sudden movements can cause collisions with nearby obstacles or cause injury to occupants of the vehicle. Be prepared for sudden wheel movements.
Note – Complete this calibration
only
:
- When the TrueTracker system's performance is less than acceptable
- After you complete
Implement Steering Sensor calibration (page 294)
The proportional steering gain (PGain) setting enables you to reach a compromise between rapid steering response and stability. Modifications to the PGain setting affect two steering characteristics:
292
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
14 TrueTracker setup Implement calibration for TrueTracker system l
Slew Time: The amount of time the steering coulters take to move from the far left to the far right position and from the far right to the far left position.
l
Overshoot: The percentage by which the steering coulters exceed the commanded angle before they settle on the correct value.
Prior to completing this calibration: l
Complete the steering sensor calibration before you perform the proportional gain calibration.
l
Perform the Automatic Deadzone calibration immediately before you run the PGain calibration, even if the Automatic Deadzone calibration has been performed in the past.
l
Perform this calibration on a level surface, that is free of obstructions.
l
Run the engine at full throttle.
l
Raise the implement.
To correct slight variations caused by valve current response, friction, and hydraulic fluid viscosity, alter the PGain values: l
High PGain values: Decrease the slew time and increase the overshoot. This provides rapid responses, but can cause the steering to exhibit signs of instability (for example, a tendency to excessively overshoot).
l
Low PGain values: Increase the slew time and decrease the overshoot. This improves the stability but can introduce significant delays in the steering response and can cause the vehicle to oscillate from side to side.
Increase the proportional gain up to the point just before any one of the following occurs: l
Slew times no longer decrease (a low value is required) l
Overshoot exceeds 10% (depending on the Tracker unit) l
Steering coulters noticeably shake near end stops
Calibration steps
1. At the Implement Controller Setup screen, select
Steering Gain and tap
OK
. The Autopilot Steering
Gain Calibration screen displays.
2. Tap
Next
to continue. The second Autopilot Automated Deadzone Calibration screen displays.
3. Tap
Next
for the next two screens that display.
4. Follow the instructions. The system will automatically move the coulter wheels in both directions several times.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
293
Implement calibration for TrueTracker system 14 TrueTracker setup
WARNING –
The steering coulters can move abruptly during the Proportional Steering Gain procedure while the TrueTracker system tests the hydraulic response to the steering commands. These sudden movements can cause collisions with nearby obstacles or cause injury. Be prepared for sudden steering coulter movements.
5. Tap
Start
. The system engages and performs the calibration.
6. Tap
Run Slew Test
. A warning message displays.
7. Tap
Next
.
8. Tap
Next
in the two screens that display next.
9. Test various gain settings while you monitor the implement steering performance and the values for
Slew Time and
Overshoot during the Turn Left phase.
10. Adjust the
New Gain value (if required).
11. Tap
Turn Left
. Both turn buttons are unavailable while the wheels slew.
Note – The optimum gain setting has short slew time (short millisecond reading) and overshoot percentage less than 10%.
12. Repeat Step 11 with
Turn Right
. Both turn buttons are unavailable while the wheels slew.
13. When you reach the best gain value, tap
OK
to save the value in the Autopilot controller memory.
14. If you want to restart the calibration procedure, tap
Cancel
.
Implement Steering Sensor calibration
Note – Complete this calibration before you calibrate the Automated Steering Deadzone or Antenna Roll
Correction.
This calibration converts the voltage output of the steering sensor into an equivalent steering angle measurement.
Note – This calibration is only available for implements that have a steering sensor providing feedback for the steering mechanism location. Sideshift hitches do not use this calibration.
Make sure that you: l
Perform this procedure on a level surface that is free of obstructions.
l
Follow the instructions on each page.
l
Run the engine at full throttle.
l
Raise the implement.
294
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
14 TrueTracker setup Implement calibration for TrueTracker system
Calibration steps
1. At the Implement Controller Calibration screen, select
Implement Steering Sensor Calibration
. The
Implement Steering Sensor Calibration screen displays.
2. For vehicles with coulters, make sure they are raised out of the ground. For other articulation methods, make sure the vehicle is slowly moving forward in a wide open space to allow free movement of the steering mechanism.
3. Tap
Start
.
4. Perform the calibration. The system will automatically steer to the right and to the left. The value for
Volts updates as the wheels are steered.
Implement Automated Deadzone calibration
The Automated Deadzone calibration for the implement runs a series of tests on the valve and steering hydraulics to determine the point at which steering movement occurs. In this test, the system independently opens and closes each side of the steering system while determining the point at which wheel movement occurs.
WARNING –
During the Implement Automatic Deadzone calibration, the system moves the wheels that steer the implement. To avoid injury, make sure that the area around the vehicle and implement is clear.
Before you begin calibration: l
Complete the
Implement Steering Sensor calibration (page 294)
.
l
Make sure the hydraulic fluid is at normal operating temperature when you run this procedure
(to ensure optimal system performance). On some vehicles with large reservoirs, it may take several hours for the fluid to reach operating level, especially if the implement circuit is lightly loaded. Consult the vehicle documentation to determine if the hydraulic fluid temperature can be shown on a vehicle console.
If you perform the calibration while the system is still cold, repeat both the Deadzone and the
Proportional gain calibration procedures after the system is at operating temperature.
Calibration steps
1. Place the vehicle in an area that is free of hazards.
2. Raise the implement.
3. At the Implement Controller Setup screen, select
Implement Automatic Deadzone and tap
OK
. The
Autopilot Automated Deadzone Calibration screen displays.
Note – Read the onscreen instructions on each page.
4. Tap
Next
to continue. The second Autopilot Automated Deadzone Calibration screen displays.
5. Tap
Next
in the two screens that display next.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
295
Implement calibration for TrueTracker system 14 TrueTracker setup
6. Follow the instructions. The system will automatically move the coulter wheels, steering wheels or other mechanism in both directions several times.
7. Tap
Start
. The system engages and performs the calibration.
Automated Deadzone error messages
If a calibration cycle is unable to complete successfully, an error message will display.
Message: Error - .....
Steering Close To End Stops
Explanation
Before the calibration cycle could be completed, the measured steering angle approached the end stops.
Retry, and if the problem persists, instead of centering the steering at the start of each cycle, try turning the steering in the opposite direction to that which is being tested so that the calibration procedure has a greater range to test over.
Valve Connectors Could Be Swapped The calibration test sensed the steering turning in the opposite direction to what was expected. Retry, and if the problem persists either the valve connectors have been accidentally swapped or the steering sensor calibration was performed incorrectly.
No GPS
No Steering Response Detected
Unable To Determine DZ: Try Again
A GPS receiver must be connected and outputting positions before the software can run the calibration procedure.
During the calibration cycle, insufficient movement was sensed in order for the calibration to complete. If the problem persists, the hydraulic installation could be faulty.
A problem occurred when trying to compute dead zone.
Retry, and if the problem persists, contact Technical
Support.
Antenna position and roll offset correction
Before configuring the antenna compensation, make sure that: l
TrueTracker is completely set up.
l
The Autopilot system is properly configured. See
l
The correct GPS corrections are enabled. See
GPS receiver settings (page 116) .
296
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
14 TrueTracker setup Implement calibration for TrueTracker system
1. At the Implement Controller Setup screen, select
Roll/Antenna Compensation and tap
OK
. The
Autopilot Roll/Antenna Compensation screen displays.
2. Enter the appropriate settings and tap
OK
. Make sure the value entered for antenna height and distance from centerline match those entered under
Implement Geometry
.
Setting
Antenna Height Above
Ground
Antenna Distance from centerline
Roll Offset
Implement Position
Explanation
a. Place the tractor and implement on a flat, level surface.
b. Measure the distance from the ground to the base of the
GPS receiver (or antenna).
c. Enter this value in the
Antenna Height Above Ground entry box.
a. Place the tractor and implement on a flat, level surface.
b. Measure the distance from the centerline of the implement to the center of the GPS receiver (or antenna).
c. Enter this value into the
Antenna Distance from centerline entry box and indicate whether it is left or right of the centerline.
Note – Values to the left of the centerline are displayed as negative numbers. The nose of the vehicle is considered the forward direction.
a. Choose the method that best matches the conditions to
calculate the roll offset: Coulter wheel track offset method
or
Flag offset method (page 298) .
b. Enter the average offset value in the
Roll Offset entry box.
Select the offline direction, depending on whether the roll offset distance is to the left or right.
Coulter wheel track offset method
WARNING –
The steering coulters can move abruptly during the Proportional Steering Gain procedure while the
TrueTracker system tests the hydraulic response to the steering commands. These sudden movements can cause collisions with nearby obstacles or cause injury. Be prepared for sudden steering coulter movements.
1. Drive the tractor to a relatively flat field where tire impressions are visible and where you can complete passes of at least 400 m (1320 ft) in length.
2. Reset the roll offset value to 0 (zero).
3. Start a new field.
4. Create a straight AB Line.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
297
Implement calibration for TrueTracker system 14 TrueTracker setup
5. Create a clean set of tire tracks in the field. To do this, start a new pass away from the area where the AB Line was created. When the system is stable, engage automatic steering mode and allow the Autopilot and TrueTracker systems to complete the pass.
6. At the end of the pass, turn the tractor around to return along the same pass from the opposite direction.
7. Engage automated steering mode and allow the system to complete the pass.
8. In the middle of the return pass, stop the tractor and confirm that the current position is directly on the AB Line. This ensures there is no cross track error.
9. Park the tractor and exit the cab. Evaluate the coulter wheel track pattern between the first and return paths.
10. Measure the difference between the track passes and record the distance. Also note whether the return pass is to the left or the right of the original pass. Record the results.
Note – The offset should be consistently to the left or right.
Offset distance Offset direction Test
Run
1
2
3
Total =
Total / 3 (average offset value) =
11. Repeat steps 5 through 10 two more times, for a total of three test runs. Average the results of the three runs. (Total the offset distances from the three passes and divide by three). Use the table in step 10 to record your results.
Flag offset method
1. Drive the vehicle to a relatively flat area where you can complete passes that are at least 400 m
(1320 ft) in length.
2. Reset the
Roll Offset value to 0 (zero) on the Roll Correction screen.
3. Start a new field.
4. Create a straight AB Line.
298
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
14 TrueTracker setup Implement calibration for TrueTracker system
5. Start a new pass. Engage automatic steering mode when the system is stable. Stop the tractor midway through the pass. Confirm that there is no cross track error: the current vehicle position should be directly on the AB Line.
6. Park the vehicle and exit the cab. Insert a flag in the ground to mark the implement centerline for this pass.
7. Complete the pass. Turn the vehicle around to return along the same pass from the opposite direction.
8. Engage automatic steering mode. Stop the vehicle midway down the pass very close to the marker flag. Confirm that there is no cross track error. The current vehicle position should be directly on the AB Line.
9. Park the vehicle and exit the cab. Insert a second flag in the ground to mark the implement centerline for this pass. Note whether the second pass is to the left or the right of the first pass.
10. Measure the difference between the flags for the two passes and record the distance. Also record whether the return pass is to the left or the right of the original pass. Record the results.
Note – The offset should be consistently to the left or right.
Offset distance Offset direction Test
Run
1
2
3
Total =
Total / 3 (average offset value) =
11. Repeat steps 5 through 10 two more times, for a total of three test runs. Average the results of the three runs. (Total the offset distances from the three passes and divide by three). Use the table in step 10 to record your results.
Line Acquisition Aggressiveness calibration
1. Atthe Implement Controller Setup screen, select
Line Acquisition and tap
OK
. The Autopilot Line
Acquisitioncreen displays.
2. Adjust the line acquisition aggressiveness slider.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
299
Implement calibration for TrueTracker system 14 TrueTracker setup
The slider controls how aggressively the implement approaches the guidance line, using a scale from 50% to 150%. The optimal value for each profile is not necessarily 100%. It varies for different implement profiles.
300
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
Chapter
15
Vehicle Sync setup
In this chapter:
Vehicle Sync integrates with the Field-IQ crop input control system, Tru Count clutches and the Yield Monitoring system.
Multiple users can share coverage maps, providing section control for minimized overlap and seed savings during planting season.
In conjunction with the Field-IQ system and
Yield Monitoring, Vehicle Sync can influence seed placement as well as the header for increased accuracy.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
301
Vehicle Sync 15 Vehicle Sync setup
Vehicle Sync
Vehicle Sync supports up to six vehicles within range of approximately 325 yards (300 m) and in direct line of sight with each other.
Requirements
For Vehicle Sync, you need: l
FM-1000 Plus application l
Vehicle Sync unlock l
l
High-gain Wi-Fi antenna kit
For operational information, see
Vehicle Sync operation (page 442)
.
Setup steps
1. At the Home screen, tap
. The Configuration screen displays.
2. Select
Vehicle Sync and tap
Setup
. The Vehicle Sync Configuration screen displays.
3. On the
Setup tab, enter the appropriate settings.
Setting
Channel
Static IP
Explanation
Make sure that the channel that is selected is the same on all the vehicles that you want to link. You can link up to six vehicles.
Must be unique for each vehicle being synced. If two vehicles have the same IP address, tap
Generate New
for one of the displays.
CAUTION – Do not remove power from the display or the DCM-300 modem for 10 minutes after you tap the Generate New button.
Display Name
Enter a descriptive name that will be easy to recognize and select when you join the vehicles.
Note – If you already have Office Sync, this item is populated with the vehicle name that you set up earlier.
4. On the
Data tab, complete the settings and tap
OK
.
302
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
15 Vehicle Sync setup Setup steps
When there is excessive data transfer, the FM-1000 Plus application may slow down. To help with this, it may be useful to limit the amount of data sent back and forth between displays two FM-1000 Plus application.
The
Coverage and
Comms Strategy settings enable you to limit the amount of data the FM-1000
Plus application sends out. For this to be effective, it is recommended that you limit the data sent out for all displays FM-1000 Plus application in the group .
Setting
Coverage
Comms Strategy
Explanation
l
All Layers: This transfers all applied layers for the Field-IQ system.
Layer 1 only: This setting limits transfer and receiving of data to only the first product.
Original: All displays always broadcast data. Every display in the workgroup is talking always and at the same time. This slows down communication traffic across the DCM and is used for heavy traffic workgroups.
l
Round-Round Robin: Each display takes turns communicating information to the rest of the work group. Displays talk one at a time instead of the original format.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
303
Setup steps 15 Vehicle Sync setup
304
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
Chapter
16
Water Management setup
In this chapter:
Water Management functionality includes survey, design, leveling and WM-Drain functions.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
305
Water Management features 16 Water Management setup
Water Management features
Water Management includes: l
Survey: Creating surveys of areas. You use a high-accuracy GPS receiver on the water management implement to create a topographic survey of the layout of your field. The threedimensional data shows the surface topography of the land.
Note – If you are working in a field that has already been leveled, you may not need to perform a survey and you can go straight to leveling with the FieldLevel II system or installing tile using WM-Drain.
l
Design: After you complete the survey, you can use it to design the optimum drainage slope that can be graded with minimal dirt movement.
l
Leveling: After you create a survey of the field and a design for how to modify it, you can use
FieldLevel II to control a land-leveling implement on your vehicle and to adjust the land to an optimal slope.
l
WM-Drain: Surface and subsurface drainage installation
Water Management system enables you to: l
Conserve precious water resources and help control the water table.
l
Reduce erosion and conserve topsoil.
l
Perform touch-up leveling each year.
l
Use technology with a larger operating range than a laser and no vertical limit.
l
Work with your existing agriculture guidance products to manage your fields with one collective system. For example, you can connect the Autopilot system to the FM-1000 Plus application at the same time as the implement.
Requirements
The Water Management system requires: l
An FM-1000 Plus application, with or without the Autopilot system l
A platform kit to suit your vehicle and valve type (P/N 55045-xx) l
An unlock code for the water management functionality l
A leveling or drainage implement
306
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
16 Water Management setup FieldLevel II Survey/Design
FieldLevel II Survey/Design
Benchmarks
Before you can create a survey, you must set a point at a known location called a benchmark. When you create a benchmark, the GPS receiver obtains and records location information from the base station for that specific point in your field.
When you are leveling, you use benchmarks to: l
Return to a point in the field with known coordinates to re-calibrate your exact position. This may include setting the bucket on the ground or on a solid surface that will not be disturbed while you perform field leveling.
l
Move the design up or down to match the field surface at that point.
The first benchmark you create on a field is the master benchmark and displays as an orange flag labeled MB . Field coordinates are calculated from this point.
Subsequent benchmarks display as orange flags labeled with their corresponding number .
When you tap a button to create a benchmark, a countdown timer runs for 30 seconds and then the system creates the benchmark. To stop the averaging during the countdown, tap
Bench
again.
Rebenching
If you plan to shift the location of the base station each time you use the survey data, you can configure the system to force a re-bench. The system will not allow you to engage automatic control until the system has been re-benched.
When you are within the circle around an existing benchmark, a message displays on the Run screen telling you how close you are to that benchmark.
If you tap the
Rebench
button when the receiver is within the circular radius of a benchmark, the receiver is calibrated over the existing benchmark.
When you re-bench, the system automatically selects the benchmark closest to you but allows you to select the benchmark you want to use.
Settings
1. Activate FieldLevel Survey/Design for use. See
Activate features/plugins for use (page 60) .
2. At the Configuration screen, select screen displays. Complete the settings.
FieldLevel Survey/Design and tap
Setup
. The Survey Setup
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
307
FieldLevel II Survey/Design 16 Water Management setup
Setting
Survey Height Offset
Survey Point Density
Cut/fill Color Range
Explanation
Represents the difference between the height of the blade when surveying, and the height of the blade when moving dirt.
To measure this value, park the implement on a flat surface and raise the blade up to its highest limit and then measure the distance from the bottom of the blade to the surface of the ground. The
Survey Height Offset will be applied to all surveys to avoid the need to re-bench between
Survey mode and moving dirt.
When you create a survey of a field, this setting determines the distance between the collected survey mapping points. The approximate distances between points are: l
Coarse: 7.8 m (25 ft)
Medium: 3 m (10 ft) l
Fine: 1.5 m (5 ft)
Defines the vertical range in which the colors are spread over the cut/fill map.
The cut/fill map displays only after you have surveyed the field and defined a design plane. The range is displayed from the highest cut value to the highest fill value.
For example: If your highest cut value is 1 foot and your highest fill value is 1 foot, and you set your Cut/fill color range to 2 feet, then the colors will be spread evenly across your cut/fill map. If you change the cut/fill color range to 1 foot, the colors will become more focused around the neutral area, providing more detail closer to the grade.
3. Select the
Relative Heights tab and complete the settings.
By default, coordinates are recorded relative to the master benchmark. Setting relative positions establishes the coordinates of the master benchmark when it is set. These coordinates are then used for field leveling and topographic mapping every time the field is opened.
308
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
16 Water Management setup FieldLevel II Survey/Design
Setting
Relative Heights
Relative X
Relative Y
Height Offset
Force Re-bench
Explanation
Select
Enabled from the list.
By default, coordinates are recorded relative to the master benchmark. Setting the relative positions establishes the coordinates of the master benchmark when it is set. These coordinates are then used for field leveling and topographic mapping every time the field is opened.
X-axis coordinate (Relative X)
Y-axis coordinate (Relative Y) height (Height Offset)
Whether the system will force you to re-bench each time that you reload the field.
Note – If you choose No, the RTK base station must be placed in exactly the same position for the field to be correct.
4. Tap
OK
to return to the Survey Setup screen.
Tip – To view relative offset values on the Run screen, set the offsets as status text items on the slide-out tab.
For operational information, see
Create / save a design (page 449) .
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
309
FieldLevel II Leveling 16 Water Management setup
FieldLevel II Leveling
The FieldLevel II system: l
Uses a high-accuracy GPS receiver with an antenna mounted on the implement blade to measure and control its elevation l
Defines the three-dimensional height for the field and controls how the implement reshapes the ground l
Automatically raises and lowers the blade on the implement to match the design height anywhere in the field l
Includes a color cut/fill map, simple on-screen adjustments, and automatic blade control makes leveling easy l
Supports tandem or dual scraper implements
With a tandem system, the second scraper is also controlled by GPS. You can work in areas requiring cuts and fill two scraper buckets before you have to empty the scrapers.
l
With a dual system, an antenna on each side of the scraper controls two independent cylinders. This creates a more accurate surface by controlling the height of both ends of the scraper.
l
Supports the EZ-Remote joystick or with custom switches controlled by a Signal Input Module
(SIM)
Requirements
The FieldLevel II system requires: l
FM-1000 Plus application, with or without the Autopilot system l
Platform kit to suit your vehicle and valve type (P/N 55045-xx) l
Unlock code for the field leveling functionality l
Leveling or drainage implement
Setup process
Note – Before you can configure the system, it must be professionally installed. For more information, contact your local reseller.
FieldLevel II setup and calibration include:
1.
Implement settings for FieldLevel II (page 311)
2.
310
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
16 Water Management setup FieldLevel II Leveling
3.
FieldLevel II settings (page 312)
4.
Valve module calibration (page 316)
Leveling models
The FieldLevel II system has five leveling models: l
Point and Slope: The system levels at a consistent upward or downward slope, regardless of the vehicle’s direction. This can be useful for installing tile and field drainage.
l
Multiplane Design: The FieldLevel II system supports external leveling designs from Multiplane design software. This software can run a wide range of “what if” scenarios, enabling you to create complex designs with multiple field sections. You can export these design control files and then load them into the FieldLevel II system to shape the field surface based on the work in the office.
l
Plane (flat): Use this leveling model to level a field that has previously been measured with a laser. The FieldLevel II GPS system will correct the design heights to a plane surface to match your previous laser system.
l
Plane (Earth Surface): Use this model to level a field using the FieldLevel II GPS system. No corrections will be made to a flat plane, so the surface will be curved to match the surface of the
Earth. This is the most accurate model to use so that water sits at an equal depth across a field.
l
Contour: The system guides you around a contour and indicates whether to drive up or down to maintain your current level. This is designed for marking rice levees.
For cabling information, see XCN-2050 Cabling Guide.
For operational information, see
.
Implement settings for FieldLevel II
1. At the Home screen, tap
.
2. At the Configuration screen, tap
FieldLevel II and then tap
Diagnostics
.
3. At the Field Level Diagnostics screen, use the
Height Control options to set the target height.
4. You can test valve functionality at any time at this screen without the need for a GPS position or an active field design open. See
FieldLevel II diagnostics valve test (page 514) .
GPS receiver setup
The FieldLevel II system uses its own GPS receiver to record the exact position of the leveling blade.
To configure this receiver:
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
311
FieldLevel II Leveling 16 Water Management setup
1. At the Configuration screen, select the
GPS Receiver that is associated with FieldLevel II and then tap
Setup
. The WM-Drain GPS Receiver Settings screen displays.
2. From the Receiver list, select the GPS receiver you will use for your FieldLevel system. It is recommended that you tap Internal Primary when configuring the display as a stand-alone
FieldLevel II system, but you can use an external GPS receiver. If you are also using the
Autopilot system, it is recommended that you use Internal Secondary, as the Autopilot system will be occupying the Internal Primary receiver.
3. From the
Corrections list, select
RTK for all FieldLevel II applications.
4. Set the
Network ID to the same network ID that is set in the base station receiver.
5. Tap
OK
.
6. FieldLevel II is now configured and ready to use.
FieldLevel II settings
Complete the FieldLevel II settings: l
l
l
Relative Heights tab (page 314)
l
l
Settings tab
1. At the Configuration screen, select screen displays.
FieldLevel II
2. Select the
Settings tab and complete the settings.
and then tap
Setup
. The FieldLevel II Setup
312
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
16 Water Management setup FieldLevel II Leveling
Setting
Operation Mode
Cut/Fill Range
Warning
VDOP Level
Explanation
Choose your leveling model.
Point and Slope: Creates consistently sloped tile or surface drainage.
l
Multiplane design: Uses more complex surface designs imported from the MultiPlane design software.
l
Plane (Flat): Levels the field to a design plane. The plane can be configured in the on-board software using benchmarks and slopes, or by creating a plane of best-fit over a surveyed surface
(Autoslope). This leveling model uses a high-accuracy GPS receiver mounted on the leveling implement. However, the design heights are corrected to a plane surface to match your old laser-leveled fields.
l
Plane (Earth Surface): Levels the field to a design plane. The plane can be configured in the software using benchmarks and slopes, or by creating a plane of best-fit over a surveyed surface
(Autoslope). It uses a high-accuracy GPS receiver mounted on the leveling implement.
l
Contour: Uses the FM-1000 Plus application's on-screen lightbar to guide the vehicle along contours to keep the vehicle at the same elevation. This can be used for levee marking and applications that require guidance to elevations.
Acceptable warning distance.
When Auto mode is engaged and the blade is outside this range for more than three seconds, a warning displays.
Vertical Dilution of Precision: A measure of the vertical accuracy of the GPS signal. If the VDOP reaches this value, a warning message displays.
A VDOP setting of less than 3 is recommended.
Correction Age
Timeout
On Grade Tolerance Tolerance for a cut / fill value being considered on grade. The
On Grade
Tolerance is shown as the green color in the Cut /Fill scale. If a value of
0.5' is used for the on grade tolerance, any value between 0.5' of cut and 0.5' of fill will show as green on the Cut / Fill map.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
313
FieldLevel II Leveling 16 Water Management setup
Blade Settings tab
Setting
Blade Step
Course Blade Step
Antenna Height
On-grade Limit
Disengage Raise
Remote Input Auto
Explanation
The increment that you require the blade to move each time it is stepped up or down by the plus or minus offset buttons.
Coarse mode enables you to offset the target height in large increments with a single tap, such as a 0.2' fill.
The increment you want the blade to move each time it is stepped up or down in Coarse mode.
Height of the antenna above the lower edge of the blade.
Distance the blade can move before the green blade height indicators change to thin red arrows. At twice this distance, the height indicators become thick red arrows. See
.
When you disable Auto while scraping a field, you can set a time value that will automatically raise the blade. For example, if you set 0.5s, the blade will raise for half a second when you turn off Auto mode.
You can attach a remote for enabling and disabling Auto mode. This remote is controlled with the Remote Input Auto setting.
Relative Heights tab
For survey data collection or field leveling, set relative the relative offset height so that the coordinates are recorded relative to the offsets set for the master benchmark.
Setting
Relative Heights
Relative X
Relative Y
Height Offset
Force Re-Bench
Explanation
Enabled: For relative heights from the master benchmark
Disabled: For GPS heights at all times
The X coordinate that will be applied to the master benchmark if relative heights are enabled.
The Y coordinate that will be applied to the master benchmark if relative heights are enabled.
The height value that will be applied to the master benchmark if relative heights are enabled.
If set to
Yes and the field has been closed and opened again, the system will not let you begin work again until you have re-benched. Use this setting if you are using a different base station setup between work sessions.
314
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
16 Water Management setup FieldLevel II Leveling
Setting Explanation
If you have a permanent base station setup that is never moved, select
No
. The system will not force you to rebench.
To view relative offset values on the Run screen, set the offsets as status text items on the slide-out tab. See
Valve Setup tab
Setting
Valve Module
Valve Type
Valve Inverted
Explanation
Type of valve module that is detected
Select the type of valve that is connected.
Not Inverted
: (Default) Keep this setting unless the tank and pressure hoses have been installed incorrectly on the valve.
Inverted
: Select if tank and pressure hoses have not been installed correctly. This eliminates the need to reverse the hoses.
Height Filter Tab
Choose the filter for height:
Setting
None
Average
Jump Detect
Explanation
This setting (this is the raw GPS data used for height) is recommended.
The height will be averaged using the number of positions selected. This will smooth spikes in height readings but will introduce a latency into the controls.
This will filter out some jumps in the height readings. When selected, the following values must be entered: l
Threshold: The change in height value that will trigger the filter l
Decay Time: After the filter is triggered, the amount of time it takes to gradually resume using the raw GPS height
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
315
FieldLevel II Leveling 16 Water Management setup
Valve module calibration
Note – Depending on the make and manufacturer of your vehicle, the tractor computer may need to be put into a special mode. Refer to the FieldLevel II Installation Guide for your vehicle type.
1. At the Configuration screen, select
II Calibration screen displays.
FieldLevel II and then tap
Calibrate
. The FieldLevel
2. Set the vehicle throttle to 100%.
3. For automatic calibration, tap
Start
.
The system performs its calibration sequence to test the speed at which the blade raises and lowers. This process takes approximately 8 – 10 minutes.
4. To manually calibrate the valve, enter values in the three Manual Calibration entry boxes and then tap
OK
.
Note – Stopped DeadBand is the control deadband that is applied when the implement is traveling at less than 0.1 mph.
316
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
16 Water Management setup Tandem / dual scraper setup
Tandem / dual scraper setup
For improved productivity when leveling a field, the FieldLevel II system supports tandem or dual scraper implements.
With a tandem system, the second scraper is also controlled by GPS. This means that you can work in areas requiring cuts, and fill two scraper buckets before you have to empty the scrapers.
With a dual system, an antenna on each side of the scraper controls two independent cylinders.
This creates a more accurate surface by controlling the height of both ends of the scraper.
Tandem scraper
The tandem scraper feature tows two scrapers, one behind the other. This type of leveling provides increased efficiency as it allows for the blade of each scraper to be controlled independently from the other. This means more dirt can be cut before you have to drive to a fill area and remove dirt from the scraper buckets.
For operational information, see
Tandem scraper controls (page 463) .
Dual scraper
A dual scraper is single scraper with two GPS antennas, one at each end of the blade. This allows for control of the roll of the blade, giving a more accurate surface. This configuration is ideal for complex surfaces with high variability slopes.
For operational information, see
Dual scraper controls (page 462)
.
Note – For the FieldLevel II dual system you must use a scraper with dual hydraulic controls.
Set up
Note – Before you can configure the system, it must be professionally installed. For more information, contact your local reseller.
l
l
Prepare connections (page 318)
l
Primary receiver setup (page 318)
l
Secondary receiver setup (page 318)
l
Tandem / Dual settings (page 318)
l
Tandem / dual calibration (page 319)
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
317
Tandem / dual scraper setup 16 Water Management setup
Implement setup
If you have not already configured the implement, see
Prepare connections
If not already installed on the FM-1000 Plus application, install: l
FieldLevel II l
Tandem/Dual
When installed, the Configuration screen will show: l
FieldLevel II with its associated GPS receiver l
Tandem/Dual with its associated GPS receiver
Primary receiver setup
FieldLevel II controls the primary receiver.
1. At the Configuration screen below Field Level, select the
Setup
.
2. From the
Receiver list, select
Internal Primary
.
3. From the
Corrections list, select
RTK
.
GPS receiver listed and then tap
4. Set the
Network ID field to the same network ID that is set in the base receiver.
Secondary receiver setup
Tandem/Dual controls the secondary receiver.
1. At the Configuration screen below Tandem/Dual, select the
Setup
.
2. From the
Receiver list, select
Internal Secondary
.
GPS receiver listed and then tap
Tandem / Dual settings
You must set up the FM-1000 Plus application to control either a tandem configuration or a dual configuration, depending upon the implement being used.
At the Configuration screen, select
Tandem/Dual and then tap
Setup
. The Tandem/Dual Setup screen displays.
318
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
16 Water Management setup Tandem / dual scraper setup
Setting
Type
Antenna Height
Disengage Raise
Explanation
Tandem (Back): Default. Select to control two implements, one towed behind the other.
Dual (Right): Select for a dual setup.
Height of the antenna installed on either the rear implement, or the antenna installed on the right side of a single implement. Measure the antenna height vertically from the ground to the base of the antenna.
Note – For FieldLevel II, the antenna height value can be altered on the Blade
Settings tab and relates to the antenna installed on either the front implement, or the antenna installed on the left side of a single implement.
Used to control the rear implement or the right side of a single implement when Auto is disengaged. If you set it to 0.000s then the blade will not move up when you disengage.
Note – For FieldLevel II, the disengage raise value can be altered from the Blade
Settings tab and relates to the front implement’s blade, or the left side of the blade on a single implement.
Note – For a tandem system, move the blade up when Auto is disengaged on both the front and back implements as you will be swapping between the two.
For a dual setup with a single implement, we recommend that you have the left and right Disengage Raise values set to the same value.
Tandem / dual calibration
When working with a tandem/dual configuration, the valve module must be calibrated for both: l
FieldLevel II: Relates to the front implement cylinder in a tandem configuration, or the left side cylinder of a single implement.
l
Tandem/Dual: Relates to the rear implement cylinder in a tandem configuration, or the right side cylinder of a single implement.
Depending on the make and manufacturer of your vehicle, the tractor computer may need to be put into a special mode. Please refer to the FieldLevel II Installation Guide for your vehicle type.
1. At the Configuration screen, select
Tandem/Dual and then tap
Calibrate
.
2. Set the vehicle throttle to 100%.
3. Tap
Start
.
The system performs its calibration sequence to test the speed at which the blade raises and lowers. This process takes approximately 8 – 10 minutes.
4. To manually calibrate the valve, enter values in the three
Manual Calibration entry boxes and then tap
OK
.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
319
WM-Drain setup 16 Water Management setup
WM-Drain setup
1. If you have not completed implement setup, complete this before continuing.
2. At the Configuration screen, select screen displays.
3. Complete the settings on each tab:
WM-Survey l
Implement control settings (page 321)
Limit and increment settings (page 323)
and then tap
Setup
. The WM-Drain Setup l
Relative heights settings (page 324)
l
l
4. Tap
OK
when you have completed all the settings.
5.
Calibrate the valve (page 330)
.
For operational information, see
.
320
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
16 Water Management setup WM-Drain setup
Implement control settings
Implement tab
At the
Implement tab, enter the appropriate settings.
Setting
Control Type
Height Gain
Explanation
Height Control
: Select if no IMD-600 slope sensor is installed, or if an
IMD-600 slope sensor is being used for roll corrections only.
Pitch Control
: Select to allow the IMD-600 slope sensor to adjust for roll and pitch corrections.
Height and Pitch
: Select to allow the IMD-600 sensor to control pitch and height.
The amount of pitch control used to get to the target height with
Pitch Control or
Height and Pitch control types.
l
A higher number will more aggressively pitch the plow if it is off target.
l
A lower number will keep the plow closer to the grade and more slowly approach the target height.
Default value for
Pitch Control is 0.2, and for
Height and Pitch is 0.0.
Increase this by 0.05 increments and fine tune if the plow is not pitching enough to achieve the target depth.
Antenna Height
Antenna Selection
The distance from the antenna to the bottom of the boot.
Select the appropriate antenna from the list.
Survey Height Offset The distance from the tip of the boot to the ground when the plow is in the survey position (height and pitch cylinders both in full up position).
Survey Point Density
Slope Sensor (IMD-600)
The distance between the collected survey mapping points.
Select the serial number of the installed IMD-600 slope sensor that is used for pitch and roll corrections. It is recommended that the
IMD-600 be installed parallel to the bottom of the boot. See XCN-
2050 Cabling Guide.
IMD-600 is a CAN device and must connect to Port A of the TM-200
Module.
Click
Measurements
to open the
screen and select the appropriate settings.
Slope Transition Distance
Distance required to transition the plow to a different slope
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
321
WM-Drain setup 16 Water Management setup
Setting
Antenna
section
Setting
Horizontal
Vertical
Explanation
increment. If you are using the
Pitch Control or
Height and Pitch control type, it is recommended to set this measurement to twice the length of the boot.
If you are on a particularly rough ground, you can increase this distance to three or four times the boot length for smoother operation of the pitch cylinder. If you want the plow to follow the ground contours more closely, reduce this distance to the boot length.
Tile Plow Measurements
At the Tile Plow Measurements screen (when you are setting up Pitch Control and Height and Pitch control types), complete the settings and tap
OK
.
IMD-600
section
Setting
Label Faces
Connector Faces
Pitch Offset
Roll Correction
Explanation
The direction (Up, Down, Left, Right) that the IMD-600 label faces in relation to the direction the plow travels during installation.
The direction (Left, Right, Forward, Back) that the IMD-600 connector faces in relation to the direction the plow travels during installation.
The amount of angle or tilt (up or down) if the sensor is not installed parallel to the bottom of the boot.
If you adjust the pitch offset, this can help correct the boot pitch if it is not running level through the ground.
Corrects for static roll caused by minor variations in the sensor mounting.
Explanation
The distance from the leading edge of the boot to the center line of the antenna. The horizontal distance should be positive if the antenna is forward from the tip of the boot and negative if it is backward.
The distance from the bottom of the boot to the base of the antenna dome.
322
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
16 Water Management setup WM-Drain setup
Setting
Lateral
Boot Length
Offset
Antenna Selection
Explanation
Offset of the antenna from the center line of the pipe.
Distance from where the pipe exits, to the back of the boot, to the leading edge of the boot.
The distance of the GNSS antenna from the approximate center of vehicle rotation (the fixed rear axle of a towed plow or the center of the tracks). Forward is the antenna in front of the pivot point. Backward is the antenna behind the pivot point.
Select the antenna from the list.
Valve settings
Select the
Valve Setup tab and complete the settings for the PWM valve.
Setting
Valve Module
Valve Type
Valve Inverted
Explanation
Displays the type of valve module that is detected.
Select the type of valve that is connected.
Leave this value as
Not Inverted unless the raise and lower hoses have been installed incorrectly on the valve.
If this is the case, select
Inverted to eliminate the need to reverse the hoses.
Limit and increment settings
Select the
Steps tab and complete the settings.
Setting
Height Step
Pitch Step
On-grade Limit
Slope Adjust
Explanation
Fine
: You can change height steps in small increments.
Coarse
: You can change height steps in large increments.
Fine
: You can change height steps in small increments.
Coarse
: You can change height steps in large increments.
This limit sets the distance the blade can move before the green blade height indicators change to a thin red arrow. At twice this distance, the height indicators become think red arrows. See blade position in
Blade level indicators (page 452)
This percentage controls the amount the gradient changes
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
323
WM-Drain setup 16 Water Management setup
Setting Explanation
each time you increase or decrease the slope on the
Install tab when in Point and Slope mode.
For example, if the leveling gradient is 3% and the
Slope Adjust value is set to 2%, the leveling gradient changes to 5% if you decrease the slope.
Relative heights settings
Select the
Relative Heights tab and complete the settings.
Setting
Relative Heights
Relative X
Relative Y
Height Offset
Explanation
Enabled: Select to use the relative heights from the master benchmark.
Disabled: Select to use GPS heights at all times.
If relative heights are enabled, this is the X coordinate that will be applied to the master benchmark.
If relative heights are enabled, this is the Y coordinate that will be applied to the master benchmark.
If relative heights are enabled, this is theheight value that will be applied to the master benchmark.
Operation settings
Select the
Operation tab and enter the settings.
Setting
Force Rebench
VDOP Level
As-Built Logging
Explanation
Yes: If the field has been closed and then reopened, the system will not allow you to begin work until you have rebenched. Use this setting if you are using a different base station setup between work sessions.
No: Select if you have a permanent base station setup that is never moved.
Vertical Dilution of Precision measurs the vertical accuracy of the GPS signal. If the VDOP reaches the value you enter, a warning will display. A setting of less than 3 is recommended.
Manual: Logs data if hydraulics are engaged and if you have begun logging in the Run screen.
324
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
16 Water Management setup
Setting
Filter Type
WM-Drain setup
Explanation
Engage: Logs data only if Auto is engaged on the plow.
None: Raw GPS data is used for height. This setting is recommended.
Average: The height will be averaged using the number of positions selected. This will smooth spikes in height readings but will introduce a latency into the controls.
Jump detect: This will filter out some jumps in the height readings. When you select this, you must enter the following values: l
Threshold: The change in height value that will trigger the value.
l
Decay Time: When this filter is triggered, this will be the amount of time it takes to gradually resume using the raw
GPS height.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
325
WM-Drain setup 16 Water Management setup
Calibrate WM-Drain for cantilever plow
Follow the steps in sequence for consistent calibration results and improved performance. If you skip steps, you may experience inconsistent results.
Step 1: Select the mode
1. At the Configuration screen, select screen displays.
WM-Drain and then tap
Setup
. The WM-Drain Setup
2. On the
Implement tab, from the
Control Type list select Pitch Control.
3. Tap
Measurements
. The Tile Plow Measurements screen displays.
4. Enter all measurements as accurately as possible to the nearest 0.25 inch (1 cm).
5. Tap
OK
to return to the WM-Drain Setup screen.
6. On the
Implement tab, enter values for
Height Gain and
Slope Transition
.
7. Calibrate the roll offset.
Step 2: Set up the system
In the Implement tab, enter the values for
Height Gain and
Slope Transition Distance
. See
Implement control settings (page 321) .
Step 3: Calibrate Roll Offset
1. At the Configuration screen, select
Diagnostics screen displays.
WM-Drain and then tap
Diagnostics
. The Drainage
2. Complete the roll offset calibration using one of two methods.
Method 1
1. Park the system on a known level surface. Ensure the boot is flat on the ground.
2. Note the
Roll value on the Drainage Diagnostics screen.
3. At the Tile Measurements screen, for the
Roll Correction value enter an offsetting value.
For example: l
Current angle reading = .07°
IMD-600 Roll reading = -0.2° l
Roll Offset
= 0.9°
4. Return to the Drainage Diagnostics screen. Wait approximately 30 seconds for the filtered
326
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
16 Water Management setup WM-Drain setup reading to settle on a stable value.
If the
Roll value is ± 0-0.1°, the roll offset calculation has been calibrated correctly.
l
If the
Roll value is not ± 0-0.1°, note the value and then repeat Step 3 to enter a value that corrects for any remaining error.
For example: l
Current angle reading = .07°
IMD-600
Roll reading = 0.5° l
Increase
Roll Offset by 0.2°.
Roll Offset now = 1.1°
Method 2
1. Park the system on a known level surface. Ensure the boot is flat on the ground.
2. Place a digital angle indication device flat against a smooth surface on the side of the system's boot shank. Note the roll angle of the boot shank.
3. Note the
Roll value that displays on the Drainage Diagnostics screen.
4. At the Tile Measurements screen, for the
Roll Correction value enter an offsetting value.
For example: l
Shank angle reading = 4.7°
IMD-600
Roll reading = 2.5° l
Roll Offset
= -2.2°
5. Return to the Drainage Diagnostics screen. Wait approximately 30 seconds for the filtered reading to settle on a stable value.
If the
Roll value is ± 0-0.1° of the measurement taken in Step 2, the roll offset calculation has been calibrated correctly.
l
If the
Roll value is not ± 0-0.1°, note the value and then repeat Step 2 to enter a value that corrects for any remaining error.
For example: l
Shank angle reading = 4.7°
IMD-600
Roll reading = 4.5° l
Increase
Roll Offset by -0.2°.
Roll Offset now = -2.4°
Step 4: Calibrate the valve
Perform an automated valve calibration to provide the best valve drive performance. See
Valve module calibration (page 316) .
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
327
WM-Drain setup 16 Water Management setup
Step 5: Tune system performance
The system gains may need to be fine tuned to reach the desired level of system performance.
1. Set the tractor hydraulics to ~70% of the maximum flow. This will allow you to fine tune the hydraulics without adjusting any other calibration settings.
2. Walk beside the system while operating a dry run. This allows you to see the visual cues necessary for efficient gain adjustment. Pay close attention to the cylinder movement and note any directional trend.
Excess movement in both directions can indicate the following:
Hydraulic flow is too high. It is recommended that you drop the flow by 5% and then recheck.
l
Drop both valve gains by 5% and then check for improved performance.
Excess movement in one direction can indicate: l
Valve gain in that direction (raise or lower) is too high. Drop the corresponding valve gain by 5% and then check for improved performance.
Valve gain in the opposite direction (raise or lower) is too low. Raise the corresponding valve gain by 5% and then check for improved performance.
Step 6: Set the height gain
Fine tuning the height gain and the overall valve gains are a crucial step in perfecting the precision control of a cantilever plow with the WM-Drain system.
In the
Implement tab, adjust the
Height Gain values:
1. Manually drive the plow to a depth below the optimal depth of the section line that you have surveyed and designed for this calibration run. The system will default to a
Height Gain of 0.2.
2. Move forward at the speed and RPM that you will be running the plow. When the vehicle is moving, engage the WM-Drain system and note how quickly the system takes to get to the design depth.
Note – The system may not go the optimal depth that you have entered at this time because the pitch offset of this plow has not been determined. In this test, the system should drive to a consistent depth each time it is engaged.
3. If the system is too lazy/slow to get to depth within a reasonable distance, increase the height gain setting by a value of 0.05. Continue to raise this value until the plow achieves depth at the required speed.
Note – The plow may oscillate while on grade.
4. Split the last two values you entered.
For example:
328
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
16 Water Management setup WM-Drain setup
Height Gain run prior = 0.300
l
Height Gain current run = 0.350
l
Height Gain to try next run = 0.325
Note – After you have determined the optimal values for a particular plow series, such as Liebrecht 5' plow, it is very likely that you can enter the same measurements, offsets, and height gain values for other plows of the same series. With a good valve calibration for each plow, you should be able to get each subsequent plow running very quickly.
Determine the pitch offset
Note – It may take some time to determine the proper pitch offset of a plow accurately.
Without a correct pitch offset, the system will most likely attempt to maintain the design slope and drive the plow above or below the optimal depth.
All cantilever plows must assume an angle that is slightly tipped up in order to maintain depth against the immense down-pressure being applied by the soil that is being displaced. If the boot traveled through the soil with an even attitude the plow would progressively plow deeper as it was pulled through the soil.
After the pitch offset value has been determined, the value should only change as the tip begins to show considerable wear.
Note – Before completing this process, ensure that the system drives to a consistent depth. This depth may not be the optimal depth, but it will ensure that the hydraulic system is operating well. Once you are certain that optimal performance has been achieved, you may begin the process of determining the proper pitch offset with consistent results.
1. Engage the plow on a newly surveyed section line in soil that has been undisturbed.
2. Allow the system to drive the vehicle to a consistent depth and then begin entering a positive
Pitch Offset value in the Implement tab. Enter values in 0.50% increments.
Note – It may take 1-2 lengths of the boot for the system to fully recognize this offset.
3. Continue the actions in Step 2 until you are within a few hundredths of optimal depth.
4. Allow the system to drive along the entire section line. Ensure that the system continues to be consistent through any transitions that are found in the current section line.
5. When you believe the system is running with the highest accuracy possible, survey another new section line. Allow the system to drive the entire line.
6. Repeat Step 2 through Step 4 until the system gives a consistent result. Note the pitch offset value you came up with and reset the run screen offset back to 0.00%.
7. At the Measurements screen, enter the determined
Pitch Offset value.
Note – Once determined, this value should only change once the tip begins to show signs of considerable wear
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
329
WM-Drain setup 16 Water Management setup
Calibrate the valve
WM-Drain performs its calibration sequence to test the speed at which the blade raises and lowers.
This process takes approximately 8 - 10 minutes for each valve.
1. At the Home screen, tap
. The Configuration screen displays.
2. Select
WM-Drain and tap
Calibrate
.
3. Select the appropriate valve (depth or pitch), if applicable.
4. At the Depth Valve Calibration screen, set the vehicle throttle to 100% and tap
Start
.
Note – To manually calibrate the valve, enter values for manual calibration and tap
OK
.
5. When the procedure is complete, tap
OK
.
6. Repeat this procedure for another valve, if applicable.
Note – To stop the plow cylinders from working excessively when stopped, you can add a value for
Stopped
Deadband
.
330
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
Chapter
17
Yield Monitoring setup
In this chapter:
Yield Monitoring functionality
Yield Monitoring best practices
Yield sensor / moisture sensor calibration 340
Third-party display instructions 343
Yield Monitoring obtains data from mass, flow, and moisture sensors to gather data and define high and low productivity areas of a field during harvest.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
331
Yield Monitoring functionality 17 Yield Monitoring setup
Yield Monitoring functionality
The Yield Monitoring module collects data from .from OEM or Trimble installed yield monitoring sensors, and sends that data to the FM-1000 Plus application.
Yield Monitoring enables you to accurately view, map, and record crop yield and moisture data in real-time during harvest to immediately understand how well your crop performed.
Supported yield monitoring types range from EOM sensors (both CAN and Serial) to Trimble's full
Yield Monitoring CAN solution.
Yield Monitoring functions include: l
: Map and compare the performance of different seed varieties throughout your field.
l
Moisture tracking: Determine if grain needs to be stored or dried based on the in-field moisture content.
l
Load tracking (page 484) : Record the amount of grain harvested and loaded onto your trucks.
l
Auto-cut width adjustment: Adjust the cut width automatically when traveling over oddshaped fields, point rows, or other previously harvested areas to improve the accuracy of yield calculations.
332
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
17 Yield Monitoring setup Yield Monitoring best practices
Yield Monitoring best practices
There are key practices required to use the Yield Monitoring system to best advantage. Read this before you start the installation and setup procedures.
Installation
The Yield Monitoring System relies on an appropriate installation of the optical sensors. To ensure the best results: l
Install the optical sensors in the location described in the Installation Guide.
l
If the desired location is not achievable, install the optical sensors as high as possible, but no more than 6 inches (15 cm) below the top spindle of the elevator.
l
Installing the sensors lower than 36 inches (90 cm) above the bottom spindle will give unacceptable results.
l
Interference: Ensure that there is no opportunity for interference between the optical sensors or the retaining brackets and any moving parts on the combine. Be especially aware of chains, belts, pulleys, and tensioning rods, and keep in mind that their range of motion may be much greater during operation than when standing still.
l
Alignment: Ensure that the optical sensors will not move out of alignment during operation.
l
Paddle support bracket: Ensure that the optical sensors will not sense the paddle support bracket. Refer to the Installation Guide for more information.
Tare calibration
The quality of the Tare Calibration is critical to getting good accuracy, particularly at low flow rates.
To ensure the best results: l
Check the tare daily.
l
When performing the tare calibration, run the system at the same speed as you would normally use during operation.
l
While running the system empty, look at the elevator speed. This number must be correct, typically between 12–20 Hz.
l
Run the tare calibration. The tare value represents the measured thickness of the paddles, and should be approximately correct. It is more important that the number is consistent than that is exactly right.
l
If the measured value is considerably higher than expected, check the entered values for paddle spacing, and check that the optical sensors are not being obscured by the support brackets on the paddles.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
333
Yield Monitoring best practices 17 Yield Monitoring setup l
If the measured value is considerably lower than expected, recheck the entered paddle spacing and the elevator speed. If both are correct, low tare should not be a problem.
l
Tare Deviation indicates how much variation there is in the measurement of the paddle size.
Normally, this number should be less than ¼ the size of the paddle itself. If this number is excessively large, check the installation for interference or opportunities for excessive vibration, like a poorly-tensioned elevator chain.
Flow calibration
Calibrating the Yield Monitoring system across the full range of flows will improve the accuracy of the system. To get a good calibration, do the following: l
Select calibration loads where the: l
Conditions are consistent
Crop quality is even l
Ground is as level as possible l
The passes are as long as possible.
l
Keep the combine speed constant during the entire run.
Collect loads that are as large as is practical without sacrificing consistency.
l
Collect as many different calibration loads as possible, with each load at a different flow rate. To accomplish this, you can run the system at different speeds, or harvest partial header widths.
l
If you still have significant errors in the calibrations, check the noise level during harvesting. If this figure is above 30%, check for interference with the optical sensors, or opportunities for excessive vibration. If your paddles are very worn, they may need to be replaced.
Pitch/Roll calibration
The Yield Monitoring system corrects for the pitch and roll of the combine. To benefit from this feature, perform the pitch/roll calibration as described in the owner's manual.
The system has correction parameters for each tilt direction that you can adjust to improve performance. Use the following table when you decide how to adjust these parameters.
Note – The pitch sensitivity adjustment depends on whether your sensor is mounted in front of or behind the center of the paddle.
Tilt angle
Left roll
Right roll
Backward pitch, sensor
Yield reading too high
Increase left roll sensitivity
Increase right roll sensitivity
Decrease backward pitch
Yield reading too low
Decrease left roll sensitivity
Decrease right roll sensitivity
Increase backward pitch
334
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
17 Yield Monitoring setup Yield Monitoring best practices
Tilt angle
forward of center
Yield reading too high
sensitivity
Backward pitch, sensor aft of center
Increase backward pitch sensitivity
Forward pitch, sensor forward of center
Increase forward pitch sensitivity
Forward pitch, sensor aft of center
Decrease forward pitch sensitivity
To start, adjust the sensitivity numbers in increments of 0.2.
Yield reading too low
sensitivity
Decrease backward pitch sensitivity
Decrease forward pitch sensitivity
Increase forward pitch sensitivity
Test weight
The Yield Monitoring system measures the volume of grain passing through the combine, and estimates the weight by multiplying the measured volume by the test weight. Therefore, an accurate measurement of test weight is required in order to achieve an accurate total weight measurement. To ensure the best results: l
Recheck the test weight whenever the field conditions change significantly, either when harvesting different varieties, or when the moisture level of the crop changes.
l
Take several samples of test weight on calibration loads, and use the average of these samples when calibrating.
Calibrating and operating conditions
How you operate your combine can affect your accuracy. Consider the following: l
Calibration will be most effective if you operate your combine at the same conditions as you used during calibration.
l
Frequent starts and stops during a load could degrade the overall accuracy of the load.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
335
Yield Monitoring settings 17 Yield Monitoring setup
Yield Monitoring settings
The following yield monitoring systems are supported: l l
Trimble Yield Monitoring
Various supported OEM moisture sensors l
Claas, 670 and 700 series (North America only) l l
John Deere, -60 and -70 series
Serial data input
Note – The Serial tab is not available when you are setting up a Trimble Yield Monitoring, Claas, or John
Deere module.
Before setup
Before setting up Yield Monitoring, make sure:
1. All components are installed on the vehicle. Refer to the Installation Guide that is shipped with every Yield Monitoring kit.
2. Yield Monitoring has been added to the display's configuration. See .
3. The implement has been set up and configured for the appropriate operation. See
Setup steps
To complete the setup for Yield Monitoring:
1. Choose the combine and complete its settings. See
2. Complete the
Operation settings (page 337) .
3. Enter the
for your crop.
4. Complete settings for the map legend. See
.
5. Complete the
Sensor output settings (page 339)
.
6. Complete the
.
Combine settings
At the Yield Monitoring Setup screen on the
Setup tab, enter information about the harvester you are using.
336
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
17 Yield Monitoring setup Yield Monitoring settings
Setting
Combine
Series
Yield Monitor Type
Port Connection
Moisture Sensor
Explanation
Make of harvester
Series of combine
Type of Yield Monitoring: l
Trimble YM (Yield Monitoring): If this option is selected, connect the
Yield Monitoring system to any available CAN port on the TM-200 module or the configured and available EXP-100.
l
Serial data input
Choose the EXP-100 configured and assigned for serial communication. If
Yield Monitor Type is not set to
Serial
, the
Port Connection does not display.
Moisture sensor you are using: l
Trimble l
Case IH l
New Holland l
AGCO l
Ag Leader
Advanced Setup
Operation settings
At the Yield Monitoring Setup screen on the
Operation tab, enter information about the combine you are using.
Note – The selections available on the Operation tab may vary depending on the yield monitoring type that you selected.
Setting Explanation
Header Height Sensor
Enabled: The sensor is enabled.
Disabled: The sensor is disabled.
Head Logging Height
Note – Not available for the Claas 600/700. This is set by the CEBIS.
The height at which yield data logging starts and stops. The Head
Logging Height is read from the Header Height Sensor.
If required, tap
Current Height
to enter values related to your own setup.
Grain Flow Delay Time (in seconds) it takes for the grain to reach the yield sensor after it enters the head
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
337
Yield Monitoring settings 17 Yield Monitoring setup
Setting
Reset Autocut
Crop Overlap
Explanation
Controls when the rows are automatically reset l
When head is lifted: Automatically resets the rows at the end of the row when the head is raised above the logging height l
Never: Disables autocut. Rows must be controlled manually.
When more than one crop variety is detected in the head, the system will stop accumulating variety statistics. Use this setting to adjust the percentage of crop overlap that is allowed before the system stops accumulating variety statistics.
Select a value between 1% and 25%. For best results, the recommended setting is 10%.
Crop settings
At the Yield Monitoring Setup screen on the
Crop tab, enter the settings for your crop.
Setting
Commodity
Units
Explanation
Select the crop that is currently being harvested
Select the unit of measure for the crop type: l
Bushels/acre l
Lbs/acre l
Tons/acre l
Hundred Weight/acre (When this is selected, the Bushel Weight field is automatically set to 100 lbs.) l
Bushels/hectare l
Kgs/hectare l
Tonnes/hectare
Enter the weight of a single bushel of crop.
Standard Bushel
Weight
Storage Moisture Set the cutoff point between a wet crop and a dry crop. Set these values depending on what you want the map to look like.
Moisture Upper Limit Range from 5-40%. The working limit of the sensor if a trimble moisture sensor is attached.
338
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
17 Yield Monitoring setup Yield Monitoring settings
Map settings
At the Yield Monitoring Setup screen on the
Map Legend tab, enter information about the yield and moisture values to display on the Run screen.
Setting
High Yield
Low Yield
High Moisture
Low Moisture
Explanation
Highest expected yield for the current event
Lowest expected yield for the current event
Highest expected moisture for the current event
Lowest expected moisture for the current event
Sensor output settings
At the Yield Monitoring Setup screen on the
Serial tab, enter what output you want from the sensors.
Setting
Baud Rate
Parity
Data Bits
Stop Bits
Explanation
Modulation rate of data transmission in seconds l
None: No parity bit sent l
O: Odd parity bit l
Event: Even parity bit l
Mark: Parity bit is set to mark signal condition l
Space: Party bit is set to space signal condition
Number of data bits to transmit
Number of bits that represent the stop message. Used to identify the end of the cropping message when transmitted by the system.
Options settings
At the Yield Monitoring Setup screen on the
Options tab, select the setting for
New/End Load Confirmation
.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
339
Yield sensor / moisture sensor calibration 17 Yield Monitoring setup
Yield sensor / moisture sensor calibration
To calibrate the yield sensor and moisture sensor, use either of these: l
Single-Load Calibration l
Multi-Load Calibration
Before starting either procedure, keep the following in mind: l
Use the same load type for both yield and moisture calibration.
l
To achieve the highest accuracy, perform the Multi-Load Calibration procedure.
Calibration steps
1. Verify that all Yield Monitoring setup parameters are correct.
2. At the Run screen, tap to open the
Yield Monitoring panel.
3. Tap
Loads and Calibration
. The
Loads and Calibration view of the panel displays.
4. Tap either
Yield Sensor Calibration
or
Moisture Sensor Calibration
, depending on which calibration you want to perform.
5. Calibrate the
Header Height
.
6. Calibrate the
Temperature
.
7. Calibrate the
Roll Offset
.
8. Calibrate the
Yield Sensor Tare
.
If the Average Tare Deviation is equivalent to or greater than the thickness of the elevator paddle, the system may encounter a large amount of noise. “Noise” can be introduced into the system by any of the following factors:
340
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
17 Yield Monitoring setup Yield sensor / moisture sensor calibration
Paddles contacting the Yield Sensor optical lens l
Yield Sensor optical lens obstructed l
Yield Sensor(s) loose l
Elevator chain with excessive slack or paddles flopping up/down l
Tensioning rod contacting yield sensors l
Excessive paddle wear causing large quantities of grain to fall back down the elevator between the elevator wall and the outside of the paddles
9. To check the noise percentage of the system, turn the combine separator on at full engine RPM and then select
Yield Monitoring / Diagnostics / Status to see the noise percentage. If this is very high, check the aspects listed.
Note – If the frequency deviation is high, you may have an inconsistent Elevator RPM and may need to inspect the performance of your clean grain elevator pulleys, bearings, chain, and so on.
10. Select either method for calibration:
Speed method : Uses a consistent speed variable to calibrate for Low, Medium, and High
flows.
l
Cut Width method : Uses a consistent cut width variable to calibrate for Low, Medium, and
High flows.
Speed method
1. Conduct a calibration load of 3,000-6,000 lbs. at your normal constant speed.
2. Repeat this procedure for: l
One load at 1 mph less than the normal operating speed
One load at 2 mph less than the normal operating speed l
One load at 1 mph higher than the normal operating speed
This provides a calibration curve for Low, Medium, and High flow variations throughout the course of harvest.
An example of calibration loads using this method is as follows: l
Load 1 = 4,547 lbs. @ 4 mph l
Load 2 = 3,834 lbs. @ 3 mph l
Load 3 = 2,764 lbs. @ 2mph l
Load 4 = 5,768 lbs. @ 5 mph
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
341
Yield sensor / moisture sensor calibration 17 Yield Monitoring setup
Cut width method
Note – It is highly recommended that you conduct a minimum of three calibration loads to ensure that the system provides accurate readings for all low, medium, and high flows throughout harvest. If you conduct a
Single Load calibration, this may result in poor accuracy performance when Harvesting outside the Flow range at which the system was initially calibrated.
1. Conduct a calibration load of 3,000-6,000 lbs. at your normal constant speed with a 100% cut width (12 rows at 30 ft).
2. Repeat this procedure for: l l
One load at 75% of the normal cut width (8 rows at 20 ft)
One load at 50% of normal cut width (6 rows at 15 ft)
One load at 25% of normal cut width (3 rows at 7.5 ft) at the same constant speed
This provides a calibration curve for Low, Medium, and High.
Flows vary throughout the course of Harvest.
An example of calibration loads using this method is as follows: l
Load 1 = 5,768 lbs. @ 4 mph @ 100%
Load 2 = 4,547 lbs. @ 4 mph @ 75% l
Load 3 = 3,834 lbs. @ 4 mph @ 50% l
Load 4 = 2,764 lbs. @ 4 mph @ 25%
3. At the Yield Sensor Calibration screen for each load: a. Enter the actual scale weight.
b. Enter the actual test weight (average of a minimum of three test weight measurements).
c. Select each load for which the actual weight and test weight will be calibrated.
d. Tap
Update Calibration
.
e. Tap
Apply Calibration
.
4. At the Moisture Sensor Calibration screen for each load: a. Enter the actual moisture.
b. Select each load for which the actual moisture will be calibrated.
5. Tap
Update Calibration
.
6. Tap
Apply Calibration
.
342
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
17 Yield Monitoring setup Third-party display instructions
Third-party display instructions
Claas Cebis Quantimeter setup
Note – When using Yield Monitoring with Claas Quantimeter, always set Autopilot Coverage Logging to manual. See
Engage settings for Autopilot system (page 165) .
Crop Harvested setting
1. On the Cebis display, tap
2. Tap and then tap .
and then select the crop that you are harvesting.
Moisture Measuring setting
1. Tap and then tap .
2. Tap and then adjust the following settings:
Status l
Moisture correction l
Display of yield with storage moisture l
Adjust storage moisture l
Display of current moisture
Bulk Density setting
1. Turn the HOTKEY dial to the scales icon.
2. Adjust the crop density by rotating the HOTKEY until the correct value displays on the screen.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
343
Third-party display instructions 17 Yield Monitoring setup
Note – The lbs/bu value must be set before the Weight Measured function can be used.
Zero Yield setting
1. Tap and then tap .
2. Tap and then tap .
3. Tap
OK
.
Zero Angle setting
1. Tap and then tap .
2. Tap and then tap .
3. Tap
OK.
Claas Cebis Quantimeter calibration
1. Tap and then tap .
2. Tap and then scroll to
On
.
3. Harvest a full grain tank or truck load.
4. After the tank or truck is full, tap and then tap .
5. Tap and then scroll to
Off
.
6. Weigh the grain tank or truck to get a scale ticket.
7. Tap and then tap .
8. Tap and then tap
Crop yield weighted
.
9. Scroll to increase or decrease the value until it matches the weight on the scale ticket.
344
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
17 Yield Monitoring setup Third-party display instructions
Claas Cebis Auto Pilot calibration
Activate the AutoPilot system
1. Tap and then tap .
2. Tap and then scroll to
On
.
Steering angle and steering system setup
1. Tap and then tap .
2. Tap and then tap .
3. Tap
Learning sensing system
.
Centralizing switch setup
1. Tap and then tap .
2. Tap
, scroll left or right to adjust the central position and then select
OK
.
Steering sensitivity setup
1. Tap and then tap .
2. Tap
, scroll left or right to adjust the steering sensitivity and then select
OK
.
Greenstar Monitor: Stop Head Height setup
1. Tap
2. Tap
.
for Harvest Monitor.
3. Position the header to 100%.
4. Tap next to Record Stop Height.
Stop Head Height on the Command Center
1. Navigate to Home screen on the Command Center.
2. Tap the Combine icon in the lower right corner of the screen.
3. Tap the third button from the left on the command center to select the Combine tab.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
345
Third-party display instructions 17 Yield Monitoring setup
4. After Combine tab is selected, continue to press the third button from the left until page 3 displays (page numbers are located on the Combine Tab).
5. Position the header to 100%.
6. Press
Enter
on Stop Head Height screen to record the required stop header height.
Greenstar Monitor calibrations
Original Greenstar Display (60 Series Combines)
Moisture calibration
1. Press .
2. Select
.
3. View page 1.
4. Check moisture with a certified tester.
5. Calculate moisture correction (certified tester reading minus the Greenstar reading).
6. Input the moisture difference.
Yield calibration
1. Press .
2. Tap
.
3. View page 2.
4. Verify that the combine’s grain tank and the truck/wagon are both empty, and tap
Start
.
346
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
17 Yield Monitoring setup Third-party display instructions
5. Harvest about 500 bushels, and hit
Stop
.
6. Unload the grain harvested during calibration onto truck/wagon.
7. Select button next change to enter the weight of the truck/wagon in wet pounds.
Command Center (70 Series Combines)
Moisture calibration
1. Navigate to Home screen on the Command Center.
2. Tap
.
3. Press on the Command Center.
4. Continue to press until page 2 displays (page numbers are shown on the Wrench tab).
5. In the Calibrations list, select Moisture.
6. Follow the steps to perform the calibration.
7. Highlight the arrow and then press the Confirm switch on the armrest.
Yield calibration
Navigate to the Home screen on the Command Center.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
347
Third-party display instructions 17 Yield Monitoring setup
1. Tap
.
2. Press on the Command Center.
3. Continue to press until page 2 displays (page numbers are shown on the Wrench tab).
4. In the Calibrations list, select Yield.
5. Follow the steps to perform the calibration.
6. Highlight the arrow and press the Confirm switch on the armrest.
Update the Moisture Sensor (60 Series combines only)
Obtain version 1.20C from Stellar Support
1. Go to www.stellarsupport.com
.
2. Tap Support & Downloads in the left column.
3. Tap Greenstar System update from the Software Downloads column.
4. Select the green box labeled Download GSD4 Software.
5. Tap
Run
in the file download security warning.
6. After the download is complete, choose the preferred language and press
OK
.
7. Follow the Greenstar Update Wizard to load the firmware to the keycard for the original
Greenstar monitor.
Load version 1.20C to the Moisture Sensor
1. Insert the updated keycard into the mobile processor that is hooked to the Greenstar display
(it does not matter which slot the keycard is inserted in on the mobile processor).
2. Power on the Greenstar monitor.
3. Press
.
4. Tap .
5. Tap
.
348
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
17 Yield Monitoring setup
6. Tap
.
7. Tap
.
8. Disconnect the mobile processor after the update is complete.
Third-party display instructions
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
349
Third-party display instructions 17 Yield Monitoring setup
350
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
Chapter
18
Operations
In this chapter:
Water Management functionality
This chapter covers common user work operations preformed at the Run screen.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
351
Operations overview 18 Operations
Operations overview
The Run screen is where you perform operations. Depending on the features you are using, additional feature buttons will display on the right-hand side of the Run screen.
When you begin operations, there are some basic steps you will always perform. If you have already entered implement and vehicle settings:
1. Select a vehicle and an implement.
See
and
Implement selection (page 362) .
2. Select or create client, farm, field and event.
See
3. At the Run screen: a. Select or create guidance patterns and lines.
See
Guidance pattern use (page 365)
.
b. Optionally add field features.
See
.
4. Optionally activate coverage logging.
See
.
5. When you are finished, close the field.
See
.
Operation basics
The process of beginning operation can include:
1. Create or select a field. See
Field creation / selection (page 361) .
2. Select a vehicle. See
Vehicle selection (page 363) .
3. Select an implement. See
Implement selection (page 362) .
4. Load or create a guidance pattern to use. See
Guidance pattern use (page 365)
.
5. Optionally, create field features on-screen to indicate their location in your field. See
Field feature use (page 364) .
6. Optionally, activate coverage logging. See
7. Close the field when operations in that field are complete. See
.
The system saves an event summary of what has been done in the field. If you want the field to close more quickly, you can change the settings so that you do not save an event summary.
See
Event summary adjustment (page 363)
.
352
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
18 Operations Operations overview
Main buttons
The main buttons on the Run screen enable you to: l
See the status of items l
Change the view l
Open feature panels l
Navigate to other screens l
Control automatic steering, if applicable l
Turn coverage logging on or off, if applicable
Left side of Run screen
Button/Indicator
GNSS Status
Explanation
Provides information about GPS. If the GPS signal is lost completely, a warning displays and this button turns red. Tap to view
.
In the
of the Run screen, shows an overhead view of the field, with the vehicle in it.
Overhead view
Trailing view In the
of the Run screen, shows a threedimensional representation of the field from the driver’s perspective.
Version 3.0, Revision A
Information configured using the
menus.
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
353
Operations overview 18 Operations
Button/Indicator
Zoom / Pan
Explanation
Opens the zoom and pan controls for the
With the pan function, you can view the field outside of the normal viewing area.
xFill icon
To pan around the field, tap one of the four arrows positioned at the edge field area.
To zoom in and out, tap either plus or minus
Note – To toggle the zoom feature on or off, tap the field area of the Run screen.
The fifth level of zoom in the pan view is a summary view of all your coverage. It adjusts, depending on the size of the field. It does not include grid lines.
Tip – If you close the field, create a second field and then show the summary view, the summary view may be zoomed to show the area of both fields. To avoid this, reboot the display and open FM-1000 Plus application.
The view will be correct.
Tap to see a listing of all optional features/plugins and their description.
xFill is activated, displays in the top left: l
Blue: Engaged and has been used between 0 - 15 minutes l
Red: Engaged and 5 minutes remain
354
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
18 Operations Operations overview
Right side buttons on Run screen
The following buttons are the standard buttons on the right that are always available.
Item Explanation
If you are at the Run screen and have a field open, tap to close the field and return to the Field Selection screen. See
Home
Tap to go to the Configuration screen. See
Settings
Mapping guidance
Also see: l
l
Tap to open the Mapping Guidance panel. See: l
l
Guidance pattern use (page 365)
l
Operational view
The operational section of the Run screen shows your guidance lines and an on-screen representation of your vehicle in the field. Hashed grids provide a measure of distance. Each small square represents 10 feet, and each dark green outline represents 50 feet.
You can change your view from an overhead view to a trailing view. See
.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
355
Operations overview 18 Operations
Feature panels
On the Run screen, you open a feature panel to view controls related to that feature. The
display on the right-hand side of the screen.
One feature is always on the Run screen: opens the Mapping Guidance panel.
Item Explanation
1 Location for
. Tap to open the feature panel.
2
3
Feature panel. Contains controls specifically related to the feature.
Optional control button. Tap to open additional views related to the feature.
4
5
Additional information related to the feature.
Area for controls such as the coverage logging and
Engage
button when applicable. See: l
l
356
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
18 Operations Operations overview
Feature / plugin buttons
Button Opens the feature panel for...
TrueGuide implement control system. See
.
Autopilot automatic steering system. See
Autopilot system operation (page
EZ-Pilot automatic steering system. See
EZ-Pilot system operation (page 416)
.
EZ-Steer automatic steering system. See
EZ-Steer system operation (page
Field-IQ application control system. See
FieldLevel II. See
FieldLevel II, tandem. See
Tandem scraper controls (page 463)
and
Tandem / dual scraper setup (page 317)
.
GreenSeeker. See
GreenSeeker functionality (page 258)
.
Guidance mapping. See
Guidance pattern use (page 365)
and
.
ISOBUS Task Controller. See
Task Controller operation (page 427)
ISOBUS Virtual Terminal. See
Virtual Terminal operation (page 428)
Manual guidance. See
Manual guidance operation (page 401) .
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
357
Operations overview
Button Opens the feature panel for...
NextSwath. See
Remote Output. See
Remote Output setup (page 136)
Row Guidance. See
Row Guidance operation (page 433) .
18 Operations
Serial Rate Control. See
Variable rate controller setup (page 271) .
Survey. See
.
TrueGuide system. See
TrueGuide operation (page 437)
TrueTracker system. See
TrueTracker operation (page 439)
Vehicle Sync. See
WM-Drain. See
Yield Monitoring. See
Yield Monitoring operation (page 482)
.
358
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
18 Operations Operations overview
Engage button
WARNING –
Many large and sudden changes in satellite geometry caused by blocked satellites can cause significant position shifts. If operating under these conditions, auto-guidance systems can react abruptly. To avoid possible personal injury or damage to property under these conditions, disable the auto-guidance system and take manual control of the vehicle until conditions have cleared.
The
Engage
button displays on the Run screen when you are using an automatic steering system such as: l
Autopilot system operation (page 402)
l
EZ-Pilot system operation (page 416)
l
EZ-Steer system operation (page 419)
Indicator/Button Explanation
The vehicle is close enough to the guidance line to engage on it.
Ready to Engage (yellow)
The vehicle is engaged on the guidance line.
Engaged (green)
Not Ready to Engage (red)
The vehicle is not ready to engage on the line because the guidance line is too far from the vehicle.
Automatic steering is not allowed due to how it has been set up.
Auto steering not allowed
(red)
Tap to...
Engage on the guidance line.
Stop engaging on the guidance line.
N/A. You cannot tap this button.
It is an indicator only.
N/A. You cannot tap this button.
It is an indicator only.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
359
Operations overview 18 Operations
Coverage button for logging
When you are applying material, the coverage button displays on the Run screen. The coverage button controls whether or not you are logging the coverage you are applying.
Indicator/Button Explanation
Indicates coverage logging is off. Tap to start logging.
Logging Off
Indicates coverage logging is on. Tap to stop logging.
Logging On
See
GNSS status
CAUTION – The GNSS antenna may experience interference if you operate the vehicle within 100 m (300 ft) of any power line, radar dish, or cell phone tower.
Tap to see status information on GNSS.
If the feature/plugin you are using has a second GNSS receiver, there will be a satellite icon for both receivers. Tap the other to see status on the second GNSS receiver.
On-screen lightbar for vehicle
The on-screen lightbar indicates where the vehicle is in relation to the guidance line.
l
Green in center: The vehicle is on the guidance line exactly
On-screen lightbar for implement
There can be more than one row of lights, depending on the feature/plugin that is being used. The second row shows where the implement is in relation to the guidance line.
See
Implement on-screen lightbar (page 440)
.
360
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
18 Operations Fields
Fields
The FM-1000 Plus application Data Dictionary organizes all work preformed based on a Client / Farm
/ Field / Event structure.
Field creation / selection
1. To change the vehicle or implement, tap
Switch
next to the item and select the one you want.
2. Tap
OK
. The Field Selection screen displays.
l
For existing client, farm, field or events, select the appropriate choice from each list.
To create new items, tap
New
.
Item
Client
Farm
Field
Event
Variety Setup
Explanation
Select the client. The
Farm list will show only farms associated with this client.
Select the farm. The
Field list will show only fields associated with this farm.
Tap
New
. Enter the new field name.
Select the event.
Tap to add more information for record keeping.
Tap to add and edit information on the variety of products that can be distributed from the implement, tap
Hybrid Setup
.
3. Tap
OK
to enter the Run screen.
After you create the field, select a swath pattern to use while you drive the field. See
Field creation / selection (page 361)
.
Event Attributes screen
Category
Operator Name
Operator EPA#
Harvest Year
Explanation
Name of the vehicle's operator
Vehicle operator's EPA license number. For spreading restricted-use or state-restricted pesticides or herbicides.
Year the crop will be harvested
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
361
Fields 18 Operations
Category
Farm Location
Vehicle
Implement
Application method
Wind speed
Wind gust speed
Wind direction
Sky conditions
Soil conditions
Soil type
Temperature
Relative humidity
Crop
Target pests
Custom 1
Custom 2
Custom 3
Custom 4
Material
Explanation
Country or region where the farm is located
Vehicle used in the operation
Implement connected to the vehicle
Method used, such as spraying, seeding, harvesting and so on
Average wind speed
Maximum speed of any wind gusts
Average wind direction
Amount of cloud cover
Description of the soil's state
Description of the soil type
Current temperature
Percentage of humidity
Crop in the field
Pests to be eliminated by spraying
Additional information you enter
Additional information you enter
Additional information you enter
Additional information you enter
Material being applied
Implement selection
1. At the Home screen, tap
. The Configuration Selection screen displays.
2. Next to the existing implement, tap
Switch
to select to a different implement.
362
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
18 Operations Fields
Vehicle selection
1. At the Home screen, tap
. The Configuration Selection screen displays.
2. To change the vehicle currently selected, tap
Switch
to select to a different vehicle.
Event summary adjustment
When a field is closed, the system saves an HTML summary for the event.
To reduce the time it takes to close a field, you can prevent the system from saving a summary:
1. At the Configuration screen, select
System and then tap
Setup
.
2. At the Display Setup screen, select
Map Settings and then tap
Setup
.
3. At the Mapping screen, select
Off from the
Save Summaries list.
Close a field
After you finish using a field, tap want to do next. These options are: to close it. The system displays a message asking what you
Tap...
Cancel
Close
Open Another
To...
Return to the currently open field.
Close the current field and return to the Home screen.
Close the current field, and open a new field.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
363
Field feature use 18 Operations
Field feature use
You can place field features in the field while driving to define on the field points of interest or areas to avoid. There are three types of field feature: l
Point: A single point in the field, such as a tree l
Line: A straight or curved line in a field, such as a fence l
Area: An area of land, such as a pond
Field feature buttons display on the
Guidance Mapping panel at the Run screen.
Add field features
To add a feature to the on-screen map of your field:
1. At the Run screen, tap to open the Mapping Guidance panel, which contains the buttons for field features you defined.
2. Begin to drive the field.
3. When you reach the point in your field where you want to add a feature, tap the appropriate feature button. If the feature is a line or area feature, the feature will begin. To mark the end of the line or feature, tap the feature button again.
Note – You can add a point feature while adding a line or area feature. For example, use a line feature to draw an overhead telephone wire and at the same time use a point feature to add the telephone poles.
To set up feature buttons, see
Field feature mapping settings (page 65)
.
364
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
18 Operations Guidance pattern use
Guidance pattern use
Guidance patterns enable you to either: l
Manually steer on the guidance lines of the pattern using the on-screen lightbar to guide your accuracy l
Use an automatic steering system to engage on and drive on the guidance lines of the pattern
The swath measurement is based on the implement width you are using.
Creating patterns
The guidance pattern types available in the FM-1000 Plus application to create are: l
Straight swaths created using an AB line or an A+ line (see
Straight guidance pattern (page 369)
) l
l
Circular pivots. See
l
Headlands. See
.
l
Free form patterns. See
.
Access paths
With some guidance patterns, you can add an access path that provides a space such as for a road.
See
.
Existing patterns
After you have created a guidance pattern, you can choose it from the list and: l
Load it for use. See
l
Shift it. See
.
l
Rename it. See
l
Delete it. See
.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
365
Guidance pattern use 18 Operations
Guidance mapping controls
When you tap at the Run screen, the Mapping Guidance panel displays with controls for features and guidance. The following controls may display in the Mapping Guidance panel, depending on the function you are performing.
Button Tap to...
Done
Finish an A+ or an AB line.
Feature buttons
Create features in the field, such as boundary, rock, fence and so on. See
.
Load the next master line in the Swaths library with each tap.
Note – The active master line name will be displayed on the
Run screen.
Next
Project a straight line in front of the on-screen vehicle.
Pause recording a path.
Pause
Swaths
Use A+
Stop pausing and resume recording the path.
Resume
Record the path you are driving.
Record
Stop recording the path you are driving.
Stop Recording
Set A
Set B
Skip
Set the A point of an AB line.
Set the B point of an AB line.
Open the
Set the point of an A+ line.
366
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
18 Operations Guidance pattern use
Swaths Management screen
From the Mapping Guidance panel, you can access the Swaths Management screen by tapping
. The tabs on this screen are:
Tab
Swaths
Line Features
FreeForm
Features
On this tab, you can: See...
Choose the type of pattern you want to create
Shift, rename or export an existing pattern
Import or delete an existing pattern
Add an access path
Import AB Lines or boundaries (page 380)
A list of line features you have created and can load.
Set when the path is recorded and whether you want the U-turn at the end of a path to be recorded.
Delete all line segments created in your
FreeForm pattern.
A list of features you have created in the field.
The buttons on the bottom of the Swaths Management screen are:
Buttons
No AB
New FreeForm
Load
Close
Tap to...
Prevents the AB guidance lines from being loaded (for WM Form activities).
Begin a new FreeForm line and go to the Run screen.
Load a new pattern.
Close the Swaths Management screen and
See...
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
367
Guidance pattern use
Buttons
New Straight
Import
18 Operations
Tap to...
return to the Run screen.
Begin a new straight line and go to the Run screen.
Open the Import Swaths screen to import AB lines or boundaries.
See...
Import AB Lines or boundaries (page 380)
368
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
18 Operations
Straight guidance pattern
There are two ways to create a straight guidance pattern: l
Create an AB Line: Define the start and end points.
l
Create an A+ Line: Define a point on the line and the heading direction.
Guidance pattern use
AB line creation
To create a straight AB line:
1. At the Run screen, tap to open the Mapping Guidance panel.
2. Tap
Swaths
.
3. At the Swath Management screen, select the AB pattern from the pattern list.
4. Enter an access path, if required. See
.
5. Tap
New Straight
. The Run screen displays.
6. To create the start point of the line, tap
Set A
.
7. Drive to the end of the line.
Note – The end (B) point must be at least 50 meters (160 feet) from the A point.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
369
Guidance pattern use 18 Operations
8. Tap
Set B
. The new AB line displays.
9. To extend the line, drive further along it and then tap
Set B
again.
10. Tap
Done
to indicate you have finished.
11. The system automatically creates the remaining swaths. If you need to shift or skip a swath, see: l
A+ line creation
To create a straight A+ line:
1. At the Swath Management screen, select the A+ pattern from the pattern list.
2. Enter an access path, if required. See
3. In the
A+ Heading entry box, enter the angle that you want the line to be on or select a previous
AB Line to use its heading.
Note – The default angle is the same as the previous AB Line heading.
4. Tap
New Straight
. The Run screen displays.
5. Drive to the start of the line and then tap
Set A
.
6. Tap
Use A+
. The new A+ line displays.
7. Tap
Done
.
8. The system automatically creates the remaining swaths. If you need to shift or skip a swath, see: l
370
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
18 Operations
Curved pattern
Guidance pattern use
1. At the Run screen, tap to open the Mapping Guidance panel.
2. Tap
Swaths
.
3. At the Swath Management screen, select the
Curve pattern from the pattern list.
4. Enter an access path, if required. See
.
5. Tap
New Curve
. The Run screen displays.
6. Drive to the start point of the curve and then tap
Set A
.
7. To stop recording your exact path and create a straight section of line, tap
Record
.
8. Drive the curve until you reach the end point and then tap
Set B
. The new curve pattern displays showing all the swaths the system automatically generated.
9. If you need to shift or skip a swath, see: l
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
371
Guidance pattern use 18 Operations
Headland pattern
A headland is a straight AB Line or an A+ line pattern that is confined inside a boundary. This boundary is called the headland.
Note – If you want to create a headland based on the A+ line pattern, select the straight line pattern and then set the A+ heading for the internal line. Then complete the following steps.
1. At the Run screen, tap to open the Mapping Guidance panel.
2. Tap
Swaths
.
3. At the Swath Management screen, select the
Headlands pattern from the pattern list.In the
#
Headlands entry box, enter the width of the headland boundary in swaths. For example, if you enter
2
, the headland will be two swaths wide.
4. Tap
New Headland
. The Run screen displays.
5. Drive to the start point of the headland and then tap vehicle to show that the headland is being recorded.
. A red line displays behind the
6. Define the inner pattern before you complete the headland. To do so, tap
Infill
. The Mapping
Guidance panel changes to show the inner pattern buttons.
Note – After infill lines have been created, they cannot be moved.
7. When you reach the location for the A point, tap
Set A
.
8. To create an internal AB Line, drive to the location for the B point (at least 50 m (164 ft)) and then tap
Set B
.
9. To create an internal A+ line, tap
Use A+
.
372
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
18 Operations Guidance pattern use
10. Tap
Back to HL
. The Mapping Guidance panel returns to its original appearance.
11. When you complete the headland circuit, the system will draw a straight line from the vehicle back to the start point. Drive the vehicle to a position on the headland circuit where a straight line back to the start will not cut off part of the pattern.
12. Tap
Close HL
. The new headland displays showing all the swaths that the system has automatically generated.
13. If you need to shift or skip a swath, see: l
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
373
Guidance pattern use
Pivot pattern
1. At the Run screen, tap to open the Mapping Guidance panel.
2. Tap
Swaths
.
3. At the Swath Management screen, select the
Pivot pattern from the pattern list.
4. Tap
New Pivot
.
5. The Run screen displays.
18 Operations
6. Drive to a point on the outermost rut of the pivot and then tap
Set A
.
7. Follow the pivot rut around to the end and then tap
Set B
. The Enter Distance to Pivot Field
Edge screen displays.
8. Enter the distance or the number of rows from the current path to the outside of the pivot and then tap
OK
. The pivot displays, showing the swaths it generated.
9. If you need to shift or skip a swath, see: l
Outer edge radius adjustment
The pivot has an outer edge radius that is used to calculate the coverage area. After you create a pivot, you can adjust this outer edge radius.
374
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
18 Operations Guidance pattern use
1. At the Run screen, tap
Swaths
. The Swath Management screen displays.
2. Select the pivot to be adjusted from the list of available pivots.
Note – The default is the AB curve.
3. In the
Outer Edge Radius entry box, adjust or enter the value that represents the distance from the pivot center to the outer edge and tap
OK
. The Swath Management screen displays.
4. To update the pivot, tap
Load
. The Run screen displays with the new pivot dimensions.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
375
Guidance pattern use 18 Operations
FreeForm pattern
Using the FreeForm pattern, you can create non-symmetrical guidance paths in fields that have irregular shapes. FreeForm combines these patterns: l
Straight line guidance segments l
Curved guidance segments
With this combination, you can use the FreeForm pattern to create circular spirals or guidance lines with curved and straight line segments for irregular-shaped fields as well as rugged topographics.
Unlike the other patterns where the next swath is repeated, you must drive and record all paths.
Create a FreeForm pattern
1. At the Run screen, tap to open the Mapping Guidance panel.
2. Tap
Swaths
. The Swath Management screen displays.
3. Select the
FreeForm tab and complete the settings.
Setting
Record Swath
U-Turn Detection
Explanation
l
Manually: Use the record button to record the path.
When Logging: Record the path when you are logging coverage.
Note – If you have an external remote logging switch that controls coverage logging, the system records FreeForm curves when the remote logging switch is enabled).
l
Auto: Do not record the U-turn at the end of a path.
None: Do record the U-turn at the end of a path.
Removes all segments of the FreeForm pattern you have recorded.
Delete All
4. Tap
New FreeForm
.
5. To begin recording, you can either:
Tap .
l
Tap (if you have set up to record logging coverage while you are engaged. See
Engage settings for Autopilot system (page 165)
,
Engage settings for EZ-Pilot system (page
or
Engage settings for EZ-Steer (page 206)
and
6. To stop recording, you can:
376
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
18 Operations Guidance pattern use
Tap if you are recording manually.
l
Tap to stop logging coverage (if you have set up to record logging while you are engaged. See
Engage settings for Autopilot system (page 165)
,
Engage settings for EZ-Pilot system (page 201)
or
Engage settings for EZ-Steer (page 206)
and
7. To create a straight line within a FreeForm path: a. Make sure you are actively recording and the vehicle is moving forward.
b. Tap
. The system projects a straight dashed line from the front of the on-screen vehicle based on the current heading.
You can immediately engage on this line and the path driven is recorded.
c. To stop recording the path, disengage automatic steering by either tapping to disengage the automatic steering or moving the steering wheel more than 5 degrees.
Pause recording
You can pause recording and then begin recording again. This is useful when you encounter areas or objects you are driving around but will not need to drive around on the next line.
1. Tap l
.
A pause indicator displays on map.
A straight dashed line projects from the rear of the moving vehicle based on the current heading.
l
The pause button changes to .
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
377
Guidance pattern use 18 Operations l
Your position is saved to a file on the FM-1000 Plus application. You can then close the field and power off the display. When you open the field again, you will be guided back to your former position.
2. When you have returned to your desired position (for example, after driving around an obstacle), tap to stop the pause and snap a straight line from the initial pause location and the current vehicle position.
378
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
18 Operations Guidance pattern use
Access paths
An access path is a space between your guidance lines. These paths can be useful if there is road (or other field feature that breaks the consistent flow of swaths) through the middle of your field.
Note – You can add access paths on a straight or curved pattern, but not headlands or pivots.
1. At the Run screen, tap to open the Mapping Guidance panel.
2. Tap
Swaths
.
3. At the Swath Management screen, tap
Access Paths
. The Access Path Setup screen displays.
Complete the settings on this screen and tap
OK
.
Setting Explanation
Swaths between access paths This value must be equal to or higher than the
Swaths in first group setting. The next access path will display this number of swaths beyond the first access path, and will continue to repeat after this number of swaths.
The access path will display after this number of swaths
(including the master line).
Path width
Swaths in first group
ABs place in the first group
(left to right)
Provide Guidance to
Width of the access path
Enter the number of swaths
Enter a value in the ABs place in the first group (left to right) entry box. This setting enables you to specify where the master line displays in the first group (from left to right).
Select whether guidance will be based on swaths or access paths.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
379
Guidance pattern use 18 Operations
Switch to the next pattern
You can switch from one existing line pattern to another. To do so, tap .
Each time you tap , the system changes the line pattern to the next pattern available in the list on the Swaths Management screen (
Swaths tab).
The system switches to the next available pattern and displays the name of the active pattern on the Mapping Guidance panel.
Note – FreeForm cannot be actively recording the path for the Next button to be active.
Import AB Lines or boundaries
The FM-1000 Plus application can load field boundaries and AB Lines created by: l
A Remote Data Logger (RDL) l
A Geographic Information System (GIS)
Note – To load GIS boundaries, files must be in WGS-84 latitudes, longitudes, and heights in decimal degrees.
To import an AB Line or a boundary into the FM-1000 Plus application:
1. Insert the USB drive into an office computer.
The three files that define a line or field (.shp, .shx, and .dbf) must have identical names.
Otherwise, they are not recognized. If you put multiple sets of files in the folder, ensure that you do not have more than one set of files with each name or your files will be overwritten.
2. Copy the following files to the
\AgGPS\AB Lines\ folder on the USB drive: l
<field name>.shp
<field name>.shx
l
<field name>.dbf
3. Power on the display and open the FM-1000 Plus application. Tap
4. Either open an existing field or start a new field.
.
5. Tap
Swaths
.
6. Tap
Import
. The Import Swaths screen displays.
7. Tap the field or AB Line to import from the list of available swaths and then tap
OK
. The field or
AB Line is imported.
If the AB Line file contains more than one AB Line, all AB Lines in the file are imported.
8. Tap the AB Line that you want to use and tap
Load
. A warning message displays.
380
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
18 Operations
9. Tap
OK
. The imported field or AB Line is ready to use.
10. For best results, close the field and then reopen it.
Load a pattern
Guidance pattern use
To load a line/pattern you previously created in a field:
1. At the Run screen, tap to open the Mapping Guidance panel.
2. Tap
Swaths
. The Swath Management screen displays.
3. To load a pattern, select it from the list on the left of the screen. The system loads the closest pattern to you.
4. Tap
Load
. The Run screen displays, with the pattern loaded.
If you try to load a pattern that is over 100 km (63 miles) away, the following message displays:
Your current position is too far from the field to work in it.
Rename a swath
Note – To rename swaths, you must have entered the administration password. You cannot rename line features or FreeForm curves.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
381
Guidance pattern use 18 Operations
1. At the Run screen, tap to open the Mapping Guidance panel.
2. Tap
Swaths
. The Swath Management screen displays.
3. From the list on the left, select the swath to rename.
4. Tap
Rename
. If prompted, enter the password. The Enter new swath name screen displays.
5. Enter the new name for the swath and tap
OK
. The Swath Management screen displays again.
6. To return to the Run screen, tap
Close
.
382
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
18 Operations
Delete a swath
Guidance pattern use
Note – To be able to delete swaths, you must have entered the Administration password.
1. At the Run screen, tap to open the Mapping Guidance panel.
2. Tap
Swaths
. The Swath Management screen displays.
3. From the list on the left, select the swath to delete.
4. Tap
Delete
. If prompted, enter the password. The swath is marked as deleted. The next time you close the current field, the swath does not show in the list.
Note – You cannot delete a swath that is currently active.
5. To return to the Run screen, tap
Close
.
Switch to the next pattern
You can switch from one existing line pattern to another. To do so, tap .
Each time you tap , the system changes the line pattern to the next pattern available in the list on the Swaths Management screen (
Swaths tab).
The system switches to the next available pattern and displays the name of the active pattern on the Mapping Guidance panel.
Note – FreeForm cannot be actively recording the path for the Next button to be active.
Shift a swath
Note – Shifting a swath is a permanent adjustment. To temporarily change the spacing of swaths, skip a swath instead. See
Note – You cannot shift line features or FreeForm curves.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
383
Guidance pattern use
1. At the Run screen, tap to open the Mapping Guidance panel.
2. Tap
Swaths
. The Swath Management screen displays.
3. Select the swath to shift from the list on the left.
4. Tap
Shift
. The Enter the Shift Distance screen displays.
18 Operations
5. Enter the values.
Setting
Left
Right
Value entry boxes
Metric
Feet & Inches
Decimal Feet
Rows
Calculator
Tap to...
Shift the line to the left of your view.
Shift the line to the right of your view.
Enter the distance you want to shift the line.
Change to metric values.
Change to feet and inches.
Change to decimal feet.
Open the calculator.
Note – If you shift a line, it will shift the original version of the line and remove any skip that you have applied.
384
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
18 Operations Guidance pattern use
6. Tap
OK
. The Swath Management screen displays. The newly shifted swath displays in the swath list on the left of the screen.
Skip a swath
Note – The Skip position of a swath line is temporary and is not saved permanently. To save such an adjustment, shift the swath instead. See
.
FM-1000 Plus application uses the original swath that you drove to automatically generate the position of the other swaths. Occasionally, the on-screen swaths do not accurately indicate where your swaths are. For example, you may need to skip a swath to drive to the other side of a road.
To temporarily correct the spacing of the automatically generated swaths in a field:
1. At the Run screen, tap to open the Mapping Guidance panel.
2. Tap
Skip.
The Enter the Skip Distance screen displays.
3. Complete the settings.
Setting
Left
Right
Value entry boxes
Metric
Feet & Inches
Decimal Feet
Rows
Calculator
Tap to...
Shift the line to the left of your view.
Shift the line to the right of your view.
Enter the distance you want to skip to the next swath.
Change to metric values.
Change to feet and inches.
Change to decimal feet.
Open the calculator.
The swath line moves the required amount.
4. Tap
OK
. The Swath Management screen displays. The newly shifted swath displays in the swath list on the left of the screen.
Note – The skip occurs based on the direction of the vehicle, not on the A-to-B orientation of the line. For example, if you select
Left
, the line shifts to the left of your view.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
385
Coverage logging 18 Operations
Coverage logging
When you are applying material, the coverage button displays on the Run screen. The coverage button controls whether or not you are logging the coverage you are applying.
Indicator/Button Explanation
Indicates coverage logging is off. Tap to start logging.
Logging Off
Indicates coverage logging is on. Tap to stop logging.
Logging On
When the system logs coverage, it records the area that you have covered when you carry out an operation (such as applying fertilizer to a field).
If you have chosen to log coverage, the covered area displays on the Run screen as a pale yellow area that shows: l
Coverage the first time l
Any skips in coverage l
Areas you covered twice or three times
Coverage logs record more than the applied material. See
View coverage layers (page 386)
and
Log coverage for varieties (page 387) .
You can begin logging coverage: l
Manually by tapping l
Automatically if you are using automatic steering and tapping .See
,
Engage settings for EZ-Pilot system (page 201)
, or
Engage settings for EZ-Steer (page 206)
.
If you are applying a variety of materials, you can set up coverage to show the varieties. See
Log coverage for varieties (page 387) .
View coverage layers
1. To see different aspects (or layers) of coverage on the screen, tap the screen.
2. Select the layer you want to view.
on the lower left side of
386
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
18 Operations Coverage logging
Layer
Overlap
Height
GPS Quality
Cut/Fill
Explanation
General coverage and overlap
Altitude of GPS receiver
Quality of GPS signal
Cut or fill (for water management operations)
Variety
Applied Rate
Speed
Different varieties being applied
Rate at which material is being applied
Speed of the vehicle
Average Cross Track Error (XTE) Position of the vehicle in relation to the guidance line
Log coverage for varieties
By default, coverage is displayed on the screen as a pale yellow. However, if you are applying varieties, you can set up the system to make different varieties visible on the screen.
By logging varieties, you can: l
Change product in a field, so that you can later identify which parts of the field are covered in which product.
l
Plant or apply two or more different products side by side and record the locations in your field. For example, track the planting of:
Corn seed in the left side hoppers l
Clover seed in the right side hoppers
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
387
Coverage logging 18 Operations
Varieties are assigned to rows on your implement. Specify the number of rows on your implement when you configure it. For more information, see
Edit implement settings (page 158) .
Set up variety logging
To log varieties:
1. At the Home screen, tap
. The Field Selection screen displays.
2. Tap
Hybrid Setup
. The Hybrid Setup screen displays. Use this screen to complete the settings for hybrids.
Setting or Button
Left-hand list
Add
Remove
Edit
Assign
Clear
Explanation
List of varieties.
Add a new variety and select a name for it.
Select a variety name in the left-hand list and tap
Remove
to delete it.
Select a variety name in the list and tap
Edit
to change the settings.
The Variety Attributes screen displays.
Enter a name for the variety, choose the color to display for the variety and optionally complete additional record keeping information.
Select the variety from the left-hand list and tap
Assign
. For each variety, select the row numbers on your implement that will be applying the variety.
Tap to clear all current entries.
3. When you have finished with the settings, tap
OK
.
When you enable coverage logging and set the Mapping Guidance panel list to
Variety
, this variety color displays in the guidance window.
Tip – For quick access to the Hybrid Setup screen from the Run screen, set the Mapping Guidance panel list to
Variety and then tap
Attributes
.
If you select a different implement or change the settings of the current implement, the variety assignments are removed.
388
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
18 Operations Field-IQ operation
Field-IQ operation
WARNING –
When the implement is down and the master switch is in the On position, the machine is fully operational. Take all necessary precautions to ensure user safety. Failure to do so could result in injury or death.
1. At the Home screen, tap
.
2. At the Current Configurations screen, configure the display/vehicle/ implement settings and then tap
OK
.
3. At the Field Selection screen, select the required client/farm/field/event settings and then tap
OK
.
For setup information, see
Field-IQ system setup (page 218)
.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
389
Field-IQ operation 18 Operations
Field-IQ panel
To open the Field-IQ panel, tap views: l
Material detail view (page 390)
l
l
Section control view (page 393)
. The panel displays. Within the panel, you can navigate to many
Material detail view
The main view shows a list of materials. Up to six materials are listed. The current target and actual rates are shown for each material.
Material details, page 1
Tap the material to see the first details view of the material.
390
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
18 Operations Field-IQ operation
Page 1 Buttons
Material On
Sections Auto
Target
Rows
Tap to...
Turn the material on or off.
Turn automatic section control on or off.
Select if Target 1 or Target 2 is shown, or to select Manual to turn the Target rate off.
Tap to decrease the Target rate by 1.
Tap to increase the Target rate by 1.
To see the
of the material.
To go to the
Material details, page 2
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
391
Field-IQ operation 18 Operations
Depending on the material, the following buttons display on the second page of the material details view.
Page 2 Buttons
Bin
Seed Disc
Arm Pump
Gate Setup
Density
Tap to...
Go to the Virtual Bin / Tank Setup screen where you can adjust the bin settings.
Fill the seed disk.
Enable Field-IQ to control the pump.
Go to the Gate Setup screen.
Go to the Density screen where you can enter the density of the current product.
Return to the
.
Rows
To go to the
.
Row detail view
To see detailed information on the rows, tap
Rows
.
The color of the row numbers indicate how far off target the rows are applying.
l
Green: Rows are applying on target.
l
Red: Rows are applying off target.
l
Black: Rows have been manually turned off.
l
White: Rows have been turned off automatically by the system.
To view more rows, tap the arrow buttons .
392
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
18 Operations Field-IQ operation
To return to the previous view, tap .
Section control view
To open the section control view on the Run screen, tap in the lower left corner of the screen.
The section control view shows the engage status of each row on the implement: l
Green: Engaged l
Gray: Section closed due to overlap l
Red: Not engaged or section manually turned off
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
393
Field-IQ operation
Field-IQ master switch box functions
Note – All systems must have a Field-IQ master switch box.
18 Operations
Item Setting
1
2
3
4
5
Increment/ decrement switch
Rate switch
LED indicator
Automatic/Manual section switch
Master switch
Explanation
Increases or decreases the applied amount by a set amount
(the amount is set in the Setup screen,
Rate tab).
Preset Rate 1, preset Rate 2, or Manual rate.
l
Red: Unit is powered but not communicating with the
FM-1000 Plus application.
l
Green: Unit is powered and communicating with the FM-
1000 Plus application.
l
Yellow: Unit is initializing communications with the FM-
1000 Plus application.
You can switch from Automatic to Manual mode while traveling.
l
Automatic mode: The FM-1000 Plus application automatically opens and closes sections when entering areas of overlap, non-apply zones, or crossing boundaries.
l
Manual mode: The sections are controlled by the user using the Field-IQ system.
l
5a: Jump start position. The same functions as in Master
On are active, plus the system is overridden to use a preset control speed (the speed is set in the Setup screen,
Override tab).
l
5b: On position. The sections and rate are ready to be commanded by the FM-1000 Plus application.
l
5c: Off position. Sections are closed and rate is set to zero.
394
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
18 Operations
Item Setting
Field-IQ operation
Explanation
When you use Lock in Last Position, the valve is locked and the rate is controlled by an auxiliary master valve or section.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
395
Field-IQ operation
Field-IQ 12-section switch box (optional)
18 Operations
Only one section switch box can be used on each system. Each section switch is automatically assigned to the corresponding section. The sections are read from left to right. For example, switch
1 assigns to the section furthest on the left when standing behind the implement. For more information, see the
Hardware tab in Setup screen of Field-IQ.
The section switches have different functions, depending upon the status of the master
Automatic/Manual section control switch on the master switch box.
Automatic section control
When the Automatic/Manual section control switch is in the
Automatic position, if the section switch is in the: l
On/up position: The section(s) assigned to it are commanded automatically by the FM-1000
Plus application.
l
Off/down position: The section(s) assigned to it are commanded to be off.
Manual section control
When the Automatic/Manual section control switch is in the Manual position, if the section switch is in the: l
On/up position: The section(s) assigned to it are commanded to be on. This overrides the FM-
1000 Plus application and coverage logging is ignored.
l
Off/down position: The section(s) assigned to it are commanded to be off. This overrides the
FM-1000 Plus application and coverage logging is ignored.
LED status indicators
The LED indicators on the section switch box are: l
Green: Unit is powered and is communicating with the display.
l
Yellow: Unit is initializing communications with the display.
l
Red: Unit is powered but not communicating with the display.
Material assignment
To change materials quickly and easily:
396
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
18 Operations Field-IQ operation
1. At the Material Assignment screen, tap the material to change. A list of available materials displays.
2. Select the material you want from the list and tap
OK
.
Material assignment
Use the
Material Assignment option to quickly and easily change materials. The location name you set up displays (for example, Hoppers) and the button shows the current material name.
Tap the button to see a list of the same type of materials. To change the material type, select the required material from the list, and then tap
OK
.
Enable sections
To enable sections:
1. At the Home screen, tap
.
2. At the Configuration screen, tap
Field-IQ and then tap
Diagnostics
.
3. At the Field-IQ Diagnostics screen on the
Operations tab, tap the section you want to enable.
Enter values manually
To enter values manually:
1. At the Home screen, tap
.
2. At the Configuration screen, tap
Field-IQ and then tap
Diagnostics
.
3. At the Field-IQ Diagnostics screen on the
Operations tab, you can enter values manually for:
Setting
Tank Level
Target Rate
Speed
Aggressiveness
Explanation
Enter a value or tap
Refill Tank
.
Use the buttons to decrease or increase the required rate for the rate switch.
Use the buttons to decrease or increase speed.
Check the value for
Applied Rate
. Increase or decrease aggressiveness to achieve the rate you want.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
397
Field-IQ operation 18 Operations
Test optional switch box
To test the optional switch box:
1. At the Home screen, tap
.
2. At the Configuration screen, tap
Field-IQ and then tap
Diagnostics
.
3. At the Field-IQ Diagnostics screen on the
Operations tab: a. Flip each switch in the section switch box.
b. The section it is assigned to displays as gray.
Prescriptions
To send target rates to the variable controller, you can define variable rate controller setup data and
that define the rates to be applied in different areas of the field. This information is used to send target rates to the variable rate controller. Applied rates are received from the controller, and both target and applied rates display on the screen. In addition, you can log data relating to the variable rate application to the hard drive.
After you create the prescription, store either the three prescription files in ESRI shape-file format or the single .gdx file in the \AgGPS\Prescriptions\ folder. Then, when you are within the proximity criteria, the prescription is available to load.
If you use complex contoured prescriptions, loading the prescriptions can take some time. The FM-
1000 Plus application shows progress bars while it loads and converts prescriptions.
You can configure the status sliders on the main navigation screen (the Run screen) to show the target rate specified in the prescription file, and the applied rates returned from the controller for the active channel.
When a field is open, a prescription is loaded, and a controller is connected, the target rates (read from the prescription) and applied rates (received from the controller) can be shown in the status text items. For more information, see
The FM-1000 Plus application can load prescription files created by a Geographic Information
System (GIS). The method you use to create the prescription depends on which GIS package you use.
When you map a new field or select an existing field, you can also select any shapefile (.shp) or
AgInfo GDX (.gdx) prescription file created in AgInfo version 3.5.44.0 or later, that is within these limits:
For...
Boundary
AB Line
Proximity
Prescriptions must...
Overlap the field boundary
Overlap the AB Line
Be within 1 km of the field
398
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
18 Operations Field-IQ operation
If you load a shapefile prescription, select the rate column.
CAUTION – When you select a shapefile prescription, the applied rate will be incorrect if you choose the wrong column when using a variable rate controller.
Load prescription file
A prescription works only when the Field-IQ rate selection switch is in the Rate 1 position.
Rate Switch Position
Rate 1
Rate 2
Increment/Decrement Switch Status
Disabled
Enabled
To load a prescription file:
1. Map a new field or select an existing field. The FM-1000 Plus application lists the prescription files within the specified limits. If there are many prescriptions on the hard drive, this can take several seconds, and a progress bar displays.
If any prescription files are within the specified limits, the Select Prescription screen displays.
2. From the
Available Prescriptions list, select a prescription file.
Note – If an AgInfo GDX prescription has an incorrect format, it will not display in the Available
Prescriptions list.
If you select a shapefile prescription, select the correct prescription rate column.
Note – When you select a shapefile prescription, if you choose the wrong column when using a variable rate controller, the applied rate will be incorrect.
l
If you select an AgInfo GDX prescription, the
Rate Column box does not appear.
3. From the
Prescription Scale Factor
, select the scale factor for the units used in the prescription file.
4. Set the
5. From the
When off prescription use list, select the target rate for when you are outside the area that is covered by the prescription file. See
.
6. Tap
OK
to load the prescription file.
Lead time
Lead-time is the average time required by the controller before it can react to a requested rate change. Define the lead time in the Select Prescription screen. For example, a value of 5.0 means that, on average, it takes the controller around five seconds to change from one rate to a new rate.
The direction and speed of the vehicle are combined with the lead time to project a future position of the vehicle. The target rate at this projected position is sent to the variable rate controller, giving the controller time to reach the required rate at approximately the same time that the vehicle arrives at the projected position.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
399
Field-IQ operation 18 Operations
You must choose an appropriate lead time. This depends on the: l
Controller type and configuration l
Type of materials being applied l
Nature and specifications of the delivery equipment
Control outside the prescription area
When the vehicle moves outside the area covered by the prescription file, no target rate is available.
There are three options for controlling the output rate: l
Continue to use the last rate being output when the vehicle moves off the prescription l
Use a default rate l
Use a zero rate
Specify the required option in the Select Prescription screen.
You can now select prescriptions even when the vehicle is a great distance away from the field, which enables you to load a prescription before driving to the field.
400
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
18 Operations Manual guidance operation
Manual guidance operation
When you use the Manual Guidance option, you must steer the vehicle manually while you watch the virtual lightbar for guidance.
The Run screen looks similar to when the Autopilot option is installed, except that: l
There is no Autopilot tab on the right l
There is no
Engage
button
You can still tap guidance lines.
to open the Mapping Guidance panel and add field features or create
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
401
Autopilot system operation 18 Operations
Autopilot system operation
To engage the Autopilot system, you must have: l
Have a field open in the Run screen l
Have an existing pattern you are using l
The vehicle within the distance of the guidance line set in the Engage tab. See
Engage settings for Autopilot system (page 165) .
When you are using Autopilot, you use the
Engage
button to automatically steer on the guidance line. The Engage button can indicate status and, in some cases, also control the Autopilot system.
Indicator/Button Explanation
The vehicle is close enough to the guidance line to engage on it.
Tap to...
Engage on the guidance line.
Ready to Engage (yellow)
The vehicle is engaged on the guidance line.
Stop engaging on the guidance line.
Engaged (green)
Not Ready to Engage (red)
The vehicle is not ready to engage on the line because the guidance line is too far from the vehicle.
Automatic steering is not allowed due to how it has been set up.
N/A. You cannot tap this button.
It is an indicator only.
N/A. You cannot tap this button.
It is an indicator only.
Auto steering not allowed
(red)
You can also
Adjust Autopilot guidance (page 403)
settings during operations in the field.
402
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
18 Operations Autopilot system operation
Adjust Autopilot guidance
At the Run screen, tap
Setting
Nudge
Trim
Online Aggr
. The Autopilot panel displays.
Explanation
The guidance line can move off target due to either: l
GPS position drift after pausing or turning off the system l
GPS satellite constellation changes as you drive in the field
Use the
<
and
>
buttons to move the line in a perpendicular direction (left or right).
To set the increment for this setting, see
Steering settings for Autopilot system (page 166) .
Trim replaces Nudge when you are using RTK corrections.
The vehicle can steer offline as a result of uneven drag on the vehicle from an unbalanced implement or from soil conditions.
Use the
<
and
>
buttons to move the vehicle in a perpendicular direction
(left or right) of the line you are currently engaged on.
To set the increment for this setting, see
Steering settings for Autopilot system (page 166) .
Aggressiveness is the measure of how strongly the system makes steering changes.
Use the
-
and
+
buttons to adjust how aggressively the vehicle moves to the guidance line. A setting that is: l
Higher brings the vehicle back online faster, but may cause tight oscillations about the line l
Lower: Brings the vehicle back online more slowly, but can avoid overshoot
Note – The default aggressiveness setting is 100%.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
403
Autopilot system operation 18 Operations
Disengage Autopilot system
The Autopilot t system can be disengaged
and
.
Automatic disengagement
The Autopilot system disengages automatically when: l
The vehicle is outside the allowed distance from the guidance line set up in the
Engage tab. See
Engage settings for Autopilot system (page 165) .
l
The system is paused.
l
GPS positions are lost.
Manual disengagement
To manually disengage the system, you can: l l
Tap on the screen.
Turn the steering wheel to override the electric motor.
When you turn the steering wheel manually, the Autopilot system disengages. It is recommended that you check this setting before you begin using the system in a new installation. To do so: a. Engage on a line.
b. Turn the wheel until Autopilot disengages.
To make adjustments to the amount of force required to disengage the system using the steering wheel, see
Automated Deadzone calibration (page 173) .
404
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
18 Operations NextSwath operation
NextSwath operation
Note – For NextSwath setup, see
.
WARNING –
Installers, technicians, and operators must verify that the Autopilot function (line acquisition and online guidance) is in good, safe, working order before the operator uses NextSwath.
The optional NextSwath feature/plugin works with Autopilot to enable you to: l
Use automatic turns between swaths (see
) l
Tap the Turn Now button to begin an automatic turn prior to or after the turn point (see
) l
Extend the point for the automatic turn to compensate for larger implements when you enable
TrueSwath (see
TrueSwath operation (page 413) )
l
Use automated implement functions and reminders to occur before you begin or end a swath
(see
Using automated headlands management (page 415)
)
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
405
NextSwath operation 18 Operations
Automatic turn
Note – Only use NextSwath for straight AB and A+ lines, and headland infill patterns. NextSwath cannot be used with curve, pivot, or FreeForm patterns, feature line guidance, TrueTracker, FieldLevel II, or RG-100 Row
Guidance systems.
WARNING –
A trained and qualified operator must be at the controls of the vehicle at all times, and be ready to safely take over controls of the system at anytime. NextSwath is not a safety aid nor a replacement for a skilled operator.
WARNING –
NextSwath cannot avoid obstacles. The operator is solely responsible for avoiding obstacles.
WARNING –
Interaction with and avoidance of boundaries is solely the operator's responsibility. While
NextSwath can use field boundaries for a reference point for turn start points, the trained and qualified operator is responsible for determining offsets from field boundaries. NextSwath does not calculate distance of the vehicle or machinery from the boundary during the turn.
Automatic turn points are calculated from one of these: l
A headland infill boundary. see Shorten or Extend Swath setting in
.
l
Whether the turn point is inside or outside a productive boundary (if you have a boundary without headlands). see Turn Point Inside/Outside Boundary setting in
.
l
The A and B points for a line in a field without a boundary
The basic steps to use the NextSwath automatic turn are:
1. Enter the field.
2. At the Run screen, tap to go to the NextSwath panel.
3. Check the
NextSwath checkbox to enable the NextSwath capability.
Note – Each time you enter the field or change to a different guidance line/pattern, you must enable
NextSwath before you can use it.
4. When the system displays the liability warning, read the warning and accept it if you understand it and are ready to accept it.
5. Tap
(yellow) to engage on a guidance line. When you are engaged, the engage button will change to green , indicating you are engaged on the line and the Autopilot system is now steering the vehicle. When you reach the location where the end of row warning message
406
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
18 Operations NextSwath operation displays, the system:
Checks the
Enable Turn
checkbox which indicates automatic turn is enabled l
Changes the turn button from red to yellow l
Displays buttons that enable you to cancel the automatic turn or confirm you want the automatic turn (If you are not on the NextSwath panel, the
Adjust button also displays.
6. Use the swath direction controls to choose the direction you want the vehicle to automatically turn toward (in reference to the forward direction of travel). Tap either the left
<
or right
>
direction button. With each tap of the direction button, the amount of swaths (shown by the swath number ) you will move to during the turn increases. If viewable, the selected swath to change to will be highlighted in green on the Run screen. See
Adjust direction and swath number (page 410)
. The system displays a yellow line indicating the length of the automatic turn.
Note – You can travel up to 10 swaths over or a maximum of 500 feet/150 meters.
This graphic indicates you are moving one swath and are turning left.
Note – To clear the swath number, uncheck and recheck
Enable Turn
.
7. If you want the automatic turn to occur, tap
Accept Auto Turn
. The system:
Displays information about the turn, including how far away from the turn point you are l
Changes the turn button to green l
Begins the turn when your vehicle reaches the turn point, and completes the turn
Note – If you are traveling too fast for the system to complete the turn, the automatic turn will not occur.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
407
NextSwath operation 18 Operations
Note – The automatic turn shape and speed will occur based on how you have set up auto turn. See
.
After the turn is completed, the system disables the
Enable Turn
checkbox.
8. If you want to cancel the automatic turn, tap
Cancel Auto Turn
. The system cancels the automatic turn and the turn button changes to yellow . Also see
.
9. As you drive on the next swath, when you reach the location where the end of row warning message displays, the system: l
Enables and checks the
Enable Turn
checkbox
Enables the swath chooser in the opposite direction, as shown in this graphic:
Follow steps 6 through 8 as appropriate.
Tip – You can set up status items to show the length of the swath (Swath Length) and the calculated distance to the end of the swath (Along Track Error). See
408
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
18 Operations NextSwath operation
Auto turn cancel
WARNING –
A trained and qualified operator must be at the controls of the vehicle at all times, and be ready to safely take over controls of the system at anytime. NextSwath is not a safety aid nor a replacement for a skilled operator.
WARNING –
NextSwath cannot avoid obstacles. The operator is solely responsible for avoiding obstacles.
When you want to cancel an automatic turn:
1. When you reach the location where the end of row warning message displays, the system displays controls that enable you to confirm or cancel the automatic turn.
2. Tap
Cancel Auto Turn
. The system:
Cancels the automatic turn l
Changes the turn button to yellow
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
409
NextSwath operation 18 Operations
Adjust direction and swath number
WARNING –
Interaction with and avoidance of boundaries is solely the operator's responsibility. While
NextSwath can use field boundaries for a reference point for turn start points, the trained and qualified operator is responsible for determining offsets from field boundaries. NextSwath does not calculate distance of the vehicle or machinery from the boundary during the turn.
WARNING –
A trained and qualified operator must be at the controls of the vehicle at all times, and be ready to safely take over controls of the system at anytime. NextSwath is not a safety aid nor a replacement for a skilled operator.
WARNING –
NextSwath cannot avoid obstacles. The operator is solely responsible for avoiding obstacles.
If you are not at the NextSwath panel while engaged and you want to change the number of swaths to skip or change the direction of the upcoming automatic turn:
1. When you reach the point when the end of row warning displays, the system displays the
Adjust
button as well as the options to accept or cancel the automatic turn. Tap
Adjust
to quickly return to the NextSwath panel.
2. Make the appropriate changes to the direction and swath number.
410
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
18 Operations NextSwath operation
Start turn now
WARNING –
Interaction with and avoidance of boundaries is solely the operator's responsibility. While
NextSwath can use field boundaries for a reference point for turn start points, the trained and qualified operator is responsible for determining offsets from field boundaries. NextSwath does not calculate distance of the vehicle or machinery from the boundary during the turn.
WARNING –
NextSwath cannot avoid obstacles. The operator is solely responsible for avoiding obstacles.
WARNING –
A trained and qualified operator must be at the controls of the vehicle at all times, and be ready to safely take over controls of the system at anytime. NextSwath is not a safety aid nor a replacement for a skilled operator.
When you want to start an automatic turn instead of having the system start it, the steps to begin the automatic turn depend on where your vehicle is in relation to the point for the end-of-row turn warning or the turn point. The turn button indicates this by changing colors.
Yellow turn button
If the turn button is yellow and you want to begin an automatic turn, tap the turn button
(yellow).
The system will: l
Change the turn button to green l
Immediately begin and complete the automatic turn
If you have programmed automated headlands management events for use, also see
Using automated headlands management (page 415) .
Red turn button
If the turn button is red and you want to begin an automatic turn:
1. Check
Enable Turn
.
2. Choose the direction and number of swaths to move to. The system changes the turn button to yellow .
3. Tap the yellow turn button. The vehicle will begin and complete the automatic turn.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
411
NextSwath operation 18 Operations
Green turn button
If the turn button is green, you are already in the process of an automatic turn. To cancel the automatic turn, you can do any of these: l
Tap the turn button again.
l
Grab the wheel.
l
Tap to disengage the Autopilot system.
The system stops the automatic turn and changes the turn button to yellow .
412
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
18 Operations NextSwath operation
TrueSwath operation
WARNING –
A trained and qualified operator must be at the controls of the vehicle at all times, and be ready to safely take over controls of the system at anytime. NextSwath is not a safety aid nor a replacement for a skilled operator.
WARNING –
Interaction with and avoidance of boundaries is solely the operator's responsibility. While
NextSwath can use field boundaries for a reference point for turn start points, the trained and qualified operator is responsible for determining offsets from field boundaries. NextSwath does not calculate distance of the vehicle or machinery from the boundary during the turn.
WARNING –
NextSwath cannot avoid obstacles. The operator is solely responsible for avoiding obstacles.
Note – You can only use TrueSwath with drawn implements. Rigid mounted / 3-point implements cannot use
TrueSwath.
Without TrueSwath, the implement lags behind the vehicle during line acquisition, preventing proper coverage.
TrueSwath optimizes line acquisition and end-of-row turns for pulled implements. You can use
TrueSwath whether or not you are using automated turns. (To use TrueSwath for automated turns, you must have NextSwath enabled.)
Tap the TrueSwath checkbox to enable the feature. On the display for either an end-of-row turn or acquiring the line, a green line shows the path for the vehicle and a yellow line the implement path.
If you use TrueSwath for an automatic turn, the turn point will be extended to allow the implement to reach the turn point before the turn is started. The vehicle will purposely drive beyond the guidance line to pull the implement on the guidance line.
The path planned for the implement is based on the values you enter in the Measurements tab
(under Autopilot setup) for:
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
413
NextSwath operation 18 Operations l
Vehicle control point to tow hitch (see
Measurements for NextSwath (page 167)
) l
Hitch to ground contact point
Adjust these measurements to improve the performance of TrueSwath. See
.
414
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
18 Operations NextSwath operation
Using automated headlands management
Note – To set up the capability for automated functions in the FM-1000 Plus application, see
Automated headlands management settings (page 194) .
WARNING –
Do not use automated implement functions to: 1) control hazardous materials (including NH3) or 2) operate implements near ground laborers. Failure to follow these restrictions could result in serious injury or death.
In the Run screen, before you have reached the point for the end-of-row turn warning, tap either or both: l
The checkbox next to the Swath Start Events button (the button on the left) to enable the sequence at the start of the swath l
The checkbox next to the Swath End Events button (the button on the right) to enable the sequence at the end of the swath
The vehicle will perform the end and/or begin sequence of automated operations you have programmed in your vehicle. The FM-1000 Plus application will provide any sound or text alerts you have set up.
Using turn now
If you choose to turn the vehicle prior to or after the point of the end-of-row turn warning: l
Follow the appropriate steps in
l
After you tap the yellow turn button , the system begins the first automated event or reminder you have programmed and provides a countdown to the turn.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
415
EZ-Pilot system operation 18 Operations
EZ-Pilot system operation
WARNING –
Many large and sudden changes in satellite geometry caused by blocked satellites can cause significant position shifts. If operating under these conditions, auto-guidance systems can react abruptly. To avoid possible personal injury or damage to property under these conditions, disable the auto-guidance system and take manual control of the vehicle until conditions have cleared.
To engage the EZ-Pilot system, you must have: l
Have an open field in the Run screen l
Have an existing pattern you are using l
The vehicle within the engage distance set in the Engage tab. See
Engage settings for EZ-Pilot system (page 201) .
The Engage button on the screen can indicate status and, in some cases, also control the EZ-Pilot system.
When you are using EZ-Pilot, to automatically steer on the guidance line you can: l
Tap (yellow) on the screen l
Press the
Engage
button on the EZ-Remote joystick l
Use an external foot or rocker switch
Indicator/Button Explanation
The vehicle is close enough to the guidance line to engage on it.
Ready to Engage (yellow)
The vehicle is engaged on the guidance line.
Engaged (green)
Not Ready to Engage (red)
The vehicle is not ready to engage on the line because the guidance line is too far from the vehicle.
Automatic steering is not allowed due to how it has been set up.
Auto steering not allowed
(red)
Tap to...
Engage on the guidance line.
Stop engaging on the guidance line.
N/A. You cannot tap this button.
It is an indicator only.
N/A. You cannot tap this button.
It is an indicator only.
416
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
18 Operations EZ-Pilot system operation
You can also
Adjust EZ-Pilot guidance (page 418)
settings during operations in the field.
Disengage EZ-Pilot system
The EZ-Pilot system can be disengaged
and
.
Automatic disengagement
The EZ-Pilot system disengages automatically when: l
The vehicle is outside the engage distance set up in the
Engage tab. See
.
l
The system is paused.
l
GPS positions are lost.
l
The
Minimum Fix Quality setting is set to a high accuracy correction method and the system receives low accuracy positions (such as no corrections).
Manual disengagement
To manually disengage the system, you can: l l l
Tap (green) on the screen.
Press the
Engage
button on the optional remote control.
Turn the steering wheel to override the electric motor.
When you turn the steering wheel manually, the EZ-Pilot system disengages. It is recommended that you check this setting before you begin using the system in a new installation. To do so: a. Engage on a line.
b. Turn the wheel until EZ-Pilot disengages.
To make adjustments to the amount of force required to disengage the system using the steering wheel, see
Steering performance calibration (page 203)
.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
417
EZ-Pilot system operation 18 Operations
Adjust EZ-Pilot guidance
WARNING –
Many large and sudden changes in satellite geometry caused by blocked satellites can cause significant position shifts. If operating under these conditions, auto-guidance systems can react abruptly. To avoid possible personal injury or damage to property under these conditions, disable the auto-guidance system and take manual control of the vehicle until conditions have cleared.
At the Run screen, tap . The EZ-Pilot panel displays.
Setting
Nudge
Trim
Online Aggr
Explanation
The guidance line can move off target due to either: l
GPS position drift after pausing or turning off the system l
GPS satellite constellation changes as you drive in the field
Use the
<
and
>
buttons to move the line in a perpendicular direction (left or right).
To set the increment for this setting, see
Steering settings for EZ-Pilot system (page 200) .
Trim replaces Nudge when you are using RTK corrections.
The vehicle can steer offline as a result of uneven drag on the vehicle from an unbalanced implement or from soil conditions.
Use the
<
and
>
buttons to move the vehicle in a perpendicular direction
(left or right) of the line you are currently engaged on.
To set the increment for this setting, see
.
Aggressiveness is the measure of how strongly the system makes steering changes.
Use the
-
and
+
buttons to adjust how aggressively the vehicle moves to the guidance line.
A setting that is: l
Higher brings the vehicle back online faster, but may cause tight oscillations about the line l
Lower: Brings the vehicle back online more slowly, but can avoid overshoot
Note – The default aggressiveness setting is 100%.
418
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
18 Operations EZ-Steer system operation
EZ-Steer system operation
WARNING –
Many large and sudden changes in satellite geometry caused by blocked satellites can cause significant position shifts. If operating under these conditions, auto-guidance systems can react abruptly. To avoid possible personal injury or damage to property under these conditions, disable the auto-guidance system and take manual control of the vehicle until conditions have cleared.
To engage the EZ-Steer system, you must have: l
Have a field open in the Run screen l
Have an existing pattern you are using l
The vehicle within the engage distance set in the
Engage Options tab. See
.
The
Engage
button on the screen can indicate status and, in some cases, also control the EZ-Steer system.
When you are using EZ-Steer, to automatically steer on the guidance line you can: l
Tap (yellow) on the screen.
l
Press the optional remote engage foot pedal.
Indicator/Button Explanation
The vehicle is close enough to the guidance line to engage on it.
Tap to...
Engage on the guidance line.
Ready to Engage (yellow)
The vehicle is engaged on the guidance line.
Stop engaging on the guidance line.
Engaged (green)
Not Ready to Engage (red)
The vehicle is not ready to engage on the line because the guidance line is too far from the vehicle.
Automatic steering is not allowed due to how it has been set up.
N/A. You cannot tap this button.
It is an indicator only.
N/A. You cannot tap this button.
It is an indicator only.
Auto steering not allowed
(red)
You can also
Adjust EZ-Steer guidance (page 421)
settings during operations in the field.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
419
EZ-Steer system operation 18 Operations
Disengage EZ-Steer system
The EZ-Steer system can be disengaged
and
.
Automatic disengagement
The EZ-Steer system disengages automatically when: l
The vehicle is outside the engage distance set up in the
Engage tab. See
.
l
The system is paused.
l
GPS positions are lost.
l
The
Minimum Fix Quality setting is set to a high accuracy correction method and the system receives low accuracy positions (such as no corrections).
Manual disengagement
To manually disengage the system, you can: l l l
Tap (green) on the screen.
Press the
Engage
button on the optional remote control.
Turn the steering wheel to override the electric motor.
When you turn the steering wheel manually, the EZ-Steer system disengages. It is recommended that you check this setting before you begin using the system in a new installation. To do so: a. Engage on a line.
b. Turn the wheel until EZ-Pilot disengages.
To make adjustments to the amount of force required to disengage the system using the steering wheel, see
Steering performance calibration (page 203)
.
When the system is not in use, hinge the motor away from the steering wheel and then secure it with the lock pin.
420
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
18 Operations EZ-Steer system operation
Adjust EZ-Steer guidance
WARNING –
Many large and sudden changes in satellite geometry caused by blocked satellites can cause significant position shifts. If operating under these conditions, auto-guidance systems can react abruptly. To avoid possible personal injury or damage to property under these conditions, disable the auto-guidance system and take manual control of the vehicle until conditions have cleared.
At the Run screen, tap
Setting
Nudge
Trim
Online Aggr
. The EZ-Steer panel displays.
Explanation
The guidance line can move off target due to either: l
GPS position drift after pausing or turning off the system l
GPS satellite constellation changes as you drive in the field
Use the
<
and
>
buttons to move the line in a perpendicular direction (left or right).
To set the increment for this setting, see
Steering settings for EZ-Pilot system (page 200) .
Trim replaces Nudge when you are using RTK corrections.
The vehicle can steer offline as a result of uneven drag on the vehicle from an unbalanced implement or from soil conditions.
Use the
<
and
>
buttons to move the vehicle in a perpendicular direction
(left or right) of the line you are currently engaged on.
To set the increment for this setting, see
Steering settings for EZ-Pilot system (page 200) .
Aggressiveness is the measure of how strongly the system makes steering changes.
Use the
-
and
+
buttons to adjust how aggressively the vehicle moves to the guidance line.
A setting that is: l
Higher brings the vehicle back online faster, but may cause tight oscillations about the line l
Lower: Brings the vehicle back online more slowly, but can avoid overshoot
Note – The default aggressiveness setting is 100%.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
421
GreenSeeker operation
422
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
18 Operations
GreenSeeker operation
The GreenSeeker system requires either of these to be activated for use: l
Field-IQ system l
Serial Rate Control system
Prior to using the GreenSeeker system:
1. Collect or input reference strip data.
2. Calibrate the system with either:
The boom mounted sensors on the RT200 l
The GreenSeeker handheld sensor
3. If you are using the RT200 interface module for variable rate control, set up the application equipment and rate controller to match the expected delivery rate commands.
Best practice
To ensure best performance from the GreenSeeker variable application system: l
Rinse the boom at the end of every day. Do this to keep the system clean and remove to any corrosive materials. Doing so will greatly extend the life of your machine.
l
Do not use high pressure spray on the sensors when rinsing the machine. Even though all of the connectors and modules are fully sealed, there is the potential for leakage caused by the pressurized stream.
l
Every time the spray tank is filled, take a soft cloth and wipe the lenses of the sensors. Try to check sensors at least once a day during full time operation.
l
Be more aware of cleaning the sensors directly behind the machine.
l
If you do not have ground protection devices on the boom (such as gauge wheels or skids) take extra care to not run the boom into the ground. Also, be aware of sensor vulnerability to stationary structures in the field.
l
Sensors are usually mounted on the front of the boom and do not have rigid protection.
l
Sensors should be re-calibrated after approximately 1000 hours of use due to possible changes in light output. This is generally done at the factory, or authorized service center.
l
Sensors have an optimum operating range of 32" - 48" above the crop canopy. 38" is the optimum height, and must be measured from the top of the crop to the rectangular LED window of the sensor.
l
Make sure all wiring harness components remain fastened to the boom as to not obstruct the view of the sensors and are free of any pinch points from boom folding and movement.
Version 3.0, Revision A
18 Operations GreenSeeker operation
Variable rate setup
To set up variable rate application on the FM-1000 Plus application:
1. Power up the RT200 interface module and the rate controller (if required).
When the RT200 interface module is first powered on: a. The module's green power LED will blink three times accompanied by three beeps.
b. The status LED will blink in time with each transmission of sensor data over the CAN bus.
Expect to see a brief green flash, followed by a red flash at the I/M message rate (typically at 0.5sec). This indicates that data from the left (green flash) and right (red flash) CAN ports is being transmitted.
2. Activate GreenSeeker for use. See
Activate features/plugins for use (page 60) .
3. At the Home screen, tap
.
4. At the Configuration Selection screen, tap
OK
.
5. At the Field Selection screen, load the field to be sprayed.
Create a custom table
Historical knowledge about the crop enables growers or crop consultants to determine different crop input requirements based upon biomass/size of the crop/plant. An example of this type of use would be variable rate application of: l
Defoliant in cotton l
Desiccant in potatoes
For these cases, the field is scouted (field calibrated) to determine areas of the field that require different rates of defoliant.
To obtain the NDVI values in representative areas of the field, you can use either: l
The RT200 system l
A GreenSeeker handheld
Using this data, you can create a table with NDVI values corresponding to application rates.
To create a custom table:
1. At the GreenSeeker Calibration screen, tap the
Algorithm tab.
2. From the
Formula list, select either:
Custom Table
: Manually enter NDVI calibration values (go to step 4)
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
423
GreenSeeker operation 18 Operations
Auto Calibration
: The system automatically enters NDVI calibration values from the Calibration step by transferring the Maximum, Average, and Minimum NDVI values into rows two, three, and four respectively.
3. Tap the
Number Of Rows entry box, enter a value and tap
OK
.
The number of available
NDVI and
Rate values are dictated by the value entered in the
Number Of
Rows entry box.
Typically the number of rows for the custom table are two more than the number of filed calibration areas sampled. This allows for starting at zero and ending at .99 NDVI.
4. Tap an
NDVI entry box to enter a custom value.
5. Tap
OK
.
6. Tap a corresponding
Rate entry box to enter a custom value.
7. Tap
OK
.
8. Select the
Output tab.
9. From the
Material Type list, select either
Granular or
Liquid
.
10. Tap
OK
.
Calibrate GreenSeeker
In the GreenSeeker panel on the Run screen, the controls displayed depend on what you previously selected (for example, a crop algorithm or a custom table).
When you first open a new job or event and a crop algorithm has been previously used or selected, the
Calibration Required message displays.
If you want to use a custom table, but see the
Calibration Required message, tap
Edit
. See
Create a custom table (page 423) .
Note – If a custom table has been previously selected, the Calibration Required message will not display.
Calibration steps
1. At the Run screen, tap
. The GreenSeeker panel opens.
2. Tap
Calibrate
.
3. The GreenSeeker panel displays: l
The buttons
Ref
,
Non-Ref
and
Done
NDVI bar graph showing the real-time combined average NDVI from the RT200 module
4. Position the vehicle at the reference locations.
5. To record NDVI data from:
424
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
18 Operations GreenSeeker operation
The reference strip: Tap
Ref
, drive the reference strip and then tap
Ref
again to end recording.
l
The non-reference strip: Tap
Non-Ref
, drive the nonreference strip and then tap
Non-Ref
again to end recording.
Note – As the NDVI is collected, the data displays. Keep the vehicle moving as you collect the data. If you stop in one location, this will affect the average values. The
Ref
and
Non-Ref
buttons change to a lighter color when selected or active.
6. Tap
Done
. At the GreenSeeker Calibration screen on the
Calibration panel, values that were collected are displayed.
Setting
Maximum
Average
Minimum
Calibrate
Explanation
Reference: You can override the existing data and enter new data.
Non-Reference or Reference: You can override the existing data and enter new data.
Reference: You can override the existing data and enter new data.
Non-Ref
or
Reference
: Tap to collect fresh data. You will not see the new values until you deselect the button you have tapped.
Note – The reference values for
Maximum
,
Average
, and
Minimum
are also available for the Auto
Calibration function on the
Algorithm
tab.
7. When you are satisfied with the data on the
Calibration tab, select the
Algorithm tab.
For
Formula
, select either: l
An existing formula
Custom Table to create a new algorithm (see
Create a custom table (page 423)
)
Note – The formula selected for your last job will still be current, so you are often just verifying that the correct formula is being used.
The values to be entered will change based upon the formula selected. Some values (such as
Nitrogen Use Efficiency
) have default values that are formula specific. You can change any value by tapping the entry box.
8.
Note – You may need to reference the specific algorithms instruction for more detailed explanation of the CumGDD F, or similar fields. For example the CumGDD F for the corn v1.3 GrtPlns GDD OKState is
Cumulative Growing Degree Days, Base 50F. For specific algorithm instructions, visit
www.GreenSeeker.com
.
Tap
OK
.
9. Go to the
Chart tab and enter the settings.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
425
GreenSeeker operation 18 Operations
Setting
Limit
Max Limit
Min Limit
Explanation
Enabled:
Disabled:
If necessary, enter a value based on rate controller or application equipment limitations.
If necessary, enter a value based on rate controller or application equipment limitations.
Note – Maximum and minimum settings will limit the rate commands given to the rate controller.
10. Review the application chart for each job to determine the appropriate nozzle selections and/or application equipment settings.
11. Tap
OK
.
12. Tap the
Output tab.
13. From the
Material Type list, select either
Granular or
Liquid
.
14. Tap
OK
.
426
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
18 Operations ISOBUS operation
ISOBUS operation
With ISOBUS, you can use the FM-1000 Plus application to control an ISO-certified implement without an additional display. An ISO-certified implement has small computers called electronic control units (ECUs) which send signals to the FM-1000 Plus application. An ISO-certified tractor has a tractor ECU (TECU) installed on it. ECUs on implements enable you to control the operation: l
With the FM-1000 Plus application, using Task Controller (an optional feature). See
Controller operation (page 427) .
l
With Virtual Terminal, an on-screen window opens so you can directly access the functions provided by the ECUs. See
Virtual Terminal operation (page 428) .
Task Controller operation
After you have activated Task Controller, displays on the Run screen.
1. If you are using one of the following models, you must tap the
Start
or
Auto
button in the Virtual
Terminal screen before starting section and rate control using Task Controller.
a. Tap to open the Virtual Terminal.
b. Tap the appropriate button (
Start
or
Auto
).
Mode
Kuhn Moduliner Seed Drill
Kverneland Exacta TL GEOspread
Rauch/Kuhn AXIS-H-EMC
Rauch/Kuhn AXIS-W
Vicon RO-EDW GEOspread
Tap...
Auto
Start
Start
Start
Start
2. At the Run screen, tap
3. Tap on the right-hand side to display the Task Controller panel.
to begin logging coverage.
4. Tap on the left-hand side to view the current section control.
5. To switch between the two target rates, tap the appropriate target rate button
Task Controller panel.
6. To turn section control on and off, tap the
Section Control On
/
Off
button.
on the
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
427
ISOBUS operation 18 Operations
When section control is off, use the Virtual Terminal for section control.
l
When section control is on, sections will automatically turn off to limit multiple pass coverage.
Virtual Terminal operation
After you have activated Virtual Terminal, the
To access the Virtual Terminal screen: button displays on the Run screen.
l
From the Diagnostics screen (under
Configuration
) l
By tapping on the Run screen. (This button displays on the Run screen after you have activated Virtual Terminal.)
Icon(s) on the left of the screen show the available ECUs. The center area and the buttons on the right of the screen change depending on information provided by the ECU.
Note – Virtual Terminal screens and functions vary by platform. For more information, refer to the equipment manufacturer's operating instructions.
428
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
18 Operations Remote Output operation
Remote Output operation
The FM-1000 Plus application automatically outputs pulses based on the settings in
Remote Output settings (page 136)
as well as
Line feature settings (page 152)
.
Crossing a line feature operation
Using this option, a pulse is output at any point where the line you are engaged on intersects another line feature that has the remote output option enabled. See
You can use this remote output option with AB/A+ lines as well as pivots and curves.
Your screen will show: l l
Dots showing additional previous pulses
A red X indicating where the system will output the next pulse l
Note – The location of the next output may change as accuracy of the calculated position improves.
A warning when you near the intersecting line, if you have set up warnings (see
Remote Output settings (page 136)
)
The Remote Output panel shows:
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
429
Remote Output operation
Remote Output Panel
Next Output ID
Current Pass Output
Total Outputs
Next Output Distance
Manual Trigger
18 Operations
Explanation
A combination of the next pulse number and the current swath ID).
(The pulse number increments with each pulse, and is not related to the swath or vehicle position.)
The number of pulses that have been output on the current swath.
The number of pulses that have been output in the field currently.
The distance between the implement and the next point for the system to output a pulse.
Tap this button to manually output a pulse.
430
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
18 Operations Remote Output operation
Distance-based pulse operation
With this option, pulses are output based on a specific distance you set up in
Remote Output settings (page 136) . You can use distance-based pulses with straight AB or A+ lines.
Within range limits
When you use remote output with distance-based pulses and you are within the limits of the range set in the Trigger Limits setting, your screen will show: l
The first dot for the first pulse output at the A point for the current swath l l
Dots showing additional previous pulses
A red X indicating where the system will output the next pulse
The Remote Output panel shows:
Remote Output Panel
Next Output ID
Current Pass Output
Total Outputs
Next Output Distance
Trigger Limits
Explanation
A combination of the next pulse number and the current swath ID.
The number of pulses that have been output on the current swath.
The number of pulses that have been output in the field currently.
The distance between the implement and the next point for the system to output a pulse.
The maximum number of pulses allowed per swath past the A point. This is set in
Remote Output settings (page 136)
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
431
Remote Output operation
Remote Output Panel
Manual Trigger
18 Operations
Explanation
change this during operation. See
Change trigger limits during operation (page 432)
.
Tap this button to manually output a pulse.
Outside range limits
When the vehicle and implement are outside the range limits: l l
There is no red X on the screen.
On the Remote Output panel, the Next Output ID shows n/a for both the next pulse number and the current swath ID.
Change trigger limits during operation
To change the maximum number of pulses per swath during operation, tap the button to the left of the label
Trigger Limits and enter the new number.
Manually output a pulse
To manually output a pulse, tap .
To set the color of the dot that indicates a manual pulse, see
Remote Output settings (page 136)
.
432
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
18 Operations Row Guidance operation
Row Guidance operation
WARNING –
Many large and sudden changes in satellite geometry caused by blocked satellites can cause significant position shifts. If operating under these conditions, auto-guidance systems can react abruptly. To avoid possible personal injury or damage to property under these conditions, disable the auto-guidance system and take manual control of the vehicle until conditions have cleared.
With Row Guidance, the information from existing sensors installed on the combine heads are used to automatically adjust the combine response to changes in the row position.
Row Guidance is used with the Autopilot system to help center the combine on the crop rows when they are are not aligned with the guidance line used to plant the crop (caused by planter drift or environmental damage).
Row Guidance enables you to: l
Increase corn yield through reduced ear loss l
Reduce operator fatigue in difficult conditions (such as down corn, curved rows, long passes and other poor visibility conditions) l
Operate effectively in fields that were planted using other steering systems or in areas where the planter drifted
You can operate Row Guidance with: l
Straight lines: You can use either A-B or A+ lines.
l
FreeForm patterns: When recording and in corn rows, the Row Guidance sensors drive the firsts pass. After that, the guidance system uses the previously recorded pass but augments it with sensor input.
l
Curves: When operating on a sharp curve, Row Guidance aggressiveness may need to be increased for performance. See
Row Guidance adjustments (page 436)
.
To open the Row Guidance panel, at the Run screen tap .
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
433
Row Guidance operation 18 Operations
Use row sensors
To use the sensors:
1. Make sure the Autopilot system is engaged.
2. Activate the sensors by tapping on the Row Guidance panel.
When active, the row guidance sensors will feel the number of "strikes" against them. After a set number of strikes, the Row Guidance will determine the average peak displacement of the sensors on each side of the row for the strikes and react to this peak displacement on each side to steer the vehicle until the peak displacements on each sensor are equal.
Note – Row sensors override the set Autopilot guidance line. When you turn around in headlands with the sensor turned on, random strikes on stubble cause the system to veer off the set Autopilot guidance line. It is recommended that you travel through the headlands with Autopilot only to guide to the proper row. After you enter the unharvested crop, activate the sensors for row guidance.
On the Row Guidance panel, the sensor button/indicator shows the status of the sensors.
Indicator/Button Explanation
Row sensors are on but not active.
(Yellow)
Row sensors are on and active. Tap to turn sensors off.
(Green)
(Gray)
Row guidance sensors are off. Tap to turn row guidance sensors on and off while the Autopilot system is engaged. The guidance system will now function as a traditional Autopilot system
There is an error with the sensors.
434
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
18 Operations Row Guidance operation
Shift or skip guidance line
You may need to skip the guidance line to coordinate with the crop and guidance line if you operate in a crop that was planted: l
Without automatic steering l
Using WAAS corrections and is being harvested using WAAS guidance
In either case, satellite drift and/or operator guidance can lead to misalignment of the guidance line with the crop. Depending on conditions, it may be necessary to shift or skip the guidance line to coordinate with the crop and guidance line. This will be evident when the sensors guide down the proper row with offline distance is shown to be 0, but the selected guidance line is not centered on the current swath on the screen.
In this case it is recommended to skip (temporarily move the guidance line) to align with the drifted crop rows. The Autopilot system must be disengaged to skip.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
435
Row Guidance operation 18 Operations
Row Guidance adjustments
On the Row Guidance panel, you can adjust guidance using the following controls.
Control
Nudge
Trim
Steering Aggressiveness
Row Guidance Aggr
Explanation
Use to correct satellite drift.
Nudge adjustments are available for autonomous, WAAS, Omni, and RTX Rangepoint corrections. This adjustment will move the position of the vehicle in the global (cardinal) direction perpendicular to the path traveled in the user defined increment.
When a correction is made heading South on a guidance line to the right, the position of the vehicle will be moved to the West. When heading back North, the correction will still be to the West but left to the direction of travel.
The vehicle can steer offline as a result of: l
Uneven drag on a vehicle from an unbalanced implement l
Uneven drag on a vehicle from soil conditions
Trim adjustment is available for RTK and RTX Centerpoint corrections (FS, SS, SC). Trim moves the vehicle perpendicular to the line with reference to the forward direction (to the right or left of vehicle forward travel) the amount setup by the user. For example, while traveling South down a line and the trim is moved 1 inch right
(West), when the vehicle is turned around and driven north the correction will still be right of the line which is East on the Northern heading.
Use the - and + buttons to adjust how aggressively to command the steering to the guidance line.
Aggressiveness should not be set too high. This can cause the vehicle steering not to react to commands (the steering wheels cannot react fast enough to keep up with the steering commands).
Instability in steering will result.
Use the - and + buttons to adjust how aggressively the vehicle reacts to the input from the Row Guidance sensors.
436
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
18 Operations TrueGuide operation
TrueGuide operation
WARNING –
Many large and sudden changes in satellite geometry caused by blocked satellites can cause significant position shifts. If operating under these conditions, auto-guidance systems can react abruptly. To avoid possible personal injury or damage to property under these conditions, disable the auto-guidance system and take manual control of the vehicle until conditions have cleared.
TrueGuide uses a second GPS receiver on the implement to enable the Autopilot system to pull the implement onto the guidance line.
To open the TrueGuide panel, at the Run screen, tap
Control
Trim
Aggr
Explanation
TrueGuide engagement
.
Adjust aggressiveness during operation.
Use the - and + buttons to adjust how aggressively the implement moves to the guidance line.
l
To increase the response to move the implement back to the line, increase aggressiveness.
l
To smooth the response to the implement moving offline, decrease aggressiveness
The recommended settings for default values are: l
For steep slopes (10% - 30%): 150% l
For slow speed applications: 125% l
For normal operation: 100% l
For high speed applications (>8 mph): 33%
On: When the right-hand button displays ON, the Autopilot system is engaged.
Auto: When the right-hand button displays AUTO, the TrueGuide system is engaged.
Off: Tap to disengage the TrueGuide system.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
437
TrueGuide operation 18 Operations
Using TrueGuide
1. At the Run screen on the TrueGuide panel, tap
(yellow). The right-hand button changes to
ON
and the TrueGuide status changes to
Waiting
.
The Autopilot system acquires the line before transitioning to the TrueGuide system.
The TrueGuide system status remains at
Waiting while the Autopilot system acquires the line.
After the TrueGuide system has taken control, its status changes to
ON and the right-hand button changes to
AUTO
.
2. To disengage the TrueGuide system at anytime, tap
OFF
(the left-hand button).
Note – As soon as the TrueGuide system is disengaged, the Autopilot system immediately begins providing all guidance.
Note – To turn on the TrueGuide system when the status is Waiting, tap
ON
again.
TrueGuide system status indicators
The system status displays on the TrueGuide tab between the
Off / On (Auto)
buttons.
TrueGuide Status
Off
Disengaged
Waiting
On
Expanation
The TrueGuide system is off.
The TrueGuide system is ready, but not engaged.
The Autopilot system is engaged, and the TrueGuide system is preparing to engage after a short pause.
The TrueGuide system has engaged and is on.
438
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
18 Operations TrueTracker operation
TrueTracker operation
WARNING –
Many large and sudden changes in satellite geometry caused by blocked satellites can cause significant position shifts. If operating under these conditions, auto-guidance systems can react abruptly. To avoid possible personal injury or damage to property under these conditions, disable the auto-guidance system and take manual control of the vehicle until conditions have cleared.
When using TrueTracker with the Autopilot system, the implement receives its own separate guidance and steering to increase accuracy.
TrueTracker controls
To open the TrueTracker panel, tap
Control
Nudge
Aggr
Zero Steering
Engage
Engage
(Green)
(Red)
Explanation
.
The guidance line can move off target due to either: l
GPS position drift after pausing or turning off the system l
GPS satellite constellation changes as you drive in the field
Use the < and > buttons to move the guidance line in a perpendicular direction (left or right).
Use the - and + buttons to adjust how aggressively the implement moves to the guidance line.
Off: Zero Steering is not used.
On: Commands the steering to zero degrees left/right, centering the steering device on the implement. This option can be turned on in the field, keeping the coulters pointed straight, or just at the ends of the field to center the steering.
Note – Disengaging the TrueTracker system automatically turns off Zero
Steering.
For the main button color: Vehicle steering is engaged.
For the smaller inner color on the button: Implement steering is engaged.
For settings on Engage, see
Engage settings for TrueTracker system
.
For the main button color: Vehicle steering cannot engage.
For the smaller inner color on the button: Implement steering cannot
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
439
TrueTracker operation 18 Operations
Control
Engage
(Yellow)
Explanation
engage.
For settings on Engage, see
Engage settings for TrueTracker system
.
For the main button color: Vehicle steering is ready to engage.
For the smaller inner color on the button: Implement steering is ready to engage.
For settings on Engage, see
Engage settings for TrueTracker system
.
Implement status
GPS status
Tap the second to view status on the implement receiver: l
Implement GPS Status l
Implement Correction Type l
Implement Correction Age l
Latitude l
Longitude l
Altitude l
Satellites l
HDOP l
VDOP l
Network ID
Text
A number of status text items provide information about the implement. You can set these status text items to appear permanently at the top of the screen or on a slide-out tab. To set up status items, see
.
Implement on-screen lightbar
When implement steering is enabled, a second, smaller lightbar displays on the screen below the main lightbar.
440
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
18 Operations TrueTracker operation
The lower lightbar shows the implement guidance relative to the guidance line. Each LED on the second lightbar represents 1 inch.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
441
Vehicle Sync operation 18 Operations
Vehicle Sync operation
Vehicle Sync replaces the transfer of data using a USB drive. Instead, data is transferred wirelessly between vehicles. Real-time, up-to-date information improves operational efficiency and accuracy.
Multiple operators belonging to the same WorkGroup in the same field can transfer location information on other vehicles and: l
Point/line/area features l
Coverage mapping and implement section switching l
Productivity and operational statistics and conditions
Vehicles using Vehicle Sync can also share data on: l
Yield and moisture l
Tank levels l
Location and speed
Common uses
You can use Vehicle Sync for: l
Same operation: Multiple vehicles and implements in a Vehicle Sync WorkGroup performing the same tasks (such spraying, planting or harvesting) l
Same field, different operation: Multiple vehicles and implements performing different tasks
(such as a sprayer working with a planter or a harvester working with a grain buggy) l
Observation: A vehicle can see the location and productivity of the WorkGroup, but does not share coverage, lines or points.
Benefits
Vehicle Sync assists in: l
Planting: Using Field-IQ provides clutch triggering based on coverage sharing, which maximizes input conservation.
l
Spraying: Sharing tank level and as-applied information l
Harvesting: Maintaining yield-to-area integrity within the harvest data, and sharing instant yield and moisture information
Using Vehicle Sync
Up to six vehicles can join a Vehicle Sync WorkGroup by joining the same channel.
442
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
18 Operations Vehicle Sync operation
Join a WorkGroup
To sync with a specific vehicle, make sure: l
Your vehicle has a clear line of sight with that vehicle.
l
You are within a distance of 325 yards (300 meters) from that vehicle.
l
At least one vehicle is working in an open field.
To link with a vehicle, see .
Guidance lines with Vehicle Sync
You create guidance lines as normal (with the exception of adaptive curves and Free Form lines that are not supported by Vehicle Sync).
Naming guidance lines
To avoid any confusion, it is recommended that you take care in naming guidance lines. All guidance lines are automatically combined together, including lines that vehicles possessed prior to linking. If guidance lines have the same name prior to linking (for example, if both vehicles have a line called
AB line 1), Vehicle Sync reviews the lines to determine whether they are the same or different: l
If they are exactly the same, they are not duplicated.
l
If there is a difference, the lines are pooled and labeled with the tractor from which they have come (for example, for both Tractor A and Tractor B, AB line 1 will be relabelled in all guidance line pools as AB Line 1 Tractor A and AB Line 1 Tractor B).
Note – Vehicle Sync will not shift lines to account for different implement widths. The actual line is transferred.
If you are performing an operation in which all vehicles have the same swath width and use the same guidance line, the line on which the other vehicle is engaged becomes dotted, as shown for
H1:
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
443
Vehicle Sync operation 18 Operations
Although you can engage on this line, an alert will display to inform you that you are engaged on the same line as another vehicle.
Coverage
Your vehicle coverage is colored yellow on the screen. When the vehicle sync layer is selected (for events that have the same Client/Farm/Field/Event), the coverage associated with other vehicles will be color coordinated to that vehicle.
View only layer
When vehicles are not in the same event, a View Only layer is shown for those vehicles that does not affect section control.
444
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
18 Operations Vehicle Sync operation
There is also the option to show only the coverage logged by the your vehicle.
Coverage controls the following: l
Tru Count clutches l
Liqui-Block clutches l
“Rate as” section l
Header swath width for yield calculation l
Sprayer sections
Note – The warning
Event Memory Low
displays when the size of the file in the current event exceeds the memory capacity of the display. If this warning displays, exit the current field and begin a new event with a similar name.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
445
Water Management functionality 18 Operations
Water Management functionality
The functions you can perform with Water Management features include: l
l
Create / save a design (page 449)
l
l
Point and Slope mode (page 455)
Flat Plane (Laser) and Flat Plane (GPS) modes (page 456)
l
For dual or tandem operations, there are: l
Dual scraper controls (page 462)
l
Tandem scraper controls (page 463)
Create a survey
The steps to create a survey are:
1.
.
2.
.
Create benchmarks
Before you can create a survey, you must set a point at a known location called a benchmark. When you create a benchmark, the GPS receiver obtains and records location information from the base station for that specific point in your field.
When you are leveling, you use benchmarks to: l
Return to a point in the field with known coordinates to re-calibrate your exact position. This may include setting the bucket on the ground or on a solid surface that will not be disturbed while you perform field leveling.
l
Move the design up or down to match the field surface at that point.
The first benchmark you create on a field is the master benchmark and displays as an orange flag labeled MB . Field coordinates are calculated from this point.
Subsequent benchmarks display as orange flags labeled with their corresponding number .
446
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
18 Operations Water Management functionality
Bechmark steps
1. Place the GPS antenna in a known, repeatable location that will not change throughout the leveling of a field.
Tip – Mark this location with flags or some other marker so that you can return to the exact spot.
2. Stop the vehicle.
3. On the WM-Survey tab, tap
Bench
.
Note – If FieldLevel II is installed, you can tap
Bench
on that instead. Both
Bench
buttons have the same effect.
A countdown timer runs for 30 seconds and then the system creates the benchmark. To stop the averaging during the countdown, tap
Bench
again.
Note – If you are within the circle around an existing benchmark, a new mark is not created.
Survey the field
After you create the benchmark(s), collect field layout data by conducting a survey.
Define the boundary
Define a boundary to establish the confines of your field. Drive around the boundary while you record the shape.
1. At the Run screen, tap to open the Survey/Design panel.
2. Before driving the boundary, select the reference point you want to use for recording the boundary.
l
Center: Records the boundary based on the location of the antenna.
Left: Records the boundary offset half of the implement width to the left of the direction of travel.
l
Right: Records the boundary offset half of the implement width to the right of the direction of travel.
3. Select
Boundary from the list.
4. Tap
Record
.
5. Drive the boundary while recording. The boundary records with a line showing it begins and ends at the starting point. (The boundary is a complete loop.)
6. After you have driven to the end of the boundary, tap
Record
again.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
447
Water Management functionality 18 Operations
Define interior points
To complete a full survey, create guidance lines and then drive over all of the interior of the field boundary, while the system records interior points.
1. At the Survey/Design panel, select
Interior from the list.
2. Tap
Record
and drive around the interior of the field, gaining enough coverage to produce a height map. You can change the data logging intensity in the FieldLevel II Survey/Design settings (Coarse = 25 ft; Medium = 10 ft; Fine = 5 ft).
Define a section (optional)
After you create a boundary, you have the option to create sections that split the entire area into portions. This enables you to create a design for each section instead of the entire area.
Sections can be useful after you finish working on the area for the day. Define the area that you completed as a section. When you return to the area, you can level the remaining area to a second best-fit plane. See
There are two methods for defining a section.
l
Method 1: l
Begin recording the section line outside the boundary.
Drive through the field to define the section line, then cross outside the boundary again.
l
The section is defined.
l
Method 2:
Record a section line inside the boundary.
l
The ends of the line will extend to meet the boundary.
Design
After you have completed the survey, the system can create the design based on the information gathered by the survey and the settings you enter as part of the design process. FieldLevel II defines the three-dimensional height for the field and controls how the implement reshapes the ground.
The Autoplane functionality uses the topographic survey of your field to estimate its surface elevations.
You can accept the AutoPlane calculation and have the system create a best-fit design, or manually edit settings, including: l
Cut/Fill ratio: Amount of cut dirt that equals one volume of fill dirt.
l
South --> North Slope: Angle of the slope from North to South.
l
West --> East Slope: Angle of the slope from West to East.
448
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
18 Operations Water Management functionality l
Composite Slope: The true angle of the fall of the design. In other words, the angle of the slope when the two slope angles are combined.
l
Slope Heading: The heading direction of the slope when the East/West and North/South slopes are combined.
Create / save a design
After you complete the survey, the
AutoPlane
button displays on the Survey/Design panel.
To create a design for the optimum slope for your field that requires the minimum amount of dirt to be moved:
1. Tap
AutoPlane
. The AutoPlane screen displays.
If necessary, you can manually adjust the angle of the slope. However, this may require a greater amount of dirt to be moved because the original design was the optimum.
2. Complete the settings.
If necessary, you can manually adjust the angle of the slope. However, this may require a greater amount of dirt to be moved because the original design was the optimum.
Setting
Cut/Fill Ratio
Section
Explanation
The amount of cut material that equals one volume of fill material.
If you set up sections when you defined the field, you can select a section from the list.
l
None: Levels the entire field.
Left: Levels only the section to the left of the section line.
l
Right: Levels only the section to the right of the section line.
Composite Slope
Slope Heading
The true angle of the fall of the design when the East/West and
North/South slopes are combined.
The heading direction of the slope when the East/West and
North/South slopes are combined.
North -> South Slope The angle of the design slope from North to South.
East -> West Slope
Height or Cut/Fill
The angle of the design slope from East to West.
Height: Gives the design the theme of a topographic height map.
Cut/Fill: Gives the design the theme of a cut/fill map. Red indicates the cut areas. Blue indicates the fill areas. Green indicates areas that do not need cut or fill.
3. Tap
Best Fit
.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
449
Water Management functionality 18 Operations
The system uses the interior points that you collected to calculate the optimum slope of the field. An arrow displays on the image of the field to show the direction of fall. The
Stats table lists the statistics of the design computation: l
Cut: The volume of material that must be removed for the current design.
Fill: The volume of material that must be added for the current design.
l
Area: The area of the field inside the boundary.
4. Tap
OK
to close the AutoPlane screen and save the design. The the system saves the design as the default plane for this field.
Leveling
Before you begin your leveling operation using Field LevelII, you may need to: l
l
l
Getting started with leveling
The FieldLevel II system automatically raises and lowers the blade on the implement to match the design height anywhere in the field. You will use the color cut/fill map, simple on-screen adjustments, and automatic blade control to perform leveling.
In addition to the following instructions, depending on where you are in your operation, you may need to: l
l
1. Open a field as normal.
2. When your leveling model is set to Multiplane design and the FM-1000 Plus application opens the field, the system: l
Scans the
\AgGPS\Designs\
.
Opens any Multiplane .gps control files that are close to your current position and displays a list of these files in the Select Design screen.
3. Select the design you want to use and tap
OK
.
4. To enter the leveling panel, tap either or , depending on whether you are using a tandem scraper or dual scraper. See
Dual scraper controls (page 462)
or
Tandem scraper controls (page 463) .
5. Determine which leveling model you want to use:
450
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
18 Operations Water Management functionality
Point and Slope mode (page 455)
l
Flat Plane (Laser) and Flat Plane (GPS) modes (page 456)
l
l
Import designs
After you finish with your design, you can export a control file (.GPS) for use with the FieldLevel II system. Copy the design control file into the
\AgGPS\Designs\ folder on a USB drive.
Reload a field
When you create a design for a field (for example, a target leveling plane), the design is saved in the
/field/ directory.
The design files are associated with the field. If you close the field and then open it again, the design reloads with the field.
With RTK GPS, the position of the RTK base station is important to the heights used when the field was previously open. If the base station is not accurately positioned in the same physical location, you must reestablish the design over an existing benchmark to re-establish the height.
Re-bench
When you are leveling, you use benchmarks to: l
Return to a point in the field with known coordinates to re-calibrate your exact position. This may include setting the bucket on the ground or on a solid surface that will not be disturbed while you perform field leveling.
l
Move the design up or down to match the field surface at that point.
Re-benching is designed to accommodate differences with RTK base station setup from the last time the field was opened.
Manual re-bench
On the Field LevelII panel, if you tap either of the
Re-bench
buttons when the receiver is within the circular radius of a benchmark, the receiver is calibrated over the existing benchmark. Re-benching enables you to synchronize your position with the design you created.
1. Tap
Re-Bench
. A message displays showing a list of the saved benchmarks within the open field.
The system automatically selects the benchmark closest to you (if multiple benchmarks exist), but allows you to select the benchmark you want to use.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
451
Water Management functionality 18 Operations
Note – To ensure the design is properly aligned to the field, return to the exact location of the master benchmark that you marked on the ground (for example, with flags, see
), and re-bench on the master benchmark.
2. Select the benchmark to re-bench on.
3. Tap
OK
. A confirmation message displays showing the calculated distance to the selected benchmark.
Note – This calculation may be quite exaggerated if the base was moved a considerable distance away from its previous position.
4. Verify this is the benchmark you want (if multiple benchmarks exist).
5. Tap
OK
to accept the message. The system begins the standard 30-second averaging process to re-establish the field relevance to the benchmark you just re-benched on.
Force re-bench
If you open a field that has an existing master benchmark and have chosen to require
Force Rebench
(see
Relative Heights tab (page 314)
), the
Create Benchmark
button label changes to
Re-Bench
. The system will not allow you to engage automatic control until the system has been re-benched.
Note – You must locate the machine exactly over the actual mark on the ground. Do not rely on your relative position to the master benchmark if the base station was moved.
Blade level indicators
In the operational view of the Run screen, a blade indicator shows the status of the blade related to the On-Grade Limit.
452
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
18 Operations Water Management functionality
Indicator Explanation
The blade is above the target height beyond the On-Grade Limit.
The blade is below the target height beyond the On-Grade Limit.
The blade is considerably above the target height, more than double the On-
Grade Limit.
The blade is considerably below the target height, more than double the On-
Grade Limit.
The blade is at the correct target height, within the On-Grade Limit.
When you are using dual or tandem scrapers, you will see two blade indicators on the Run screen.
Additionally, you can tap select either Height or Cut/Fill.
to open the legend for the operational view of the Run screen and
FieldLevel II status items
Status items are text information that: l
Describe factors in leveling models l
Beginning with P are for the primary GPS receiver (for example, P Blade Height) l
Beginning with S for the secondary if you are using dual or tandem scrapers (for example,
S Blade Height)
Status items can be set to always display at the top of the screen or on a slide-out tab. See
.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
453
Water Management functionality
Status Item
Altitude
Blade Height
Boot Depth
CMR Percent
Correction Age
Correction Type
Cut/fill
Design Height
Design Slope
Distance Traveled
East
GPS Status
H Error
HDOP
Heading
Latitude
18 Operations
Explanation
Current GPS altitude of the blade.
Current height of the blade shown as a relative height or a GPS height depending on settings selected.
Depth of the boot when installing tiles or the depth of the blade when cleaning surface ditches (used with the Autoslope leveling model).
Percentage of data being successfully received from the base GPS receiver.
Time since the last GPS correction was received from the GPS base station.
Note – Can also be viewed from the Run screen.
Solution type (for example: RTK Fixed, or RTK Float, etc.)
Note – Can also be viewed from the Run screen.
Difference between the blade height and the target height.
When Cut is displayed, the current ground height is above the target height, and the height adjustment indicator shows a red down arrow, which means that the blade needs to moved down to reach the target height.
When Fill is displayed, the current ground height is below the target height.
Originally planned or designed height at the current location.
Design slope with respect to the current location along the section line. Used with Autoslope leveling model.
Distance traveled since Auto mode was enabled. Used with Point to
Slope leveling model.
Difference in the East component from the Local Tangent Plane
(LTP).
Solution type (for example: RTK Fixed, or RTK Float, and so on).
Note – Can also be viewed from the Run screen.
Current estimate of the error in the horizontal component.
Horizontal dilution of position. Horizontal component of
Current direction the vehicle is heading in
Latitude as recorded by the GPS receiver
454
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
18 Operations Water Management functionality
Status Item
Longitude
Network ID
North
Offset
Offset X
Offset Y
Satellites
Section Line Number
Speed
Survey Cut / Fill
Target Height
Up
VDOP
Vertical Error Estimate
Explanation
Longitude as recorded by the GPS receiver.
Network ID of the GPS receiver, which must be the same as the base receiver network ID.
Difference in the North component from the Local Tangent Plane
(LTP).
Relative offset in the vertical component.
Relative offset in the X axis.
Relative offset in the Y axis.
Amount of satellites in the GPS/GLONASS solution.
Line number selected for design in AutoSlope. This is the current section line being recorded in the field.
Current speed of the vehicle.
Cut/fill for the location of the vehicle within a field that has been processed in AutoPlane.
Height the blade will attempt to reach. This is the design height ± the offset. When the blade reaches the target height, the arrows turn green.
Difference in the up component from the Local Tangent Plane (LTP).
Vertical dilution of precision. Vertical component of
Current estimate of error in the height calculated by the FieldLevel
GPS receiver.
Leveling models
You have different leveling options, depending on the leveling mode that you selected: l
Point and Slope mode l
Flat Plane (Laser) and Flat Plane (GPS) mode l
Contour mode
Point and Slope mode
Slope is the percentage of vertical drop compared to horizontal travel. A positive slope goes upward, and a negative slope goes downward. For example, if the slope is set to -1%, the slope will drop 1 ft for every 100 ft horizontally traveled.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
455
Water Management functionality 18 Operations
When you drive in Point and Slope mode, the Leveling panel displays the following controls.
Button
Coarse
/
Fine
Edit
Explanation
Coarse: The blade will move by large increments.
Fine: The blade will move by small increments.
Tap to view or change the
Slope Adjust increment. This setting controls the amount the gradient changes each time you increase or decrease the design slope.
For example, if the leveling gradient is set to -3%, and the slope adjust is set to 2%, when you decrease the design slope amount, the leveling gradient decreases to -5%.
Tap to increase the design slope by the
Slope Adjust increment.
Bench
or
Re-Bench
Delete Benchmark
Logging
Auto
Tap to decrease the design slope by the
Slope Adjust increment.
Tap to create a benchmark or re-bench.
Set the
Design Height equal to the
Blade Height
.
Tap to remove any benchmark on the field that you have selected.
You do not need to drive over a benchmark to delete it.
Tap to log coverage. This shows on the map where you have been, dependent on your implement width. A shape file is created with cut/fill and height information.
Engages automatic blade height control: l
Starts the slope calculation l
Resets the height l
Resets the cut/fill
Flat Plane (Laser) and Flat Plane (GPS) modes
When driving in Flat Plane mode, these options operate the same: l
Flat Plane (Laser): Use this model when the land has previously been leveled with a laser system and you want to touch up the field. This model results in a mathematically flat surface (which means the plane does not follow the curvature of the Earth, but completely flat).
l
Flat Plane (GPS): Results in a design with a surface that is curved the same as the surface of the
Earth (an equipotential surface).
Note – Neither of these models can be used with a laser system. The entire FieldLevel II system only works with GPS.
The controls on the Leveling panel for these modes are:
456
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
18 Operations Water Management functionality
Button
Coarse
/
Fine
Design
Bench
or
Re-Bench
Delete Benchmark
Logging
Auto
Explanation
Coarse: The blade will move by large increments.
Fine: The blade will move by small increments.
Raises the blade by the fine or coarse increment.
Lowers the blade by the fine or coarse increment.
Tap to open the Plane Editor. Here you can edit the design plane.
Tap to create a benchmark or re-bench.
Set the Design Height equal to the Blade Height.
Removes any benchmark on the field. You do not need to drive over a benchmark to delete it.
Tap to log coverage. This shows on the map where you have been, dependent on your implement width. A shape file is created with cut/fill and height information.
Engages automatic blade height control: l
Starts the slope calculation l
Resets the height l
Resets the cut/fill
Define a plane
You can define a plane in the Plane Editor screen. The controls on the Plane Editor screen enable you to either: l
Design a field slope and orientation l
Set the design parameters for the tile or surface ditch profile
To define a plane, you can use: l
l
Use at least one point as a pivot point and extra information based on direction and slope requirements.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
457
Water Management functionality 18 Operations
Item
1
2
3
4
Name
Pivot
Benchmark
Explanation
The single benchmark where the plane is defined. All slopes will pivot around this point.
Primary The first axis upon which the slope is defined. It has a Primary Slope and
Primary Heading component. The Primary Slope is defined as a negative number, where water will fall along the primary axis.
Cross The second axis upon which the slope is defined. The Cross Heading will always be 90° or 270° from the Primary Heading. The Cross Slope is defined as a negative number, where water will fall along the cross axis.
To define the plane by a single heading and slope, then you should set the Cross Slope value to 0.000%
Composite
When both Primary and Cross slopes are defined, the Composite Slope direction shows the actual heading where water will fall. If you have
0.000% slope on the Cross axis, the Composite Heading will be the same as the Primary Heading.
Use a single point
To define a plane using a single point:
1. At the FieldLevel II panel, create a benchmark to define the direction of the slope and its heading.
458
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
18 Operations Water Management functionality
It can be useful to create the benchmark at the critical point. For example, where the water will enter or exit the field. This ensures that where the benchmark is, the plane is on grade.
2. Tap
Design
. The Plane Editor screen displays. Complete the settings and tap
OK
.
Explanation Item
New Plan
Choose Pivot
Primary Slope
Tap and select the benchmark you want to be on grade.
If you want to define the primary heading by measuring a second point, see
.
Cross Slope
Height Above Pivot
Primary Heading
Flip
Enter the known offset if you are using one.
Tap to change the direction of the Cross Slope. This changes the
Heading between 90° and 270° from the
Primary Heading
.
Cross
For water to run along the Primary and Cross axis, the slope values must be keyed in as negative values.
Note – FieldLevel II searches for a survey on the field. If there is a survey, a Cut/Fill map displays on the new design plane.
Use multiple benchmarks
You can use multiple benchmarks to define a plane based on your specific requirements. If multiple benchmarks are created, you can design a plane of best-fit through them.
If you use three benchmarks to design the plane, the cut and fill values will be "0.0" through those points so the system can create a perfect plane. If you use more than three benchmarks to design the plane, the cut/fill values will be the residual difference between the plane of best-fit and the benchmark elevations.
To define a plane using multiple points:
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
459
Water Management functionality 18 Operations
1. At the FieldLevel II panel, create two or more benchmarks to help define the plane. If a primary heading definition is required you only need two benchmarks. If all the slopes of a field are to be defined, then you need at least three benchmarks. Select the FieldLevel II plugin and tap
Design
. The Plane Editor screen displays.
2. Tap
New Plane
. The New Plane screen displays.
3. From the
Benchmarks list, select the benchmark you want to use for the primary pivot, then tap
Add
. The benchmark is copied to the
Design Benchmarks list.
4. Repeat the previous step until all the required benchmarks are copied to the
Design Benchmarks list. The
Design Benchmarks list contains the benchmarks for the multi-point plane.
5. Set the
Primary Slope Heading
: a. Choose the first benchmark to define the heading and then tap the
Set> From: button.
Note – It is recommended that this point is the uphill point of the two points that will be used to define the primary slope.
b. Select the second point of the primary slope and then tap the
Set> To: button.
c. Tap
OK
. The
Plane Editor screen displays.
The selected benchmarks appear in the
Benchmarks table on the upper left along with their associated cut/fill values. The
Primary Slope and
Cross Slope values reflect the calculated slopes based on the benchmarks entered in the New Plane screen.
6. To update the slope values: a. Identify the benchmark to be used as the new pivot.
b. Tap
Choose Pivot
. The Choose Pivot screen displays.
c. Select the benchmark to be used as a the pivot for the new slope from the screen.
d. Tap
OK
. The Plane Editor screen displays.
7. Select the Primary Slope, Cross Slope, or Height Above Pivot areas to edit the slope values as required.
Note – The cut/fill values in the Benchmarks table will update automatically.
8. The plane is now defined. Tap
OK
. The Run screen displays.
Note – The FieldLevel II system will search for a survey on the field. If there is a survey, a cut/fill map displays as the new design plane.
Contour mode
1. At the Run screen, drive the vehicle to the location where you want to start the first levee.
2. Set the master benchmark at this point.
3. Set which side of the vehicle is uphill.
4. Tap
Guide
and drive the vehicle forward, following the lightbar to keep the vehicle on the same contour.
460
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
18 Operations Water Management functionality a. To move to the next levee, turn the vehicle around and change the
Up Hill direction.
b. To step the blade up or down, use the and plus and minus buttons to achieve the required offset and then follow the lightbar to keep the correct grade.
When you drive in Point and Slope mode, the FieldLevel II panel displays these controls.
Button
Coarse
/
Fine
Explanation
Coarse: The blade will move by large increments.
Fine: The blade will move by small increments.
Raises the blade by the fine or coarse increment.
Up Hill Left
Up Hill Right
Bench
or
Re-Bench
Delete Benchmark
Logging
Guide
Lowers the blade by the fine or coarse increment.
Select if you are driving around the contour with the uphill slope on your left and the downhill slope on your right.
Select if you are driving around the contour with the uphill slope on your right and the downhill slope on your left.
Tap to create a benchmark or re-bench.
Set the Design Height equal to the Blade Height.
Removes any benchmark on the field. You do not need to drive over a benchmark to delete it.
Tap to log coverage. This shows on the map where you have been, dependent on your implement width. A shape file is created with cut/fill and height information.
Tap to get lightbar guidance at the current level.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
461
Water Management functionality
Dual scraper controls
18 Operations
Blade height indicators: l
The left height indicator shows the height of the left/primary blade.
l
The right height indicator shows the height of the right/secondary blade.
Left plus and minus: Controls the blade height for the left/primary blade.
Right plus and minus: Controls the blade height for the right/secondary blade.
: Controls the left/primary automatics
: Controls the right/secondary automatics
462
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
18 Operations
Tandem scraper controls
Water Management functionality
Left plus and minus: Controls the blade height for the front/primary blade.
Right plus and minus: Controls the blade height for the rear/secondary blade.
Blade height indicators: l
The left height indicator shows the height of the front/primary blade.
l
The right height indicator shows the height of the rear/secondary blade.
: Controls the front/primary automatics
: Controls the rear/secondary automatics
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
463
Water Management functionality 18 Operations
WM-Drain operation
To use WM-Drain, you use the following to edit the survey and design, and to install tile or perform ditch cleaning: l
Set survey height offset (page 473)
and
Create a tile / ditch survey line
l
and
:
Design a section line (page 474)
,
Clip a portion of a section line (page 477)
and
l
Installation/ditch cleaning (page 478)
464
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
18 Operations Water Management functionality
Survey tab
The
Survey tab is used to create a survey by creating a master benchmark and logging survey points while driving the area you want to survey.
7
8
9
4
5
6
Item
1
2
3
Explanation
Survey tab
Record Section
button
Pause Section
button
Delete Section
button
Manual Data Point
button
Type of design: Main
Size of design
Create Benchmark: Tap to create a benchmark
Rebench: Tap to rebench
Delete Benchmark: Delete a benchmark
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
465
Water Management functionality
Install tab
On the Install tab, you perform installation.
18 Operations
2
3
4
5
6
Item
1
7
Explanation
Install tab
Mode
:
Type of pipe: The type of pipe to install. Options are: Main, Sub-Main, Lateral
Height Offset controls
- Decrease height offset
- Increase height offset
Choice of Coarse or Fine increments for changing height offset
466
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
18 Operations Water Management functionality
Design tab
On the
Design tab, you choose a section to design and tap
Design
. The
opens.
4
5
6
Item
1
2
3
Explanation
Design tab
Section
: Section chosen to design
Select Closest
button: Tap to choose the closest section
Design
button: Tap to open the
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
467
Water Management functionality
Design screen
At the Design screen, you determine the design of the section line you have chosen.
Settings Tab
18 Operations
4
5
6
Item
1
2
3
Explanation
Section
: The section you are currently designing.
Rename
button: Tap to rename the section.
Direction list:
The design screen shows the outlet at the left side of the screen and runs the design uphill to the right side of the screen. The direction of the profile is defined by the direction that it was surveyed. If your survey profile is displayed the other way, switch the option shown in the
Direction list to the other option in the list.
Options are: l
Outlet at Survey Start l
Outlet at Survey End
Outlet information: Elevation of outlet depth.
Boot Slope information: The current reading for the boot slope from the IMD-600.
468
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
18 Operations Water Management functionality
13
14
Item
7
8
9
10
11
12
15
16
17
18
Explanation
Minimum Depth
: The minimum depth for the tile or ditch installation. The system will not allow the design profile to be any shallower than the minimum depth, which is shown on the profile as a red line.
Note – For ditching applications, this depth is set close to the surface
Optimal Depth
: The depth to install the tile or ditch. The design will keep this to the depth when it can. It will move off the optimal depth to be within the other constraints where it is needed.
Note – For ditching applications, this depth is set close to the surface.
Maximum Depth
: The maximum depth for the tile or ditch installation. The system will not allow the design profile to be any deeper than the maximum depth, which is shown on the profile as a blue line.
Outlet to Optimal
: The distance it takes to change the depth of the design from the Outlet
Depth to the Optimal Depth. The tile plow will level out over a long distance rather than trying to achieve the depth too quickly at the start of a run.
Minimum Slope
: The minimum slope for the tile or ditch installation. The system will not allow the design to slope to be any less than the minimum slope.
Outlet Depth
: The depth at which the design profile will be at the outlet. This depth can either be entered or measured. To measure the depth:
1. Drop the tile plow into the ground so the boot is at the same height as the main or outlet.
2. Tap Measure. The outlet depth is entered by the system. Also, another point is added to the section line if you are within 20 m (65 ft) of the end of the surveyed section line.
The height of the outlet is shown by a yellow tag.
Outlet Elevation
: The real or relative elevation of the outlet.
Smoothing list: The required smoothing level (None, Low, Medium, High) to work out any humping sections in the design. It is recommended you use either Low or Medium smoothing.
Measure Outlet
button: Tap to show the outlet depth and outlet elevation layers with the current boot depth in relation to the surveyed surface.
OK
button: Tap to save any changes to the design.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
469
Water Management functionality
Edit Line tab
18 Operations
4
5
6
7
8
9
Item
1
2
3
Explanation
Section
: The section you are currently designing.
Rename
button: Tap to rename the section.
Direction list:
The design screen shows the outlet at the left side of the screen and runs the design uphill to the right side of the screen. The direction of the profile is defined by the direction that it was surveyed. If your survey profile is displayed the other way, switch the option shown in the
Direction list to the other option in the list.
Options are: l
Outlet at Survey Start l
Outlet at Survey End
Outlet information: Elevation of outlet depth.
Boot Slope information: The current reading for the boot slope from the IMD-600.
Distance
: The distance of the fixed point from the beginning of the line.
470
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
18 Operations Water Management functionality
10
11
12
13
Item
14
15
Info tab
Explanation
Clipping Distance
: The distance from the beginning of the line.
Design information: Elevation of the designed section at that location.
Surface information: Elevation of the surface at that location.
Design Tool list: Options: Clip Start, Clip End, Fix Point.
Add
button: Tap to add a fixed point to the design.
Clip
button: Tap to clip the designated portion of the section line.
Delete All
button: Tap to delete all of the fixed points created.
OK
button: Tap to save any changes to the design.
2
3
Item
1
Explanation
Section
: The section you are currently designing.
Rename
button: Tap to rename the section.
Direction list: The design screen shows the outlet at the left side of the screen and runs the design uphill to the right side of the screen. The direction of the profile is defined by the direction that it was surveyed. If your survey profile is displayed the other way, switch the option shown in the
Direction list to the other option in the list.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
471
Water Management functionality 18 Operations
6
7
8
4
5
9
10
Item Explanation
Options are: l
Outlet at Survey Start l
Outlet at Survey End
Outlet information: Elevation of outlet depth.
Boot Slope information: The current reading for the boot slope from the IMD-600.
Distance
: The selected location's distance from the start of the section line.
OK
button: Tap to save any changes to the design.
472
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
18 Operations Water Management functionality
Set survey height offset
To set the Survey Height Offset:
1. At the Home screen, tap . The Configuration screen displays.
2. Select
3. On the tile plow, raise the boot as high as it will raise.
4. Measure the distance from the bottom of the tile boot to the ground.
5. Enter this value into the
Survey Height Offset entry box.
Note – It is recommended that you change the survey point spacing to 1.5m (5 feet). This will then record the survey points every 1.5M (5 feet) and provide a more accurate profile of the ground surface.
6. Tap
OK
.
WM-Drain and tap
Setup
.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
473
Water Management functionality 18 Operations
Create a tile / ditch survey line
Before creating the survey line,
Set survey height offset (page 473) . This offset will be applied to the
heights of your surveyed alignment so that you do not need to rebench before installing tile.
1. At the Run screen, tap to open the WM-Drain panel.
2. Go to the
Survey tab of the panel.
3. Drive to a point that will be untouched to use as a reference point.
4. Tap to create a master benchmark and flag this point so you can find it again easily.
5. Drive the vehicle to the start of the line where you want to install tile or clean a ditch.
Note – For the most efficient method, it is recommended that you drive to the high end of the line.
6. From the
Type list, select the type of design. The options are
Main
,
Sub main and
Lateral
.
7. In the
Size entry box, enter the size of the design.
8. Tap
Record Section
to begin recording a section and then drive. To pause recording, tap
Pause
Section
. (The
Record
button changes to white when activated.)
If you have created a section you want to remove, tap
Delete Section
and choose the section from the list that displays.
Note – For the most efficient method, it is recommended that the end point is where the tile line is to be connected to a main or outlet.
9. To add a manual survey point at a distance different from the normal survey distance, tap
Manual Data Point
.
10. Tap
Record
again to stop the recording.
11. If you create a benchmark you want to remove, tap list that displays.
and choose the benchmark from the
Design a section line
After you create survey lines, use design screen to create designs for installing tile or cleaning ditches along those lines.
1. At the Run screen, tap to open the WM-Drain panel.
2. Go to the
Design tab of the panel.
3. From the
Section list, select the section line that you want to design and tap
Edit Design
.
4. If required, tap
Select Closest
. This enables you to select the line that is closest to you. If there is more than one line within 10 m of your current position, the Select Closest Section Line screen
474
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
18 Operations Water Management functionality displays. The line that is calculated as being closest to you is highlighted. The section line number and pipe type are shown. Choose the line you want and tap
OK
. The system displays the Design screen.
5. At the Design screen, from the
Section list choose the section line you want to design.
Explanation Setting at Top of
Screen
Section Selection
Rename
button
Direction
Auto: The nearest section line is automatically selected.
Manual: Manually select a section from the list.
Tap to rename the section name.
The design screen shows the outlet at the left side of the screen and runs the design uphill to the right side of the screen. The direction of the profile is defined by the direction that it was surveyed. If your survey profile is displayed the other way, switch the option shown in the
Direction list to the other option in the list.
Options are: l
Outlet at Survey Start
Outlet at Survey End
Note – The section lines are labeled automatically by the system (beginning at S1) in the sequence they were surveyed.
6. Edit the design to your requirements.
On the
Settings tab, set:
Settings Tab
Min Depth
Optimal Depth
Max Depth
Outlet to Optimal
Explanation
The minimum depth for the tile or ditch installation. The system will not allow the design profile to be any shallower than the minimum depth, which is shown on the profile as a red line.
Note – For ditching applications, this depth is set close to the surface.
The depth to install the tile or ditch. The design will keep this to the depth where it can. It will move off the optimal depth to be within the other constraints where it is needed.
Note – For ditching applications, this depth is set close to the surface.
The maximum depth for the tile or ditch installation. The system will not allow the design profile to be any deeper than the maximum depth (shown as a blue line).
The distance it takes to change the depth of the design from the
to the
. The tile plow will level out over a
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
475
Water Management functionality 18 Operations
Settings Tab
Min Slope
Outlet Depth
Explanation
long distance rather than trying to achieve the depth too quickly at the start of a run.
The minimum slope for the tile or ditch installation. The system will not allow the design to slope to be any less than the minimum slope.
The depth at which the design profile will be at the outlet. This depth can either be entered or measured. To measure the depth: a. Drop the tile plow into the ground so the boot is at the same height as the main or outlet.
b. Tap
Measure
. The outlet depth is entered by the system. Also, another point is added to the section line if you are within 20 m
(65 ft) of the end of the surveyed section line.
The height of the outlet is shown by a yellow tag.
Outlet Elevation
Smoothing
Elevation of outlet depth.
The required smoothing level (None, Low, Medium, High) to work out any humping sections in the design. It is recommended you use either
Low or
Medium smoothing.
Measure Output
button Tap to show the outlet depth and outlet elevation layers with the current boot depth in relation to the surveyed surface.
Distance Tap the design graph or enter a distance to display the Design Info
(depth, elevation, slope, surface) for that location.
7. On the
Edit Line tab, you have the options to: a. Indicate fixed points on the line. See
Add a fixed point (page 477) .
b. Clip and remove sections of the line. See
Clip a portion of a section line (page 477)
.
8. Tap
OK
.
At the Run screen, you can install the tile or clean the ditch from either the outlet or the top end of the profile. The section line that you use for installation or cleaning will display as red on the screen
(other section lines are white).
476
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
18 Operations Water Management functionality
Add a fixed point
You can add a fixed point to your design. This enables you to avoid: l
An underground structure l
Intersecting a specific depth or existing tile line
1. At the
Design tab, tap Design to open the Design screen.
2. Go to the
Edit Line tab.
3. From the far left-hand list at the bottom of the screen, choose
Fix Point
.
4. Indicate where you want the fixed point by: a. Touching on the screen b. Moving the slider c. Entering a specific distance in the Distance entry box
5. Tap
Add
. The screen will show the design elevation for the fixed point.
6. Enter the elevation that represents the target or obstacle. The system redesigns the section line to account for the new fixed point. If the slope approaching the point is now too steep, you have the option to enter more fixed points ahead of the original fixed point to make the transition better from one slope to the next.
Clip a portion of a section line
You can remove a portion of the section line from either the beginning or end of the line (or both).
1. At the
Design tab, tap
Design
to open the Design screen.
2. Go to the
Edit Line tab.
3. From the far left-hand list at the bottom of the screen, choose either
Clip Start or
Clip End
(depending on which end of the line you want to remove).
4. Indicate where you want to clip to by: a. Touching on the screen b. Moving the slider c. Entering a specific distance in the
Distance entry box
5. When you have finished indicating the areas to clip, tap
Delete All
.
6. To save the changes, tap
OK
.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
477
Water Management functionality 18 Operations
Installation/ditch cleaning
Autoslope mode
You can use the Autoslope mode for: l
For tile applications: The system runs on both self-propelled tile machines and pull-type plows towed behind a tractor.
l
For ditching applications: You can use any type of scraper or ditching machine supported by the WM-Drain system.
Note – When the system is not running in Autoslope mode, the on-screen or LB25 lightbar will guide to any existing A-B line. This means you can use manual guidance for surveying in section lines to be tiled at a consistent spacing.
1. At the Run screen, tap to open the WM-Drain panel.
2. Go to the
Install tab of the panel. Use the controls for installation or ditch cleaning.
Control
Survey
Design
Mode
Explanation
Tap to open the Survey screen where you can survey the section line you will design.
Tap to open the Design screen where you can select a section line and then edit the design.
Note – A white cross displays on the Run screen to show both the horizontal and vertical location.
l l
Autoslope: Creates sloped tile or surface drainage targeting the optimal depth defined on the Design tab.
Slope: Creates consistently sloped tile or surface drainage. From the starting point, the vehicle leves at a constant slope, regardless of direction.
Constant Depth: Use to collect a live, rolling survey of the ground surface. This survey is passed in real time to the control system, which enables it to run at the specified depth above or below the ground surface.
The constant depth mode can only be accessed when you have properly configured manual guidance, Autopilot or EZ-Pilot.
This mode requires two RTK-enabled receivers are available and assigned on the system. One of the RTK-enabled receivers:
Is not required to be an internal receiver
478
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
18 Operations Water Management functionality
Control
Pipe
Recalc
Explanation
l
Must be assigned to the appropriate guidance plugin/feature l
Must be mounted in front of the antenna used for WM-
Drain
Pipe Type: Select the type of pipe to be installed.
Pipe Size: The size of the pipe to be installed.
When the tile plow encounters a rock, pull the boot up over the rock and tap
Recalc
.
This modifies the design to ensure the remaining tile run stays within the minimum slope requirement and prevents the pipe from diving down to the original design grade.
Note – This works only when installing tile in the direction away from the outlet point.
Height Offset Increase button
Raise the tile boot or blade by the blade step increment.
Height Offset
Decrease button
Lower the tile boot or blade by the blade step increment.
Height Offset or
Fine
button
Coarse
When you tap
Coarse
, the increase or decrease button moves the blade by the Coarse Blade increment. This enables you to move the blade by a larger increment.
When you tap
Fine
, the increase or decrease button moves the blade by the fine increment.
Pitch Offset Increase Raises the blade pitch relative to the design pitch.
Pitch Offset Decrease Lowers the blade pitch relative to the design pitch.
Coarse (Pitch Offset) When you tap Coarse, the increase or decrease button moves the blade by the Coarse Pitch increment. This enables you to move the blade pitch by a larger increment.
Point and slope mode
1. At the Run screen, tap to open the WM-Drain panel.
2. Go to the
Install tab of the panel. Use the controls for installation or ditch cleaning.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
479
Water Management functionality
Control
Survey
Design
Mode
Pipe
Slope Increase
Slope Decrease
18 Operations
Explanation
Tap to open the Survey screen where you can survey the section line you will design.
Tap to open the Design screen where you can select a section line and then edit the design.
Note – A white cross displays on the Run screen to show both the horizontal and vertical location.
l
Autoslope: Creates sloped tile or surface drainage targeting the optimal depth defined on the Design tab.
Slope: Creates consistently sloped tile or surface drainage. From the starting point, the vehicle leves at a constant slope, regardless of direction.
Constant Depth: Use to collect a live, rolling survey of the ground surface. This survey is passed in real time to the control system, which enables it to run at the specified depth above or below the ground surface.
The constant depth mode can only be accessed when you have properly configured manual guidance, Autopilot or EZ-Pilot.
Run depth is defined by setting the Height Offset value to the desired depth. Examples:
For a consistent depth of 4.0' (1.22 m), adjust the Height
Offset to -4.0' (-1.22m).
l
For a consistent height of 6" (0.15 m) above the ground surface, adjust the Height Offset to 6" (0.15cm).
This mode requires two RTK-enabled receivers are available and assigned on the system. One of the RTK-enabled receivers:
Is not required to be an internal receiver l
Must be assigned to the appropriate guidance plugin/feature l
Must be mounted in front of the antenna used for WM-
Drain l
Pipe Type: Select the type of pipe to be installed.
Pipe Size: The size of the pipe to be installed.
Increase the design slope by the
Slope Adjust increment.
Decrease the design slope by the
Slope Adjust increment.
480
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
18 Operations Water Management functionality
Control Explanation
Height Offset Increase Raise the tile boot or blade by the
Slope Adjust increment.
Height Offset
Decrease
Lower the tile boot or blade by the
Slope Adjust increment.
Height Offset Increase Raise the boot or blade by the blade step increment.
Height Offset
Decrease
Slope
Lower the boot or blade by the blade step increment.
Select a defined percentage of vertical drop for a horizontal distance traveled.
Coarse (Height Offset) When you tap
Coarse
, the increase or decrease button moves the blade by the
Coarse Blade
increment. This enables you to move the blade by a larger increment.
Pitch Offset Increase Raises the blade pitch relative to the design pitch.
Pitch Offset Decrease Lowers the blade pitch relative to the design pitch.
Coarse (Pitch Offset) When you tap
Coarse
, the increase or decrease button moves the blade by the
Coarse Pitch increment. This enables you to move the blade pitch by a larger increment.
Auto Set Automatics to the hydraulic valve. The blade or tile boot will be driven to the design depth depending on where you are located relative to the section line.
Logging Tap to log coverage to be able to see on your map where you have been dependent on your implement width. A shape file will also be created with cut/fill and height information.
Define boot depth
You can define the boot depth by either of the steps below.
l
Option 1: Enter the relative depth above and below the surveyed surface.
l
Option 2: Enter a specific elevation in the
Outlet Elevation entry box. The system calculates the other box.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
481
Yield Monitoring operation 18 Operations
Yield Monitoring operation
Yield Monitoring enables you to track the: l l
Loads of grains harvested through the season for a field.
After the harvest is complete, use the Farm Works
™ office. See
.
Mapping software to track loads in the
Variety of grains harvested throughout the season for a field that has an associated planting variety map.
After harvest is complete, use the Farm Works Mapping software to create and view a yield variety report to see a yield by variety comparison. See
.
Yield Monitoring panel
To access the Yield Monitoring panel, at the Run screen tap
The panel contains several views that you can navigate between.
.
Crop summary and details
The initial view shows each crop being harvested and summary information for each one.
Tap a crop/summary section to see more details about the crop.
To change the status items that show for a crop, at the
Crop Name view tap
Edit Overview
.
482
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
18 Operations Yield Monitoring operation
Variety tracking
For a field that has an associated planting variety map, Yield Monitoring enables you to track the variety of grains harvested throughout the season.
Variety map
When you are planting or seeding and are , a variety map layer is created within the
Field folder if you are using either: l
Field-IQ crop input control system l
Serial Rate Control
When you open the client, farm, and field and create a harvest event, the system automatically loads the variety map layer into the background on the screen.
Note – Set up the implement as a harvest operation if you want the variety map layer to display.
After harvest is complete, use the Farm Works Mapping software to create and view a yield variety report to see a yield by variety comparison.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
483
Yield Monitoring operation 18 Operations
Load tracking
Yield Monitoring tracks loads of grains harvested through the season for a field. After the harvest is complete, use the Farm Works
™
Mapping software to track loads in the office.
At the Load Details screen, you can view for each load listed:
Item
Load Name
Recorded Weight
Scale Ticket Weight
Recorded Moisture
Scale Ticket Moisture
Explanation
Name you assigned to the load
The weight of the load
484
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
Chapter
19
Diagnostics
In this chapter:
FieldLevel II diagnostics valve test
This chapter covers diagnostics and troubleshooting.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
485
System diagnostics 19 Diagnostics
System diagnostics
At the Configuration screen, select
System and then tap
Diagnostics
. Each tab contains specific information about the system: l
Advanced system diagnostics (page 486)
l
l
Network diagnostics (page 487)
l
Advanced system diagnostics
1. At the Configuration screen, tap
2. Go to the
Advanced
tab.
System and then tap
Diagnostics
.
3. Select the
Diagnostics Level
. This determines how much debugging information is logged in the program files.
Item
1
6 (default)
9
Explanation
Minimal level of information
Medium level of information
Highest level of information
4. At
Swath Control Points
, select whether to hide or show swath control points.
When the guidance line is a curve, it displays on-screen as a series of short straight sections joined together. Swath control points appear where these line segments meet.
You can also use the System Diagnostics screen to view raw port data. For more information, see
.
486
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
19 Diagnostics CAN Bus data
CAN Bus data
You can view CAN Bus data as the FM-1000 Plus application receives it.
To view the data:
1. At the Configuration screen, select
System and then tap
Diagnostics
.
2. Go to the
CAN Bus tab.
3. To view the data from a port, tap
View
. The port diagnostics screen for that port displays.
4. To capture data, tap the
Capture
button. Approximately five seconds of serial data is captured and then displays on the screen. You can review the data or capture another snapshot of data.
5. To close the screen, tap
OK
.
Configuration data
1. To view FM-1000 Plus application configuration information, tap .
2. The Home screen shows: l
FM-1000 Plus application firmware information
Autopilot controller information l
GPS receiver and correction method information l
Vehicle make and model
Network diagnostics
1. At the Configuration screen, tap
2. Go to the
Network
tab.
System and then tap
Diagnostics
.
The status of various network connections display.
Serial Comms
You can view raw serial data as the FM-1000 Plus application receives it. This can be useful for analyzing the GPS signal.
To view the raw serial data:
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
487
Autopilot diagnostics 19 Diagnostics
1. At the Configuration screen, select
System and then tap
Diagnostics
.
2. Go to the
Serial Comms tab. This diagnostics screen shows each of the connectors (ports) on the display harness and the number of data packets that have been sent and received.
3. To view the raw data from a port, tap
View
.
4. To capture data, tap
Capture
. Approximately five seconds of serial data is captured and then displays on the screen. You can review the data or capture another snapshot of data.
5. To close the screen, tap
OK
.
Note – Text shown in green is incoming data. Text shown in red is outgoing data.
Autopilot diagnostics
1. At the Configuration screen, select
Autopilot
.
2. Tap
Diagnostics
. The Vehicle Controller Setup - Guidance screen displays. From this screen, you can access information on: l
l
l
l
Controls
The following buttons are available on every tab: l
Engage
: You can tap to engages or disengage the system. The button also shows the current engage state. When this button is red, tap it to see the fault that is preventing the automatic mode.
l
View Fault Log
: Tap to view
l
View Warning
: Tap to view
488
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
19 Diagnostics Autopilot diagnostics
Guidance tab
Section
Offline distance graph
GPS status
Heading error
Roll
Direction
Cross Track Error
On-screen lightbar
Heading
Speed
1PPS
Aggressiveness
Nudge
Steering tab
Section
PWM status
Explanation
A graph of offline distance over time. Useful for diagnosing problems with the vehicle coming online and staying online.
Current GPS position fix quality and number of satellites
The difference between vehicle heading and path heading
Current roll value calculated by the system
Current vehicle direction: Forward, backward, or stopped
Numeric value of the offline distance
Visual representation of offline distance
Current vehicle heading calculated by the system
Current vehicle speed calculated by the system
Shows whether the 1PPS signal from a GPS receiver is detected
A slider to adjust the aggressiveness of the steering system.
Enter the increment of distance you want for nudging.
Steering command override
Steering angle
Explanation
Shows the current PWM signals being sent to the electrohydraulic valve. This is an indication of whether the system is attempting to turn left or right.
Bypasses the normal steering command to the wheels. With this feature, you can force a certain angle of turn and make sure that the system responds as expected.
Required angle: The angle that the system is trying to attain
Steering angle: Where the system calculates the wheels are pointing
Enable
Reset
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
489
EZ-Pilot diagnostics 19 Diagnostics
Details tab
Section
Diagnostics
Accelerometers
Vehicle voltage
Vehicle voltage
Explanation
Vehicle and configuration specific diagnostics. Up to nine diagnostics can be shown.
Raw voltage and scaled G-force for each of the system’s accelerometers
Input voltage currently being fed into the Autopilot system from the vehicle’s electrical system
Input voltage currently being fed into the Autopilot system from the vehicle’s electrical system
Autopilot Faults screen
The Autopilot Faults screen lists all faults on the Autopilot controller. To access this screen tap
View
Fault Log
.
Item
Active
History
Cancel
Refresh Fault Lists
Clear History
Close & Clear Faults
Explanation
Faults that are currently active
Faults that have previously occurred
Tap to close the screen.
Tap to see the latest faults.
Tap to clear historical faults.
Tap to clear all faults and close the screen.
Warning screen
When you are viewing the vehicle diagnostics screens, the
View Warning
button flashes red if there is an active warning. To view any active warnings, tap the button.
EZ-Pilot diagnostics
The EZ-Pilot Diagnostics screen contains the statistics for the IMD-600 and SAM-200 and inertial information.
490
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
19 Diagnostics
1. At the Home screen, tap
.
2. At the Configuration screen, tap
EZ-Pilot and then tap
Diagnostics
.
The EZ-Pilot Diagnostics screen displays.
IMD-600 status
Status
Version
Serial Number
Explanation
Status of the system's connection to the IMD-600
Firmware version of the IMD-600
Serial number of the IMD-600
EZ-Steer diagnostics
SAM-200 status
Status
Version
Serial Number
Temperature
Voltage
Explanation
Status of the system's connection to the SAM-200
Firmware version of the SAM-200
Serial number of the SAM-600
Temperature of the SAM-600
3. To view faults, tap
View Fault Log
.
4. To adjust the steering performance of the system, tap
Steering Performance
. See
EZ-Pilot system calibration (page 202)
.
EZ-Steer diagnostics
1. At the Home screen, tap
.
2. At the Configuration screen, tap
EZ-Steer and then tap
Diagnostics
. The EZ-Steer Diagnostics screen displays the SCM statistics and inertial information.
3. To view faults, tap
View Fault Log
.
4. To adjust the steering performance of the system, tap
Steering Perf
. See
EZ-Steer system calibration (page 208)
.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
491
Field-IQ diagnostics
492
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
19 Diagnostics
Field-IQ diagnostics
1. At the Home screen, tap
.
2. At the Configuration screen, tap screen displays.
Field-IQ and then tap
Diagnostics
. The Field-IQ Diagnostics
Operations tab
On this tab, you can: l
Test optional switch box (page 398)
if you are using an optional section switch box l
Enter values manually (page 397)
l
Status Item
Control Mode
Rate Switch Mode
Applied Rate
Current Flow
Control Speed
Master Switch
Current Pressure
Explanation
Auto or Manual
Manual, Rate 1 or Rate 2
The rate being applied
Relation of material being applied to time
Speed you are moving
Indicates which switches have been assigned to each section.
Tap
View Error Log
to see all errors listed since the last time the log was cleared.
Tap
Section Test
to begin a sequence of engaging each section and groups of sections.
The color coding for the sections are:
Section Number Tab
Not indented
Not indented
Indented
Indented
Section Indicator Graphic Section is...
Red
Gray
Red
Green
Not armed
Not armed
Armed
Armed
Section switch is...
Off
On
Off
On
Version 3.0, Revision A
19 Diagnostics Field-IQ diagnostics
Testing section switches
Testing the switches from the Diagnostic screen is useful because you do not have to open a field or set a manual speed and manual coverage to make the section switches active.
At the
Operation tab:
1. Arm the sections by tapping on the box with the sections you want to turn on.
2. Flip the section switches to test that they are working properly and are in the correct order.
Hardware tab
On this tab, the control modules are listed with the: l
Serial number of the module l
Position on the implement l
Firmware version l
Status of CAN connection l
Tx/Rx number of packets
Row Monitor tab
The status column of this screen indicates: l
Disabled: Sensor is not detected.
l
Off: Sensor is detected but is not actively looking for seed.
l
On: Sensor is detected and is looking for seed. (The field is open with system planting.)
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
493
Field-IQ diagnostics 19 Diagnostics
Field-IQ faults and troubleshooting
Faults
Message That Displays
Field-IQ devices not found.
New Field-IQ devices need configuring. Please go to the Field-IQ Setup.
The 12-section switch box has been disconnected.
Sections will be controlled automatically.
Explanation
One or more Field-IQ system devices in the current implement configuration are not present.
Possible Causes/Actions
Check: l
Implement selection l
Cabling and fuses l
Field-IQ Diagnostics to identify missing modules l
Field-IQ Setup
Check:
The Field-IQ system cannot be used without the master switch box.
Field-IQ can operate without the
12-section switch box. Section switching will depend only on existing coverage, field boundaries and exclusion zones.
To get on-screen buttons for controlling sections, cycle power to the display and open the FM-
1000 Plus application.
l
Cabling l
To see if CAN has been dropped. Check terminators.
Check: l
Cabling l
To see if CAN has been dropped. Check terminators.
One or more Field-IQ system devices were disconnected.
One or more Field-IQ system devices have lost communication with the system.
Check:
1. Cabling and fuses
2. Field-IQ system Diagnostics to identify missing modules
3. Field-IQ System Setup
Rate not achievable For current target rate, the maximum speed is X mph.
The target application rate cannot be achieved within the configured maximum RPM at the current speed. The Field-IQ system is limiting the RPM to
Maximum flow/rpm has been set too low for desired speed and rate.
494
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
19 Diagnostics Field-IQ diagnostics
Message That Displays Explanation
Target rate may not be achieved for current target rate, the minimum speed is
X\ mph.
the configured maximum.
At the current speed and target application rate, the required
RPM is below the configured minimum RPM limit.
Minimum flow/rpm has been set to high for desired speed and rate.
The current coverage pattern will degrade system performance.
A "combing" coverage pattern is being generated because of a mix of on and off boom sections.
This causes generation of many coverage polygons, possibly leading to degraded system performance.
Contact Trimble support.
Hydraulic motor over speed.
or
Hydraulic motor under speed
The hydraulic motor is not running at the commanded speed.
Rate control stopped due to hydraulic motor over speed or
Rate control stopped due to hydraulic motor under speed
The hydraulic motor was stopped due to it not running at commanded speed.
Hydraulic motor stalled
Rate control has been disabled. Toggle the master switch to re-enable rate control.
Check the hydraulic motor.
It ran too fast (Rawson).
The hydraulic motor is not running at the commanded speed
Degraded GPS.
Automatic section control has been disabled.
Use switches to control sections.
The GPS positions are uncorrected. Due to potential inaccuracy of the positions, the
Field-IQ system will not switch the boom sections automatically. You must control
Possible Causes/Actions
No RPM is being reported from encoder.
Check hydraulic pressure.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
495
Field-IQ diagnostics 19 Diagnostics
Message That Displays
Controller Requires Valve
Calibration
Sprayer configuration error
Check the settings on the
Valve Calibration screen
Explanation
No GPS.
Automatic rate and section control has been disabled.
Please maintain speed at X mph.
the sections manually through the switches.
The Field-IQ system is no longer adjusting the application rate.
You are prompted to maintain the current speed. The last sentence appears only if the master switch was on at the time of the warning.
General system warning Tank/bin level is getting low.
Using jump start speed.
Please maintain speed at
XX mph.
The GPS speed has been overridden with the jump start speed. You must drive at that speed to maintain the current target application rate.
Warning typically appears when system drops under 10 V.
A power brown-out has occurred - check cabling and fuses - check power supply
Section controller reported over-current.
Section and rate control have been disabled.
Toggle the master switch to re-enable control.
Rate and Section Control
Module Not Configured
Please set the number of nozzles in the Field-IQ
Setup
Number of nozzles has not been set.
The valve type, plumbing, or auxiliary valve setting is incorrect.
Possible Causes/Actions
Check: l
Cabling and fuses l
Power supply
Possible causes:
Controller is drawing too much current.
There is an electrical short somewhere.
Go to the Valve Calibration screen to set the valve type.
496
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
19 Diagnostics Field-IQ diagnostics
Message That Displays
Flow meter configuration error
Check the flow meter calibration
Shaft encoder configuration error
Check the Shaft Encoder
Constant in the Flow
Calibration screen
Valve configuration error
Check the valve calibration
Unknown Field-IQ configuration error
Explanation
The flow meter calibration number has not been set.
The shaft encoder constant has not been set.
No flow detected
Attention Minimum flow
XX gal/min is applying
Rate not responding.
Unstable flow control
Possible Causes/Actions
The valve settings are not valid for the selected valve type.
This message shows if the FM-
1000 Plus application does not understand the fault code that was received from the rate and section control module.
The Field-IQ system attempted to apply material, but the flow sensor failed to detect any flow.
Check firmware versions. Report this fault to Trimble Support.
Possible causes: l
Incorrect flow calibration l
Damaged or disconnected feedback sensor l
Broken valve wiring
The current target application rate and speed require a flow that is less than the configured minimum flow limit. The flow will be at that limit instead.
Therefore, the actual applied rate will probably be above the target rate.
The flow sensor indicates that the actual flow is not changing as expected.
The rate and section control module is having difficulty
Verify correct setup on the Valve
Calibration screen.
Perform a valve calibration.
Inspect feedback sensor and rate control valve for damage.
Check the Plumbing setting on the Valve Calibration screen
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
497
Field-IQ diagnostics 19 Diagnostics
Message That Displays
Valve controller reported over-current
Unknown valve error
Unable to lock valve position.
Unable to start flow
Field-IQ unknown internal error
The second pressure entry must differ from the first
Please enter a different
Explanation
maintaining the target flow, possibly due to an incorrect setup.
Possible Causes/Actions
Reduce Field-IQ system aggressiveness.
This message shows if the FM-
1000 Plus application does not understand the fault code that was received from the rate and section control module.
An error occurred when attempting to lock the position of the control valve.
An error occurred when attempting to control the valve.
This message appears if the FM-
1000 Plus application does not understand the fault code that was received from the rate and section control module.
Probably due to incompatible firmware versions.
The pressure calibration process requires calibration at two different pressures. This
Possible causes: l
Control valve is drawing too much current.
l
There is an electrical short somewhere.
Probably due to incompatible firmware versions. Make sure that the correct firmware versions and the rate and section control module are installed.
Report this fault to Trimble
Support.
Probably due to incompatible firmware. Make sure that the correct firmware versions are installed on the FM-1000 Plus application and the rate and section control module.
Probably due to incompatible firmware. Make sure that the correct firmware versions are installed on the FM-1000 Plus applicationand the rate and section control module.
Make sure that the correct firmware versions are installed on the FM-1000 Plus application and the rate and section control module.
Report this fault to Trimble
Support.
498
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
19 Diagnostics Field-IQ diagnostics
Message That Displays
pressure
No pressure change has been detected Please change the system pressure
Invalid setup for flow calibration
Invalid setup for granular calibration
The second gate height entry must differ from the first
Please enter a different height
No gate height change has been detected
Explanation
message indicates that you entered the same pressure twice.
Note – Zero is a valid pressure for calibration.
Possible Causes/Actions
The pressure calibration process requires calibration at two different pressures. This message indicates that the report from the pressure sensor did not change when the second reading was taken.
The pressure in the system must be changed between readings, for example, by either: l l
Opening or closing a valve
Starting or stopping the pump.
If this message persists after the pressure is changed, check the installation and wiring of the pressure sensor.
Check: l
Total Nozzles in the Boom tab in the Field-IQ system setup l
Width in the Hardware tab in Field-IQ Setup l
Flow meter number
Check: l
Shaft Encoder Constant l
Width in the Hardware tab in Field-IQ Setup
The gate height calibration process requires calibration at two different gate heights. This message indicates that you entered the same gate height twice.
Note – Zero is a valid gate height for calibration.
The gate height calibration process requires calibration at
If this message persists after the gate is moved, check the
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
499
Field-IQ diagnostics 19 Diagnostics
Message That Displays
Please change the gate height
Gate not open
Please open the gate
Explanation
two different gate heights. This message indicates that the report from the gate height sensor did not change when the second reading was taken. The gate must be raised or lowered between readings.
Possible Causes/Actions
installation and wiring of the gate height sensor.
The Field-IQ system is attempting to dispense material, but the gate height sensor indicates that the gate is closed.
Or if the gate height sensor is disabled, you did not enter a non-zero gate height.
Open the gate, or enter a nonzero gate height.If the gate is already open, check the installation and wiring of the gate height sensor.
The spinner pulses per revolution setting is invalid
Please check the spinner sensor setup
The tank/bin is empty
Please refill tank/bin
Valve Calibration Not
Started.
Valve Calibration Failed
Please turn off the master switch
The tank/bin level sensor has reported that the tank/bin is empty.
This shows only during auto valve calibration, which is not available in firmware version 4.0.
For safety reasons, when running an auto valve calibration for anhydrous, the vehicle must be moving at a speed of at least 2 mph. If the vehicle speed is above 2 mph, check that the FM-1000 Plus application is receiving valid GPS positions.
If this is incorrect, check the tank/bin sensor installation and wiring.
The vehicle is moving too slow to begin the automatic valve calibration. Increase the speed of the vehicle and start the valve calibration again
The vehicle is moving too slow to continue the automatic valve calibration.
The Field-IQ system is in a mode in which material application is
Increase the speed of the vehicle and start the valve calibration again.
500
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
19 Diagnostics Field-IQ diagnostics
Message That Displays Explanation
not expected. It is asking for the master switch to be turned off to make the system safe.
NH3 is an irritant and corrosive to the skin, eyes, respiratory tract and mucous membranes and is dangerous if not handled properly. May cause severe burns to the eyes, lungs and skin. Skin and respiratory related diseases could be aggravated by exposure. It is recommended that protective gloves, boots, slicker and/or pants and jacket, and chemical-splash goggles that are impervious to anhydrous ammonia are worn at all times.
The application type is set to
Anhydrous
Application width is different from the control width.
Please visit Field-IQ setup to reconfigure settings.
Application width is different from the control and section width.
Do you want the control and section width to be automatically adjusted to match the application width?
The total of the rate controller widths in the Hardware tab of the Field-IQ Setup must match the application width in the
Implement Setup. A difference of about 0.4 inches is tolerated.
This message could appear when you exit the Field-IQ
Setup.
The total of the rate controller widths in the Hardware tab of the Field-IQ Setup must match the application width in the
Implement Setup. A difference of about 0.4 inches is tolerated.
Please select your NH3 unit This messages shows if the application type is anhydrous and you attempt to exit the
Field-IQ Setup without selecting
Possible Causes/Actions
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
501
Field-IQ diagnostics 19 Diagnostics
Message That Displays
The total number of rows assigned to sections (XX) exceeds the number of rows on the implement
(XX)
Press Continue to exit the
Field-IQ Setup or press Edit to edit the row assignments.
XX implement rows are not assigned to sections
Press Continue to exit the
Field-IQ Setup or press Edit to edit the row assignments.
The number of nozzles must not be less than the total number of sections.
Explanation
the Anhydrous Units type ("lbs.
Actual N" or "lbs. NH3") in the
Features tab.
This message may appear when you exit the Field-IQ Setup.
The total of the numbers in the fields in the Sections tab exceeds the number of rows configured in the Implement Setup.
This message may appear when you exit the Field-IQ Setup.
The total of the numbers in the fields in the Sections tab exceeds the number of rows configured in the Implement Setup.
This message could appear when you exit the Field-IQ
Setup.
The total number of sections in the Hardware tab exceeds the
Total Nozzles setting in the Rate tab. There must be at least as many nozzles as sections.
Some devices have not been identified by serial number.
None of the expected Field-
IQ system devices were found on the implement.
Do you want to switch to another implement configuration?
None of the configured
This message shows when you exit the Field-IQ Setup, if one or more of the serial number selection fields in the Hardware tab has no serial number selected.
The rate and/or section controllers that are identified in the current Field-IQ system configuration were not detected on the CAN bus.
The rate and/or section
Possible Causes/Actions
502
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
19 Diagnostics Field-IQ diagnostics
Message That Displays
Field IQ devices are connected.
Do you want to remove all of the missing devices from the Field IQ hardware configuration?
Explanation
controllers that are identified in the current Field\ IQ configuration were not detected on the CAN bus.
Fence nozzle is enabled The configured sections exceed the maximum that is supported
Please reduce the number of sections
If the left fence nozzle is enabled in the Sections tab of the Field
IQ Setup, the leftmost section controller must not have more than 11 sections.
If the right fence nozzle is enabled in the Sections tab of the Field-IQ Setup, the rightmost section controller must not have more than 11 sections.
Cannot flush because the system is not calibrated.
Rate and Section Control
Module and Rawson
Control Module can not be present at the same time.
Please disconnect either device before continuing setup.
Field-IQ has been disabled
Rate and Section Control
Module and Rawson
Control Module cannot be present at the same time.
Field-IQ has been disabled
One or more of the Field-IQ system devices requires calibration
Please enter a valid
This message appears if you try to use the Manual Flush button in the Tank/Bin tab of the Field-
IQ Setup when a rate controller is not yet calibrated.
When using multiple rate controllers for 1 material, they must all be of the same type.
When using multiple rate controllers for 1 material, they must all be of the same type.
The flow meter constant must
Possible Causes/Actions
Go to the calibration screen to calibrate a controller.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
503
Field-IQ diagnostics 19 Diagnostics
Message That Displays
flowmeter calibration constant
Weighed NH3 (End) must be less than Weighed NH3
(Start).
Explanation
be greater than zero.
This appears during anhydrous flow calibration.
The process requires you to enter the weighed amounts of
NH3 at the start and end of a run. If this warning appears, it is likely that you transposed the two amounts.
This will appear if you try to flush when the current target rate is zero.
No target rate
The flush cannot be performed until a target rate has been set
Please select a target rate
The calibration cannot be completed because the quantity dispensed is zero.
Press Edit to edit the quantity or Restart to restart the calibration.
Calibration Failed
The flow calibration was cancelled
Calibration Failed
No flow was detected
The granular flow calibration requires you to enter the amount that was dispensed.
This message shows if the entered amount was zero.
The granular calibration failed because you cancelled the calibration or an error occurred.
The granular flow calibration failed because there were no pulses reported from the shaft encoder.
Possible Causes/Actions
Check that the shaft turns during calibration.
Check the installation and wiring of the shaft encoder.
Calibration Failed
No material was dispensed
The selected target rate and speed cannot be achieved.
Reduce target speed or target rate.
The granular calibration failed because you entered zero for the actual amount of material dispensed.
This shows during granular calibration if the target rate and target speed that you entered require the shaft to turn faster than the maximum RPM that is set in the Limits tab in the flow
504
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
19 Diagnostics Field-IQ diagnostics
Message That Displays Explanation
The selected target rate and speed may not be achieved.
It is recommended that the target speed be increased.
calibration screen.
This shows during granular calibration if the target rate and target speed that you entered require the shaft to turn slower than the minimum RPM that is set in the Limits tab in the flow calibration screen.
If you choose to continue, the
Field-IQ system tries to run the system below the minimum
RPM limit.
The calibration constant changed significantly.
For best results it is recommended that the calibration be repeated.
Motor failed to start
This message shows at the end of the granular calibration process, if the calibration constant changed by more than
30%.
This message shows if the hydraulic motor fails to start during the Rawson Control
Module Hydraulic Test.
Motor stopped unexpectedly
The number of seeds dispensed did not match the number of seeds expected. Do you want to adjust the calibration constant in order to attain the target rate?
Adjusting the calibration constant will alter the seed spacing.
Calibration Failed
This message shows if the hydraulic motor stops unexpectedly during the Rawson
Control Module Hydraulic Test.
This message may appear during calibration of a Rawson Control
Module in a planter application.
If the calibration test does not dispense the expected number of seeds, it is likely that the seed pick up is not operating perfectly. You can adjust the calibration constant to compensate for this but the seed spacing will be inconsistent where seeds are missed or doubled up.
This message shows if the
Possible Causes/Actions
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
505
Field-IQ diagnostics 19 Diagnostics
Message That Displays
The motor failed to turn
Speed Too Low
The vehicle is moving too slow for safe anhydrous application. Increase the speed of the vehicle.
Explanation
hydraulic motor fails to turn during calibration of a Rawson
Control Module.
For safety reasons, the Field-IQ system will not apply anhydrous in auto rate control mode at speeds below 2 mph. Either increase the speed or switch to manual mode.
Possible Causes/Actions
Anhydrous Rate Control troubleshooting
Unable to open valve.
1. Check all for proper valve type in rate control setup.
2. NH3 will not operate unless vehicle is moving over 1.5 MPH.
If settings are correct:
1. Disconnect the tank from the system.
2. Set the system up as a liquid.
3. Check that system has control of the valve when in manual rate. (During this procedure a no flow detected warning may appear. This is normal as there is no flow going through the system)
4. For FM-1000 integrated display 6.5 and up. System will run in diagnostics. (Only attempt after trying the previous steps.)
If system will run in diagnostics:
1. Check color of sections in the run screen. If sections are red there is an issue.
a. Check that system is not outside a boundary (open a new field to test) b. Check that system is not over a previously applied area.
c. Check that system has a "fixed" GPS position.
2. Check that the material has not been disabled in the material detail screen.
Unable to reach target.
1. Check that system control components are sized properly.
2. See if the valve will open any further when set to manual rate. (if not, may be a tank or cooler limitation)
506
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
19 Diagnostics Field-IQ diagnostics
If system is sized properly for rate:
1. Check minimum and maximum flow settings.
2. Check that the flowmeter calibration is close to the number listed on the tag.
If settings check ok:
Check that control valve has been calibrated.
If PWM, check upper PWM limit under advanced parameters. May need to be set to 100%.
Rate fluctuates around target.
1. Check that a drive calibration has been performed.
2. Turn valve on and set rate switch to Manual to lock the valve.
3. If the rate still fluctuates check the flowmeter. (may be a cooler or a tank issue)
If the rate holds in manual, the valve needs to be tuned.
Any Implement Section Control troubleshooting
Section Control does not work.
1. Check that section control has been completely set up.
2. Check that switching type is set up properly. Boom valve Vs. air clutch
3. Check that auxiliary power and auxiliary I/O on the Field-IQ cables are connected. (if present)
If system is set up properly:
1. Run a flow calibration (catch test.) This will force the sections on and confirm that all cabling and connections are correct.
2. Operate the system in diagnostics. (FM-1000 Plus application only) Arm sections at bottom of the screen and perform a catch test.
If system works in diagnostics:
1. Check color of sections in the run screen. If sections are red there is an issue.
a. Check that system is not outside a boundary (open a new field to test) b. Check that system is not over a previously applied area.
c. Check that system has a "fixed" GPS position.
2. If sections are yellow, boom valves should be on but no flow is detected.
3. Check that the material has not been disabled in the material detail screen.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
507
Field-IQ diagnostics 19 Diagnostics
Section control timing is off.
1. Check that all implement and vehicle measurements are correct. (Do not guess. These measurements are crucial for an accurate application.)
2. Check that start and end overlaps have not been adjusted to take care of timing issues. (These settings are only used for intentional overlap!)
If sections are coming on too late or shutting off too late:
1. Check that start and end overlaps are set to the desired intentional overlap.
2. Raise the on latency to allow the section to turn on earlier.
3. Raise the off latency to allow the system to start turning off earlier. Typically these settings are no more than 5 seconds. If they are higher double check implement measurements.
If sections are coming on too early or shutting off too early:
1. Check that start and end overlaps are set to desired intentional overlap.
2. Lower the on latency if the system is turning on too soon.
3. Lower the off latency if the system is shutting off too soon.
4. If settings are set to 0 and system is still not accurate check implement measurements.
Any Implement Sensor troubleshooting
Erratic sensor readings.
1. Has sensor been calibrated?
2. Check that sensor is specified properly for the system.
3. Make sure the feedback voltage is in the right range. Pressure sensors are 0 to 5 V.
Erratic flowmeter / encoder readings.
1. Check all cabling and connections.
2. Check that the encoder constant is correct.
3. Check that there isn’t a rate control issue by setting the Rate to Manual to lock the valve.
4. Check that the meter is sized properly for the application.
5. Check that there is nothing mechanically wrong with the meter.
508
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
19 Diagnostics Field-IQ diagnostics
Lift switch won't calibrate.
1. Check that the switch is plugged in
2. Check that switch works. Use a volt meter to check continuity on the switch. One way it will be open the other way it will be a closed circuit.
Switch is functional.
1. Jump the A and B terminals at the module harness to bypass cabling. If this works check all cabling.
2. If previous test didn’t work set up a new implement. May be a bad module.
3. Check that the OEM harness is not supplying constant power to signal wire.
Planter Rate Control troubleshooting
Unable to turn motor.
1. Check valve type in Rate control set up.
2. Check that hydraulic motor is receiving flow.
3. Check that motor will pass a drive calibration (PWM) only.
4. Perform a hydraulics test (Rawson).
If the motor will run in the calibration screen, check the operation of the system in the Field-IQ diagnostics screen.
1. Enter a manual speed and turn all sections on.
2. Arm all sections at the bottom of the screen.
3. If equipped with an implement switch make sure it is calibrated and shows the implement in the running position.
If motor ran in diagnostics screen:
1. Check color of sections in the run screen. If sections are red there is an issue.
a. Check that system is not outside a boundary (open a new field to test) b. Check that system is not over a previously applied area.
c. Check that system has a "fixed" GPS position
2. Check that the material has not been disabled in the material detail screen.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
509
Field-IQ diagnostics 19 Diagnostics
Unable to reach target rate.
1. Check that maximum meter RPM has not been set to low. System defaults to 120 RPM
2. Rawson: Check that maximum motor RPM has been set to 300 RPM
3. Check Gear ratio and encoder constant (gear ratio needs to be figured from the encoder to the meter.)
4. Check info tab in the drive calibration screen. Make sure target rates and speeds are logical. If they are not this usually represents improper Field-IQ system set up.
If the settings check out okay:
1. Check that the control valve has been calibrated. If PWM, check upper PWM limit under advanced parameters. May need to be set to 100%.
2. Rawson: Check that the motor will reach 300 RPM in the hydraulic test. If it will and system still can’t reach rate check that the gear ratio will allow system to reach target rate. Formula on page.
If the rate fluctuates around the target:
1. Check that a drive calibration has been performed.
2. If population monitoring is on, disable it to see target rate of the motors. If system holds rate it is a seed monitoring issue.
Drive calibration is performed (PWM):
1. Check that motor(s) have sufficient hydraulic flow.
2. Raise the PWM base frequency to 200Hz. (if PWM valve is a raven set to 120hz)
Rawson:
1. Check that drive is running above 100 RPM. Adjust gear ratio to achieve proper RPM.
2. Isolate the drive from the seed shaft. Make sure the drive operates properly with no load.
No communication with seed sensors.
1. Check that the Auxiliary I/O connector is plugged in.
2. A power cycle must be performed every time a cable is plugged in. The system only looks for the sensors on boot up. If they are not present it won’t look for them until power is cycled.
3. Check that sensors are compatible with Field-IQ.
If the cables are connected:
510
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
19 Diagnostics Field-IQ diagnostics
1. Check for the right harness.
2. CT harness (John Deere) will always have pins 27 and 28 populated. These will be a power and a ground that provides 8 V to the sensors. DO NOT ASSUME YOUR JD PLANTER HAS A CT
HARNESS IT MAY HAVE BEEN RETROFITTED WITHA PM STYLE HARNESS.
3. PM harness. (Also referred to as a Dickey John or DJ harness. Typically on all planters but JD.)
These harnesses will have pins 24-27 populated. 24 and 25 are 8 V power. 26 and 27 are ground.
If you have the correct harness and have power to the sensor:
Check that all the sensors have 8 V power and 5 volt signal. If not this could represent a bad seed sensor harness.
Planter Seed Sensor troubleshooting
No communication with seed sensors.
1. Check that the Auxiliary I/O connector is plugged in.
2. A power cycle must be performed every time a cable is plugged in. The system only looks for the sensors on boot up. If they are not present it won’t look for them until power is cycled.
3. Check that sensors are compatible with Field-IQ.
If the cables are connected:
1. Check for the right harness.
2. CT harness (John Deere) will always have pins 27 and 28 populated. These will be a power and a ground that provides 8 V to the sensors. DO NOT ASSUME YOUR JD PLANTER HAS A CT
HARNESS IT MAY HAVE BEEN RETROFITTED WITHA PM STYLE HARNESS.
3. PM harness. (Also referred to as a Dickey John or DJ harness. Typically on all planters but JD.)
These harnesses will have pins 24-27 populated. 24 and 25 are 8 V power. 26 and 27 are ground.
If you have the correct harness and have power to the sensor:
Check that all the sensors have 8 V power and 5 volt signal. If not this could represent a bad seed sensor harness.
Sprayer/Liquid Strip Till Rate Control troubleshooting
Control valve will not open.
1. Check valve type in Rate control set up.
2. Check that hydraulic motor is receiving flow (PWM)(pump servo).
3. Check that the product pump is on and producing flow (Servo).
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
511
Field-IQ diagnostics 19 Diagnostics
For PWM:
1. Check that system will pass a drive calibration.
a. If not check that max flow setting has not been set too high. This setting is dependent of nozzle size. Refer to a tip chart.
b. If system still will not pass perform the calibration with no tips.
2. Sprayers with a pump arming relay:
Check that the pump arming relay is working by checking that the relay clicks on when the pump is armed. (there will be 12 V at terminal 85 on the relay)
For Servo:
1. Operate the valve in the drive settings screen.
2. Check that there is manual control of the valve in manual rate control. If there is no control check cabling.
3. If valve will work in manual, it may need to be calibrated to work in auto. See calibration procedure.
If the system ran in Diagnostics:
1. Check color of sections in the run screen. If sections are red there is an issue.
a. Check that system is not outside a boundary (open a new field to test) b. Check that system is not over a previously applied area.
c. Check that system has a "fixed" GPS position.
2. Check that the material has not been disabled in the material detail screen.
Unable to reach target rate.
If unable to reach target:
1. Check that system control components are sized properly.
2. Check that nozzles are sized properly for sprayer.
3. See if the valve will open any further when set to manual rate. (if not may be a pump issue)
If system is sized properly for rate:
1. Check minimum and maximum flow settings.
2. Check that the flowmeter calibration is close to the number listed on the tag.
If settings check ok:
Check that control valve has been calibrated.
If PWM, check upper PWM limit under advanced parameters. May need to be set to 100%.
512
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
19 Diagnostics Field-IQ diagnostics
Rate fluctuates around target.
1. Check that a drive calibration has been performed.
2. Check that tips/orifices are sized appropriately for the system.
For PWM / Servo systems:
1. You may need to manually tune the valve.
2. Set valve to manual rate. With the rate in manual the valve should be "locked". If the rate still fluctuates check the pump and the flowmeter.
For Rawson:
1. Check that the drive is running above 100 RPM.
2. Isolate the drive from the pump. Make sure the drive operates properly with no load.
Spreader Rate Control troubleshooting
Unable to turn motor.
1. Check valve type in Rate control set up.
2. Check that hydraulic motor is receiving flow.
3. Check that motor will pass a drive calibration (PWM) only.
4. Perform a hydraulics test (Rawson).
If the motor will run in the calibration screen, check the operation of the system in the Field-IQ diagnostics screen.
1. Enter a manual speed and turn all sections on.
2. Arm all sections at the bottom of the screen.
3. If equipped with an implement switch make sure it is calibrated and shows the implement in the running position.
If motor ran in diagnostics screen:
1. Check color of sections in the run screen. If sections are red there is an issue.
a. Check that system is not outside a boundary (open a new field to test) b. Check that system is not over a previously applied area.
c. Check that system has a "fixed" GPS position
2. Check that the material has not been disabled in the material detail screen.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
513
FieldLevel II diagnostics valve test 19 Diagnostics
Rate fluctuates around target.
1. Check that a drive calibration has been performed.
2. Set the Rate to Manual. With the drive "locked" the drive should be running steady. If the rate is still fluctuating check the encoder.
If drive calibration is performed, check that motor(s) have sufficient hydraulic flow.
For Rawson:
1. Check that drive is running above 100 RPM. Adjust gate height to achieve proper RPM.
2. Isolate the drive from the shaft if possible (try to minimize the load on the drive.) Make sure the drive operates properly with little or no load.
FieldLevel II diagnostics valve test
1. At the Home screen, tap .
2. At the Configuration screen, tap
FieldLevel II and then tap
Diagnostics
.
3. You can test valve functionality at any time at this screen without the need for a GPS position or an active field design open by either tapping: l
Auto: To engage the system (this sets the current elevation as Target Height = 0.0) and tests its response as height offsets are added or subtracted from the current elevation, based upon the current coarse offset entered into the system l
Up or Down: To manually stroke the valve to 100% command in the required direction to verify valve performance and wiring accuracy
GPS status
1. At the Home screen, tap
.
2. At the Configuration screen, tap
GPS Receiver and then tap
Diagnostics
. The GPS Status screen. Use this screen to check that the GPS receiver is outputting the expected data.
To analyze the GPS signal, see
to view raw serial data.
GreenSeeker diagnostics
The GreenSeeker Diagnostics screen reports on the quantity of sensors detected on system and any error conditions.
514
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
19 Diagnostics Row-Guidance diagnostics
1. At the Home screen, tap
.
2. At the Configuration screen, tap
GreenSeeker and then tap
Diagnostics
. The GreenSeeker
Diagnostics screen displays.
The hardware and firmware version information at the top of the diagnostics screen indicates the
FM-1000 Plus application and RT200 are communicating.
Incorrect data
The RT200 system monitors the sensors for proper operation, and if a sensor reports incorrect data, the data is not included in the rate control calculation. Incorrect data can come from mud on the sensor lenses, sensors viewing concrete, snow, wet asphalt, or other non soil or non plant surface.
-5
-9
-3
-4
Error
-1
-2
Error conditions
Error conditions include sensors disconnected from the CAN bus, or a sensor transmitting invalid data.
Invalid data could occur if the sensor malfunctions, or more commonly, if it is seeing a target other than plants and soil.
For example, when setting up the system, the sensors may be pointed into the air or against wet asphalt. Either of these conditions will likely generate an error code from a sensor.
Code
Red > NIR
BOTH < .01
RED < .01
NIR < .01
BOTH > .98
NIR < .015
Explanation
Red reflectance higher than NIR
Both reflectances are below 0.01
Red reflectance below 0.01
NIR reflectance below 0.01
Either reflectance above 0.98
NIR net reflectance below 0.15
Row-Guidance diagnostics
1. At the Home screen, tap
.
2. At the Configuration screen, tap
Row Guidance and then tap
Diagnostics
.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
515
Row-Guidance diagnostics
Item
Offline Distance
Status
Enable
/
Disable
Voltage
Voltage status
Explanation
Status of the sensor
Tap to enable or disable sensors
Voltage for the left and right sensor
Status for the left and right sensor
19 Diagnostics
516
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
19 Diagnostics Vehicle Sync diagnostics
Vehicle Sync diagnostics
1. At the Home screen, tap
.
2. At the Configuration screen, tap
Diagnostics screen displays.
Vehicle Sync
3. Check the signal quality for the WiFi connection.
and then tap
Diagnostics
. The Vehicle Sync
4. View the other vehicles that are on the selected channel.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
517
Yield Monitoring diagnostics 19 Diagnostics
Yield Monitoring diagnostics
1. At the Home screen, tap
.
2. At the Configuration screen, tap
Yield Monitoring and then tap
Diagnostics
. The Yield
Monitoring Diagnostics screen displays.
Status tab
The
Status tab includes information on the optical and moisture sensors.
Optical Sensor Item Explanation
Noise level
Indicates how clean the optical sensor signal is and if the noise level is too high.
This number should be less than 30% for best performance. If larger values are seen, check the following:
Elevator speed
Percent Dark l
Optical sensor interference l
Worn paddles l
Optical sensors protruding too far into the chamber l
Installation in the wrong location (too low on elevator).
Frequency of paddles, typically 15 Hz to 20 Hz l l
Unusually low numbers: Indicate the system is not seeing the paddles
This most likely occurs when running empty. Inspect the optical sensor installation.
Unusually high numbers: Typically be accompanied by large noise levels
Inspect the optical sensor installation.
The duty cycle.
This data can be used to determine if you are close to exceeding the capacity of the combine.
518
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
19 Diagnostics Yield Monitoring diagnostics
Moisture Sensor Item Explanation
Sensor Value
Percent of moisture and the raw sensor value
Can be used by support or engineering if troubleshooting is necessary.
Temperature
Yield Monitor error messages
State 1 - During boot up
Cause
60 Series
Moisture unit
Head unit
Armrest unit
70 Series
Moisture sensor
CC1 unit
Cab unit
Corner post
YM 2000
Cannot detect YM
2000
Serial port
Actions
1. Ensure that the correct cable is installed.
2. Ensure the FM-1000 Plus application is communicating with the CAN bus (system / diagnostics / serial port / Port A/B). Is there another value other than zero for CAN messages?
3. For 60 Series Combines: Check if Crop Type will change on the
Greenstar display after Crop Type on the FM-1000 Plus application has been changed.
4. For 70 Series Combines: Change the Crop Type in the command center and make sure it changes on the FM-1000 Plus application.
5. Raise the head up or down to see if the FM-1000 Plus application will show a change for header height.
6. If step 1 and step 2 resolve the issue, log field data.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
519
Yield Monitoring diagnostics 19 Diagnostics
State 2 - During boot up
Cause
Never sees the armrest, header unit, moisture sensor, or reports which one is not visible by the FM-
1000 Plus application.
Actions
1. Ensure the FM-1000 Plus application is communicating with the CAN bus (system / diagnostics / serial port / Port A/B). Is there another value other than zero for CAN messages?
2. For 60 Series Combines: Make sure Moisture Sensor has version
1.20C loaded.
3. For 60 Series Combines: Check if Crop Type will change on the
Greenstar display after Crop Type on the FM-1000 Plus application has been changed.
4. For 70 Series Combines: Change the crop type in the command center and make sure it changes on the FM-1000 Plus application.
5. Raise head up or down to see if the FM-1000 Plus application shows a change for header height.
State 3 - During boot up
Cause
Will show which controller is not visible (armrest, header unit, moisture sensor).
Actions
1. Ensure the FM-1000 Plus application is communicating with the CAN bus (system / diagnostics / serial port / Port A/B). Is there another value other than zero for CAN messages?
2. For 60 Series Combines: Make sure Moisture Sensor has version 1.20C
loaded.
3. For 60 Series Combines: Check if Crop Type will change on the
Greenstar display after Crop Type on the FM-1000 Plus application has been changed.
4. For 70 Series Combines: Change the crop type in the command center and make sure it changes on the FM-1000 Plus application.
5. Raise head up or down to see if the FM-1000 Plus application shows a change for header height.
520
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
19 Diagnostics Yield Monitoring diagnostics
State 4
Cause
Display has lost communication with the CAN bus.
Actions
1. Check cabling.
2. Recycle power (power down the display and the combine and wait
20 seconds before powering the display and the combine back up).
3. Make sure other logging devices are not connected to the CAN bus
(disconnect Mobile Processor or GS2 display).
Yield Monitor troubleshooting
The FM-1000 Plus application is not mapping.
1. Make sure the display Header Height setting is lower than John Deere's setting.
2. Ensure that the crop type is the same.
3. The machine must be in normal harvesting operation mode.
The FM-1000 Plus application stops mapping periodically through the field.
Cause: The header could be raising and lowering past the setting for Stop Logging Header Height.
Action: Increase the Header Height setting on the FM-1000 Plus application.
FM-1000 Plus application yield information does not match John Deere's information.
Cause: Different crop types may be selected.
Action: Verify the crop types match in both displays.
The display shows a major jump or extremely different weight values from those shown on the John Deere monitor.
Cause: The Stop Head Height setting is lower than what the John Deere monitor shows. The John
Deere monitor could be logging more data than the FM-1000 Plus application logs, therefore showing a larger value.
Action: Set the Head Height to 100% on the John Deere display.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
521
Yield Monitoring diagnostics 19 Diagnostics
Yield Monitoring warning messages
Warning message
Unable to calibrate yield monitor.
Invalid selection. Please select one of the calibration types below this item.
No Connection. Please check connections.
Explanation
Occurs when tare calibration fails.
The user clicked on the wrong line in the Yield
Monitor Calibration menu.
User attempted to calibrate a device that is not connected.
Failed to detect yield sensor!!!
Yield sensor has not uploaded configuration into FmX.
Trimble Yield Monitor not found—check cabling and fuses—check Yield Monitor Setup.
Trimble Moisture Sensor not found—check cabling and fuses—check Yield Monitor Setup.
One or more Yield Monitor devices were disconnected.
Some setup parameters cannot be edited because the yield monitor is not connected.
Some setup parameters cannot be edited because they have not been received from the yield monitor.
Yield monitor not detected.
Moisture sensor not detected.
A device has been disconnected.
Bad reading received from moisture sensor.
Moisture out of range. Check the sensor is positioned properly and not being struck by paddles, and there is no free water or wet soil on sensor surface.
The label cannot be oriented along the same axis as the connectors.
Choose the options that match the Trimble
Yield Monitor’s mounting orientation.
Would you like to calibrate the roll sensor?
For accurate Roll Offset calibration you must turn the vehicle around.
Please select one or more loads to use for calibration. Tap the check mark to select a load.
Would you like to apply the calibration to the current field?
Invalid selection in IMU sensor orientation setup.
Attempting to perform roll calibration before setting a valid orientation.
User did not turn the vehicle around for second step of roll calibration.
Attempted to run load calibration with no loads selected.
522
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
19 Diagnostics Yield Monitoring diagnostics
Warning message
Current field is successfully recalibrated.
Explanation
Unable to recalibrate current field.
Calibration was unable to be applied to field, possibly due to invalid data in field.
User tapped
Reset
in a calibration screen.
The calibration will be cleared. Are you sure you want to do this?
The yield sensor calibration has been reset.
User confirmed yield calibration reset.
The moisture sensor calibration has been reset.
User confirmed moisture calibration reset.
User confirmed temperature calibration reset.
The temperature sensor calibration has been reset.
No load information is available. You must record some data by harvesting some crop before you can run this calibration.
This load is too small to be used for calibration or contains invalid data.
Optical sensor is not responding.
There are no loads for the current crop type.
The load data is not valid for calibration, usually because the load is too small.
Optical sensor failed to respond during tare calibration.
Displayed in load details dialog if there are no loads for the current crop type.
No loads have been recorded. Use the 'New
Load' button on the map screen to record a load.
This load cannot be deleted because it is used in the yield calibration.
This load cannot be deleted because it is used in the moisture calibration.
Loads that were used for the current yield calibration cannot be deleted.
Loads that were used for the current moisture calibration cannot be deleted.
Loads cannot be recorded when there is no field open.
You have chosen to delete some loads. Are you sure you want to do this?
The system is not yet ready to delete fields or events.
Occurs when tapping
New Load
in the diagnostic screen if no field is open.
User tapped
OK
after selecting loads for deletion in Load Details screen
The FM-1000 Plus application needs some time to determine whether deletion of the field/event would remove a load that was used for calibration. Try again later.
Accepting the new test weight will affect the current calibration.
The average moisture will be reset to the Manual moisture will cause the average to be
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
523
Yield Monitoring diagnostics 19 Diagnostics
Warning message
manually entered moisture setting.
Do you want to reset average moisture and recalculate dry yield?
Closing this field will cause your current load being recorded to be automatically finished.
Would you like to clean out the moisture sensor?
Would you like to begin a new load? The Test
Weight for the new load is XXXXX.
What would you like to do? End Load, ends the current Load. Cancel, continue with the current
Load. New Load, closes this Load and starts another Load.
This operation will delete one or more loads that were used in the most recent yield or moisture calibration. These loads will not be available for use in any future recalibration.
CLAAS YIELD MONITOR: WARNING.
Uninitialized.
Explanation
reset.
Requesting confirmation when setting manual moisture.
The user has chosen to close the field before ending the load.
The FM-1000 Plus application offers to clean out the Trimble moisture sensor when shutting down.
User tapped
New Load
and New/End Load
Confirmation is enabled in setup.
User tapped
End Load
and New/End Load
Confirmation is enabled in setup.
User is deleting a client, farm, field or event that contains one or more loads that were used in the current calibration.
CLAAS YIELD MONITOR: WARNING. Cannot configure CAN port.
CLAAS YIELD MONITOR: WARNING. Cannot detect the CLAAS CAN bus.
CLAAS YIELD MONITOR: WARNING. Cannot configured Yield Monitoring.
Error in communication with Claas yield monitor.
Error in communication with Claas yield monitor.
Error in communication with Claas yield monitor.
Error in communication with Claas yield monitor.
CLAAS YIELD MONITOR: WARNING. Lost CAN communications.
Error in communication with Claas yield monitor.
CLAAS YIELD MONITOR: WARNING. Error state.
Error in communication with Claas yield monitor.
CLAAS YIELD MONITOR: WARNING. Head configuration differs between the FmX and
CEBIS.
YIELD MONITOR: CAN bus error (state#XX).
Failed to detect the following device(s):-…..
The implement width in the FM-1000 Plus application setup must be set to match the width that was set in the Claas yield monitor.
John Deere moisture sensor, head unit or armrest unit not detected. Check port
524
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
19 Diagnostics Yield Monitoring diagnostics
Warning message
YIELD MONITOR: CAN bus error (state#XX).
Explanation
selection.
Unknown error when communicating with John
Deere yield monitor.
YIELD MONITOR: Failed to update crop type!!!
Unable to set grain type in John Deere yield monitor. Probable communication error.
Lost connection with John Deere yield monitor.
YIELD MONITOR: Configuration Error
(state#XX). Verify the FmX is connected to the
CAN bus and CAN bus/combine series configuration.
Trimble moisture sensor connection error.
YIELD MONITOR: Moisture sensor is not connected
YIELD MONITOR: Temperature sensor is reporting values outside of a valid range
YIELD MONITOR: Field changed on YM2000.
Verify that the Crop type is not inadvertently changed on YM2000
YIELD MONITOR: Load changed on YM2000.
Verify that the crop type is not inadvertently changed on YM2000.
YIELD MONITOR: Cannot Detect YM2000 Serial
Port (state#XX) !!!
Bad reading received from temperature sensor.
YM2000 reported a "field" error.
YM2000 reported a "load" error.
Lost connection with YM2000 yield monitor.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
525
Yield Monitoring diagnostics 19 Diagnostics
526
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
Chapter
20
Glossary
A
A+ line
A guidance line you define on your field. The A+ line is defined fixing a point, then heading in a direction.
Guidance lines are for use with automated steering.
AB line
A guidance line you define on your field. You set a beginning point (A) and an end point (B). You use guidance lines for use with automated steering.
Accelerometer
A device that measures non-gravitational acceleration.
Access path
A space between your guidance lines. They can be useful if there is road (or other field feature that breaks the consistent flow of swaths) through the middle of your field.
Aggressiveness
The measure of how strongly the system makes steering changes.
Autonomous GNSS positioning
Autonomous GNSS positioning uses no corrections. The rover receiver calculates its position using only the GNSS signals it receives. This method does not have high absolute accuracy, but the relative accuracy is comparable to the other methods.
RTK GNSS positioning uses the RTK positioning method to achieve centimeter-level accuracy. To use the
RTK method, you must first set up a base station. The base station uses a radio link to broadcast RTK corrections to one or more rover receivers.
B
Benchmark
A point on the field with GPS coordinates assigned to it.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
527
C 20 Glossary
Blade height
Current height of the blade shown as a relative height or a GPS height depending on settings selected.
Boot depth
Depth of the boot when installing tiles or the depth of the blade when cleaning surface ditches.
Boundary
A line indicating the border surrounding a field.
C
CenterPoint™ RTK for radio
Positioning correction service for radio communication systems. Requires access to a base station located within a eight-mile radius (approximately) from your farm. An RTK base station sends corrections via a radio transmitter to a mobile receiver attached to your vehicle. Works well for farms within 8 miles of an established RTK base station or base station network, without line-ofsight obstructions such hilly terrain or an abundance of trees.
CenterPoint™ RTX™
Positioning correction service for satellite communication systems. Delivers GPS or GNSS enabled corrections via satellite directly to your receiver. Does not require a base station or cellular data plan. CenterPoint RTX corrections are provided on as subscription basis.
CenterPoint RTX for cellular
Positioning correction service for cellular communications. Delivers corrections via cellular network directly to your receiver. Requires a cellular data plan.
CenterPoint™ VRS™
Virtual reference station. Positioning correction service for cellular communication systems. Enables
RTK (Real-Time Kinetic) corrections over a large geographic area where robust cellular data coverage is available. Provides high accuracy for guidance applications throughout the whole coverage area.
Requires a cellular data plan. Uses a cellular communication modem, such as the DCM-300 or
Ag3000. Relies on CORS.
Clean grain elevator
After grain has been separated from the rest of the plant, the clean grain auger moves the grain from the separator to the grain bin.
Client
The customer for whom the work is being done.
Composite slope
The true angle of the fall of the design. In other words, the angle of the slope when two slope angles are combined.
Controller orientation
Correctly associate the outputs of the Autopilot controller sensors with the direction of the vehicle.
Correction age
Time since the last GPS correction was received.
528
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
20 Glossary D
Correction service
A service which provides corrections to create a higher GPS accuracy.
CORS network
Continuously Operating Reference Station. A network of GPS/GNSS reference stations situated within the coverage area to transmit RTK (Real-Time Kinetic) corrections to the cellular modem. The distance between the reference stations and the modem on the vehicle does not affect accuracy.
CORS works well in areas with spotty RTK radio tower coverage.
Curved line
A guidance line you define on your field. You begin recording and drive until you are at the end of the curved line or segment, then stop recording. Guidance lines are for use with automated steering.
Cut
A point on the field where dirt needs to be removed. A cut occurs when the existing field is higher than the proposed field surface.
Cut/Fill ratio
Difference between the blade height (1) and the target height (4):
When cut (dirt to be removed) is displayed, the current ground is above the target. The height indicator arrow turns red and points down, which means that the blade needs to move down to reach the target height.
When fill (dirt to be replaced) is displayed, the current ground is below the target. The height indicator arrow turns red and points up, which means that the blade needs to move up to reach the target height.
D
Data Dictionary
A set of data that contains categories for entry data when you are setting up client, farm, field and event.
Design height
The height of the land called for in a design.
Design slope
The slope of the land called for in a design.
DGNSS
Differential GNSS positioning. The GNSS receiver uses corrections from WAAS/EGNOS satellites or from OmniSTAR HP, XP, G2, or VBS satellites. These differential systems use special algorithms to provide differential corrections that allow the rover receiver to calculate its position more accurately. Not all corrections services support the use of GLONASS satellites in their solution.
DGPS
Differentially corrected Global Positioning System (GPS).
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
529
E 20 Glossary
E
EGNOS
European Geostationary Navigation Overlay Service. An
operated by the European Space
Agency.
Event
A precision agriculture activity on a particular field. For example: planting seed, applying fertilizer or lime, or spraying with fungicide, herbicide or insecticide.
F
Farm
A collection of fields.
Field
Settings created in the FM-1000 Plus application to represent an actual field, one or more parts of an actual field, or a group of two or more fields. Field profiles include guidance lines for steering, pivot patterns and landmarks.
Fill
A point on the field where dirt must be added. A fill occurs when the existing field is lower than the proposed field surface.
Freeplay
Movement in the steering linkage through which a movement of the steering wheel will cause no change in wheel angle.
Freeplay offset
A value entered to give the control system a way to account for freeplay during guidance.
G
GDD
Growing Degree Days. A measurement of heat units since planting above a prescribed base temperature.
GLONASS
A Russian space-based satellite navigation system.
GNSS
Global Navigation Satellite System. A system of GPS US and Russian satellites that provide information about geo-spatial positioning. A GNSS receiver can determine its longitude, latitude and altitude. In the future, GNSS will also use Chinese GPS satellites.
530
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
20 Glossary H
GPS
Global Positioning System. A space-based satellite navigation system. A GPS receiver can determine its position by using GPS satellites.
GPS autonomous positioning
A mode of operation in which a GPS receiver computes position fixes in real time from satellite data alone, without reference to data supplied by a base station. Autonomous positioning is the least precise positioning procedure a GPS receiver can perform, yielding position fixes that are precise to
±100 meters.
H
HDOP
The horizontal component of
.
Header height
A sensor that indicates the position of the head.
I
IMD
Inertial Measurement Device.
IMEI
International Mobile Station Equipment Identity. A number to identify mobile equipment. The GSM network uses this number to identify valid devices. The IMEI number has no relationship to the subscriber.
Implement steering
A system that actively steers the implement being towed by a vehicle.
IMU
Inertial Measurement Unit. An electronic device that measures and reports on a vehicle's velocity, orientation, and gravitational forces, using a combination of accelerometers and gyroscopes.
Integrated radio
Trimble integrated radios contain a radio antenna integrated with the GNSS receiver or display in a single unit. These integrated radios receive corrections transmitted by Trimble GNSS RTK base stations.
L
Logging
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
531
M 20 Glossary
Also called coverage logging. Logging records the area that you have covered when you carry out an operation, for example applying fertilizer to a field.
License
A license enables a software feature, and is valid for an unlimited duration. A license does not need to be activated, but does need to be assigned to and delivered to a specific display. Assignment and delivery of a license occurs on the reseller portal.
M
Manual override
Required for platforms that employ a pressure transducer for the manual override function. Change the default only if the operation of the manual override function is unacceptable
Master benchmark
Before you can create a survey, you must set at least one point at a known location called a benchmark. When you create a benchmark, the GPS receiver obtains and records location information from the base station for that specific point in your field. The first benchmark you create on a field is the master benchmark and displays as an orange flag labeled MB. Field coordinates are calculated from this point.
Material
A product that is controlled by a PWM valve, Servo valve, or Rawson drive. You can use a planter
(seed), liquid, granular seed and granular fertilizer, all of which have different setup parameters.
Multipath error
An error caused by the interference of the same signal reaching the receiver by two different paths: once via the direct path, and once via a reflection. A major cause of GPS errors.
N
NDVI
Normalized Difference Vegetative Index. Commonly used to measure plant health and vigor. NDVI =
(NIR_reflected Red_reflected)/(NIR_reflected + Red_reflected).
NMEA standard
An electrical, hardware and data standard designed by the National Marine Electronics Association that dictates the content and format of communication between GPS receivers and other devices.
NMEA messages include data that provides location and accuracy, the number of satellites being used, the dilution of precision and signal strength.
NEU
Nitrogen Use Efficiency. A percentage of nitrogen taken up by the plant. For example, an NUE of 60% means that 6 lbs. of nitrogen fertilizer is expected to be used by the plant that year for every 10 lbs.
applied. For more information, visit www.nue.okstate.edu
.
532
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
20 Glossary O
NRS
Nitrogen Rich Strip. An area for determining the amount of nitrogen being made available to the plant by the environment (mineralization, etc), and importantly this year's expected maximum yield potential and response to additional nitrogen.
O
OEM moisture sensor
Moisture sensor installed by the combine manufacturer.
Offset
Difference between design height and target height. By using the offset buttons, you can create a plane that is parallel to the original design.
P
Parity
When used with a serial port, an extra data bit is sent with each data character to detect errors in transmission.
PDOP
Position Dilution of Precision. A calculation that takes into account the satellites that can be seen, how high they are and their bearing. The outcome of the calculation is an estimation of how prone to error your GPS position is. The lower the value, the more accurate your position. You may wish to plan your field work for periods of low PDOP. Generally, the more satellites in view, the better
(lower) the PDOP.
Pivot
A guidance pattern you define for your field by recording the outer circular boundary of the pivot area and then entering a value to compute the rows within the pivot. Guidance patterns are for use with automated steering.
R
RangePoint™ RTX™
Positioning service for satellite communication systems. RangePoint RTX works with a built-in GNSS receiver. Does not require a base station or cellular data plan.
Rate switch for Field-IQ
Used to select Preset Rate 1, Preset Rate 2, or Manual Rate Control.
Real Time Kinematic (RTK)
A navigation technique to improve the information received from satellite-based positioning systems. Used with GPS, GLONASS and Galileo.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
533
S 20 Glossary
RI
Response Index. An indication of how the crop will respond this season to additional nitrogen.
Roll correction
Compensates for antenna height and static roll caused by minor variations in the navigation controller and the mounting of the GPS receiver.
Row
The individual row unit which seed comes from on the planter. This can be controlled individually as a single row section, or as a group with other rows in a multiple row section.
Run screen
The screen where you perform field activities.
S
SBAS
Space Based Augmentation System. A system of Earth-based systems at points surveyed for location accuracy that measure satellites, signals and factors that can impact the signals. The SBAS then broadcasts corrections to satellite signals to improve accuracy.
Scintillation
Causes extreme fluctuations in signals that are received. Scintillation can be caused by turbulence that creates air pockets with different temperatures and densities.
Section
A number of rows or spray nozzles that are controlled by existing shut-off valve, Tru Count air clutches, or Tru Count LiquiBlock valves. A section can have either a single row/nozzle or multiple rows/nozzles depending on how the system is set up.
Section Control Module
Controls 12 sections/rows per module with up to 4 modules (48 module sections / rows).
Service
A service is a subscription to an application that lasts for a specific amount of time, such as one or two years. You associate a service with a specific display that can be delivered wirelessly, through a
QR code included in an email or through download to a computer.
Signal Input Module
The signal input module (SIM) can interface with existing equipment inputs to control on-screen buttons and features.
Singulation
The percentage of time an individual seed is placed for every intended drop.
Slew time
The amount of time that the front wheels take to move from the far left to the far right position and back.
Slope heading
The heading direction of the slope.
Steering deadzone
534
FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A
20 Glossary T
The amount of pressure that the system must apply to the hydraulics before the wheels begin to turn.
Stop bit
A bit sent at the end of every character to enable the detection of the end of the character. Then the hardware can synchronize again with the character stream.
T
TAP
Tuning parameter for guidance algorithms.
Target height
Height on the target plane that the blade will attempt to reach. This is the design height (6) ± the offset (5). When the blade reaches the target height, the height indicator arrow turns green.
V
VDOP
A measurement of the vertical
VI
Vegetation Index. A value that is calculated (or derived) from sets of remotely-sensed data used to quantify plant health, stress, and vigor.
VRA
Variable Rate Application. The rate of fertilizer or other chemical applied, based on information supplied to a rate controller.
W
Wheelbase
The distance between the front and rear axles. On tracked vehicles, the wheelbase is exactly half the length of the track.
Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide
535
advertisement
* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project
Related manuals
advertisement
Table of contents
- 10 Warnings
- 13 Cautions
- 14 Working with anhydrous ammonia
- 30 About the FM-1000 Plus application
- 30 Optional features
- 30 Compatibility
- 31 Installation
- 31 Supported features
- 32 Changes to this document
- 34 Display power on/off
- 34 Automatic power on
- 34 Manual power on
- 34 Automatic power off
- 35 Manual power off
- 36 Touch screen basics
- 36 Interactive controls
- 37 Cleaning the touch screen
- 38 Main screens
- 39 Launcher screen
- 39 Interruption of services
- 39 Application menu button
- 40 Home screen
- 41 Configuration Selection screen
- 43 Field Selection screen
- 44 Configuration screen
- 45 Run screen
- 46 On-screen user guide
- 47 System bar
- 47 Navigation buttons
- 47 Emergency button
- 47 Screenshot
- 48 Optional features/plugins
- 48 Vehicle guidance
- 48 Features for application
- 48 ISOBUS
- 49 Implement control
- 49 Connectivity
- 49 Water Management
- 49 Harvest
- 50 Screen shots
- 51 FM-1000 Plus application Passwords
- 51 Access password
- 51 Change administration password
- 54 Settings
- 54 FM-1000 Plus application-specific settings
- 54 FM-1000 Plus application and display settings
- 54 Display-specific settings
- 55 Upgrades and unlocks
- 56 Unlocks and upgrades
- 56 Firmware upgrades
- 56 USB upgrades
- 57 Wireless upgrades
- 59 Feature unlocks
- 59 Manual code entry
- 59 QR code scan
- 59 Check for unlocks
- 60 Activate features/plugins for use
- 61 FM-1000 Plus application settings
- 62 Data dictionary
- 63 Data Files
- 64 EZ‑Remote Joystick
- 65 Field feature mapping settings
- 66 Guidance settings
- 67 Language, measurements, keyboard layout
- 68 Lightbar settings
- 70 Map settings
- 74 Port settings
- 75 Configuration principles
- 76 Restore default settings
- 77 Signal input module for OEM switch
- 78 Sounds
- 79 Status items
- 91 Display settings
- 91 Access display settings
- 91 Shortcut
- 91 Launcher screen
- 91 Date and time settings
- 92 Languages and units settings for display
- 93 Users and passwords
- 93 Add a user
- 93 Take a photo of a user
- 94 Wi-Fi settings
- 94 Restore defaults
- 94 Admin User Options
- 96 Managing data
- 96 Transfer data
- 96 Data Files screen
- 99 Delete data
- 101 Data storage structure
- 101 AB Lines folder
- 102 Archives folder
- 102 Autopilot folder
- 102 Data folder
- 109 Data Dictionary folder
- 109 Diagnostics folder
- 110 Prescriptions folder
- 110 Summaries folder
- 112 Task Data folder
- 112 Data Dictionary categories
- 112 Default data entry categories
- 112 Edit data entry categories
- 113 Create / load a data dictionary
- 116 GPS receiver settings
- 117 AgRemote Interface
- 118 Basic correction settings
- 119 CenterPoint RTK
- 121 CenterPoint RTX US or EU (fs)
- 123 CenterPoint RTX (sc)
- 124 CenterPoint RTX (ss)
- 126 OmniSTAR HP/XP/G2 - VBS
- 128 OmniSTAR HP/XP/G2
- 130 OmniSTAR VBS
- 131 RangePoint RTX
- 132 Frequencies and baud rate
- 133 GPS output settings
- 133 CAN GPS messages
- 134 Serial NMEA messages
- 135 NMEA messages
- 136 Remote Output setup
- 136 Remote Output settings
- 139 Calibrate implement lead time
- 142 Serial Data Input
- 143 Ag3000 modem
- 143 Modem activation
- 143 Modem setup
- 144 DCM-300 Modem
- 144 Unlock the modem
- 144 Service activation
- 145 Modem setup
- 148 Field feature mapping settings
- 148 Access Feature Mapping settings
- 148 Assign feature buttons
- 149 Create a field feature
- 149 Edit a field feature
- 150 Mapping location setting
- 151 Recording with coverage
- 151 Field area feature settings
- 152 Line feature settings
- 152 Boundary feature settings
- 154 Point feature settings
- 156 Implement setup
- 157 Create an implement
- 157 Select an implement
- 158 Import an implement
- 158 Edit implement settings
- 158 Implement Type
- 159 Measurements
- 159 Geometry
- 160 Overlap
- 160 Switches
- 160 Delete an implement
- 162 Guidance settings
- 162 Manual guidance
- 164 Autopilot system
- 164 Begin setup
- 169 Autopilot calibration
- 185 Row Guidance
- 186 Save vehicle profile
- 188 OnSwath settings
- 189 NextSwath settings
- 189 Requirements
- 190 Restrictions
- 190 Automatic turn settings
- 194 Automated headlands management settings
- 199 EZ-Pilot assisted steering system
- 199 Vehicle settings for EZ-Pilot system
- 200 Steering settings for EZ-Pilot system
- 201 Engage settings for EZ-Pilot system
- 202 EZ-Pilot system calibration
- 205 EZ-Steer assisted steering system
- 206 Engage settings for EZ-Steer
- 206 Advanced settings for EZ-Pilot
- 208 EZ-Steer system calibration
- 212 Field-IQ system functionality
- 214 Pressure limiting
- 214 Flow control
- 214 Pressure limiting
- 215 Setup
- 215 General setup information
- 215 Implement setup for Field-IQ
- 218 Field-IQ system setup
- 219 Material setup
- 219 Alarms tab
- 220 Operation tab
- 221 Coefficent tab
- 222 Control setup
- 222 Material tab
- 224 Layout
- 225 Section Control tab
- 226 Material linking
- 227 Automatic Section Control
- 230 Rate Control tab
- 232 Rate control module setup
- 232 Section Widths screen
- 233 Drive Setup screen
- 237 Row monitoring
- 237 Sensor tab
- 239 Equipment calibration for Field-IQ
- 239 Air Seeder calibration
- 240 Anhydrous calibration
- 242 Planter calibration
- 246 Sprayer calibration
- 251 Spreader calibration
- 258 GreenSeeker functionality
- 258 Care and maintenance
- 259 Field preparations for nitrogen application
- 260 Field setup
- 261 Field preparations for user defined rate
- 261 Field calibration
- 261 Delivery system and liquid control
- 262 Select a nozzle
- 264 ISOBUS settings
- 264 Virtual Terminal setup
- 264 Task Controller setup
- 265 GPS output settings
- 266 Equipment setup
- 270 Supported variable rate controllers
- 271 Variable rate controller setup
- 272 Amazone Amatron +
- 272 Bogballe Calibrator
- 272 Flex-Air setup
- 273 Hardi 5500 and 6500
- 274 LH5000
- 274 Raven
- 276 Rawson and New Leader
- 277 Vaderstad Control Station
- 277 Additional controller setup
- 278 Alarms
- 278 Coverage mapping
- 278 Prescriptions
- 278 Target and applied rates
- 278 Units
- 280 TrueGuide system
- 280 Benefits
- 280 Requirements
- 281 Implement setup and selection
- 282 TrueGuide setup
- 282 System aggressiveness settings
- 283 TrueGuide calibration
- 286 TrueTracker
- 286 Requirements
- 287 Setup process
- 287 Implement controller setup for TrueTracker system
- 288 Vehicle settings for TrueTracker system
- 290 Engage settings for TrueTracker system
- 291 Steering settings for TrueTracker system
- 292 Implement calibration for TrueTracker system
- 292 Controller orientation setup
- 292 Proportional Steering Gain calibration
- 294 Implement Steering Sensor calibration
- 295 Implement Automated Deadzone calibration
- 296 Antenna position and roll offset correction
- 299 Line Acquisition Aggressiveness calibration
- 302 Vehicle Sync
- 302 Requirements
- 302 Setup steps
- 306 Water Management features
- 306 Requirements
- 307 FieldLevel II Survey/Design
- 307 Benchmarks
- 307 Rebenching
- 307 Settings
- 310 FieldLevel II Leveling
- 310 Requirements
- 310 Setup process
- 311 Leveling models
- 311 Implement settings for FieldLevel II
- 311 GPS receiver setup
- 312 FieldLevel II settings
- 316 Valve module calibration
- 317 Tandem / dual scraper setup
- 317 Tandem scraper
- 317 Dual scraper
- 317 Set up
- 318 Implement setup
- 318 Prepare connections
- 318 Primary receiver setup
- 318 Secondary receiver setup
- 318 Tandem / Dual settings
- 319 Tandem / dual calibration
- 320 WM-Drain setup
- 321 Implement control settings
- 323 Valve settings
- 323 Limit and increment settings
- 324 Relative heights settings
- 324 Operation settings
- 326 Calibrate WM-Drain for cantilever plow
- 330 Calibrate the valve
- 332 Yield Monitoring functionality
- 333 Yield Monitoring best practices
- 333 Installation
- 333 Tare calibration
- 334 Flow calibration
- 334 Pitch/Roll calibration
- 335 Test weight
- 335 Calibrating and operating conditions
- 336 Yield Monitoring settings
- 336 Before setup
- 336 Setup steps
- 340 Yield sensor / moisture sensor calibration
- 340 Calibration steps
- 341 Speed method
- 342 Cut width method
- 343 Third-party display instructions
- 343 Claas Cebis Quantimeter setup
- 344 Claas Cebis Quantimeter calibration
- 345 Claas Cebis Auto Pilot calibration
- 345 Greenstar Monitor: Stop Head Height setup
- 346 Greenstar Monitor calibrations
- 347 Command Center (70 Series Combines)
- 352 Operations overview
- 352 Operation basics
- 353 Main buttons
- 356 Feature panels
- 359 Engage button
- 360 Coverage button for logging
- 360 GNSS status
- 360 On-screen lightbar for vehicle
- 360 On-screen lightbar for implement
- 361 Fields
- 361 Field creation / selection
- 362 Implement selection
- 363 Vehicle selection
- 363 Event summary adjustment
- 363 Close a field
- 364 Field feature use
- 364 Add field features
- 365 Guidance pattern use
- 365 Creating patterns
- 365 Access paths
- 365 Existing patterns
- 366 Guidance mapping controls
- 367 Swaths Management screen
- 369 Straight guidance pattern
- 371 Curved pattern
- 372 Headland pattern
- 374 Pivot pattern
- 376 FreeForm pattern
- 377 Pause recording
- 379 Access paths
- 380 Switch to the next pattern
- 380 Import AB Lines or boundaries
- 381 Load a pattern
- 381 Rename a swath
- 383 Delete a swath
- 383 Switch to the next pattern
- 383 Shift a swath
- 385 Skip a swath
- 386 Coverage logging
- 389 Field-IQ operation
- 390 Field-IQ panel
- 394 Field-IQ master switch box functions
- 396 Field-IQ 12-section switch box (optional)
- 396 Material assignment
- 397 Enable sections
- 398 Prescriptions
- 401 Manual guidance operation
- 402 Autopilot system operation
- 403 Adjust Autopilot guidance
- 404 Disengage Autopilot system
- 405 NextSwath operation
- 406 Automatic turn
- 409 Auto turn cancel
- 410 Adjust direction and swath number
- 411 Start turn now
- 411 Yellow turn button
- 411 Red turn button
- 412 Green turn button
- 413 TrueSwath operation
- 415 Using automated headlands management
- 416 EZ-Pilot system operation
- 417 Disengage EZ-Pilot system
- 418 Adjust EZ-Pilot guidance
- 419 EZ-Steer system operation
- 420 Disengage EZ-Steer system
- 421 Adjust EZ-Steer guidance
- 422 GreenSeeker operation
- 422 Best practice
- 423 Variable rate setup
- 423 Create a custom table
- 424 Calibrate GreenSeeker
- 427 ISOBUS operation
- 427 Task Controller operation
- 428 Virtual Terminal operation
- 429 Remote Output operation
- 429 Crossing a line feature operation
- 431 Distance-based pulse operation
- 431 Within range limits
- 432 Outside range limits
- 432 Change trigger limits during operation
- 432 Manually output a pulse
- 433 Row Guidance operation
- 434 Use row sensors
- 435 Shift or skip guidance line
- 436 Row Guidance adjustments
- 437 TrueGuide operation
- 438 Using TrueGuide
- 439 TrueTracker operation
- 439 TrueTracker controls
- 440 Implement status
- 440 Implement on-screen lightbar
- 442 Vehicle Sync operation
- 442 Common uses
- 442 Benefits
- 442 Using Vehicle Sync
- 443 Guidance lines with Vehicle Sync
- 444 Coverage
- 446 Water Management functionality
- 446 Create a survey
- 448 Design
- 450 Leveling
- 464 WM-Drain operation
- 465 Survey tab
- 466 Install tab
- 467 Design tab
- 468 Design screen
- 473 Set survey height offset
- 474 Create a tile / ditch survey line
- 474 Design a section line
- 477 Add a fixed point
- 477 Clip a portion of a section line
- 478 Installation/ditch cleaning
- 481 Define boot depth
- 482 Yield Monitoring operation
- 482 Yield Monitoring panel
- 483 Variety tracking
- 484 Load tracking
- 486 System diagnostics
- 486 Advanced system diagnostics
- 487 CAN Bus data
- 487 Configuration data
- 487 Network diagnostics
- 487 Serial Comms
- 488 Autopilot diagnostics
- 488 Controls
- 489 Guidance tab
- 489 Steering tab
- 490 Details tab
- 490 Autopilot Faults screen
- 490 Warning screen
- 490 EZ-Pilot diagnostics
- 491 EZ-Steer diagnostics
- 492 Field-IQ diagnostics
- 492 Operations tab
- 493 Hardware tab
- 493 Row Monitor tab
- 494 Field-IQ faults and troubleshooting
- 514 FieldLevel II diagnostics valve test
- 514 GPS status
- 514 GreenSeeker diagnostics
- 515 Incorrect data
- 515 Error conditions
- 515 Row-Guidance diagnostics
- 517 Vehicle Sync diagnostics
- 518 Yield Monitoring diagnostics
- 518 Status tab
- 519 Yield Monitor error messages
- 521 Yield Monitor troubleshooting
- 522 Yield Monitoring warning messages
- 527 A
- 527 B
- 528 C
- 529 D
- 530 E
- 530 F
- 530 G
- 531 H
- 531 I
- 531 L
- 532 M
- 532 N
- 533 O
- 533 P
- 533 R
- 534 S
- 535 T
- 535 V
- 535 W